Konica Minolta Ineo 7000 - Guides - Manuels Utilisateur - Konica Minolta Revenir à l'accueil Voir une liste d'imprimantes Vous souhaitez un imprimante ou un photocopieur Konica, contactez nous

 

 

 

 

Search Results: 1 - 44 of 44

Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link
User`s Guide English ineo+ 6000/7000 User's Guides 1 2010-10-05
User`s Guide German ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-06
User`s Guide English ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-0 2010-10-06
User`s Guide Czech ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Danish ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Greek ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Spanish ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Finnish ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide French ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Italian ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Norwegian ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Polish ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Russian ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Czech ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Danish ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide German ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Greek ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Spanish ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide French ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Italian ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Dutch ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Norwegian ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Polish ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Portuguese ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Russian ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Turkish ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-29
Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity of ineo+ 6000, ineo+ 7000 i2 2011-03-14
User`s Guide Czech ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Danish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide German ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Greek ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Spanish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Finnish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide French ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Italian ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Dutch ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Norwegian ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Polish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Portuguese ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Russian ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Swedish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Turkish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide English ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-0 2011-11-15
Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity of ineo+ 6000, ineo+ 7000 i1n 2012-11-14

Search Results: 1 - 44 of 44

 

 

 

 

Autre documentation Konica Minolta :

Konica-Minolta-Di2510-Di3010-Di3510-Advanced-Information-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C550-bizhub-C451-bizhub-C203-bizhub-C253-bizhub-C353-bizhub-C650-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C203-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-PageScope-Account-Manager-Ver.2.1-User-s-Guide-EFIGS-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C554-C454-C364-C284-C224-User-Guides-part-1-2-French-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-162-210-copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-552-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-130f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-PRO-PRESS-C6000-C7000_ug_Expert-Guide-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2400W-User-Documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-User-Manual-bizhub-C252-Phase3-complete-set-Documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C200-Phase2-User-Manuals-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C200-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C10-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-163-211-User-Manual-Copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-1600f-User-Manual-Copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-131f-190f-User-Manual-Manuels

Konica-bizhub-131f-190f-Advanced-Information-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-190f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C253-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C253-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Francais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-1690MF-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-362-282-222-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C220-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-36-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Anglais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Pays-Bas-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-283-Russe-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-222-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C203-C253-C353-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-601-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C452-bizhub-C552-bizhub-C652DS-bizhub-C652-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C554-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-652-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C224-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C652DS-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub_c652-c652ds-c552-c452-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-bizhub-C10P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-bizhub-C10-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-7823-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C20-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C25-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2490MF-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-1600W-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-7823-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5670EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5650EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-7823-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450II-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-8650DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7300-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4750EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2490MF-Imprimante-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4750DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4690MF-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4695MF-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4650EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4650DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2500W-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5570-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5550-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5450-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5440DL-Couleur-Manuels

 

http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=25461&productName=magicolor%202490MF http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=24593&productName=magicolor%202500W http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=45226&productName=magicolor%203730DN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=31144&productName=magicolor%204650DN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=31144&productName=magicolor%204650EN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=48849&productName=magicolor%204690MF http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=48858&productName=magicolor%204695MF http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=41338&productName=magicolor%204750DN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=25354&productName=magicolor%205450 http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=29872&productName=bizhub%20C10 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0719195EN00&name=user.pdf http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/products/copier-print-systems/multifunctional-systems-black-and-white/bizhub-652/downloads/download-details.html?packageId=48057&productName=bizhub%20652 http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=25408&productName=bizhub%20C250 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_scanner-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_box-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdfhttp://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_enlarge-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_print-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_copy-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=49761&productName=bizhub%20C25 http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=47425&productName=magicolor%201600W http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=22632&productName=bizhub%20C252 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0610809EN00&name=bizhub_c252_um_scanner-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=26947&productName=Konica%20Minolta%20190f http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=21374&productName=bizhub%20210 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0514130EN00&name=bizhub_162_210_UM_FR_1.1.1.pdf [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/about-konica-minolta.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/imprint.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/terms-of-use.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/conditions-dutilisation.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/identite.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/information-groupe.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/info-photo.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/cartouche-toner.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieur-couleur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieurs-couleur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieurs.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fax-copieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fax-imprimante-copieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fileadmin/content/fr/rss/flux.xml [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/about-konica-minolta.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/imprint.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/terms-of-use.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/accueil.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/certificats-et-labels.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/cycle-de-vie-eco-responsable.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/eco-fonctionnalites.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/eco-technologies.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/historique.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/ops-green.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/politique-environnementale.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/carrieres-et-emplois.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/contacts.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/jamais-deux-sans-trois-konica-minolta-est-elu-gamme-de-lannee-par-bli-pour-la-troisieme-ann.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/konica-minolta-parraine-la-9eme-edition-de-la-nuit-des-trophees-de-limprimerie-francaise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/konica-minolta-stand-c05-profitera-du-salon-it-partners-qui-se-tiendra-les-5-et-6-fevrier-procha.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/la-4eme-edition-des-journees-du-bureau-eco-responsable-par-konica-minolta-business-solutions-fr.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/temoignage-copy-top-retour-sur-un-investissement-reussi.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/informations-sur-lentreprise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/responsabilite-societale.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/conditions-dutilisation.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/gartner-magic-quadrant-2012.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/identite.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/information-groupe.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/applications.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/presses-numeriques.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/securite.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/systemes-dimpression-office.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/itraining.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/marches-verticaux.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/ops.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/ops.html/solutions-dentreprise/produits/conseils-et-services/la-prestation-de-consulting-idoc/audit-idoc.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/programme-dsp.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/services-informatiques.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/acces-reserve.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/cleanplanet.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/service-et-garantie.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimante-multifonction.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimante-photocopieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-copieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-laser-couleur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-multifonction.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-photocopieuse.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/info-photo.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/photocopieurs-konica-minolta.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/photocopieurs.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/presse-numerique.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/toner-photocopieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-cn/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-fr/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/contact/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/document_download.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/domain.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/history.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/management.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/message.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/outline.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/symbol_logo.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/vision.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/csr/governance/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-cn/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/domain.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/history.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/message.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/outline.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/vision.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/csr/csr/governance/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/csr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/siteinfo/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-fr/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/contact/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/document_download.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/domain.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/history.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/management.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/message.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/outline.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/symbol_logo.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/vision.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/csr/governance/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/01/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/02/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/03/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/04/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide Dutch IC-206 for ineo 163/213 2.1.1 2007-06-07 Parts Guide Manual Italian ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30 User`s Guide Hungarian ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) fk-506 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide English ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.0 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Russian ineo 163/213 - User Manual TWAIN driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide French ineo 163/213 - User Manual GDI-driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Russian ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Spanish ineo 163/213 - User Manual GDI-driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide German ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Italian IC-206 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Greek ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Italian IC-206 for ineo 163/213 2.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Dutch ineo 163/213 - User Manual TWAIN driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Dutch IC-206 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Dutch ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) ineo 163/213 - User Manual GDI-driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Spanish NC-503 for ineo 163/213 2.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Dutch fk-506 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for ineo 163,213 i5 2010-01-08 User`s Guide German ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30 User`s Guide French ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30 User`s Guide Spanish ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30 User`s Guide Italian ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30 Declaration of Conformity - Not Related - Declaration of Conformity for ineo 163,213 i6 2011-09-15 Produit Sous-catégorie Langue Titre Version Date de sortie Lien 7013 Guide d’utilisation Italien Konica 7013 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7013 Guide d’utilisation Anglais K7013 RS-232C User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7013 Guide d’utilisation Français Konica 7013 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-09-08 7013 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7013 Druckerkarte Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7013 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7013 Print Server Card Owner's Manual 1.1.0 2004-10-05 7013 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7013 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7013 Guide d’utilisation Français K7013 Printer User Manual 1.1.1 2004-09-08 7013 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7013 User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7013 Guide d’utilisation Allemand RS232C Schnittstelle Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7013 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7013 Printer User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7013 Guide d’utilisation Français K7013 RS-232C 1.1.1 2004-09-08 7013 Abrégé d'utilisation Anglais Konica 7013 Quick Reference 1.1.0 2004-10-05 7020 Guide d’utilisation Danois Konica 7022/7130 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-17 7020 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-421 Instruction manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7020 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7020/7025/7030/7035 Instruction Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-31 7020 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-011 User's Guide 1.1.0 2004-10-05 7020 Guide d’utilisation Anglais FK-101 User Manual 1.1.0 2004-11-02 7020 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7020 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7020 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-011 Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13 7020 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-421 Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13 7022 Guide d’utilisation Portugais Konica 7022 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-17 7022 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-423 User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7022 Guide d’utilisation Français Konica 7022/7130 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-16 7022 Guide d’utilisation Français URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022 Guide d’utilisation Italien Konica 7022/7130 Manuale Instruzioni 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7022 Guide d’utilisation Hollandais Konica 7022/7130 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-17 7022 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7022/7130/7135 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7022 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica IP-422 Print Controller User Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-10 7022 Guide d’utilisation Portugais URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7022/7130 Instruction Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-31 7022 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-422/IP-423 Printcontroller/PS-343/PS-345 PostScript3 Zubehör Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13 7022 Guide d’utilisation Espagnol URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-422 Printcontroller, PS-343 PostScript3 Zubehör Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13 7022 Guide d’utilisation Espagnol Konica 7022/7130 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-16 7022 Guide d’utilisation Allemand URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022 Guide d’utilisation Italien URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022 Guide d’utilisation Anglais URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.0 2004-09-07 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-423 User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Français URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica IP-422 Print Controller User Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-10 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Portugais URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-422/IP-423 Printcontroller/PS-343/PS-345 PostScript3 Zubehör Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Espagnol URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-422 Printcontroller, PS-343 PostScript3 Zubehör Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Allemand URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Italien URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Anglais URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.0 2004-09-07 7024 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7024 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7025 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-421 Instruction manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7025 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7020/7025/7030/7035 Instruction Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-31 Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide Spanish d131f_d191f - pcl Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-12 User`s Guide Spanish D131F/191F Advanced Information 1.1.1 2007-09-11 User`s Guide Italian D131F/191F Advanced Information 1.1.1 2007-09-11 User`s Guide Dutch D131F/191F User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 User`s Guide German MB-190 Manual 1.0.0 2007-09-12 User`s Guide French D131F/191F User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 User`s Guide Danish D131F/191F User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 Search Results: 1 - 44 of 44 Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide English ineo+ 6000/7000 User's Guides 1 2010-10-05 User`s Guide German ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-06 User`s Guide English ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-0 2010-10-06 User`s Guide Czech ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Danish ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Greek ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Spanish ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Finnish ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide French ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Italian ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Norwegian ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Polish ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Russian ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Czech ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Danish ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide German ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Greek ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Spanish ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide French ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Italian ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Dutch ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Norwegian ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Polish ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Portuguese ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Russian ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Turkish ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-29 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity of ineo+ 6000, ineo+ 7000 i2 2011-03-14 User`s Guide Czech ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Danish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide German ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Greek ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Spanish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Finnish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide French ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Italian ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Dutch ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Norwegian ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Polish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Portuguese ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Russian ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Swedish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Turkish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide English ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-0 2011-11-15 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity of ineo+ 6000, ineo+ 7000 i1n 2012-11-14 Search Results: 1 - 44 of 44

Instructions de remplacement ORU-M (Operator Replaceable Unit Management) Unité de développement (YMCK) . Unité de développement (JMCN) Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Introduction 2 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M 2.1 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M ......................................... 2-3 3 Remplacement des unités ORU-M 3.1 Unité de développement (JMCN)................................................................................................... 3-3 4 Réglage après remplacement des unités ORU-M 4.1 Réglage des unités de développement et des développeurs..................................................... 4-3 Table des matières-2 Unité de développement (JMCN) 1 Introduction Unité de développement (JMCN) 1-3 1 1 Introduction Objectifs de l'ORU-M (Operator Replaceable Unit Management) Le système ORU-M permet aux utilisateurs de remplacer eux-mêmes certains composants de la machine. Il contribue aussi à réduire la durée d'immobilisation de la machine. Note à l'intention des utilisateurs d'ORU-M Assurez-vous de suivre des formations pour obtenir un certificat d'agrément avant d'utiliser l'ORU-M. Lors du remplacement des composants (ou unités) de la machine, veuillez suivre les instructions figurant dans les INSTRUCTIONS pour REMPLACEMENT de l'ORU-M (Operator Replaceable Unit Management). Pour effectuer les opérations de remplacement en toute sécurité et fiabilité, conservez soigneusement INSTRUCTIONS pour REMPLACEMENT de l'ORU-M (Operator Replaceable Unit Management), afin de ne pas les égarer. Si cela arrivait malgré tout, veuillez contacter votre SAV. 1 1-4 Unité de développement (JMCN) 2 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M Unité de développement (JMCN) 2-3 2.1 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M 2 2 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M Lors du remplacement des unités ORU-M, accédez au mode ORU-M, puis remplacez les unités ORU-M conformément aux procédures indiquées à l'écran. Ce guide explique les différentes rubriques dans l'ordre où elles apparaissent à l'écran. Veuillez vous reporter à "2 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M" en ce qui concerne les préparatifs à effectuer une fois que vous avez accédé au mode ORU-M, mais avant de remplacer les unités, "3 Remplacement des unités ORU-M" pour ce qui est des procédures de remplacement de chaque unité, et "4 Réglage après remplacement des unités ORU-M" pour ce qui traite des procédures de réglages après remplacement des unités. Imprimez ce guide et conservez-le pour le consulter avant de commencer l'opération de remplacement. 2.1 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M Avant de remplacer les unités ORU-M, suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour passer en mode ORU-M. 1 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur. L'écran Utilitaire s'affiche. 2 Appuyez sur [M-RUO (Rpl.Unité)]. L'écran Unité Remplacement M-RUO s'affiche. Cet écran affiche la liste des noms d'unité, des cycles de vie, et des dates de remplacement des unités ORU-M. 2 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M 2-4 Unité de développement (JMCN) 2.1 3 Imprimez un exemplaire concernant la machine. % Appuyez sur [Type de sortie Test]. L'écran Sélection de Type de sortie Test s'affiche. 4 Sélectionnez [Type1] ou [Type2]. Type1 : Sortie Demi-teintes. Type2 : Sortie Couleur (CMJN). REMARQUE Veillez à imprimer les deux types de sorties test, Type1 et Type2. % Appuyez sur [Retour]. L'écran Unité Remplacement M-RUO réapparaît. Unité de développement (JMCN) 2-5 2.1 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M 2 5 Appuyez sur [MODE IMPR.]. L'écran Mode d'impression s'affiche. 6 Sélectionnez un magasin configuré pour du papier A3 ou 11 e 17, et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de commande. REMARQUE Il ne vous sera pas possible d'imprimer la totalité de la sortie-test si vous spécifiez un autre format que A3 ou 11 e 17. 7 Appuyez sur [Quitter MImpr]. L'écran Unité Remplacement M-RUO réapparaît. 8 Répétez les étapes 3 à 7 pour imprimer les deux sorties, de [Type1] et [Type2]. 2 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M 2-6 Unité de développement (JMCN) 2.1 9 Appuyez sur [Lancer Remplacement]. 10 Appuyez sur [Oui]. La machine s'éteint automatiquement. Unité de développement (JMCN) 2-7 2.1 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M 2 11 Si vous voulez procéder aux travaux de remplacement, appuyez sur [Oui]. La machine passe automatiquement en mode Remplacement ORU-M, et affiche à nouveau l'écran Unité Remplacement M-RUO. 12 Veuillez vous reporter à "3 Remplacement des unités ORU-M" pour remplacer les unités. REMARQUE Lors du remplacement, vous pouvez vérifier à l'écran les procédures relatives au remplacement des unités. 2 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M 2-8 Unité de développement (JMCN) 2.1 3 Remplacement des unités ORU-M Unité de développement (JMCN) 3-3 3.1 Unité de développement (JMCN) 3 3 Remplacement des unités ORU-M 3.1 Unité de développement (JMCN) REMARQUE Lors du remplacement de l'unité, vous pouvez vérifier à l'écran les procédures relatives au remplacement des unités. 1 Ouvrez la porte avant [1] de la machine and et desserrez les vis [2] (2 pièces). 2 Ouvrez la porte de la trémie toner [1]. 3 Desserez la vis [1] (1 pièce) et ouvrez le capot avant du ventilateur [2]. 3 Unité de développement (JMCN) 3-4 Unité de développement (JMCN) 3.1 4 Tirez la poignée de droite [1] et la poignée de gauche [2] vers le haut et vers l'avant, puis tirez l'unité de traitement [3]. REMARQUE Tenez la poignée en son milieu lors de la manipulation. 5 Débranchez le connecteur [1] à côté de l'étiquette bleu lavande après avoir libéré le loquet. REMARQUE L'illustration donne un exemple de la manière de remplacer l'unité de développement Jaune. 6 Enlevez les vis [1] (6 pièces). Poussez et faites glisser la pièce de pression [2] vers l'intérieur puis déposez-la. 7 Enlevez l'unité de développement [1] à remplacer de l'unité de traitement [2]. Enlevez la face arrière de l'unité de développement [1] de la machine, puis enlevez l'unité de développement complète de l'unité de traitement [2]. REMARQUE Lorsque vous enlevez l'unité de développement, veillez à ne pas toucher le rouleau de développement ou à ne pas l'endommager. Veillez aussi à maintenir l'unité de développement à l'horizontale. (Sinon du toner pourrait se répandre par le capot supérieur de l'unité de développement.) 8 Déballez l'unité de développement neuve puis enlevez la bande extérieure. Unité de développement (JMCN) 3-5 3.1 Unité de développement (JMCN) 3 9 Insérez l'unité de développement par son côté entrée toner [1] et installez l'unité de développement complète [1] dans l'unité de traitement [2]. 10 Insérez l'extrémité inférieure [1] de la pièce de pression dans l'orifice [2] de l'unité de traitement, placez l'extrémité supérieure [3] de la pièce de pression dans la rainure [4] de l'unité de traitement, puis fixez-la à l'unité en la positionnant en face du logement de la vis. REMARQUE Vérifiez que le ressort de la pièce de maintien de l'unité de développement n'est pas courbé lors de la repose. Si le ressort est tordu lors l'installation de la pièce de maintien de l'unité de développement, cela peut réduire la pression d'appui de la pièce de maintien de l'unité de développement. 11 Serrez les vis [1] (6 pièces). 3 Unité de développement (JMCN) 3-6 Unité de développement (JMCN) 3.1 12 Branchez le connecteur [1] autour de l'étiquette de couleur lavande. 13 Replacez l'unité de traitement à sa position d'origine en tenant la poignée de droite [1] et la poignée de gauche [2] et en poussant l'unité de traitement [3]. Replacez ensuite la poignée de droite et la poignée de gauche dans leur position d'origine. REMARQUE Tenez la poignée en son milieu lors de la manipulation. 14 Refermez le capot supérieur droit [1] et fixez-le avec la vis [2] (1 pièce). 15 Fermez la porte de la trémie toner [1] et fixez-la avec les vis [2] et [3] (1 pièce de chaque). 16 Fermez la porte avant [1] de la machine. 4 Réglage après remplacement des unités ORU-M Unité de développement (JMCN) 4-3 4.1 Réglage des unités de développement et des développeurs 4 4 Réglage après remplacement des unités ORU-M 4.1 Réglage des unités de développement et des développeurs Après avoir remplacé les unités de développement, chargez le développeur selon les procédures suivantes et réglez les unités de développement. 1 Après avoir remplacé les unités de développement, appuyez sur [Effectuer Remplacem.] sur l'écran Unité Remplacement M-RUO. La machine s'allume automatiquement et l'écran Enregistrer Unité Remplacement M-RUO s'affiche. REMARQUE Assurez-vous de fixer la trémie de toner avec les vis et de fermer la porte avant. Sinon, la machine ne s'éteindra pas automatiquement. Réglage des 4 unités de développement et des développeurs 4-4 Unité de développement (JMCN) 4.1 2 Sélectionnez la ligne de l'unité de développement que vous avez remplacée. % Si l'unité de développement que vous avez remplacée n'est pas affichée à l'écran, appuyez sur [+] [,] pour la faire apparaître. % Lorsque vous remplacez plusieurs unités de développement, vous pouvez configurer les unités en une seule fois en les sélectionnant et en définissant un motif de remplacement pour ces unités. 3 Appuyez sur [Raison Remplac] afin d'afficher une boîte de dialogue demandant la raison du remplacement. Sélectionnez une raison, et appuyez sur [Valider]. REMARQUE N'oubliez pas de spécifier une raison pour les unités de développement remplacées. Sinon, cela ne réinitialisera pas le compteur Cycle Vie des unités de développement. En outre, il ne sera pas possible de charger les développeurs ou de procéder à un réglage correct lors des étapes suivantes. Une fois que le motif a été défini, la case de gauche apparaît cochée. Unité de développement (JMCN) 4-5 4.1 Réglage des unités de développement et des développeurs 4 4 Appuyez sur [Terminé]. Une boite de dialogue permettant de spécifier les unités de développement que vous avez remplacées s'affiche. 5 Sélectionnez l'unité de développement que vous avez remplacée. REMARQUE Définissez l'unité de développement usagée et l'unité de développement neuve comme A et B. Veillez à bien identifier les unités A et B, et appuyez sur [Unité Développement A] ou [Unité Développement B] pour sélectionner l'unité de développement neuve. Lors de l'installation d'une unité de développement neuve, assignez la lettre (A ou B) qui était associée à l'ancienne unité de développement (celle que vous n'utiliserez plus) à l'unité de développement neuve. Appuyez sur [Enreg. Nouv. Unité Dével.] pour sélectionner [Unité Dév. A] ou [Unité Dév. B]. 6 Appuyez sur [Terminé]. Une boite de dialogue demandant de remettre le compteur de l'unité de développement sélectionnée à zéro s'affiche. Réglage des 4 unités de développement et des développeurs 4-6 Unité de développement (JMCN) 4.1 7 Appuyez sur [Oui]. L'écran Réglage après Remplacement Unité s'affiche. 8 Appuyez sur [Départ]. L'écran Exécuter Chargement Automatique Développeur s'affiche. Éléments de réglage • Charge Développeur Automatique • Réglage Initial Capteur Densité Toner • Ajustement Gamma • Ajustement Décalage Gamma Imprimante Unité de développement (JMCN) 4-7 4.1 Réglage des unités de développement et des développeurs 4 9 Ouvrez la porte avant [1] de la machine and et desserrez les vis [2] (2 pièces). 10 Ouvrez la porte de la trémie toner [1]. 11 Enlevez les vis [1] (2 pièces), puis déposez le capot supérieur [2]. REMARQUE Le remplissage du développeur se fait en mode réglage une fois que le remplacement des unités de développement est achevé. La dépose du capot avant n'est nécessaire que pour le chargement du développeur dans l'unité de développement Jaune. 12 Desserrez les vis [1] (2 pièces), puis enlevez la plaque de chargement du développeur [2]. Desserez les vis [3] (2 pièces), puis enlevez l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (noir) [4]. 13 Insérez la plaque de chargement du développeur [2] sur les vis à épaulement [1] sur le dessus de l'unité de développement de la couleur dont vous chargez le développeur et fixez la plaque en la faisant coulisser vers la droite. Réglage des 4 unités de développement et des développeurs 4-8 Unité de développement (JMCN) 4.1 REMARQUE Pour fixer la plaque de chargement du développeur [2] sur l'unité de développement Jaune, veillez à utiliser les vis à épaulement (2 pièces). Lors de la fixation de la plaque de chargement du développeur [2] sur une autre unité de développement que la Jaune, utilisez la vis à épaulement (1 pièce) et la vis (1 pièce) située en haut à gauche de la vis à épaulement. Lorsque vous fixez la plaque de chargement du développeur [2], faites attention à ne pas pincer les câbles. 14 Fixez l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (noir) [2] en insérant les broches (gauche et droite) de l'entonnoir dans les orifices situés sur la plaque de chargement du développeur [1]. Lorsque vous fixez l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (noir), placez-le sur le fond de la plaque de chargement du développeur. REMARQUE Assurez-vous de fixer fermement l'embout de l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (noir) sur l'entrée toner de l'unité de développement. Pour la durée du chargement, placez du papier A4 ou 8,5 e 11 sur la plaque qui se trouve sous l'unité de traitement. 15 Placez l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (blanc) [1] fourni dans le kit développeur, à l'intérieur de l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (noir) [2]. REMARQUE L'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (blanc) est fourni avec chaque kit développeur. Ne réutilisez pas l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (blanc). Utilisez l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (blanc). Assurez-vous de nettoyer l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (noir) après l'avoir utilisé pour chaque couleur. Faute de nettoyage, les couleurs pourraient se mélanger. Vérifiez que l'obturateur de sortie du développeur est bien fermé avant de charger le développeur. Le développeur peut s'écouler par le fond. Unité de développement (JMCN) 4-9 4.1 Réglage des unités de développement et des développeurs 4 16 Appuyez sur la touche de la couleur dont vous êtes prêt à charger le développeur et appuyez sur [Départ]. Le moteur de l'unité de développement se met à tourner. 17 Versez le développeur neuf [1] dans l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (blanc) [2]. Le développeur s'écoule dans l'unité de développement. % Le moteur qui s'est mis à tourner lorsque vous avez appuyé sur la touche [Départ] s'arrêtera automatiquement après un certain temps. S'il reste du développeur dans l'entonnoir lorsque le moteur s'arrête, appuyez sur [Départ] une nouvelle fois. Si le moteur continue à tourner alors que le développeur s'est complètement écoulé et qu'il n'en reste plus dans l'entonnoir, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Le moteur s'arrête. 18 Chargez les développeurs pour toutes les unités de développement que vous avez remplacées, en effectuant les étapes 9 à 18. 19 Enlevez l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (blanc) [1] et l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (noir) [2]. REMARQUE Assurez-vous de nettoyer l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (noir). Réglage des 4 unités de développement et des développeurs 4-10 Unité de développement (JMCN) 4.1 20 Faites glisser la plaque de chargement du développeur [1] vers la gauche tout en tirant vers l'extérieur la lame-ressort de la plaque de chargement du développeur [1], puis enlevez la plaque. 21 Serrez la vis [1] (2 pièces), puis ramenez l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (noir) à sa position d'origine. Serrez les vis [3] (2 pièces), puis ramenez la plaque de chargement du développeur [4] à sa position d'origine. 22 Tirez la vitre antipoussière [1]. 23 Nettoyez la vitre antipoussière avec un chiffon nonpelucheux et un aérosol d'air sec, puis ramenez la vitre antipoussière à sa position d'origine. 24 Installez le capot supérieur [1] et fixez-le avec la vis [2] (2 pièces). REMARQUE La dépose du capot avant n'est nécessaire que pour le chargement du développeur dans l'unité de développement Jaune. Unité de développement (JMCN) 4-11 4.1 Réglage des unités de développement et des développeurs 4 25 Fermez la porte de la trémie toner [1] et fixez-la avec les vis [2] et [3] (1 pièce de chaque). 26 Fermez la porte avant [1] de la machine. 27 Appuyez sur [Retour]. Réglage des 4 unités de développement et des développeurs 4-12 Unité de développement (JMCN) 4.1 L'écran Réglage après Remplacement Unité réapparaît. Une fois que l'[Ajustement Gamma] s'est achevé automatiquement, l'écran Correction décalage Gamma de l'imprimante s'affiche. 28 Écran Correction décalage Gamma de l'imprimante. (1) Appuyez sur [Suivant] ou [Précédent] pour sélectionner l'écran de l'élément que vous voulez régler sur l'écran Ajustement Décalage Gamma Imprimante. (2) [Appuyez sur Rajuster.] Si vous voulez refaire un ajustement, appuyez sur [Oui]. Sinon, appuyez sur [Non]. d Pour info Si le dégradé de la zone sélectionnée dans l'image est largement divergent, appuyez sur Réinit. DonnRégl pour remettre le décalage gamma de l'imprimante à 0 (zéro), et appuyez ensuite sur [Rajuster]. (3) Appuyez sur [MODE IMPR.]. Sur l'écran Mode d'impression, sélectionnez un magasin pour du papier A4 (8,5 e 11), appuyez ensuite sur Départ sur le panneau de commande. Les mires tests sont imprimées. Une fois que la mire test est imprimée, l'écran Correction décalage Gamma de l'imprimante réapparaît automatiquement. (4) Place la mire test imprimée [1] sur la vitre d'exposition en plaçant la mire avec précision sur le plateau de positionnement des originaux /Lt [3] et le plateau de positionnement des originaux /Rr [4]. d Pour info Placez la mire de manière à ce que le repère triangulaire vert [2] soit orienté vers la gauche (face imprimée dessous). Unité de développement (JMCN) 4-13 4.1 Réglage des unités de développement et des développeurs 4 29 Appuyez sur [ Fermer ]sur l'écran L'ajustement après remplacement unité est terminé. L'écran Réglage après Remplacement Unité réapparaît. 30 Appuyez sur [Type de sortie Test]. Procédez à une sortie test à l'issue du réglage. L'écran Sélection de Type de sortie Test s'affiche. 31 Sélectionnez [Type1] ou [Type2]. Type1 : Sortie Demi-teintes. Type2 : Sortie Couleur (CMJN). REMARQUE Veillez à imprimer les deux types de sorties test, Type1 et Type2. % Appuyez sur [Retour]. L'écran Réglage après Remplacement Unité réapparaît. (5) Placez 10 feuilles de papier (blanc) sur la mire test, et fermez l'ADF ou le couvre-original. d Pour info N'utilisez que du papier copie blanc, car il n'est pas possible de régler correctement le gamma de l'imprimante avec du papier qui n'est pas blanc. (6) Appuyez sur [Départ] sur l'écran. La mire test est numérisée et les données actuelles JMCN sont mises à jour. d Pour info L'évaluation Accepté/Rejeté des données de réglage n'a pas lieu lors du premier balayage, par conséquent le message "Terminé normalement" ne s'affiche pas. Du fait que évaluation Accepté/Rejeté n'a lieu qu'après la deuxième lecture, effectuez plusieurs fois cette opération d'ajustement jusqu'à ce que le message "Terminé normalement" s'affiche. (7) Appuyez sur [MODE IMPR.] sur l'écran Réglage décalage gamma imprimante auto. (8) Répétez les étapes 3 - 6. (9) Vérifiez que le message "Terminé normalement" s'est affiché. Si un autre message que "Terminé normalement" s'affiche, répétez les étapes 7 à 8. (10) Appuyez sur [Retour]. L'écran Réglage après Remplacement Unité réapparaît. Réglage des 4 unités de développement et des développeurs 4-14 Unité de développement (JMCN) 4.1 32 Appuyez sur [MODE IMPR.]. L'écran Mode d'impression s'affiche. 33 Sélectionnez un magasin configuré pour du papier A3 ou 11 e 17, et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de commande. 34 Appuyez sur [Quitter MImpr]. L'écran Réglage après Remplacement Unité réapparaît. 35 Répétez les étapes 31 à 35 pour imprimer les deux sorties test, [Type1] et [Type2]. 36 Confirmez le résultat du réglage en comparant les exemplaires test d'avant et d'après réglage. 37 Appuyez sur [Fermer] sur l'écran Réglage après Remplacement Unité. L'écran Machine réapparaît. Guide de l‘utilisateur D 131F/191F Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Introduction 2 Conseils de sécurité 2.1 Informations de sécurité pour utilisation correcte....................2-3 2.1.1 Symboles d'avertissement et de précaution .............................2-3 2.1.2 Signification des symboles ........................................................2-4 2.1.3 AVERTISSEMENT ......................................................................2-4 2.1.4 ATTENTION................................................................................2-5 2.1.5 Précautions à prendre................................................................2-7 2.1.6 Divers .........................................................................................2-7 2.2 Termes et symboles .....................................................................2-8 2.3 Précautions ...................................................................................2-9 2.3.1 Précautions d'installation...........................................................2-9 2.3.2 Alimentation ...............................................................................2-9 2.3.3 Espace requis ..........................................................................2-10 2.3.4 Précautions d'utilisation...........................................................2-11 2.3.5 Réglementation en matière de copie .......................................2-13 3 Implantation et installation 3.1 Identification des éléments contenus dans l'emballage ..........3-3 3.2 Nomenclature................................................................................3-4 3.3 Présentation du panneau de contrôle ........................................3-5 3.4 Préparation de votre machine.....................................................3-8 3.4.1 Déblocage du miroir mobile .......................................................3-8 3.4.2 Installation du plateau originaux ................................................3-9 3.4.3 Raccordements........................................................................3-10 3.4.4 Installation du tambour et des cartouches de toner ................3-11 3.4.5 Mise sous tension ....................................................................3-14 3.4.6 Désactivation du mode transport.............................................3-15 3.4.7 Chargement du papier et définition du format de papier.........3-15 3.4.8 Réglage du volume du haut-parleur ........................................3-16 Table des matières-2 D 131F/191F 3.5 Réglages initiaux ........................................................................3-17 3.5.1 Effacement des réglages enregistrés ...................................... 3-17 3.5.2 Premières opérations............................................................... 3-18 3.5.3 Paramétrage initial ................................................................... 3-18 3.5.4 Mode Economie d'énergie....................................................... 3-23 3.6 Installation du pilote d'imprimante et du scanner...................3-24 3.6.1 Système d'exploitation pris en charge (Local)......................... 3-24 3.6.2 Installation locale : Port USB Windows ................................... 3-25 3.6.3 Installation locale : Port parallèle Windows (option) ................ 3-36 3.6.4 Désinstallation du pilote........................................................... 3-37 4 Premières opérations 4.1 Conseils d'utilisation....................................................................4-3 4.1.1 Modifier le mode de la machine................................................. 4-3 4.1.2 Saisie de caractères .................................................................. 4-4 4.1.3 Secours Mémoire [CD]............................................................... 4-6 4.1.4 Sélection d'une fonction [CD] .................................................... 4-6 4.1.5 Tableau des fonctions [CD]........................................................ 4-6 4.2 Traitement du papier et des documents .................................... 4-7 4.2.1 Traitement des documents........................................................ 4-7 4.2.2 Traitement du papier................................................................ 4-10 5 Copie 5.1 Avant de réaliser de copies .........................................................5-3 5.1.1 Traitement du papier et des documents.................................... 5-3 5.1.2 Commutation de la machine en mode Copie ............................ 5-3 5.1.3 Affichage du mode attente copie............................................... 5-3 5.1.4 Message de dépassement mémoire.......................................... 5-4 5.2 Opérations de copie..................................................................... 5-5 5.2.1 Réaliser des copies avec l'ADF ................................................. 5-5 5.2.2 Réaliser des copies sur la vitre d'exposition .............................5-5 5.3 Paramètres copie élémentaires .................................................. 5-6 5.3.1 Sélection du type de document................................................. 5-6 5.3.2 Contraste de numérisation ........................................................ 5-6 5.3.3 Taux zoom ................................................................................. 5-7 D 131F/191F Table des matières-3 5.3.4 Nombre de copies......................................................................5-7 5.3.5 Tri de copies ..............................................................................5-8 5.3.6 Sélection du format de papier....................................................5-8 5.3.7 Sélection du format du document .............................................5-9 5.4 Fonctions avancées de copie....................................................5-10 5.4.1 Combiné...................................................................................5-11 5.4.2 Copie recto-verso ....................................................................5-13 5.4.3 Définition de copie ...................................................................5-15 6 Impression PC 6.1 Impression d'un document..........................................................6-3 6.2 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante ............................................6-4 6.2.1 Ouvrez les propriétés de l'imprimante .......................................6-4 6.2.2 Description des propriétés de l'imprimante...............................6-6 6.3 Annulation d'une tâche d'impression .......................................6-12 6.3.1 Pour annuler une tâche d'impression à partir de la machine ..6-12 7 Numérisation 7.1 Préparation à l'utilisation du pilote TWAIN ................................7-3 7.1.1 Commutation de la machine en mode Scanner ........................7-3 7.1.2 Affichage du mode attente Scanner ..........................................7-3 7.1.3 Numériser une image .................................................................7-4 7.1.4 Accéder au pilote TWAIN...........................................................7-4 7.2 Utilisation du mode RS [CD]........................................................7-4 7.3 Utilisation du mode SB [CD]........................................................7-4 8 Numéroteur automatique 8.1 Fonctions de base du numéroteur automatique .......................8-3 8.1.1 Numéroteurs automatiques .......................................................8-3 8.1.2 Groupes d'appel ........................................................................8-3 8.1.3 Noms de destination et numérotation par répertoire téléphonique ..............................................................................8-3 8.1.4 Caractères spéciaux de numérotation.......................................8-4 Table des matières-4 D 131F/191F 8.2 Touches 1-Touche........................................................................ 8-5 8.2.1 Saisie ou modification d'un numéro 1-Touche.......................... 8-5 8.2.2 Accès rapide à l'enregistrement 1-Touche................................ 8-7 8.2.3 Effacement d'un numéro 1-Touche ........................................... 8-9 8.2.4 Composition avec des touches 1-Touche............................... 8-10 8.3 Numéros abrégés .......................................................................8-12 8.3.1 Introduction ou changement d'un numéro abrégé .................. 8-12 8.3.2 Effacement d'un numéro abrégé ............................................. 8-14 8.3.3 Composition par numéro abrégé............................................. 8-14 8.4 Numérotation pour groupe d'appel [CD]..................................8-16 8.5 Numérotation par répertoire [CD].............................................8-16 9 Emission de fax 9.1 Préalables à l'émission ................................................................ 9-3 9.1.1 Traitement des documents........................................................ 9-3 9.1.2 Définition de la numérisation ..................................................... 9-3 9.1.3 Contraste de numérisation ........................................................ 9-4 9.1.4 Combinaison de définition document et contraste différents sur plusieurs pages....................................................................9-4 9.1.5 Méthode d'émission .................................................................. 9-5 9.1.6 Message de dépassement mémoire.......................................... 9-6 9.2 Emission de fax............................................................................. 9-7 9.2.1 Émission mémoire ..................................................................... 9-7 9.2.2 Emission en temps réel (Emission sans mémoire)................... 9-11 9.3 Rappel [CD].................................................................................9-13 9.4 Confirmation ou annulation de commandes [CD]...................9-13 9.5 Fonctions avancées fax [CD] ....................................................9-13 10 Réception de télécopies 10.1 Réception fax ..............................................................................10-3 10.1.1 Sélection du mode de réception.............................................. 10-3 10.1.2 Mode de réception manuelle ................................................... 10-4 10.1.3 Mode de réception automatique ............................................. 10-4 10.1.4 Prendre les appels manuellement ........................................... 10-6 D 131F/191F Table des matières-5 10.1.5 Basculer en mode de réception automatique ou en mode de réception manuelle ..............................................10-6 10.1.6 En cas de panne de papier pendant la réception fax ..............10-7 10.2 Paramétrage de la réception fax [CD] ......................................10-8 10.3 Fonctions avancées de réception [CD] ....................................10-8 11 Fonctions Boîtes F-code [CD] 12 Fonctions spéciales [CD] 13 Fonctions de sécurité [CD] 14 Paramètres utilisateur [CD] 15 Rapports & Listes 15.1 Tableau des listes et journaux...................................................15-3 15.2 Journal d'activité ........................................................................15-5 15.2.1 Configurer le journal d'activité .................................................15-5 15.2.2 Impression manuelle du journal d'activité................................15-6 15.2.3 Définir l'ordre d'impression du journal d'activité .....................15-6 15.3 Rapport de confirmation d'émission ........................................15-7 15.3.1 Configurer le rapport de confirmation d'émission ...................15-7 15.4 Liste documents en mémoire....................................................15-8 15.5 Notification de perte de document ...........................................15-9 16 Entretien et dépannage 16.1 Entretien ......................................................................................16-3 16.1.1 Conseils de nettoyage .............................................................16-3 16.1.2 Nettoyage de la zone de numérisation ....................................16-3 16.1.3 Nettoyage des rouleaux de l'ADF ............................................16-4 16.1.4 Nettoyage du fil de charge du tambour et de la tête d'impression LED.....................................................................16-5 16.1.5 Remplacement de la cartouche de toner.................................16-6 16.1.6 Remplacement de la cartouche tambour ................................16-8 Table des matières-6 D 131F/191F 16.2 Incidents....................................................................................16-10 16.2.1 Serrage document ................................................................. 16-10 16.2.2 Serrage papier ....................................................................... 16-15 16.2.3 Message d'erreur à l'écran .................................................... 16-20 16.2.4 "Message d'erreur" imprimés ................................................ 16-25 16.2.5 Code d'erreur......................................................................... 16-26 16.2.6 Problèmes machine ............................................................... 16-28 16.2.7 Problèmes de télécopie ......................................................... 16-28 16.2.8 Problèmes de copie............................................................... 16-29 16.2.9 Problèmes d'impression à partir d'un ordinateur .................. 16-29 16.2.10 Problèmes de Scanner .......................................................... 16-30 16.2.11 Problèmes de qualité d'impression ....................................... 16-31 16.2.12 Si les informations contenues dans ce chapitre ne vous permettent pas de résoudre le problème................. 16-34 17 Annexe 17.1 Caractéristiques .........................................................................17-3 17.1.1 Autres....................................................................................... 17-3 17.1.2 Fax ........................................................................................... 17-5 17.1.3 Copie........................................................................................17-5 17.1.4 Imprimante............................................................................... 17-6 17.1.5 Scanner.................................................................................... 17-6 17.1.6 Consommables........................................................................ 17-6 18 Index 1 Introduction Introduction 1 D 131F/191F 1-3 1 Introduction Bienvenue Merci d'avoir choisi le Develop 131F/191F. Ce guide de l'utilisateur décrit les fonctions, les procédures de fonctionnement, les précautions à prendre et les résolutions de problèmes du Develop 131F/191F. Avant d'utiliser l'appareil, il y a lieu de lire entièrement le manuel utilisateur pour assurer un fonctionnement correct et efficace de l'appareil. Une fois que vous avez lu le manuel, conservez-le à portée de main pour le consulter en cas de besoin. Veuillez noter que certaines illustrations de la machine figurant sur le manuel utilisateur peuvent différer de ce que vous voyez en réalité sur votre machine. Label CE (déclaration de conformité) Ce produit est conforme aux directives européennes suivantes : 89/336/EEC, 73/23/EEC et 93/68/EEC. Cette déclaration est valide pour les pays de l'Union Européenne. Cet appareil doit être utilisé avec des câbles d'interface blindés. L'utilisation de câbles non blindés est susceptible d'entraîner des perturbations de radiocommunication et elle est interdite en vertu des directives de l'UE. Cet appareil a été autorisé conformément à la Décision du Conseil 1999/5/ EC pour connexion individuelle d'un terminal au réseau téléphonique public commuté pan-Européen. Toutefois, en raison des différences entre les PSTN (réseaux téléphoniques publics commutés) de chaque pays, cette autorisation ne constitue pas en elle-même l'assurance inconditionnelle que cette machine fonctionnera d'égale manière sur chaque point desservi par les divers réseaux téléphoniques publics. 1 Introduction 1-4 D 131F/191F Si vous rencontrez des problèmes, vous devriez contacter en premier lieu le fournisseur de votre appareil. 2 Note Le fabricant devrait s'assurer que le vendeur et l'utilisateur de l'appareil sont clairement avisés des informations ci-dessus, par le biais de l'emballage et/ou des manuels d'utilisation ou autres formes d'instructions à l'intention de l'utilisateur. Vous pourrez obtenir une déclaration de conformité complète auprès de Develop aux numéros suivants Fax. : +49-511-7404-346, Tél. : +49-511-7404-367 en nous indiquant le numéro de série de votre produit. Ce produit n'est agréé que pour la numérotation par Double Tonalité Multi- Fréquence (DTMF). Lorsqu'il est raccordé directement au réseau téléphonique commuté public (mode PSTN), la numérotation par impulsions ne peut pas être utilisée. Émission d'ozone 7ATTENTION Placer l'appareil dans une pièce largement ventilée % Une quantité d'ozone négligeable se dégage de l'appareil quand celui-ci est utilisé normalement. Cependant, une odeur désagréable peut se faire sentir dans les pièces dont l'aération est insuffisante et lorsque l'appareil est utilisé pendant de longues périodes. Pour avoir la certitude de travailler dans un environnement réunissant des conditions de confort, de santé et de sécurité, il est préférable de bien aérer la pièce où se trouve l'appareil. Niveau sonore Utilisateurs européens Réglementation sur le bruit des machines 3 GSGV, 18.01.1991 : le niveau de pression acoustique pour l'utilisateur est égal ou inférieur à 70dB(A) conformément à la norme européenne EN ISO 7779. Ergonomische Grundlagen für die GS-Prüfung von IT-Geräten in Verbindung mit Bildschirmgeräten Cet appareil n'est pas destiné une utilisation sur une régie vidéo conformément à BildscharbV. Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gemäß BildscharbV vorgesehen. Introduction 1 D 131F/191F 1-5 Energy Star En tant que Partenaires ENERGY STAR®, nous avons pu déterminer que cet appareil satisfait les directives ENERGY STAR® en matière d'efficience énergétique. Définition d'un produit ENERGY STAR® Un produit ENERGY STAR® intègre une fonction spéciale qui lui permet de basculer automatiquement en "mode d'économie d'énergie" à l'issue d'une certaine période d'inactivité. Un produit ENERGY STAR® utilise l'énergie avec plus d'efficacité, vous permet d'économiser de l'argent sur vos factures d'électricité et contribue à protéger l'environnement. Super G3 Super G3 est une extension des normes de la technologie fax de Groupe 3, permettant d'utiliser des modems haut débit ITU-T V.34 pour la transmission à 33,6 Kbps et à protocoles accélérés pour négociation rapide. JBIG Joint Bi-level Image experts Group, la dernière méthode de l'ITU-T pour la compression des données images. Etant donné que le JBIG compresse les données plus efficacement que le MMR, il se révèle particulièrement efficace pour l'émission de documents comportant des images en demi-teintes (niveaux de gris). 1 Introduction 1-6 D 131F/191F 2 Conseils de sécurité Conseils de sécurité 2 D 131F/191F 2-3 2 Conseils de sécurité 2.1 Informations de sécurité pour utilisation correcte Ce chapitre contient des instructions détaillées relatives à l'exploitation et à la maintenance de cette machine. Pour utiliser au mieux cet appareil, tous les opérateurs doivent lire avec attention ce guide et respecter à la lettre les instructions y figurant. Veuillez conserver ce guide à portée de la main et à proximité de la machine. Veuillez lire ce chapitre avant d'utiliser la machine. Il contient en effet des informations importantes quant à la sécurité de l'utilisateur et la prévention des problèmes liés à l'équipement. Assurez-vous de bien observer l'ensemble des précautions énumérées dans ce guide. Certains points du présent chapitre peuvent ne pas correspondre au produit acheté. 2.1.1 Symboles d'avertissement et de précaution 7AVERTISSEMENT Négliger cet avertissement peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire mortelles. % Tenez compte de cette recommandation concernant la sécurité. 7ATTENTION Le non-respect de cette précaution peut provoquer des blessures graves, ou des dommages matériels. % Tenez compte de cette recommandation concernant la sécurité. 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-4 D 131F/191F 2.1.2 Signification des symboles 2.1.3 AVERTISSEMENT Symbole Signification Un triangle indique un danger contre lequel il y a lieu de se protéger. Ce symbole indique un risque de brûlure. Une ligne diagonale indique une action interdite. Ce symbole met en garde contre un démontage de l'appareil. Un cercle noir indique une action impérative. Ce symbole signale le débranchement impératif de l'appareil. Symbole Signification • Ne pas modifier ce produit, il pourrait prendre feu, subir un choc électrique ou tomber en panne. Si le produit utilise un laser, la source de son faisceau risque d'aveugler l'opérateur. • Ne pas essayer d'enlever les volets et les panneaux fixés sur le produit. Certains produits contiennent à l'intérieur des pièces haute-tension ou une source de faisceau laser susceptibles d'électrocuter ou d'aveugler l'opérateur. • N'utiliser que le cordon d'alimentation fourni. Si le cordon d'alimentation n'est pas livré, n'utilisez que le cordon et la fiche qui sont spécifiés dans les INSTRUCTIONS relatives au CORDON D'ALIMENTATION. L'utilisation d'un autre cordon peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. • Le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec le produit ne doit être utilisé qu'avec cet appareil et jamais avec un autre appareil. Négliger cette précaution peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. • N'utiliser que la tension d'alimentation spécifiée. Tout manquement à cela peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. • Ne pas utiliser d'adapteur multiprises pour brancher tout autre périphérique ou toute autre machine. Le dépassement de la puissance nominale d'une prise murale peut provoquer un incendie ou une électrocution. Ne pas brancher ou débrancher le cordon d'alimentation avec les mains humides : il y a risque d'électrocution. Insérer la prise de courant à fond dans la prise murale. Tout manquement à cela peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. • Ne jamais gratter ni éroder le cordon d'alimentation, ne pas placer d'objet lourd dessus, ne pas le chauffer, le tordre, le plier, ne pas tirer dessus, ni l'endommager. L'utilisation d'un cordon d'alimentation endommagé (conducteur exposé, fil cassé ou dénudé, etc.) peut provoquer un incendie ou une panne. Si l'une de ces conditions devait apparaître, éteignez immédiatement la machine, débranchez le cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale, puis prenez contact avec votre Service Après-Vente. • Evitez d'utiliser une rallonge électrique. L'utilisation d'une rallonge peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. Contacter votre S.A.V. si une rallonge s'avère nécessaire. Conseils de sécurité 2 D 131F/191F 2-5 2.1.4 ATTENTION • Ne pas poser de vase ni aucun autre récipient contenant de l'eau ni d'agrafes ou de petits objets métalliques sur le produit. L'eau renversée ou les objets métalliques tombés à l'intérieur du produit peuvent déclencher un incendie ou provoquer une électrocution ou une panne. • Si un morceau de métal, de l'eau ou un corps étranger tombait à l'intérieur de l'appareil, éteignez immédiatement la machine, débranchez le cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale, puis prenez contact avec votre Service Après- Vente. • Si cet appareil devient exceptionnellement chaud, ou s'il dégage de la fumée ou fait entendre un bruit insolite, ne continuez pas à l'utiliser. Mettez immédiatement l'interrupteur en position OFF (Arrêt), débranchez le câble d'alimentation de la prise murale, et contactez votre Service Après-vente. Si vous continuez à l'utiliser dans cet état, il peut prendre feu, ou être source d'électrocution. • Ne continuez pas à utiliser cet appareil s'il est tombé ou si son capot a été endommagé. Mettez immédiatement l'interrupteur en position OFF (Arrêt), débranchez le câble d'alimentation de la prise murale, et contactez votre Service Après-vente. Si vous continuez à l'utiliser dans cet état, il peut prendre feu, ou être source d'électrocution. Ne pas jeter la cartouche de toner ni du toner dans les flammes. Le toner chaud risque de se diffuser et de provoquer des brûlures ou d'autres dommages. Brancher le cordon d'alimentation à une prise électrique équipée d'une borne de mise à la terre. Symbole Signification Symbole Signification • Ne pas utiliser d'aérosols, de liquides ou de gaz inflammables à proximité de ce produit, il pourrait prendre feu. • Ne laissez pas les unités toner ou les unités tambour de fixation à portée des enfants. Le fait de lécher ou d'ingérer ces produits pourrait porter atteinte à votre santé. • Ne pas laisser le moindre objet obstruer les orifices de ventilation de ce produit. La chaleur pourrait s'accumuler à l'intérieur du produit et provoquer un incendie ou un quelconque dysfonctionnement. • Ne pas installer ce produit dans un endroit directement exposé aux rayons du soleil ou près d'un climatiseur ou d'un appareil de chauffage. Les variations de température occasionnées à l'intérieur du produit peuvent provoquer un dysfonctionnement, déclencher un feu ou provoquer une électrocution. • Ne pas installer ce produit dans un endroit poussiéreux ou exposé à la suie ou à la vapeur, à proximité d'une table de cuisine, d'une baignoire ou d'un humidificateur d'air. Un feu, une électrocution ou une panne peut se produire. • Ne pas placer ce produit sur un banc instable ou renversé ou dans un endroit soumis à des vibrations et des chocs importants. Il pourrait tomber et blesser quelqu'un ou provoquer une panne mécanique. • Une fois ce produit installé, montez-le sur un support stable. Si l'appareil bouge ou tombe, il peut blesser quelqu'un. • Ne pas stocker les unités de toner et les tambours PC à proximité d'un lecteur de disquettes ou d'une horloge sensibles au magnétisme. Ces appareils pourraient ne plus fonctionner correctement. 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-6 D 131F/191F Le compartiment de ce produit contient des zones soumises à de hautes températures, susceptibles d'entraîner des brûlures. Lors de la vérification de l'intérieur de la machine, à la recherche d'une anomalie comme un serrage papier par exemple, ne touchez pas les zones (autour de l'unité de fixation, etc.) qui sont indiquées par l'étiquette d'avertissement "ATTENTION – TRÈS CHAUD". Ne placer aucun objet autour de la prise d'alimentation, celle-ci serait difficile à débrancher en cas d'urgence. La prise électrique murale devra être implantée près de l'appareil et facilement accessible, surtout en cas d'urgence car la fiche du cordon peut être dure à extraire de la prise. • Toujours utiliser ce produit dans un local bien ventilé. L'exploitation du produit dans un local mal ventilé pendant une longue période peut mettre votre santé en danger. Aérer la pièce à intervalles réguliers. • A chaque fois que vous déplacez ce produit, assurez-vous de débrancher le cordon d'alimentation et tous les autres câbles. Tout manquement à cette règle peut endommager le cordon ou les câbles et déclencher un feu ou provoquer une électrocution ou une panne. • Pour déplacer cet appareil, tenez-le toujours par les zones spécifiées dans le Manuel d'Utilisation et dans d'autres documents. Si l'appareil tombe, il peut causer de graves blessures corporelles. Le produit risque également d'être endommagé ou de ne plus fonctionner correctement. • Débrancher le cordon d'alimentation plusieurs fois par an et nettoyer la zone entre les bornes de la prise. La poussière qui s'accumule entre les bornes peut provoquer un incendie. • Toujours tenir et tirer la prise lorsque vous débranchez le cordon. Le fait de tirer directement sur le cordon d'alimentation peut l'endommager et déclencher le feu ou provoquer une électrocution. Symbole Signification Conseils de sécurité 2 D 131F/191F 2-7 2.1.5 Précautions à prendre 2.1.6 Divers Symbole Signification • Ne pas stocker les unités de toner, les photoconducteurs et autres fournitures et consommables dans un endroit exposé aux rayons du soleil, à des températures élevées ou à l'humidité, au risque d'un dysfonctionnement et d'une mauvaise qualité d'image. • Ne pas essayer de remplacer l'unité de toner et le tambour photoconducteur dans un endroit exposé aux rayons du soleil. Si le photoconducteur est exposé à la lumière intense, l'image risque d'être de mauvaise qualité. • Ne pas déballer une unité de toner ou un tambour photoconducteur avant que leur utilisation ne soit devenue nécessaire. Ne pas laisser traîner une unité déballée. Installez la immédiatement ou l'image risque d'être de mauvaise qualité. • Ne pas conserver les unités de toner et les photoconducteurs en position verticale ou à l'envers, sinon l'image risque d'être de mauvaise qualité. • Ne pas jeter ou laisser tomber une unité de toner ou un photoconducteur, sinon l'image risque d'être de mauvaise qualité. • Ne pas utiliser ce produit dans un endroit qui génère de l'ammoniac ou d'autres gaz et produits chimiques. Tout manquement à cette règle peut réduire la durée d'utilisation du produit, provoquer des dommages ou diminuer les performances. • Ne pas utiliser ce produit dans un environnement dont la température est en dehors de la plage spécifiée dans le manuel utilisateur, sinon une panne ou un dysfonctionnement peut se produire. • NE PAS essayer d'alimenter cet appareil avec du papier agrafé, du papier carbone ou des feuilles d'aluminium, ce qui pourrait entraîner un dysfonctionnement ou un feu. Ne pas toucher ni égratigner la surface de l'unité de toner, du rouleau de développement ni du photoconducteur, sinon l'image risque d'être de mauvaise qualité. Utiliser les fournitures et les consommables recommandés par le vendeur. L'utilisation de fournitures ou de consommables non recommandés risque d'entraîner une mauvaise qualité de l'image et des pannes. Symbole Signification • Ne pas s'appuyer contre le tableau de commande, cela pourrait entraîner un dysfonctionnement. • Selon l'état des lignes du réseau téléphonique, il se peut que les communications internationales normales ne soient parfois pas possibles. • Si l'on utilise de l'eau du robinet ou d'un puits dans un humidificateur, il se peut que les impuretés contenues dans l'eau se disséminent dans l'air et se redéposent ensuite à l'intérieur de l'imprimante, avec pour effet une détérioration de la qualité d'image. Il est donc recommandé de n'employer que de l'eau pure dans l'humidificateur. • Le ventilateur de refroidissement peut se déclencher automatiquement, mais ce n'est en rien un symptôme de problème. • Des batteries Ni-MH (Nickel Métal Hybride) sont installées à l'intérieur de l'appareil afin de servir de batteries de secours pour sauvegarder la mémoire. Veuillez les mettre au rebut conformément à la législation locale, nationale ou fédérale. 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-8 D 131F/191F 2.2 Termes et symboles Terme, symbole Signification 7 Ce symbole attire votre attention pour éviter tout risque de blessure. IMPORTANT Cette instruction décrit les conditions ou les opérations incorrectes susceptibles d'endommager votre machine. Note Les notes contiennent des conseils, précisent les restrictions et la manière d'éviter les dysfonctionnements. [Valider] Le texte entre [ ] identifie des touches spécifiques sur le panneau de contrôle (par exemple, la touche Valider). LCD Il s'agit de l'afficheur (ou écran) à cristaux liquides. Il affiche les messages, sélections et suggestions lors d'une opération. "XXXXX" Ce sont les éléments qui s'affichent sur l'écran LCD. Document Il s'agit de l'original (ou des originaux papier) que vous envoyez, copiez ou numérisez sur la machine. Papier Papier destiné à l'impression. Tx Indique l'émission. Rx Indique la réception. š, › Montre le sens du papier et du document. Repère de direction Document placé dans l'ADF ou sur la vitre d'exposition Papier chargé dans le magasin papier › ou Néant Ex. A4 š Ex. A5 š Conseils de sécurité 2 D 131F/191F 2-9 2.3 Précautions Veuillez prendre les précautions suivantes afin de conserver l'appareil dans les meilleures conditions possibles. 2.3.1 Précautions d'installation Site d'installation Afin d'assurer une sécurité optimale ainsi que les meilleures performances de votre appareil, il est recommandé de l'installer dans un endroit qui répond aux conditions suivantes : - loin de rideaux ou de matières facilement inflammables - dans un endroit à l'abri de l'eau et d'autres liquides - dans un endroit à l'abri du soleil - dans un endroit à l'abri de la ventilation d'une climatisation ou de la bouche d'un chauffage, et non exposé à des températures très basses ou très élevées - dans un endroit bien ventilé - dans un endroit ne présentant pas un taux d'humidité élevé. - dans un endroit qui ne soit pas trop poussiéreux - sur un support qui ne soit pas sujet à des vibrations - sur un support stable et horizontal - dans un endroit où il n'y a pas génération d'ammoniac ou d'un autre gaz organique - dans un endroit qui n'expose pas directement l'opérateur aux effluents émanant de l'appareil. - dans un endroit qui ne se trouve pas à proximité d'un appareil de chauffage 2.3.2 Alimentation L'alimentation requise est la suivante : - Fluctuation de tension : AC 220-240 V ± 10 Hz - Fluctuation maximale en fréquence : ± 3 Hz - Utilisez une source d'alimentation présentant un minimum de fluctuation en tension ou en fréquence. 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-10 D 131F/191F 2.3.3 Espace requis Afin de faciliter le réapprovisionnement des consommables et l'intervention du Service Après-Vente, il est souhaitable d'assurer les distances minimales indiquées ci-dessous. 2 Note Afin de faciliter l'entretien de la machine et le remplacement des consommables, ménagez un espace suffisant tout autour de la machine. Pour soulever la machine, veillez à saisir celle-ci par l'arrière à l'aide des poignées situées sur le côté droit et sur le côté gauche. Si l'on soulève la machine par l'avant, celle-ci peut être déséquilibrée et tomber. 40 cm 10 cm 30 cm 40 cm 10 cm Conseils de sécurité 2 D 131F/191F 2-11 2.3.4 Précautions d'utilisation Environnement L'environnement requis pour l'appareil est le suivant : - Température : 10°C à 32°C (50°F à 89,6°F) avec des variations qui ne dépasseront pas 10°C (18°F) en une heure. - Humidité : 20% à 80% avec une fluctuation de 10% au maximum par heure Utilisation correcte Pour assurer les performances optimales de l'appareil, suivre les précautions ci-dessous. - NE posez JAMAIS d'objets lourds sur la vitre d'exposition et préservezla des chocs. - N'ouvrez jamais les volets de la machine pendant qu'elle copie ou imprime, un serrage papier pourrait en résulter. - Ne jamais approcher d'objets magnétiques, ni utiliser d'aérosols ou de liquides inflammables près de l'appareil. - S'assurer que la fiche secteur est correctement branchée à la prise de courant en permanence. - S'assurer que la fiche secteur de l'appareil est toujours visible. - Toujours maintenir une bonne ventilation lorsque vous effectuez un grand nombre de copies. 7IMPORTANT Une quantité d'ozone négligeable se dégage de l'appareil quand celuici est utilisé normalement. Cependant, une odeur désagréable peut se faire sentir dans les pièces dont l'aération est insuffisante et lorsque l'appareil est utilisé pendant de longues périodes. % Pour avoir la certitude de travailler dans un environnement réunissant des conditions de confort, il est préférable de bien aérer la pièce où se trouve l'appareil. 7IMPORTANT Le pourtour de l'unité de fixation est extrêmement chaud. % Afin de réduire le risque de brûlure, ne touchez jamais d'autres zones que celles indiquées dans ce manuel. En particulier, bien faire attention à ne pas toucher les pièces signalées par une étiquette d'avertissement, ainsi que les zones à proximité. 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-12 D 131F/191F Transport de l'appareil Si vous devez déplacer l'appareil sur une longue distance, consultez votre Service Après-Vente. Conservation des consommables Prendre les précautions suivantes lors de la manipulation des consommables (toner, papier, etc.). - Stocker les consommables dans un endroit qui répond aux conditions suivantes : à l'abri du soleil loin d'un appareil de chauffage non exposé à un taux élevé d'humidité pas trop poussiéreux - Le papier qui a été déballé mais pas chargé dans le magasin sera conservé dans un sac en plastique, dans un endroit frais et à l'abri de la lumière. - Utilisez exclusivement du toner spécialement fabriqué pour cet appareil. Ne jamais utiliser d'autres types de toner. - Garder tous les consommables hors de la portée des enfants. 7IMPORTANT Veiller à ne pas renverser de toner dans l'appareil, sur les vêtements ou sur les mains. % Si vos mains entrent en contact avec le toner, lavez-les immédiatement à l'eau et au savon. Conseils de sécurité 2 D 131F/191F 2-13 2.3.5 Réglementation en matière de copie Certains types de documents ne doivent jamais être copiés avec l'intention de faire passer les copies pour l'original. La liste suivante n'est pas exhaustive mais elle doit servir de guide pour un comportement responsable en matière de copie. Instruments financiers - Chèques personnels - Chèques de voyage - Mandats - Certificats de dépôt - Obligations ou autres titres de dettes - Titres de valeur Documents officiels - Coupons alimentaires - Timbres poste (oblitérés ou non) - Chèques ou traites tirés par des agences gouvernementales - Timbres fiscaux (oblitérés ou non) - Passeports - Papiers d'immigration - Permis de conduire et carte grise - Actes et titres de propriété Autres - Cartes d'identification, badges ou insignes - Les oeuvres protégées sans l'autorisation du propriétaire des droits Par ailleurs, il est rigoureusement interdit de copier des billets de monnaie nationale ou étrangère ou des oeuvres d'art sans la permission du propriétaire des droits. Si vous avez des doutes sur la nature des documents, consultez un conseiller juridique. 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-14 D 131F/191F 3 Implantation et installation Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-3 3 Implantation et installation 3.1 Identification des éléments contenus dans l'emballage 2 Note L'aspect du cordon d'alimentation AC et du cordon téléphonique peut différer selon les pays. La cartouche toner livrée avec votre machine est une cartouche toner qui vous permet de d'utiliser immédiatement votre appareil mais qui est prévue pour 3000 tirages ou impressions. Par la suite, vous trouverez chez votre revendeur les cartouches normales et complètement chargées. Câble téléphonique Documentation & étiquettes - Guide de l'utilisateur (le présent manuel) - Etiquette de format papier - Etiquette Numéro 1-Touche - Etiquette Touche de fonction Noyau de ferrite Cartouche tambour Unité principale avec magasin de 500 feuilles Plateau document Imprimante & Scanner CD ROM pilote Câble d'alimentation AC Cartouche toner programmable 3 Implantation et installation 3-4 D 131F/191F 3.2 Nomenclature LINE PHONE1 PHONE2 LINE PHONE1 PHONE2 2ème volet latéral 1er volet latéral Introducteur automatique Guides de document Plateau de docuement Plateau de sortie de docuement Plateau d'introduction Panneau de contrôle Témoin de niveau papier Volet frontal 2ème magasin papier (en option) Magasin papier Couvre-original Vitre d'exposition Magasin de sortie Connecteurs téléphone Connecteur parallèle (en option) Connecteur USB Connecteur réseau (en option) Prise d'alimentation AC Interrupteur general de document du papier manuelle Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-5 3.3 Présentation du panneau de contrôle 1. Bouton de changement de Mode Une pression sur ce bouton permet de changer le mode de la machine. 2. Voyant Source papier Indique la source de papier sélectionnée. 3. Voyant Alarme S'allume en cas de problème. 4. Comm./Récep. Mémoire - Clignote quand la machine est en communication avec un autre appareil. - S'allume en continu quand la machine a reçu un document en mémoire. 5. Voyant Mode machine Indique dans quel mode se trouve la machine. 6. Format papier/Doc. suivant - En mode copie : Permet de sélectionner le papier que vous voulez utiliser. - Pendant la numérisation d'un document : Permet de commander à la machine de numériser un ou plusieurs documents une fois que la numérisation en cours sera terminée. 7. LCD (Afficheur à cristaux liquides) Affiche les messages et sélections et suggestions pendant une opération. 8. Format Doc. Indique à la machine qu'elle doit numériser un document de format A4, A5 š ou F4. 9. Définition Doc. Sélectionner la définition fax et la définition de la copie. 10.Contraste Règle le niveau de contraste de la numérisation. 1 2345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 3 Implantation et installation 3-6 D 131F/191F 11.Menu/Retour Permet d'accéder aux paramètres permettant de personnaliser l'utilisation de votre machine. Permet aussi de revenir au précédent niveau du menu. 12.Touches Curseur Permet de naviguer dans les sous-menus, de déplacer le curseur à l'écran et de sélectionner divers éléments et paramètres. - En mode fax : + (Renum.) : Rappelle les numéros que vous avez composés. (Voir page 9-13.) , (Index Tél) : Affiche par ordre alphanumérique les numéros 1-Touche et les numéros abrégés, comme dans un répertoire téléphonique. (Voir page 8-16.) - En mode copie et numérisation : ,+ : Permet de choisir le taux zoom. 13.Valider Permet de sélectionner ou de confirmer les réglages. 14.Annuler Efface les caractères sur l'afficheur LCD et annule les commandes données à la machine. 15.Touches programmables Les fonctions que vous utilisez fréquemment peuvent être assignées à ces trois touches. (Voir "Fonctions spéciales [CD]" à la page 12-3 pour plus d'informations.) Dans leur paramétrage par défaut, ces touches permettent d'activer ou de désactiver les fonctions suivantes : - Touche de fonction programmable 1 : Tri– Active ou désactive la fonction Tri. - Touche de fonction programmable 2 : Intro.Manuelle – Définit le format de papier pour l'introducteur manuel. - Touche de fonction programmable 3 : 2en1– Active ou désactive la fonction 2en1. 16.Fonctions Avancées Vous pouvez choisir parmi toutes les fonctions qui n'ont pas été assignées aux touches de fonction programmables. Les éléments de fonction qui s'affichent peuvent varier en fonction du mode dans lequel se trouve la machine. 17.Num.Abrégée/Groupes Appuyez une fois sur cette touche et tapez un numéro à trois chiffres pour composer un numéro de fax ou de téléphone préalablement enregistré. Si vous appuyez deux fois sur cette touche, vous pouvez taper un numéro Groupe pour effectuer une numérotation groupée. 18.Confirm Job./Abandon Fax Annule ou permet de revoir les tâches de télécopies et les résultats de la communication fax. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-7 19.Touches numériques Permettent d'entrer des valeurs numériques, des numéros de fax ou de téléphone, et des caractères. 20.Réinit. Restaure les paramètres par défaut, ou permet aussi de revenir au mode attente. 21.Début Lance l'opération. 22.Stop Arrête la machine. Cependant, pour arrêter la télécopie, appuyez sur la touche [Confirm.Job/Abandon Fax]. 23.Touches Macro Permet d'effectuer une suite d'opérations enregistrées sous une seule touche. (Voir "Fonctions spéciales [CD]" à la page 12-3 pour plus d'informations.) 24.Touches 1-Touche Permettent de composer un numéro de téléphone ou de fax préalablement enregistré. 23 24 3 Implantation et installation 3-8 D 131F/191F 3.4 Préparation de votre machine 3.4.1 Déblocage du miroir mobile 7IMPORTANT % Ne mettez pas l'appareil sous tension avant d'avoir débloqué l'unité scanner. Cela pourrait endommager la machine. 1 Faites coulisser le curseur de verrouillage en position déblocage comme illustré ci-dessous. 2 Après avoir débloqué l'unité scanner, désactivez le mode transport. (Voir page 3-15.) Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-9 3.4.2 Installation du plateau originaux Fixez le plateau pour originaux en insérant ses ergots dans les orifices correspondants, comme indiqué sur l'illustration ci-dessous. 3 Implantation et installation 3-10 D 131F/191F 3.4.3 Raccordements Raccordement de la ligne téléphonique Fixez le connecteur téléphonique sur le câble de la ligne téléphonique, comme illustré ci-dessous. Enfichez une extrémité du fil téléphonique dans la prise marquée LINE et l'autre dans la prise téléphonique murale. Raccordement d'un téléphone externe Si vous désirez que votre machine permette à la fois la réception de fax et de communications vocales, connectez un combiné téléphonique externe (ou un répondeur) sur votre machine. LINE PHONE1 PHONE2 LINE PHONE1 PHONE2 Connecteur téléphonique Prise téléphonique Téléphone externe ou Répondeur (Exemple donné pour l'Allemagne) Noyau de ferrite murale Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-11 3.4.4 Installation du tambour et des cartouches de toner 1 Tirez le levier de déverrouillage pour ouvrir le volet latéral. 2 Ouvrez le volet frontal. 3 Tournez vers la gauche le levier de déblocage de la cartouche toner (position déverrouillée) 4 Sortez la cartouche tambour de son emballage et engagez-la fermement dans la machine jusqu'à ce qu'elle s'enclenche complètement en place. 3 Implantation et installation 3-12 D 131F/191F 2 Note Protégez la cartouche tambour de la lumière et spécialement de la lumière vive. 5 Déballez la cartouche de toner de départ. Puis, en la tenant à deux mains, secouez-la doucement pour répartir uniformément le toner à l'intérieur de la cartouche. 2 Note Ne touchez pas le rouleau de la cartouche toner. 6 Insérez fermement la cartouche toner dans la machine jusqu'à ce qu'elle se verrouille en place. 7 Tournez vers la droite le levier de verrouillage de la cartouche jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche en place complètement. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-13 8 Refermez le volet frontal et le volet latéral. 2 Note La machine ne fonctionnera pas tant que toutes les volets ne sont pas correctement fermés. 3 Implantation et installation 3-14 D 131F/191F 3.4.5 Mise sous tension 1 Branchez la fiche femelle du cordon d'alimentation dans la prise AC de la machine et la fiche mâle dans une prise murale reliée à la terre. 7IMPORTANT % Assurez-vous de ne pas mettre la machine sous tension avant d'avoir débloqué l'unité scanner. (Voir page 3-8.) 2 Actionnez l'interrupteur. Il porte des symboles internationaux : [I] pour Marche, [O] pour Arrêt. Le préchauffage de la machine ne dure que quelques secondes. La machine indique : Puis : Pour utiliser la machine, désactivez le mode transport. 2 Note Tant que la machine est sous tension, la lampe du scanner reste allumée ; ce n'est pas une anomalie, mais une nécessité pour la longévité de la lampe du scanner de votre machine. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-15 3.4.6 Désactivation du mode transport Quand la machine est en mode transport, celle-ci indique : Pour désactiver le mode transport : 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [1], [1], [4]. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner "Non" et appuyez sur [Valider]. L'unité scanner se déplace alors dans sa position de repos et la machine est prête à fonctionner. 7IMPORTANT % Si vous devez réexpédier la machine, il faudra réactiver ce mode transport, mettre la machine hors tension et verrouiller l'unité scanner en repoussant le système de blocage. 3.4.7 Chargement du papier et définition du format de papier Veuillez vous reporter à la section "Traitement du papier" à la page 4-10. 3 Implantation et installation 3-16 D 131F/191F 3.4.8 Réglage du volume du haut-parleur 1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/ Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Fax. 2 Appuyez plusieurs fois sur [Fonctions Avancées] jusqu'à ce que "Moniteur" s'affiche. 3 Appuyez sur [Valider]. Une tonalité de numérotation se fera entendre. 4 Appuyez sur [)] ou [*] pour régler le volume. 5 Appuyez plusieurs fois sur [Fonctions Avancées] pour sélectionner "Moniteur" et appuyez sur [Valider] pour raccrocher. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-17 3.5 Réglages initiaux 3.5.1 Effacement des réglages enregistrés Avant d'utiliser votre machine, effacez de la mémoire intégrée les réglages utilisateur. Ainsi la mémoire ne contiendra que vos propres paramètres. 7IMPORTANT % Après avoir défini les réglages initiaux, ne videz plus la mémoire sauf si un technicien autorisé vous demande de le faire. Pour effacer la mémoire : 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [1], [0], [2]. 2 Si vous voulez effacer le contenu de la mémoire, appuyez sur [Valider]. Si vous ne voulez pas effacer le contenu de la mémoire, appuyez sur [Annuler]. 3 Implantation et installation 3-18 D 131F/191F 3.5.2 Premières opérations Dans certains pays, il est obligatoire que votre nom et numéro de fax figurent sur tous les fax que vous envoyez. Il faut par conséquent enregistrer dans la machine votre nom (ou celui de votre entreprise) et numéro de fax avant toute utilisation. Chacune des pages que vous envoyez comporte à l'arrivée sur la machine réceptrice, une ligne unique en haut de page. Elle indique un nom (désigné aussi Identifiant Terminal Emetteur ou TTI) et un numéro de fax. L'étape suivante "Paramétrage initial" montre comment enregistrer les éléments suivants, dont votre nom et votre numéro de fax. - Langue du LCD et listes - Date et heure - Mode de réception fax - Détection de tonalité - Votre numéro de fax - TTI 1/TTI 2/TTI 3 - TTI usuel - Délai avant passage en mode Economie d'énergie Vous pourrez toujours changer plus tard les réglages que vous définissez ici. 3.5.3 Paramétrage initial Si vous appuyez sur [Réinit.] pendant le réglage préalable, la machine passe en mode attente. Mais elle conservera les paramètres que vous aurez validés par la touche [Valider] comme indiqué ci-après. 1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Fax. Langue 2 Appuyez sur [Menu], [9], [Valider]. La machine indique la langue d'affichage actuellement en vigueur. 3 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] jusqu'à afficher la langue voulue. Appuyez ensuite sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage et poursuivre. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-19 Date & Heure 4 La machine affiche le réglage actuel des heures et de la date. 5 Sur le clavier numérique tapez la date et l'heure correctes, au format JJMMAA pour la date et au format 24 heures pour l'heure. Par exemple, pour le 16 Juillet 2007, 1:30 de l'après-midi, appuyez sur [1] [6] [0] [7] [0] [7] [1] [3] [3] [0]. 6 Pour modifier un chiffre, appuyez sur [*] pour déplacer le curseur vers la gauche, ou sur [)] pour le déplacer vers la droite. Tapez ensuite le chiffre voulu. 7 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le paramètre date et heure, et poursuivre. Heure d'été Permet de régler l'heure d'été. Si ce réglage est sur "Oui", la machine tient automatiquement compte de l'heure d'été. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [9], [Valider]. 2 Sélectionnez "Heure d'été" avec les touches de déplacement et appuyez sur [Valider]. 3 Sélectionnez "Oui" ou "Non" avec les touches de déplacement et appuyez sur [Valider]. Mode de réception fax 4 La machine indique à présent le mode de réception fax en vigueur. 5 Pour l'instant, sélectionnez Mode Fax : prêt. (Pour la description du mode de réception, voir "Sélection du mode de réception" à la page 10-3.) 6 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage et poursuivre. Jour Mois Année Heure 3 Implantation et installation 3-20 D 131F/191F Détection de tonalité 7 La machine vous demande si une tonalité doit être détectée avant la numérotation. 8 Normalement, ce paramètre reste sur "Non". Si vous avez besoin de détecter une tonalité lors de la numérotation, sélectionnez "Oui", il sera cependant impossible d'envoyer un fax en l'absence de tonalité. 9 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage et poursuivre. Votre numéro de fax 10 La machine vous demande ensuite de saisir votre numéro de fax tel que vous voulez qu'il apparaisse sur l'afficheur ou les télécopies reçues par les autres machines. 11 Entrez votre numéro de fax à l'aide du clavier numérique. Ce nombre peut comporter jusqu'à 20 caractères. Pour insérer le signe "+" devant le code de votre pays, appuyez plusieurs fois sur [Fonctions Avancées] jusqu'à afficher "Pause/Numérot. Opt." sur l'écran, puis appuyez sur [Valider]. Pour insérer un trait d'union "–", en vue de faciliter la lecture des noms longs, appuyez plusieurs fois sur [Fonctions Avancées] jusqu'à afficher "Pause/Numérot. Opt.", puis appuyez sur [Valider]. Répétez cette procédure pour insérer à l'écran un caractère "–". En cas d'erreur, appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer la saisie vers la gauche. Pour modifier un seul chiffre, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur, et appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer le chiffre voulu. Retapez ensuite le numéro de fax correct. 12 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le numéro. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-21 TTI (Votre Nom) 13 La machine vous demande à présent d'entrer votre nom (ou celui de votre entreprise) tel que vous voulez le voir apparaître en tête des télécopies que vous envoyez. Vous pouvez introduire trois noms différents. Chaque nom peut comporter jusqu'à 22 caractères. Introduisez les caractères à l'aide des touches du clavier numérique. (Veuillez vous reporter à "Saisie de caractères" à la page 4-4.) En cas d'erreur, appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer la saisie vers la gauche. Pour modifier un seul caractère, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur, et appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer le caractère voulu. Retapez ensuite le caractère correct. 14 Appuyez sur [Valider]. Si vous ne désirez pas introduire le TTI 2, passez à l'étape 19. 15 Introduisez le nom du TTI 2 à l'aide des touches du clavier numérique. 16 Appuyez sur [Valider]. Si vous ne désirez pas introduire le TTI 3, passez à l'étape 21. 17 Introduisez le nom du TTI 3 à l'aide des touches du clavier numérique. 18 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage et poursuivre. Sélection du TTI usuel 19 La machine vous demande à présent de définir le TTI usuel qui apparaîtra en tête des télécopies que vous envoyez. 20 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner TTI 1, TTI 2 ou TTI 3. 21 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage et poursuivre. 3 Implantation et installation 3-22 D 131F/191F Définition du délai avant passage en mode Economie d'énergie 22 La machine vous demande de spécifier le délai avant passage en mode Economie d'énergie. Votre machine passera automatiquement en mode Economie d'énergie une fois que le délai que vous avez spécifié sera écoulé. 23 Introduisez la durée (en minutes) à l'aide des touches du clavier numérique. 24 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage. 25 Appuyez sur [Réinit.] pour revenir au mode attente. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-23 3.5.4 Mode Economie d'énergie Pour économiser l'énergie, votre machine est réglée au départ de manière à passer automatiquement en mode Economie d'énergie après un délai d'inactivité d'environ 5minutes. En mode Economie d'énergie, la machine arrête le préchauffage pour l'impression et affiche à l'écran "Mode Economie d'énergie". Cependant, les voyants LED du panneau de contrôle et la lampe scanner ne s'éteindront pas lorsque la machine est en mode Economie d'énergie. Pour quitter le mode Economie d'énergie, appuyez sur n'importe quelle touche du panneau de contrôle. Lorsque votre machine reçoit un fax alors qu'elle est en mode Economie d'énergie, la machine repasse automatiquement en mode d'activité. Pour changer le paramètre mode Economie d'énergie : 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [2], [1], [0], [5], [Valider]. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner Oui ou Non. 3 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage. 4 Appuyez sur [Réinit.] pour quitter et revenir au mode attente. 2 Note Il reste possible de modifier le réglage spécifiant le délai d'inactivité avant passage en mode Economie d'énergie. Voir "Définition du délai avant passage en mode Economie d'énergie" à la page 3-22 dans "Paramétrage initial" à la page 3-18. Si vous assignez la fonction "Economie d'énergie" à une touche de fonction programmable, vous pouvez basculer immédiatement la machine en mode Economie d'énergie en appuyant sur cette touche de fonction programmable, indépendamment du réglage Oui/Non et du réglage du délai d'inactivité. Pour plus de détails sur les touches de fonction programmables, voir page 12-3. 3 Implantation et installation 3-24 D 131F/191F 3.6 Installation du pilote d'imprimante et du scanner Pour pouvoir utiliser cette machine comme imprimante ou scanner, installez sur votre ordinateur les pilotes contenus dans le CD livré avec la machine. 3.6.1 Système d'exploitation pris en charge (Local) Systèmes d'exploitation - Windows Vista Ultimate - Windows Vista Ultimate Edition 64-bit - Windows Vista Entreprise - Windows Vista Entreprise Edition 64-bit - Windows Vista Business - Windows Vista Business Edition 64-bit - Windows Vista Home Premium - Windows Vista Home Premium Edition 64-bit - Windows Vista Home Basic - Windows Vista Home Basic Edition 64-bit - Windows Serveur 2003 - Windows XP Professionnel - Windows XP Edition familiale - Windows 2000 Professionnel - Windows NT 4.0 Workstation (SP6a ou ultérieur) - Windows Me - Windows 98 Deuxième Edition(SE) - Windows 98 Espace disque L'installation nécessite au moins 10 Mo d'espace disque disponible. 2 Note Windows 98 et Windows NT 4.0 ne sont pris en charge qu'au moyen d'une interface parallèle. Pour l'interface réseau, voir le manuel de la "Carte Interface Réseau". Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-25 3.6.2 Installation locale : Port USB Windows 2 Note Une interface USB ne fonctionnera qu'avec Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000 et Windows XP, Windows Serveur 2003 et Windows Vista. Windows 98 et Windows NT 4.0 ne prennent pas en charge l'USB. Sous Windows 2000/XP/Serveur 2003/Vista, vous devez vous connecter en tant qu'Administrateur. Si vous aviez déjà installé le pilote Develop 131F/191F vous devez d'abord le désinstaller (voir page 3-37.) 1 Allumez votre ordinateur, mais pour le moment, ne connectez pas encore la machine sur le port USB de l'ordinateur. 2 Insérez le CD fourni dans votre lecteur de CD-ROM. 2 Note Utilisateurs de Windows Vista : Si la boîte de dialogue "Exécution auto" apparaît, cliquez sur [Lancer Setup. ses]. Lorsque la boîte de dialogue "Contrôle de compte d’utilisateur" apparaît, cliquez sur [Autoriser] pour permettre l'installation du pilote. Si cette fenêtre ne s'affiche pas, lancez le fichier setup.exe qui se trouve sur le répertoire racine du CD ROM. 3 Choisissez votre langue, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 4 Dans la fenêtre suivante, cliquez sur [Suivant]. 5 Lorsque la fenêtre comportant le contrat de licence de logiciel apparaît, cliquez sur [Oui] après en avoir lu et acceptés les termes. 3 Implantation et installation 3-26 D 131F/191F 6 Sélectionnez votre machine et cliquez sur [Suivant]. 7 Sélectionnez "USB". 8 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 9 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 10 Cliquez sur [Suivant] pour lancer l'installation sur votre ordinateur. 2 Note Utilisateurs de Windows Vista: Pendant l'installation du pilote, la boîte de dialogue "Sécurité Windows" apparaît deux fois. Cliquez sur [Installer ce pilote quand même]. 11 Quand la fenêtre ci-dessous apparaît, cliquez sur [Terminer] pour achever l'installation. Si un message d'erreur apparaît au cours du processus d'installation, ou si vous avez précédemment installé le pilote Develop 131F/191F il faudra d'abord le désinstaller. (Voir page 3-37.) - Utilisateurs Windows 98SE et Windows Me % Passez à la page suivante. - Utilisateurs Windows 2000 Professionnel % Passez à la page page 3-30. - Utilisateurs Windows XP/Serveur 2003 % Passez à la page page 3-32 - Utilisateurs Windows Vista % Passez à la page page 3-34. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-27 Utilisateurs Windows 98SE et Windows Me 2 Note Assurez-vous d'avoir bien suivi les étapes d'installation 1 à 11 décrites dans "Installation locale : Port USB Windows" à la page 3-25. 1 Raccordez le câble USB à votre machine puis à votre ordinateur. 2 Note Veillez à utiliser un câble USB blindé. Un câble non blindé est susceptible de provoquer des interférences sur les radiofréquences. 2 Allumez l'appareil et l'ordinateur. 2 Note Les images suivantes sont tirées de l'Assistant Windows Me. 3 Implantation et installation 3-28 D 131F/191F 3 L' "Assistant Ajout de nouveau matériel" apparaît. Sous Windows Me, sélectionnez "Spécifier l'emplacement du pilote (avancé)" et cliquez sur [Suivant]. Sous Windows 98SE, cliquez sur [Suivant]. Sélectionnez ensuite "Rechercher le meilleur pilote pour votre matériel.(Recommandé)" et cliquez sur [Suivant]. 4 Sous Windows ME, sélectionnez "Rechercher le meilleur pilote pour votre matériel" et "Définir un emplacement". Sous Windows 98SE, sélectionnez "Spécifier un emplacement" et effacez tout autre choix. 5 Cliquez sur [Parcourir] pour naviguer dans l'arborescence de votre disque dur jusqu'à : C:\Develop_131F-191F_GDI, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 6 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent dans la fenêtre jusqu'à ce que vous puissiez cliquer sur [Terminer]. 7 L' "Assistant Ajout de nouveau matériel" réapparaît. Répétez trois fois encore la même procédure, de l'étape 3 à 6 jusqu'à ce que l'installation soit complètement terminée. Une fois le pilote installé, vous devez configurer le réglage "Option périphérique" pour activer soit le 2ème magasin papier, soit l'unité Recto-verso, soit les deux ensemble. (L'unité Recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F.) Voir à cet effet "Activer les options du périphérique)" sur la page suivante. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-29 Activer les options du périphérique Si votre machine dispose d'options, vous devez ouvrir les propriétés de l'imprimante pour les activer. Pour activer les options du périphérique : 1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer] % [Paramètres] % [Imprimantes]. 2 Cliquez le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône de l'imprimante Develop GDI, puis cliquez sur [Propriétés]. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet [Option périph.]. 4 Sélectionnez le ou les périphériques installés sur votre machine. 5 Cliquez sur [OK] puis fermez les propriétés de l'imprimante. 2 Note L'unité Recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F. 3 Implantation et installation 3-30 D 131F/191F Utilisateurs de Windows 2000 Professionnel 2 Note Assurez-vous d'avoir bien suivi les étapes d'installation 1 à 11 décrites dans "Installation locale : Port USB Windows" à la page 3-25. 1 Raccordez le câble USB à votre machine puis à votre ordinateur. 2 Note Veillez à utiliser un câble USB blindé. Un câble non blindé est susceptible de provoquer des interférences sur les radiofréquences. 2 Allumez votre machine. 3 L' "Assistant Nouveau matériel détecté" apparaît. Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 4 Sélectionnez "Rechercher un pilote approprié pour mon périphérique" et cliquez sur [Suivant]. 5 Sélectionnez "Emplacement spécifique" et désactivez toutes les autres options,E enfin cliquez sur [Suivant]. 6 Cliquez sur [Parcourir] pour naviguer dans l'arborescence de votre disque dur jusqu'à : C:\Develop_131F-191F_GDI, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 7 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. Si la boite de dialogue "Signature numérique non trouvée" s'affiche, cliquez sur [Oui] pour installer le pilote. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-31 8 L' "Assistant Nouveau matériel détecté" réapparaît. Répétez la même procédure, de l'étape 12 à 16. 9 Cliquez sur [Terminer]. L'installation du pilote est terminée. Activer les options du périphérique Si votre machine dispose d'options, vous devez ouvrir les préférences d'impression pour les activer. Pour activer les options du périphérique : 1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer] % [Paramètres] % [Imprimantes]. 2 Cliquez le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône de l'imprimante Develop GDI, puis cliquez sur [Préférences d'impression]. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet [Option périph.]. 4 Sélectionnez le ou les périphériques installés sur votre machine. 5 Cliquez sur [OK] puis fermez les préférences d'impression. 2 Note L'unité Recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F. 3 Implantation et installation 3-32 D 131F/191F Utilisateurs Windows XP/Serveur 2003 2 Note Assurez-vous d'avoir bien suivi les étapes d'installation 1 à 11 décrites dans "Installation locale : Port USB Windows" à la page 3-25. 1 Raccordez le câble USB à votre machine puis à votre ordinateur. 2 Note Veillez à utiliser un câble USB blindé. Un câble non blindé est susceptible de provoquer des interférences sur les radiofréquences. 2 Allumez votre machine. 3 L' "Assistant Matériel Détecté" apparaît. Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 4 Sélectionnez "Installer à partir d'une liste ou d'un emplacement spécifié" et cliquez sur [Suivant]. 5 Sélectionnez "Inclure cet emplacement dans la recherche" et désactivez toutes les autres options. Cliquez sur [Parcourir] pour naviguer dans l'arborescence de votre disque dur jusqu'à : C:\Develop_131F-191F_GDI, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 6 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 7 Si la boite de dialogue "test Logo Windows" apparaît, cliquez sur [Continuer] pour installer le pilote. 8 Cliquez sur [Terminer]. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-33 9 L'"Assistant Matériel détecté" pour un autre matériel Develop 131F/ 191F apparaît, répétez alors la même procédure, de l'étape 4 à 8. 10 Cliquez sur [Terminer]. L'installation du pilote est terminée. 3 Implantation et installation 3-34 D 131F/191F Activer les options du périphérique Si votre machine dispose d'options, vous devez ouvrir les préférences d'impression pour les activer. Pour activer le composant en option : 1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer] % [Paramètres] % [Imprimantes]. 2 Cliquez le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône de l'imprimante Develop 131F/191F puis cliquez sur [Préférences d'impression]. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet [Option périph.]. 4 Sélectionnez le ou les périphériques installés sur votre machine. 5 Cliquez sur [OK] puis fermez les propriétés de l'imprimante. 2 Note L'unité Recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F. Utilisateurs de Windows Vista 2 Note Assurez-vous d'avoir bien suivi les étapes d'installation 1 à 11 décrites dans "Installation locale : Port USB Windows" à la page 3-25. 1 Branchez le câble USB sur votre appareil et branchez-le ensuite à votre ordinateur. Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-35 2 Note Veillez à utiliser un câble USB blindé. Un câble non blindé est susceptible de provoquer des interférences sur les radiofréquences. 2 Allumez votre machine. 3 Le logiciel du pilote va s'installer automatiquement. 4 Une fois que les pilotes ont été correctement installés, le message "Vos matériels sont prêts à être utilisés" apparaît. 2 Note Après l'installation du pilote, vous devez configurer le réglage "Option Périphérique" pour activer soit le 2ème magasin papier, soit l'unité Recto-verso, ou les deux ensemble (L'unité Recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F.) Voir "Activer les options du périphérique" sur la page suivante. Activer les options du périphérique Si votre machine dispose d'options, vous devez ouvrir les préférences d'impression pour les activer. Pour activer les options du périphérique : 1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer] % [Panneau de configuration]. 2 Cliquez sur [Matériel et audio]. 3 Cliquez sur [Imprimantes]. 4 Cliquez le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône de l'imprimante Develop GDI, puis cliquez sur [Options d'impression...]. 5 Cliquez sur l'onglet [Option périph.]. 6 Sélectionnez le ou les périphériques installés sur votre machine. 7 Cliquez sur [OK] et fermez les préférences d'impression. 2 Note L'unité Recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F. 3 Implantation et installation 3-36 D 131F/191F 3.6.3 Installation locale : Port parallèle Windows (option) 2 Note Cette procédure nécessite une interface parallèle, en option. Une interface parallèle n'est disponible que pour une utilisation avec Windows 98/98SE, Windows Me et Windows NT 4.0 workstation. Sous Windows NT 4.0, vous devez vous connecter en tant qu'Administrateur. Si vous avez précédemment installé le "Pilote Imprimante/Scanner GDI 131F/191F Develop", vous pouvez le mettre à jour simplement en cliquant sur le bouton [Mettre à jour] de la fenêtre de maintenance. 1 Allumez votre machine. 2 Insérez le CD fourni dans votre lecteur de CD-ROM. 2 Note Si cette fenêtre ne s'affiche pas, lancez le fichier setup.exe qui se trouve sur le répertoire racine du CD ROM. 3 Choisissez votre langue puis cliquez sur [Suivant]. 4 Dans la fenêtre suivante, cliquez sur [Suivant]. 5 La fenêtre "Contrat de licence du logiciel" s'affiche. Après avoir lu et accepté le contenu, cliquez sur [Oui]. 6 Sélectionnez votre machine et cliquez sur [Suivant]. 7 Sélectionnez "Parallèle" et cliquez sur [Suivant]. Confirmez le récapitulatif qui s'affiche. Cliquez sur [Suivant] pour lancer l'installation sur votre ordinateur. 8 Quand la fenêtre suivante apparaît, cliquez sur [Terminer] pour achever l'installation. Si un message d'erreur apparaît au cours du processus d'installation, vous devrez procéder à une désinstallation. (Voir page 3-37.) Implantation et installation 3 D 131F/191F 3-37 Activer les options du périphérique Si votre machine dispose d'options, vous devez ouvrir les propriétés de l'imprimante pour les activer. Voir page 3-29 pour les instructions à ce sujet. 3.6.4 Désinstallation du pilote Il est nécessaire de procéder à la désinstallation si vous mettez le logiciel à jour ou si la procédure d'installation échoue. 2 Note Sous Windows NT4.0/2000/XP/Serveur 2003/Vista, vous devez vous connecter en tant qu'Administrateur. Utilisateurs de Windows 98/98SE et Windows Me 1 Sélectionnez "Démarrer, Paramètres", "Panneau de configuration", "Ajout/Suppression de programmes", puis sur l'onglet "Installation/Désinstallation". 2 Sélectionnez "Pilote Imprimante/Scanner GDI 131F/191F Develop" et cliquez sur le bouton [Ajouter/Supprimer]. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent dans la fenêtre. Sous Windows 2000 Professionnel 1 Sélectionnez "Démarrer", "Paramètres", "Panneau de configuration", "Ajouter/Supprimer des Programmes" et cliquez sur l'icône "Modifier ou supprimer des Programmes". 2 Sélectionnez "Pilote Imprimante/Scanner GDI 131F/191F Develop" et cliquez sur le bouton [Modifier/Supprimer]. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent dans la fenêtre. 3 Implantation et installation 3-38 D 131F/191F Sous Windows XP et Windows Serveur 2003 1 Sélectionnez "Démarrer", "Panneau de configuration", "Ajout/Suppression de programmes" et cliquez sur l'icône "Modifier ou supprimer des programmes". 2 Sélectionnez "Pilote Imprimante/Scanner GDI 131F/191F Develop" et cliquez sur le bouton [Modifier/Supprimer]. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent dans la fenêtre. Sous Windows Vista 1 Sélectionnez [Démarrer], [Panneau de configuration], [Programmes], [Programmes et fonctionnalités]. 2 Sélectionnez le pilote Imprimante/Scanner GDI 131F/191F Develop et cliquez sur le bouton [Désinstaller]. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent dans la fenêtre. 4 Premières opérations Premières opérations 4 D 131F/191F 4-3 4 Premières opérations 4.1 Conseils d'utilisation 4.1.1 Modifier le mode de la machine Pour modifier le mode de la machine, appuyez sur le bouton"Copie/Fax/ Scan". Le voyant Mode machine indique dans quel mode se trouve la machine. 2 Note Il n'est pas possible de changer de mode dans les cas suivants : Pendant la numérisation d'un document. Pendant la transmission en temps réel. Pendant la programmation de tout réglage de fonction. 4 Premières opérations 4-4 D 131F/191F 4.1.2 Saisie de caractères Certains réglages nécessitent la saisie de caractères, par exemple votre TTI (votre nom), le nom d'un fax distant ou autres. Pour introduire des lettres ou autres caractères, voici quelques conseils : En appuyant plusieurs fois sur une touche numérique, vous pouvez accéder aux caractères suivants, comme représenté dans le tableau ci-dessous. Tableau des caractères Pour introduire l'un des caractères réunis sous la même touche numérique, appuyez sur [)] pour déplacer le curseur vers la droite. Clavier numérique Caractères 1 . @ - _ , / : & ‘ o ! ? Note : o représente une espace A B C 2 D E F 3 G H I 4 J K L 5 M N O 6 P Q R S 7 T U V 8 W X Y Z 9 0 Caractères spéciaux Verrouillage majuscules Premières opérations 4 D 131F/191F 4-5 Pour introduire des majuscules ou des minuscules Appuyez sur la touche [#] pour basculer entre majuscule et minuscule. L'indication "Majusc." signifie que la machine n'enregistrera que des lettres en majuscules. L'indication "Minusc." signifie que la machine n'enregistrera que des lettres en minuscules. Introduction de caractères spéciaux Vous pouvez introduire également des caractères spéciaux ou des symboles. 1 Lorsque la machine vous invite à entrer un nom, appuyez sur la touche [1]. L'écran affiche alors : 2 Sélectionnez le caractère que vous désirez à l'aide des touches [*], [)], [+] ou [,]. 3 Pour entrer le caractère, appuyez sur [Valider]. 4 Si vous désirez entrer un autre caractère, répétez les étapes 1 à 3, sinon passez à l'étape suivante. 5 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour l'enregistrer. Correction de caractères Si vous avez saisi une lettre ou un chiffre incorrects, appuyez sur la touche [Annuler] pour effacer vers la gauche. Pour ne modifier qu'un seul caractère ou chiffre, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur sur ce caractère ou chiffre. Appuyez ensuite sur [Annuler] pour l'effacer. Enfin, retaper correctement le caractère ou le chiffre. 4 Premières opérations 4-6 D 131F/191F 4.1.3 Secours Mémoire [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "4 Premières opérations" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 4.1.4 Sélection d'une fonction [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "4 Premières opérations" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 4.1.5 Tableau des fonctions [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "4 Premières opérations" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. Premières opérations 4 D 131F/191F 4-7 4.2 Traitement du papier et des documents 4.2.1 Traitement des documents Avant de commencer à télécopier, copier ou numériser, veuillez lire les instructions suivantes. Document acceptables ADF * En émission en temps réel en mode Super fin, 216 x 356mm. Vitre d'exposition Mono-feuille Multi-feuilles Format (l × L) Max. 216 × 900 mm* Min. 120 × 100 mm Max. 216 × 356 mm Min. 216 × 139,5 mm Quantité 1 feuille Max. 80 feuilles A4, A5, ou F4 (papier de 75 g/m2 ou 20lb) Poids 35,0 à 128,0 g/m2 52,0 à 105,0 g/m2 Epaisseur 0,05 à 0,15 mm 0,07 à 0,12 mm Type de document Papier ordinaire Papier ordinaire Sous-menu Format (l × L) Max. 216 × 356 mm Quantité 1 feuille Poids – Epaisseur Max. 28 mm Type de document Documents qui ne peuvent pas être introduits par l'ADF. 4 Premières opérations 4-8 D 131F/191F Objets à ne pas mettre dans votre machine Pour éviter tout serrage dans l'ADF ou détérioration de l'ADF, n'insérez pas les objets suivants : - Feuilles gondolées, pliées, froissées ou très fines - Documents comportant agrafes, colle, bande adhésive, trombones ou liquide de correction humide - "Notes adhésives" (ou documents sur lesquels sont collées des "notes adhésives") - Carton, papier journal ou tissu - Feuilles comportant du carbone-copie sur l'une ou l'autre face - Cartes de crédit ou objets petits et fins - Transparents de rétroprojection Zone de numérisation La zone de numérisation est représentée ci-dessous. Fax : 208 mm (8,2 in.) Copie : 210 mm (8,3 in.) Fax : 2,5 mm (0,1 in.) Copie : 0 mm (0 in.) Fax : 2,0 mm (0,08 in.) Copie : 0 mm (0 in.) Zone de numérisation A4 Letter Legal F4 Premières opérations 4 D 131F/191F 4-9 Chargement des documents dans l'ADF 1 Introduisez les documents, face orientée vers le haut, bord supérieur en premier. 2 Puis, faites coulisser les guides pour qu'ils correspondent au format du document. Chargement du document sur la vitre d'exposition 1 Assurez-vous qu'il n'y a pas de document dans l'ADF. 2 Relevez le couvre-original. 3 Placez le document, face imprimée vers le bas, sur la vitre d'exposition. Veillez à aligner le document dans le coin supérieur gauche. 4 Refermez doucement le couvre-original. 7IMPORTANT % Lors de la copie d'un document relié, un livre par exemple, l'image copiée peut présenter quelques zones sombres. Pour réduire cet effet, maintenez le document à plat pour empêcher sa partie reliée de se relever. Cependant, il convient de ne pas appuyer trop fort. Cela pourrait briser la vitre d'exposition et causer des blessures. 4 Premières opérations 4-10 D 131F/191F 4.2.2 Traitement du papier Formats papier acceptable Magasin papier Plateau d'introduction manuelle Impression Recto-verso - Le papier de format personnalisé ne peut être utilisé que pour l'impression à partir d'un PC. - Le papier de format A5 ne peut pas être utilisé pour l'impression commandée par PC, mais A5 š est disponible. - N'utilisez pas d'enveloppes à double rabat ou des fermetures à pression car leur introduction est problématique. - Pour les transparents, assurez-vous que leur verso ne comporte pas de papier de protection ou de bande amorce. Si c'est le cas, enlevez le papier de protection ou la bande amorce. Seul le transparent nu doit être introduit. Type de papier Format du papier Quantité Papier ordinaire (poids : 60-90 g/m2) A4, A5 š, F4 500 feuilles (poids : 80 g/m2) Type de papier Format du papier Quantité Papier ordinaire (poids : 60-120 g/m2) A4, A5, A5 š, A6, F4, Letter, Legal, Half-letter š, Executive 50 feuilles (poids : 80 g/m2) Format personnalisé • Largeur : 97 à 216 mm • Longueur : 140 à 356 mm 1 feuille Enveloppes DL (110 × 220) Com#10 (4,125 in. × 9,5 in.) Monarch (3,875 in. × 7,5 in.) 1 enveloppe Carte postale 100 × 148 mm 20 feuilles Transparent A4 20 feuilles Type de papier Format du papier Papier ordinaire (grammage : 60-90 g/m2) A4, F4, Letter, Legal Premières opérations 4 D 131F/191F 4-11 Papier à ne pas utiliser Pour éviter tout serrage ou détérioration de votre machine, n'utilisez pas le papier suivant : - Papier avec marque de pliage - Papier froissé - Papier plié - Papier gondolé - Papier déchiré - Papier carbone - Papier humide - Papier très fin - Papier très épais - Papier déjà imprimé sur imprimante - Papier perforé - Enveloppes avec fermeture à pression - Papier très glacé ou très texturé 4 Premières opérations 4-12 D 131F/191F Zone imprimable La zone imprimable est représentée ci-dessous. Chargement du papier dans le magasin papier 2 Note Après avoir chargé le papier dans le magasin, vous devez spécifier le format du papier que vous avez chargé. (Voir "Programmation du format papier" à la page 4-17.) 1 Tirez pour ouvrir le magasin. 2 Appuyez sur la plaque élévatrice jusqu'à ce qu'elle se verrouille en place. 3 mm (0,12") 3 mm (0,12") 3 mm (0,12") 3 mm (0,12") Zone imprimable Premières opérations 4 D 131F/191F 4-13 3 Ajustez le guide papier arrière pour l'adapter à la longueur du papier. 4 Chargez le papier dans le magasin. - Avant le chargement, égalisez les bords de la ramette de papier. - Ne chargez pas au-delà du repère situé à l'intérieur du magasin. 2 Note Pour éviter les serrages papier, ne rechargez jamais du papier sans avoir préalablement enlevé du magasin tout le papier qui pourrait s'y trouver. En d'autres termes, n'ajoutez pas de feuilles de papier à celles qui se trouvent déjà dans le magasin. 5 Pincez le guide papier latéral puis ajustez-le à la largeur du papier. 4 Premières opérations 4-14 D 131F/191F 6 Fermez le magasin papier. 7 Après avoir chargé le papier dans le magasin, vous devez spécifier le format du papier. (Voir "Programmation du format papier" à la page 4-17.) 8 Apposez sur le devant du magasin l'étiquette indiquant le format papier (fournie avec la machine). Premières opérations 4 D 131F/191F 4-15 Chargement de papier dans l'introducteur manuel Si vous devez utiliser un format de papier qui n'est pas chargé dans le magasin, ou si vous désirez imprimer une enveloppe, un transparent, ou un papier de format personnalisé, vous pouvez charger le papier dans l'introducteur manuel. 2 Note Utilisez toujours les supports d'impression préconisés dans la section "Formats papier acceptable" à la page 4-10 pour éviter les serrages papier et des problèmes de qualité d'impression. 1 Ouvrez l'introducteur manuel situé sur le côté droit de la machine. Déployez le plateau d'extension. 2 Pour installer le papier, levez le levier de déverrouillage du rabat (1) et chargez le papier (2) jusqu'à ce qu'il soit en butée. 4 Premières opérations 4-16 D 131F/191F 3 Ajustez les guides papier (1) au format du papier, puis abaissez le levier de déverrouillage du rabat (2). 4 Une fois le papier chargé dans l'introducteur manuel, vous devez spécifier le format correct en appuyant sur [Intro-Manuelle]. 5 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner le format papier que vous voulez utiliser. 6 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 2 Note Il est possible de programmer le format par défaut pour l'introducteur manuel. Voir l'étape 6 de la section "Programmation du format papier" à la page 4-17. Premières opérations 4 D 131F/191F 4-17 Programmation du format papier Sélection par défaut : Magasin 1 : A4, Magasin 2 (en option) : A4, Introducteur manuel : A4 Après avoir chargé le papier dans le magasin, vous devez spécifier le format du papier en suivant la procédure ci-dessous. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [2], [1], [0], [1], [Valider]. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner le format du papier que vous utilisez dans le magasin 1. 3 Appuyez sur [Valider]. Si vous disposez du deuxième magasin en option, poursuivez à l'étape 4 ; sinon, passez à l'étape 6. 4 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner le format du papier que vous utilisez dans le magasin 2. 5 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 6 Vous pouvez aussi programmer le format par défaut pour l'introducteur manuel. Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner le format papier que vous voulez utiliser dans l'introducteur manuel. Après avoir chargé du papier de format différent dans l'introducteur manuel, vous devez spécifier le format correct du papier à utiliser en appuyant sur [Intro-Manuelle]. 7 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 8 Appuyez sur [Réinit.] pour quitter et revenir au mode attente. 4 Premières opérations 4-18 D 131F/191F 5 Copie Copie 5 D 131F/191F 5-3 5 Copie 5.1 Avant de réaliser de copies 5.1.1 Traitement du papier et des documents Avant de commencer à réaliser des copies, veuillez lire les informations relatives au traitement des documents et du papier, figurant en page 4-7. 5.1.2 Commutation de la machine en mode Copie % Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" jusqu'à ce que le voyant Copie s'allume. 5.1.3 Affichage du mode attente copie % Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Copie. Quand la machine est en mode Copie, celle-ci indique : - Pour modifier les paramètres, voir "Paramètres copie élémentaires" à la page 5-6. Nombre de copies Taux zoom Format du document Enregistrement du format papier 5 Copie 5-4 D 131F/191F 5.1.4 Message de dépassement mémoire Si vous avez enregistré trop d'informations dans la mémoire de votre machine, le message "Dépassement mémoire" s'affichera à l'écran. La cause peut être : - trop de pages ont été stockées en mémoire, ou - les pages qui sont enregistrées contiennent une quantité excessive d'informations dépassant la capacité de la mémoire. Si ce message apparaît, appuyez sur [Début] pour indiquer à la machine de copier en mémoire un maximum de pages, ou appuyez sur [Annuler] pour supprimer de la mémoire toutes les pages conservées en mémoire pendant l'opération en cours (mais pas celles des opérations précédentes). 2 Note Si vous laissez la machine inactive pendant 3minutes, celle-ci imprimera automatiquement le document enregistré en mémoire pendant l'opération en cours. Copie 5 D 131F/191F 5-5 5.2 Opérations de copie 5.2.1 Réaliser des copies avec l'ADF 1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/ Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Copie. 2 Placez votre document dans l'ADF, face imprimée vers le haut, et ajustez les guides document au format de votre document. 3 Si nécessaire, spécifiez les paramètres de copie, notamment le type de document et le contraste de numérisation, le nombre de copies, le taux zoom et le paramètre Tri. (Voir "Paramètres copie élémentaires" à la page 5-6.) 4 Pour effacer le paramétrage, appuyez sur [Réinit.]. 5 Appuyez sur [Début] pour lancer la copie. Pour arrêter la copie, appuyez sur [Stop]. 5.2.2 Réaliser des copies sur la vitre d'exposition 1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/ Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Copie. 2 Vérifiez qu'aucun document ne se trouve dans l'ADF. Si l'ADF contient un document, celui-ci est prioritaire sur celui qui se trouve sur la vitre d'exposition. 3 Placez le document, face imprimée contre la vitre d'exposition et alignez- le sur le coin supérieur gauche. Puis refermez le couvre-original. 4 Appuyez sur [Format Doc.] pour sélectionner le format du document, A4, A5 š ou F4. 5 Si nécessaire, spécifiez les paramètres de copie, notamment le type de document et le contraste de numérisation, le nombre de copies, le taux zoom et le paramètre Tri. (Voir "Paramètres copie élémentaires" à la page 5-6.) Pour effacer le paramétrage, appuyez sur [Réinit.]. 6 Appuyez sur [Début] pour lancer la copie. Pour arrêter la copie, appuyez sur [Stop]. 5 Copie 5-6 D 131F/191F 5.3 Paramètres copie élémentaires 5.3.1 Sélection du type de document - Texte Sélectionnez ce réglage pour copier des lettres. - Photo/Texte Sélectionnez ce réglage pour copier des documents contenant des photos ou des dessins comportant des lettres. - Photo Sélectionnez ce réglage pour copier des photos ou des dessins. Pour sélectionner le type de document : 1 Appuyez sur [Définition Doc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [)] ou [*] pour sélectionner le type de document. 5.3.2 Contraste de numérisation Le réglage du contraste de numérisation vous permet de compenser toute luminosité ou obscurité excessive des pages du document que vous voulez copier. Pour ajuster le contraste : 1 Appuyez sur [Contraste]. 2 Appuyez sur [*] pour éclaircir, appuyez sur [)] pour assombrir, ou appuyez sur [Contraste] plusieurs fois pour sélectionner le contraste. Pour ne pas confondre les réglages Clair et Foncé, il suffit de se rappeler – "Clair éclaircit" et "Sombre assombrit" – pour faire simple. Copie 5 D 131F/191F 5-7 5.3.3 Taux zoom Vous pouvez entrer le taux zoom avec l'une des 3 méthodes ci-dessous. 2 Note Pour une copie agrandie, utilisez la vitre d'exposition. Utilisation de taux prédéfinis 1 Appuyez sur [+] ou [,] pour sélectionner l'un des taux zoom prédéfinis suivants. - 50% : Min. - 70% : A4 % A5 - 81% : B5 JIS % A5 - 86% : A4 % B5 JIS - 100% - 115% : B5 JIS % A4 - 122% : A5 % B5 JIS - 141% : A5 % A4 - 200% : Max. Réglage du taux par pas de 1% 1 Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois jusqu'à ce que "Zoom" s'affiche, puis appuyez sur [Valider]. ou Appuyez sur la touche programmable (page 12-3) assignée à la fonction "Zoom". 2 Réglez le taux avec [+] ou [,]. (de 25 à 400% avec la vitre d'exposition, de 25 à 100% avec l'ADF.) Saisie directe du taux zoom 1 Appuyez sur [#]. 2 Entrez le taux zoom avec les touches numériques. (de 25 à 400% avec la vitre d'exposition, de 25 à 100% avec l'ADF.) 3 Appuyez sur [#] une nouvelle fois. 5.3.4 Nombre de copies Vous pouvez réaliser 99 copies maximum. % Avec les touches numériques tapez le nombre de copies désiré (01–99). 5 Copie 5-8 D 131F/191F 5.3.5 Tri de copies 2 Note Le tri de copies n'est possible qu'avec l'ADF. Les copies peuvent être regroupées en jeux consécutifs. % Pour activer le tri de copies, appuyez sur [Tri]. Le voyant de la touche tri s'allume pour confirmer que le tri de copies est activé. % Pour désactiver le tri de copies, appuyez sur [Tri] une nouvelle fois ; le voyant s'éteint. 5.3.6 Sélection du format de papier Par défaut, la machine sélectionne automatiquement le format du papier. La machine indique le format "Auto" lorsque vous chargez du papier à la fois dans le magasin et l'introducteur manuel ou dans le second magasin, en option. D'autre part, le voyant de la source papier disponible s'allume. Toutefois, s'il n'y a pas de papier dans l'introducteur manuel ou que le second magasin en option n'est pas installé la machine affiche le "(Format papier)" à la place de "Auto". Vous pouvez également sélectionner manuellement la source papier en appuyant sur [FormatPapier/DocSuiv]. L'écran affiche le format de papier contenu dans le premier magasin, dans le second magasin (si installé) et dans l'introducteur manuel. Si l'introducteur manuel ne contient pas de papier, la machine indique "Sans" pour l'introducteur manuel. Copie 5 D 131F/191F 5-9 5.3.7 Sélection du format du document Si vous utilisez la vitre d'exposition, sélectionnez le format du document en appuyant sur [Format Doc.] plusieurs fois jusqu'à afficher le format voulu. Vous pouvez choisir entre A4, A5 š ou F4 : 2 Note Lorsque la sélection du format document est réglée sur "Auto" (voir "Paramètres utilisateur [CD]" à la page 14-3), vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner le format du document en appuyant sur [Format Doc.]. Dans ce mode, la machine choisira automatiquement le format du document selon le format papier et le taux zoom qui ont été sélectionnés. [Format Document] indique que la machine sélectionne automatiquement le format du document. En fonction du taux zoom choisi, il se peut que la machine ne puisse pas afficher le véritable format du document et dans ce cas l'écran indique : 5 Copie 5-10 D 131F/191F 5.4 Fonctions avancées de copie Lorsque les fonctions copie suivantes ne sont pas assignées à des touches programmables, il est possible de les sélectionner avec la touche Fonctions Avancées. (Voir "Fonctions spéciales [CD]" à la page 12-3.) Pour sélectionner une fonction copie à l'aide de la touche Fonctions Avancées : 1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Copie.. 2 Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées]. 3 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+], ou [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois pour sélectionner la fonction voulue. Appuyez ensuite sur [Valider]. Le tableau ci-dessous énumère les fonctions avancées disponibles en mode copie et la séquence d'affichage. Reportez-vous aux pages indiquées pour les détails des fonctions. Fonction Avancée Description Page de référence Zoom Ajuste le taux zoom par pas de 1%. page 5-7 Copie Recto-Verso Active ou désactive la copie recto-verso. (Cette fonction n'est disponible que pour D 191F.) page 5-13 Compteur pages Affiche le nombre total de pages imprimées et numérisées. page 12-3 Economie d’énergie Sélection Oui/Non pour le mode économie d'énergie. page 3-23 En ligne Annule l'impression à partir du PC. page 6-12 Switch Mode Permet de changer le mode de la machine. page 4-3 Tri copies Sélection Oui/Non pour la copie avec tri. (Par défaut, cette fonction est pré-assignée à la "Touche progr. 1".) page 5-8 Intro-Manuelle Définit le format papier de l'introducteur manuel. (Par défaut, cette fonction est pré-assignée à la "Touche progr. 2".) page 4-15 Combiné Sélection Oui/Non pour la copie combinée. (Par défaut, cette fonction est pré-assignée à la "Touche progr. 3".) page 5-11 Copie 5 D 131F/191F 5-11 5.4.1 Combiné Cette fonction vous permet de copier deux documents recto sur une seule feuille de papier A4. 1 Vérifiez que la machine se trouve en mode copie. 2 Placez votre document dans l'ADF face imprimée vers le haut ou sur la vitre d'exposition, face imprimée vers le bas. 3 Pour effectuer une copie combinée : Appuyez sur [Combiné]. La touche COMBINER s'allume pour indiquer que la fonction est activée. Orientation du document sur l'ADF ou sur la vitre d'exposition Image obtenue en copie combinée 5 Copie 5-12 D 131F/191F 4 Procédez éventuellement aux réglages suivants. (Voir "Paramètres copie élémentaires" à la page 5-6.) - Type de document et contraste de numérisation - Nombre de copies - Taux Zoom (25 à 400% pour la vitre d'exposition, 25 à 100% pour l'ADF) - Pour restaurer les paramètres copie par défaut, appuyez sur [Réinit.]. 5 Appuyez sur [Début]. Pour arrêter la copie, appuyez sur [Stop]. Copie 5 D 131F/191F 5-13 5.4.2 Copie recto-verso Cette fonction vous permet de copier 2 documents recto sur les 2 faces d'une feuille. 2 Note Avec l'ADF, l'agrandissement de la copie n'est pas disponible. Cette machine ne dispose pas de la fonction rotation d'image. L'unité Copie recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F. Orientation du document sur l'ADF ou sur la vitre d'exposition Position de reliure Image obtenue en copie recto-verso G&D Haut G&D Haut G&D Haut 5 Copie 5-14 D 131F/191F Copie recto-verso d'un document recto 1 Vérifiez que la machine se trouve en mode copie. 2 Placez votre document dans l'ADF face imprimée vers le haut ou sur la vitre d'exposition, face imprimée vers le bas. 3 Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] jusqu'à afficher "Copie Rectoverso" et appuyez sur [Valider]. Choisissez l'un des éléments suivants et appuyez sur [Valider]. ou Appuyez sur la touche de fonction programmable "Copie Rectoverso " et choisissez l'un des éléments suivants. - Non : Annule la copie recto-verso. - G&D : Pour relier la copie recto-verso à gauche ou à droite. - Haut : Pour relier la copie recto-verso en haut. 4 Appuyez sur [Début]. Pour arrêter l'opération de copie, appuyez sur [Stop]. 2 Note L'unité Recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F. G&D Haut Orientation du document sur l'ADF ou sur la vitre d'exposition Position de reliure Image obtenue en copie recto-verso Copie 5 D 131F/191F 5-15 5.4.3 Définition de copie Cette fonction offre la meilleure qualité copie disponible. Elle demande cependant plus de mémoire que la définition copie ordinaire. Donc si vous tentez de copier de nombreuses pages à la fois avec ce réglage, une saturation de la mémoire peut se produire. 1 Vérifiez que la machine se trouve en mode copie. 2 Placez votre document dans l'ADF face imprimée vers le haut, ou sur la vitre d'exposition, face imprimée vers le bas. 3 Appuyez sur [Définition Doc.]. 4 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] ou [Définition Doc.] pour sélectionner "600dpi". 5 Procédez éventuellement aux réglages suivants. (Voir "Paramètres copie élémentaires" à la page 5-6.) - Type de document et contraste de numérisation - Nombre de copies Pour restaurer les paramètres copie par défaut, appuyez sur [Réinit.]. 6 Appuyez sur [Début] pour lancer la copie. Pour arrêter la copie, appuyez sur [Stop]. 5 Copie 5-16 D 131F/191F 6 Impression PC Impression PC 6 D 131F/191F 6-3 6 Impression PC 6.1 Impression d'un document 1 Vérifiez que vous avez préalablement installé le pilote d'imprimante sur votre ordinateur. Pour plus de détails, voir "Installation du pilote d'imprimante et du scanner" à la page 3-24. 2 A partir de votre application logicielle, sélectionnez la commande d'impression. Assurez-vous de sélectionner le pilote d'imprimante "Develop 131F/ 191F GDI". 3 Si vous désirez procéder à des réglages relatifs à l'impression du document, cliquez sur [Propriétés] ou [Configurer]. Pour plus de détails, voir "Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante," ci-dessous. 4 Après avoir éventuellement modifié les paramètres d'impression, cliquez sur [OK] pour lancer la tâche d'impression. 5 Votre ordinateur envoie à votre machine une commande d'impression ainsi que les données à imprimer. 6 Impression PC 6-4 D 131F/191F 6.2 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 6.2.1 Ouvrez les propriétés de l'imprimante Pour ouvrir les propriétés de l'imprimante, il y a deux méthodes : - A partir de votre application logicielle - Depuis le dossier de l'imprimante 2 Note Lorsque vous changez les propriétés de l'imprimante depuis une application logicielle, les nouveaux paramètres ne seront pris en compte que pour la tâche d'impression en cours. Pour changer les réglages par défaut de l'imprimante, procédez depuis le dossier "Imprimantes". Ce changement peut affecter tout utilisateur qui partage la même imprimante. A partir de l'application logicielle L'ouverture des propriétés de l'imprimante à partir de l'application logicielle dépend du type d'application que vous utilisez. Voir le manuel de votre logiciel pour plus de détails. L'exemple suivant utilise Microsoft Word 2000. 1 Sélectionnez "Imprimer" dans le menu Fichier. 2 La boîte de dialogue Imprimer s'affiche. Dans le champ Nom, sélectionnez votre imprimante GDI Develop, puis cliquez sur [Propriétés]. 3 La fenêtre des propriétés de l'imprimante s'ouvre. Pour plus de détails, voir "Description des propriétés de l'imprimante" à la page 6-6. Impression PC 6 D 131F/191F 6-5 Depuis le dossier de l'imprimante 2 Note Sous Windows NT4.0/2000/XP/Serveur 2003/Vista, vous devez vous connecter en tant qu'Administrateur. 1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer], [Paramètres], puis cliquez sur [Imprimantes]. - Windows Vista, cliquez sur [Démarrer] % [Panneau de configuration] % [Matériel et audio] % [Imprimantes]. - Sous Windows XP Professionnel, cliquez sur [Démarrer] puis sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs]. - Sous Windows XP Home edition, cliquez sur [Démarrer], [Panneau de configuration], [Imprimantes et autres périphériques], puis cliquez sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs]. 2 Faites un clic droit sur l'icône Develop GDI, et cliquez sur [Propriétés] (Windows 98/98SE/Me), [Document, options par défaut...] (Windows NT4.0), ou [Préférences d'impression] (Windows 2000/XP/Server2003/ Vista). 3 La fenêtre des propriétés de l'imprimante s'ouvre. Pour plus de détails, voir "Description des propriétés de l'imprimante" à la page 6-6. 6 Impression PC 6-6 D 131F/191F 6.2.2 Description des propriétés de l'imprimante 2 Note La fenêtre représentée dans cette section se rapporte à Windows XP. La fenêtre affichée sur votre ordinateur peut être différente en fonction de votre système d'exploitation Windows. Onglet Papier Remplir page Choisissez cette option pour mettre votre tâche d'impression à l'échelle du format de papier sélectionné indépendamment du format logique du document. Si vous voulez que votre document soit ajusté au format de papier sélectionné, cochez la case "Adapter". 2 Note Quand l'option "Combiner" de l'onglet "Mise en page" est activée, il n'est pas possible de spécifier l'option "Remplir page". Echelle(%) Vous pouvez agrandir ou réduire le document par pas de 1%, de 25% à 400%. 2 Note Lorsque l'option "Adapter" ou "Combiner" est activée, l'option "Echelle(%)" ne peut pas être spécifiée. Impression PC 6 D 131F/191F 6-7 Copies Tapez le nombre de copies (1 à 99) à imprimer. Tri Si vous sélectionnez "Oui" pour activer la fonction tri, une tâche de plusieurs pages sera imprimée en jeux assemblés. Si vous sélectionnez "Non", elle sera imprimée page par page. Format papier Sélectionne le format papier dans la liste déroulante qui indique les formats pris en charge par le paramétrage en vigueur du pilote d'imprimante. Les formats papier indiqués sur la liste déroulante découlent des contraintes provenant des paramètres "Source papier" et "Combiner". Si vous ne trouvez pas le format voulu dans cette liste, modifiez les paramètres de la source papier. 2 Note Pour plus de détails sur les formats papier pris en charge par votre machine, voir "Formats papier acceptable" à la page 4-10. Orientation L'option Portrait permet d'obtenir une impression verticale sur le papier. L'option Paysage permet d'obtenir une impression horizontale sur le papier. Personnaliser % Cliquez sur ce bouton si vous voulez ajouter, modifier ou supprimer votre format de papier personnalisé. Il est possible d'ajouter jusqu'à 50 formats papier personnalisés. 2 Note Ce bouton n'est disponible que si "Intro. Manuelle" a été sélectionné comme source papier et que l'option "Combiner" n'est pas activée. 6 Impression PC 6-8 D 131F/191F Pour ajouter un format papier personnalisé : 1 Cliquez sur [Personnaliser]. 2 Cliquez sur [Ajouter]. 3 Tapez le nom utilisé pour identifier votre papier personnalisé. Ce nom peut comporter 20 caractères maximum. 4 Spécifiez la largeur et la longueur de votre format papier personnalisé. 5 Cliquez sur [OK]. Pour supprimer un format papier personnalisé : 1 Sélectionnez le nom de papier que vous voulez supprimer. 2 Cliquez sur [Supprimer]. Résolution Permet de sélectionner la définition d'impression. Source papier Ce paramètre spécifie le magasin ou l'introducteur manuel dans lequel le papier enregistré est chargé. Type papier Cette option vous permet de choisir le type papier. Economie Toner Sélectionnez cette option pour économiser le toner, sachant que cela diminue la qualité de l'impression. Paramètre Densité % Cliquez pour ouvrir la fenêtre de réglage de la densité et ajuster le niveau de la densité d'impression. Impression PC 6 D 131F/191F 6-9 Onglet Mise en page Recto-verso 2 Note La fonction de copie recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F. Imprimer les 2 faces Vous pouvez imprimer sur les deux faces de la feuille. La position de reliure doit être spécifiée pour l'impression recto-verso afin d'harmoniser l'orientation des deux faces (livre), sélectionnez "Reliure gauche" ou "Reliure droite". Pour inverser l'orientation (dépliant), sélectionnez "Reliure Haut". Régalage de Duplex Sélectionnez ce bouton pour ajuster la marge. Combiner Sélectionnez le nombre de pages par feuille que vous voulez imprimer (2, 4 ou 8). 2 Note Avant de régler cette fonction, assurez-vous que l'échelle est réglée sur 100%. Une fois que le paramètre "Combiner" est réglé, la mise à l'échelle sera automatiquement déterminée et ne peut pas être modifiée manuellement. Si l'impression d'un document de plusieurs pages avec cette option donne un résultat qui ne répond pas à votre attente, désactivez l'option "Tri" et réessayez. 6 Impression PC 6-10 D 131F/191F Ligne séparatrice Vous pouvez imprimer une ligne de séparation autour de chaque page imprimée sur la feuille. Détail de Combiner Cliquez sur ce bouton pour ouvrir la boîte Détail de Combiner vous permettant de spécifier l'ordre des pages combinées sur le papier. Livret La fonction "Livret" n'est disponible que pour D 191F équipé de l'unité rectoverso. Vous pouvez imprimer plusieurs pages pour former un livre en pliant ensemble les feuilles de papier en deux par leur milieu. Pour sélectionner cette fonction, cochez la case "Imprimer les 2 faces" et sélectionnez "N-2" pour "Combiner". Impression de livret Permet de définir la position de reliure d'un livret. La position de reliure que vous spécifier dépend de l'orientation d'impression définie dans "Orientation" sous l'onglet "Papier". Si vous sélectionnez "Portrait", vous pouvez spécifier la position de reliure "Gauche" ou "Droite" et si vous avez sélectionné "Paysage", vous pouvez spécifier la position de reliure "Supérieur" ou "Inférieur". Impression PC 6 D 131F/191F 6-11 Onglet Option périph. Utiliser le ou les périphérique(s) Pour activer le 2ème magasin papier et/ou l'unité Recto-verso, cochez la case correspondante dans la fenêtre "Option Périphérique". 2 Note L'unité Recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F. 6 Impression PC 6-12 D 131F/191F 6.3 Annulation d'une tâche d'impression 6.3.1 Pour annuler une tâche d'impression à partir de la machine Pendant l'impression PC, l'écran se présente comme ci-contre. Si vous voulez annuler la tâche d'impression en cours, suivez la procédure ci-dessous : 1 Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] et appuyez sur [+] jusqu'à afficher "En ligne" sur l'écran, puis appuyez sur [Valider]. Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner "Non". ou Appuyez sur la touche programmable assignée à la fonction "En ligne". (Veuillez vous reporter à page 12-3.) 2 La machine affichera l'écran suivant : 3 Pour annuler l'impression PC en cours, appuyez sur [Valider]. Si vous ne souhaitez pas annuler l'impression PC en cours, appuyez sur [Annuler]. 7 Numérisation Numérisation 7 D 131F/191F 7-3 7 Numérisation 7.1 Préparation à l'utilisation du pilote TWAIN 7.1.1 Commutation de la machine en mode Scanner % Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" jusqu'à ce que le voyant Scan s'allume. 7.1.2 Affichage du mode attente Scanner % Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Scanner. Quand la machine est en mode Scanner, celle-ci indique : - Pour changer le réglage initial, voir "Numérisation" à la page 7-3. Résolution Largeur de numérisation Taux zoom 7 Numérisation 7-4 D 131F/191F 7.1.3 Numériser une image Il y a deux manières de numériser une image : Mode de numérisation en temps réel (mode RS) Si vous choisissez le mode Numérisation en temps réel, votre machine numérise un document et le transfère immédiatement sur votre ordinateur. Le mode RS est le mode utilisé par la plupart des scanners de documents. Mode Boîte Analyse (mode SB) Si vous choisissez le mode Boîte Analyse, les données numérisées seront enregistrées dans la boîte d'analyse de votre machine. Vous pouvez la télécharger à partir de votre application logicielle pour peu qu'elle soit compatible TWAIN. 7.1.4 Accéder au pilote TWAIN Suivez les étapes ci-dessous pour accéder au pilote TWAIN depuis votre application logicielle. 1 Allumez votre machine. 2 Lancez l'application logicielle qui prend en charge la numérisation TWAIN. 3 Sélectionnez le Scanner Develop 131F/191F comme périphérique de numérisation. 2 Note La procédure de sélection d'un périphérique scanner peut varier selon le logiciel employé. En cas de doute, consultez le manuel du logiciel. 7.2 Utilisation du mode RS [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "7 Numérisation" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 7.3 Utilisation du mode SB [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "7 Numérisation" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 8 Numéroteur automatique Numéroteur automatique 8 D 131F/191F 8-3 8 Numéroteur automatique 8.1 Fonctions de base du numéroteur automatique Le numéroteur automatique de votre machine conserve en mémoire les numéros de fax et de téléphone le plus fréquemment appelés et vous permet de les composer immédiatement. 8.1.1 Numéroteurs automatiques Il y a deux sortes de numérotations automatiques. Leur différence réside dans la manière de composer les numéros : 8.1.2 Groupes d'appel Les groupes d'appel sont des groupes de numéros de fax et permettent de faciliter l'envoi d'un même message vers un grand nombre de destinations. Votre machine peut enregistrer 200 numéros dans 32 groupes d'appel max. Voir également "Numérotation pour groupe d'appel [CD]" à la page 8-16. 8.1.3 Noms de destination et numérotation par répertoire téléphonique Au moment d'enregistrer les numéros dans le numéroteur automatique, vous pouvez leur donner des noms évocateurs ou descriptifs, par exemple "Chicago office" ou "Bureau de facturation". Le répertoire téléphonique trie ces noms par ordre alphabétique. Grâce à la numérotation par répertoire téléphonique, vous pouvez rechercher ces numéros par leurs noms comme vous le feriez avec un simple répertoire téléphonique. Voir également "Numérotation par répertoire [CD]" à la page 8-16. Type Procédure de numérotation Quantité mémorisée Touche 1-Touche Appuyez sur des touches marquées de 1 à 40 situées sur le côté gauche du panneau de contrôle 40 Numéro abrégé Appuyez sur Num. Abrégée/Groupes, suivi d'un identifiant à trois chiffres, de 001 à 160 160 8 Numéroteur automatique 8-4 D 131F/191F 8.1.4 Caractères spéciaux de numérotation Lors de l'enregistrement dans le numéroteur, la machine vous permet d'introduire des caractères spéciaux. Le tableau ci-dessous décrit brièvement chacun de ces caractères. Il indique aussi les touches à manipuler pour enregistrer ces caractères dans le numéroteur automatique. 2 Note Pour assigner "Pause/Numérot.Opt." à une Touche de fonction programmable, voir page 12-3. Caractères Effet Procédure /P Chaque pause dure 2 secondes. Si vous devez attendre une autre tonalité ou signal à n'importe quel stade de la séquence de numérotation, introduisez une pause dans le numéro. (Vous pouvez modifier la durée de la pause. Voir page 14-3.) Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois jusqu'à ce que "Pause/ Numérot. Opt." apparaisse, puis appuyez sur [Valider]. ou Appuyez 1 fois sur une touche de fonction programmable à laquelle "Pause/Numérot.Opt." a été assigné – Facilite la lecture des numéros longs. Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois jusqu'à ce que "Pause/ Numérot.Opt." apparaisse, puis appuyez sur [Valider]. Répétez cette procédure jusqu'à ce que le caractère "-" s'affiche à l'écran à cristaux liquides. ou Appuyez 2 fois sur la Touche de fonction programmable à laquelle "Pause/ Numérot.Opt." a été assigné. /N Introduit un "Préfixe" pour accéder à un autre réseau téléphonique. "/N" doit être tapé avant le premier chiffre du numéro à appeler. Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois jusqu'à ce que "Préfixe (/N)" apparaisse, puis appuyez sur [Valider]. Répétez cette procédure jusqu'à ce que le caractère "/N" s'affiche à l'écran à cristaux liquides. ou Appuyez 4 fois sur la Touche de fonction programmable à laquelle "Pause/ Numérot.Opt." a été assigné. Numéroteur automatique 8 D 131F/191F 8-5 8.2 Touches 1-Touche 8.2.1 Saisie ou modification d'un numéro 1-Touche A l'aide des touches étiquetées 1 à 40, vous pouvez enregistrer dans la machine 40 numéros 1-Touche. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [1], [1], [1], [Valider]. Un numéro 1-Touche vide s'affiche. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner un numéro 1-Touche. La sélection peut aussi se faire en appuyant directement sur la touche correspondante. 3 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 4 A l'aide des touches numériques introduisez le numéro exact tel que votre machine devrait le composer. Chaque numéro peut comporter jusqu'à 40 caractères. Pour changer un numéro, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur, et appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer le numéro. Retapez ensuite le numéro correct. 5 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 6 A l'aide des touches numériques tapez le nom de la touche 1-Touche. Chaque nom peut comporter jusqu'à 24 caractères. Pour la méthode d'introduction des caractères, voir "Saisie de caractères" à la page 4-4. Pour changer un nom, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur, et appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer le nom. Retapez ensuite le nom correct. 7 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer la programmation. Le numéro 1-Touche vide suivant s'affiche. 8 Numéroteur automatique 8-6 D 131F/191F 8 Pour introduire un autre numéro 1-Touche, répétez cette procédure à partir de l'étape 2. Pour quitter et revenir au mode attente, appuyez sur [Réinit.]. 9 Pour une identification rapide, apposez sur les touches les étiquettes de numéros 1-Touche livrées avec la machine. 2 Note Pour imprimer la liste des numéros 1-Touche, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], [7], [Valider]. Numéroteur automatique 8 D 131F/191F 8-7 8.2.2 Accès rapide à l'enregistrement 1-Touche 1 Vérifiez que la machine se trouve en mode attente fax. 2 Appuyez sur la touches 1-Touche vide que vous désirez enregistrer. L'écran affiche : Pour annuler cette opération, appuyez sur [Annuler]. 3 Pour enregistrer le numéro 1-Touche, appuyez sur [Valider]. 4 A l'aide des touches numériques, introduisez le numéro exact tel que votre machine devrait le composer. Chaque numéro peut comporter jusqu'à 40 caractères. Pour changer un numéro, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur, et appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer le numéro. Retapez ensuite le numéro correct. 5 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 6 A l'aide des touches numériques tapez le nom de la touche 1-Touche. Chaque nom peut comporter jusqu'à 24 caractères. Pour la méthode d'introduction des caractères, voir "Saisie de caractères" à la page 4-4. Pour changer un nom, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur, et appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer le nom. Retapez ensuite le nom correct. 7 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer la programmation. La machine revient en mode attente. 8 Numéroteur automatique 8-8 D 131F/191F 8 Pour une identification rapide, apposez sur les touches les étiquettes de numéros 1-Touche livrées avec la machine. Numéroteur automatique 8 D 131F/191F 8-9 8.2.3 Effacement d'un numéro 1-Touche 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [1], [1], [2], [Valider]. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner un numéro 1-Touche. La sélection peut aussi se faire en appuyant directement sur la touche correspondante. 3 Appuyez 2 fois sur [Valider]. Si vous voulez quitter sans effacer, appuyez sur [Annuler]. 4 Pour effacer un autre numéro 1-Touche, répétez la procédure à partir de l'étape 2. Sinon, appuyez sur [Réinit.] pour quitter et revenir au mode attente. 8 Numéroteur automatique 8-10 D 131F/191F 8.2.4 Composition avec des touches 1-Touche Numérotation fax par 1-Touche 1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Fax. 2 Placez le document dans l'ADF ou sur la vitre d'exposition. 3 Si vous utilisez la vitre d'exposition, sélectionnez le format du document en appuyant sur [Format Doc.]. 4 Si besoin, réglez la définition et le contraste. 5 Ouvrez le panneau 1-Touche et appuyez sur la touche correspondant au numéro enregistré. Touches 1-Touche Numéroteur automatique 8 D 131F/191F 8-11 Numérotation téléphonique par 1-Touche 2 Note Pour passer un appel vocal à partir de la machine, vous devez y raccorder un combiné téléphonique. (Voir "Raccordement d'un téléphone externe" à la page 3-10.) 1 Décrochez. 2 Appuyez sur la touche 1-Touche correspondant au numéro programmé voulu. 3 C'est à vous, parlez à votre interlocuteur. 8 Numéroteur automatique 8-12 D 131F/191F 8.3 Numéros abrégés 8.3.1 Introduction ou changement d'un numéro abrégé Vous pouvez enregistrer dans la machine 160 numéros abrégés, désignés par un identifiant à trois chiffres, de 001 à 160. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [1], [2], [1], [Valider]. Un numéro abrégé vide s'affiche. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner un numéro abrégé. Vous pouvez aussi sélectionner à l'aide des touches numériques un numéro abrégé en tapant directement l'identifiant à 3 chiffres correspondant (001-160). 3 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 4 A l'aide des touches numériques introduisez le numéro exact tel que votre machine devrait le composer. Chaque numéro peut comporter jusqu'à 40 caractères. Pour changer un numéro, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur, et appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer le numéro. Retapez ensuite le numéro correct. 5 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 6 A l'aide des touches numériques tapez le nom du numéro abrégé. Chaque nom peut comporter jusqu'à 24 caractères. Pour la méthode d'introduction des caractères, voir "Saisie de caractères" à la page 4-4. Pour changer un nom, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur, et appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer le nom. Retapez ensuite le nom correct. 7 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer la programmation. Le numéro abrégé vide suivant s'affiche. Numéroteur automatique 8 D 131F/191F 8-13 8 Pour introduire un autre numéro abrégé, répétez la procédure à partir de l'étape 2. Appuyez sur [Réinit.] pour quitter et revenir au mode attente. 2 Note Pour imprimer la liste des numéros abrégés, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], [8], [Valider]. 8 Numéroteur automatique 8-14 D 131F/191F 8.3.2 Effacement d'un numéro abrégé 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [1], [2], [2], [Valider]. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner un numéro abrégé. Vous pouvez aussi sélectionner un numéro abrégé en tapant directement son identifiant à 3 chiffres. 3 Appuyez 2 fois sur [Valider]. Si vous voulez quitter sans effacer, appuyez sur [Annuler]. 4 Pour entrer un autre numéro abrégé, répétez la procédure à partir de l'étape 2. Sinon, appuyez sur [Réinit.] pour quitter et revenir au mode attente. 8.3.3 Composition par numéro abrégé 1. Appuyez 1 fois sur cette touche 2. Introduire l'identifiant à 3 chiffres 3. Appuyez sur [Début] Numéroteur automatique 8 D 131F/191F 8-15 Numérotation fax par numéro abrégé 1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Fax. 2 Placez le document dans l'ADF ou sur la vitre d'exposition. Si vous utilisez la vitre d'exposition, sélectionnez le format du document en appuyant sur [Format Doc.]. 3 Si besoin, réglez la définition et le contraste. 4 Appuyez 1 fois sur [Num. Abrégée/ Groupes]. 5 A l'aide des touches numériques, tapez l'identifiant à 3 chiffres correspondant au numéro abrégé que vous voulez ; la machine indique le nom (ou le numéro fax) que vous avez enregistré : 6 Appuyez sur [Début]. Téléphoner par numéro abrégé 2 Note Pour passer un appel vocal à partir de la machine, vous devez y raccorder un combiné téléphonique. (Voir "Raccordement d'un téléphone externe" à la page 3-10.) 1 Décrochez. 2 Appuyez 1 fois sur [Num. Abrégée/ Groupes]. 3 A l'aide des touches numériques, tapez l'identifiant à 3 chiffres correspondant au numéro abrégé voulu ; le numéro s'affiche à l'écran pendant que la machine le compose. 4 C'est à vous, parlez à votre interlocuteur. 8 Numéroteur automatique 8-16 D 131F/191F 8.4 Numérotation pour groupe d'appel [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "8 Numéroteur automatique" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 8.5 Numérotation par répertoire [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "8 Numéroteur automatique" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 9 Emission de fax Emission de fax 9 D 131F/191F 9-3 9 Emission de fax 9.1 Préalables à l'émission 9.1.1 Traitement des documents Avant de commencer, veuillez lire les informations concernant les documents que vous pouvez envoyer et sur la manière de les charger, figurant en page 4-7. 9.1.2 Définition de la numérisation - Normal convient à la plupart des types de documents et aux dessins simples. - Fin est idéal pour les cartes routières, les dessins moyennement complexes, les plans de sol et les documents manuscrits. - Super fin ("S-Fin" à l'écran) reproduit les détails de dessins au trait ou de plans extrêmement compliqués. - Echelle de gris ("Gris" à l'écran) reproduit les nuances des photos et des dessins. Pour changer la définition de numérisation : 1 Appuyez sur [Définition Doc.]. 2 Appuyez sur [*], [)] ou [Définition Doc.] plusieurs fois pour sélectionner la définition. 9 Emission de fax 9-4 D 131F/191F 9.1.3 Contraste de numérisation Le réglage du contraste vous permet, le cas échéant, de compenser tout excès de luminosité ou d'obscurité des pages de document que vous envoyez. Pour ajuster le contraste : 1 Appuyez sur [Contraste]. 2 Appuyez sur [*] pour éclaircir, appuyez sur [)] pour assombrir, ou appuyez sur [Contraste] plusieurs fois pour sélectionner le contraste. Pour ne pas confondre les réglages Clair et Foncé, il suffit de se rappeler – "Clair éclaircit" et "Sombre assombrit" – pour faire simple. 9.1.4 Combinaison de définition document et contraste différents sur plusieurs pages Vous pouvez changer la définition document et le contraste pour chacune des pages de vos documents. 1 Sélectionnez la définition document et le contraste pour la première page. 2 Lancez l'émission. 3 Avant de commencer à numériser la page suivante, sélectionnez la définition document et le contraste pour la page suivante. Emission de fax 9 D 131F/191F 9-5 9.1.5 Méthode d'émission La machine permet trois méthode d'émission. Émission mémoire En émission mémoire normale, la machine : 1. fait l'acquisition en mémoire de la totalité de votre document, 2. compose le numéro du fax de destination, puis 3. envoie le document. Emission mémoire rapide L'émission mémoire rapide se caractérise par le fait que la machine n'attend pas d'avoir numérisé tout le document pour composer le numéro. Une fois la première page numérisée, la machine compose le numéro du fax de destination. Après la négociation, votre machine transmet le document enregistré tout en continuant à numériser en mémoire les pages suivantes du document. Par défaut, l'émission mémoire rapide est active. Vous pouvez néanmoins la désactiver par défaut. (Voir "Paramètres utilisateur [CD]" à la page 14-3.) Émission en temps réel La machine n'utilise pas sa mémoire pour envoyer un fax dans les cas suivants : - Quand l'émission mémoire a été désactivée. - Quand vous envoyez un fax par numérotation avec prise de ligne (en appuyant sur [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois jusqu'à ce que "Moniteur" s'affiche, puis sur [Valider]) ou en utilisant un combiné externe. - Quand la mémoire de la machine est saturée. En émission en temps réel, la page suivante n'est pas numérisée avant que la page en cours ne soit entièrement transmise. Notez qu'en émission en temps réel : - Un seul numéro de destination peut être composé - La vitre d'exposition ne peut pas être utilisée dans le mode d'émission en temps réel. 9 Emission de fax 9-6 D 131F/191F 9.1.6 Message de dépassement mémoire En émission mémoire normale, l'enregistrement d'une trop grande quantité d'informations dans la mémoire de la machine conduit à l'affichage à l'écran du message "Dépassement mémoire". La cause peut être : - trop de pages ont été stockées en mémoire, ou - les pages qui sont enregistrées contiennent une quantité excessive d'informations dépassant la capacité de la mémoire. Si ce message apparaît, appuyez sur [Début] pour spécifier à la machine de conserver un maximum de pages en mémoire, ou appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer de la mémoire toutes les pages enregistrées pendant l'opération en cours (mais pas celles des opérations précédentes). Diviser un document volumineux en plusieurs liasses moins importantes vous permettra d'éviter ce problème. Une autre solution consiste à envoyer les documents sans mémoire. (Voir "Émission en temps réel" à la page 9-5 et "Emission en temps réel (Emission sans mémoire)" à la page 9-11.) 2 Note Si vous laissez la machine inactive pendant 3minutes, celle-ci effacera automatiquement le document enregistré en mémoire pendant l'opération en cours. Emission de fax 9 D 131F/191F 9-7 9.2 Emission de fax 9.2.1 Émission mémoire Emission de fax avec l'ADF 1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/ Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Fax. 2 Chargez votre document dans l'ADF. (Voir page 4-9 pour plus de détails.) 3 Si besoin, réglez la définition de numérisation et le contraste. (Voir page 9-3.) 4 Composez le numéro de fax. - Utilisez les touches numériques pour composer le numéro. ou - Appuyez sur une touche 1-Touche. (Voir page 8-5.) ou - Appuyez sur [Num. Abrégée/Groupe] puis l'identifiant à 3 chiffres. (Voir page 8-15.) ou - Utilisez la numérotation par groupe d'appel. (Voir page 8-16.) ou - Utilisez la numérotation par répertoire téléphonique. (Voir page 8-16.) 5 Appuyez sur [Début]. (Si vous avez appuyé sur une touche 1-Touche, il est inutile d'appuyer sur [Début].) Une pression sur la touche [Début], suffit à donner une instruction à la machine. Ce numéro d'instruction s'affiche pendant quelques secondes sur la première ligne de l'écran. Vous aurez besoin de ce numéro d'instruction si ultérieurement vous désirez annuler l'émission ou imprimer un document conservé en mémoire. (Voir "Confirmation ou annulation de commandes [CD]" à la page 9-13.) 9 Emission de fax 9-8 D 131F/191F 6 A la fin de l'opération, la machine émet un signal sonore et l'écran affiche : A chaque émission de document, ce qui va effectivement s'afficher sur la première ligne de l'écran dépend d'informations propres au télécopieur de destination. Cette ligne peut même rester vierge. 2 Note Si vous désirez annuler une émission pendant la numérisation du document, appuyez sur [Stop]. Si vous désirez annuler une émission en cours, utilisez la fonction Confirmation Commande. (Voir "Confirmation ou annulation de commandes [CD]" à la page 9-13.) 2 Note Si l'appel n'aboutit pas, voir "Rappel [CD]" à la page 9-13. Emission de fax 9 D 131F/191F 9-9 Emission d'un fax avec la vitre d'exposition 1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/ Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Fax. 2 Placez votre document sur la vitre d'exposition. (Voir page 4-9 pour plus de détails.) 3 Appuyez sur [Format Doc.] pour sélectionner le format du document, A4, A5 š ou F4. 4 Si besoin, réglez la définition de numérisation et le contraste. (Voir page 9-3.) 5 Composez le numéro de fax. - Utilisez les touches numériques pour composer le numéro. ou - Appuyez sur une touche 1-Touche. (Voir page 8-5.) ou - Appuyez sur [Num. Abrégée/Groupe] puis l'identifiant à 3 chiffres. (Voir page 8-15.) ou - Utilisez la numérotation par groupe d'appel. (Voir page 8-16.) ou - Utilisez la numérotation par répertoire téléphonique. (Voir page 8-16.) 6 Appuyez sur [Début]. (Si vous avez appuyé sur une touche 1-Touche, il est inutile d'appuyer sur [Début].) Une pression sur la touche [Début], suffit à donner une instruction à la machine. Ce numéro d'instruction s'affiche pendant quelques secondes sur la première ligne de l'écran. Vous aurez besoin de ce numéro d'instruction si ultérieurement vous désirez annuler l'émission ou imprimer un document conservé en mémoire. (Voir "Confirmation ou annulation de commandes [CD]" à la page 9-13.) 7 Une fois la numérisation terminée, l'écran de la machine indique : 9 Emission de fax 9-10 D 131F/191F 8 Placez la page suivante, et appuyez sur [Format papier/Doc. suivant]. Ou bien, appuyez sur [Début] pour lancer l'émission. 9 A la fin de l'opération, la machine émet un signal sonore et l'écran affiche : A chaque émission de document, ce qui va effectivement s'afficher sur la première ligne de l'écran dépend d'informations propres au télécopieur de destination. Cette ligne peut même rester vierge. 2 Note Si vous désirez annuler une émission pendant la numérisation du document, appuyez sur [Stop]. Si vous désirez annuler une émission en cours, utilisez la fonction Confirmation Commande. (Voir "Confirmation ou annulation de commandes [CD]" à la page 9-13.) 2 Note Si l'appel n'aboutit pas, voir "Rappel [CD]" à la page 9-13. Emission de fax 9 D 131F/191F 9-11 9.2.2 Emission en temps réel (Emission sans mémoire) Votre machine compose simplement le numéro du fax de destination, et après négociation, votre machine introduit le document et effectue la numérisation et l'émission au fur et à mesure. En émission en temps réel, vous pouvez voir chaque page être numérisée puis envoyée. Pour effectuer une émission en temps réel : 1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Fax. 2 Chargez votre document dans l'ADF. 2 Note La vitre d'exposition ne peut pas être utilisée dans ce mode d'émission. 3 Recherchez l'obtention d'une tonalité, soit : - Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois jusqu'à ce que "Moniteur" s'affiche, puis appuyez sur [Valider]. ou - Décrochez le combiné, sous réserve qu'un téléphone externe soit connecté à votre machine. Dans tous les cas, la machine indique : ou - Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois jusqu'à ce que "Emission mémoire" s'affiche, puis appuyez sur [Valider]. Puis sélectionnez "Non " et appuyez sur [Valider] pour désactiver l'émission mémoire. ou - Si vous avez assigné "Emission Mémoire" à une Touche de fonction programmable (page 12-3), vous pouvez désactiver l'émission mémoire par une simple pression sur cette touche. 9 Emission de fax 9-12 D 131F/191F 4 Composez le numéro de fax. - Utilisez les touches numériques pour composer le numéro. ou - Appuyez sur une touche 1-Touche. (Voir page 8-5.) ou - Appuyez sur [Num. Abrégée/Groupe] puis l'identifiant à 3 chiffres. (Voir page 8-15.) ou - Utilisez la numérotation par répertoire téléphonique. (Voir page 8-16.) 2 Note En émission en temps réel, un seul numéro de destination peut être composé. 5 Lorsque vous percevez les tonalités émises par le télécopieur de destination, appuyez sur [Début]. Si quelqu'un répond, décrochez le combiné pour indiquer à cette personne que vous êtes en train de lui envoyer un fax. Lorsque vous entendez les tonalités du fax, appuyez sur [Début]. Si l'appel échoue, et que vous avez numéroté avec la fonction "Moniteur", appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois jusqu'à ce que "Moniteur" s'affiche, puis appuyez sur [Valider] pour raccrocher. Si vous utilisez le combiné, raccrochez après avoir appuyé sur [Début]. 2 Note Si vous désirez annuler une émission, utilisez la fonction Confirmation Commande. (Voir "Confirmation ou annulation de commandes [CD]" à la page 9-13.) Emission de fax 9 D 131F/191F 9-13 9.3 Rappel [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "9 Emission de fax" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 9.4 Confirmation ou annulation de commandes [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "9 Emission de fax" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 9.5 Fonctions avancées fax [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "9 Emission de fax" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 9 Emission de fax 9-14 D 131F/191F 10 Réception de télécopies Réception de télécopies 10 D 131F/191F 10-3 10 Réception de télécopies 10.1 Réception fax 10.1.1 Sélection du mode de réception 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [9], et appuyez 4 fois sur [Valider]. La machine indique le mode de réception fax dans lequel elle se trouve actuellement. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner le mode de réception fax désiré. Votre machine offre cinq différents modes de réception : - Tél Prêt (voir "Mode de réception manuelle" ci-après) - Mode Fax : prêt (voir "Mode de réception automatique" ci-après) - Fax/Tél Prêt (voir page 10-4) - Tél/Fax Prêt (voir page 10-5) - Répond./Fax Prêt (voir page 10-5) 3 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage. 4 Appuyez sur [Réinit.] pour quitter. 2 Note Si vous assignez la fonction "Réception auto" à une Touche de fonction programmable (page 12-3), il suffit d'appuyer sur cette touche pour passer alternativement de la réception manuelle (Tél Prêt) à la réception automatique (que vous avez paramétrée). 10 Réception de télécopies 10-4 D 131F/191F 10.1.2 Mode de réception manuelle Mode Tél Prêt Vous l'utiliserez si : - Vous voulez utiliser la même ligne tant pour les communications téléphoniques que les communications fax. - Vous recevez principalement des appels vocaux et moins fréquemment des télécopies. Dans ce mode : Votre machine ne décroche jamais automatiquement. Vous devez prendre chaque appel, comme décrit dans la section "Prendre les appels manuellement" à la page 10-6. Il faudra aussi : Connecter un téléphone externe. (Voir page 3-10.) 10.1.3 Mode de réception automatique Mode Fax : prêt Vous l'utiliserez si : Votre machine dispose d'une ligne indépendante sans la partager avec un téléphone ou un répondeur. Dans ce mode: Votre machine décroche à chaque appel et envoi de fax. Mode Fax/Tél Prêt Vous l'utiliserez si : - Vous voulez utiliser la même ligne tant pour les communications téléphoniques que les communications fax. - Vous utilisez la machine à la fois comme télécopieur et comme téléphone et que vous voulez principalement recevoir des fax. Dans ce mode : Votre machine reçoit les télécopies de manière silencieuse mais vous alerte aussi si un appel vocal se présente. (La machine émet un signal sonore à la fin de chaque réception.) Lorsqu'un appel vocal arrive, la machine fait entendre une sonnerie spéciale (en revanche le téléphone connecté à votre machine ne sonnera pas). Si vous entendez cette sonnerie, répondez en décrochant le combiné. Il faudra aussi : Connecter un téléphone externe. (Voir page 3-10.) Réception de télécopies 10 D 131F/191F 10-5 Mode Tél/Fax Prêt Vous l'utiliserez si : - Vous voulez utiliser la même ligne tant pour les communications téléphoniques que les communications fax. - Vous utilisez la machine à la fois comme télécopieur et comme téléphone et que vous voulez principalement recevoir des appels vocaux. Dans ce mode Votre machine fait entendre le nombre de sonneries que vous avez défini (le nombre de sonneries par défaut est 2 fois). Si vous ne décrochez pas pendant que la machine sonne, celle-ci décrochera et prendra automatiquement l'appel. S'il s'agit d'un fax entrant, la machine effectue la réception du fax. S'il s'agit d'un appel vocal entrant, la machine fait entendre une sonnerie spéciale pour vous indiquer de décrocher le combiné. (Mais le téléphone raccordé à la machine ne sonnera pas.) Il faudra aussi : Connecter un téléphone externe. (Voir page 3-10.) Mode Répond./Fax Prêt Vous l'utiliserez si : Vous utilisez un répondeur qui est connecté à votre machine. Dans ce mode : Le répondeur connecté à votre machine prend chaque appel. S'il s'agit d'un appel vocal entrant, le répondeur enregistre le message. Si la machine détecte une tonalité fax, elle effectue la réception de la télécopie. Il faudra aussi : Connecter un répondeur téléphone. (Voir page 3-10.) Utilisation d'un répondeur avec votre machine : 1 Réglez la machine sur Répond./Fax Prêt. (Voir page 10-3.) 2 Configurez votre répondeur pour qu'il ne décroche après 2 sonneries max. 3 Enregistrez un nouveau message sortant sur votre répondeur. Le message sortant de votre répondeur ne devrait pas durer plus de 10 secondes. Voici une suggestion de message : "Bonjour ! Vous êtes bien au [votre nom ou numéro de téléphone]. Pour laisser un message de vive voix, attendez le signal sonore. Pour envoyer un fax, appuyez sur la touche [Début] de votre télécopieur. Merci de votre appel !" 10 Réception de télécopies 10-6 D 131F/191F 10.1.4 Prendre les appels manuellement 2 Note Pour prendre un appel manuellement, vous devez raccorder un téléphone externe à votre machine. Vérifiez que le document n'est pas chargé dans l'ADF. Réception manuelle d'un appel par téléphone externe En mode "Tél Prêt" ou "Tél/Fax Prêt", décrochez le combiné dès que le téléphone externe sonne : - Si vous entendez votre interlocuteur, vous pouvez lui répondre. - Si ce sont des tonalité fax que vous entendez, ("beep – beep – beep"), posez le combiné mais ne raccrochez pas. Appuyez sur la touche [Début] de votre machine. Après avoir appuyé sur [Début], raccrochez le combiné. Du fait que les télécopieurs distants attendront plusieurs secondes la réception des tonalités de négociation de la part de votre machine, vous disposez de 30 secondes environ pour appuyer sur la touche [Début]. 10.1.5 Basculer en mode de réception automatique ou en mode de réception manuelle 1 Vérifiez que la machine se trouve en mode Fax. Sinon, appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Fax. 2 Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] jusqu'à ce que "Réception auto" s'affiche à l'écran et appuyez sur [Valider]. 3 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner Oui ou Non. - Pour passer en mode de réception manuelle, sélectionnez "Non" - Pour passer en mode de réception automatique, sélectionnez "Oui" 4 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage. 2 Note Si vous assignez la fonction "Réception auto" à une Touche de fonction programmable (page 12-3), il suffit d'appuyer sur cette touche pour passer alternativement de la réception manuelle (Tél Prêt) à la réception automatique (que vous avez paramétrée). Réception de télécopies 10 D 131F/191F 10-7 10.1.6 En cas de panne de papier pendant la réception fax Lorsque la machine manque de papier, elle émet un signal sonore, le voyant [Alarme] s'allume et l'écran indique quelle est le magasin qui n'a plus de papier – Magasin 1, Magasin 2 (en option) ou l'introducteur manuel. Dans cet exemple, c'est le Magasin 1 qui est vide. Réception sans papier Au cas où votre machine venait à manquer de papier, elle peut néanmoins enregistrer en mémoire jusqu'à 250 réceptions fax. C'est la "réception sans papier". Dès que vous l'avez rechargée en papier, la machine lance automatiquement l'impression des messages conservés en mémoire. 2 Note Le nombre de pages (et non de réceptions) que votre machine peut enregistrer en mode réception sans papier est variable. Cela dépend de Ia capacité mémoire de votre machine, des types de documents qu'elle a reçus ainsi que de leur définition fax. 10 Réception de télécopies 10-8 D 131F/191F 10.2 Paramétrage de la réception fax [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "10 Réception de télécopies" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 10.3 Fonctions avancées de réception [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "10 Réception de télécopies" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 11 Fonctions Boîtes F-code [CD] Fonctions Boîtes F-code [CD] 11 D 131F/191F 11-3 11 Fonctions Boîtes F-code [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "11 Fonctions Boîtes F-code [CD]" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 11 Fonctions Boîtes F-code [CD] 11-4 D 131F/191F 12 Fonctions spéciales [CD] Fonctions spéciales [CD] 12 D 131F/191F 12-3 12 Fonctions spéciales [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "12 Fonctions spéciales [CD]" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 12 Fonctions spéciales [CD] 12-4 D 131F/191F 13 Fonctions de sécurité [CD] Fonctions de sécurité [CD] 13 D 131F/191F 13-3 13 Fonctions de sécurité [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "13 Fonctions de sécurité [CD]" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 13 Fonctions de sécurité [CD] 13-4 D 131F/191F 14 Paramètres utilisateur [CD] Paramètres utilisateur [CD] 14 D 131F/191F 14-3 14 Paramètres utilisateur [CD] Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "14 Paramètres utilisateur [CD]" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R. 14 Paramètres utilisateur [CD] 14-4 D 131F/191F 15 Rapports & Listes Rapports & Listes 15 D 131F/191F 15-3 15 Rapports & Listes 15.1 Tableau des listes et journaux Le tableau suivant décrit les rapports et les listes que votre machine peut imprimer. Nom Description Référence Liste Fonctions Enumère les fonctions disponibles sur votre machine ainsi que la séquence des touches nécessaire pour les exécuter. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], 1, [Valider]. page 4-6 Liste Param. Machine Enumère les paramètres machine en vigueur. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], 2, [Valider]. page 14-3 Liste Param. Fax Enumère les paramètres fax en vigueur. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], 3, [Valider]. page 14-3 Liste Param. Copie Enumère les paramètres copie en vigueur. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], 4, [Valider]. page 14-3 Journal Imprime la liste des transactions fax effectuées par votre machine. Pour imprimer le jourrnal d'activité, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], 5, [Valider]. Si vous le souhaitez, un réglage permet à la machine d'imprimer automatiquement le journal d'activité toutes les 100 transactions fax. page 15-5 Liste commandes Enumère les éléments suivants : • Le numéro de commande • Le numéro ou le nom de la destination • L'heure de début (format jj,hh:mm) • Une note précisant si la commande concerne une opération relève ou F-code. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], 6, [Valider]. page 9-13 Liste Une-Touche Enumère pour chaque numéro 1-Touche, le nom et le numéro de téléphone ou fax que vous avez programmés. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], 7, [Valider]. page 8-5 Liste Num. Abrég. Enumère pour chaque numéro, l'identifiant à 3 chiffres, le nom et le numéro de téléphone ou fax que vous avez programmés. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], 8, [Valider]. page 8-12 Liste Groupe Enumère les numéros 1-Touche et les numéros abrégés que vous avez enregistrés sous un numéro groupe. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez [Menu], [5], [1], [0], [9], Valider, puis sélectionnez le numéro de groupe et appuyez sur [Valider]. page 8-16 List N° bloqués Enumère les numéros de téléphone bloqués. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 0, [Valider]. page 10-8 Page de garde Imprime un spécimen de la page de garde. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 1, [Valider]. page 9-13 15 Rapports & Listes 15-4 D 131F/191F Liste des codes comptes Indique pour chaque code compte, la durée totale de communication, le nombre d'impressions des fax reçus, la charge d'impression des fax reçus, le nombre total de pages copiées, la charge copie et la somme de la charge copie et de la charge d'impression des fax reçus. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 2, [Valider]. page 13-3 Liste Authentification Utilisateur Fait apparaître le nom de l'utilisateur enregistré, le code compte, la durée totale de communication, le nombre total de pages imprimées et le prix des fax reçus, le nombre total de pages imprimées et le prix des copies, le nombre total pages numérisées, et la somme du prix des copies et du prix d'impression des fax reçus pour chaque code compte. Pour imprimer la liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [2], [5]. page 13-3 ListBoîteF-Code Indique l'identifiant, le nom de la boîte (s'il y a lieu) l'adresse secondaire, le mot de passe, le type de boîte et le paramétrage de chaque boîte. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 3, [Valider]. page 11-3 Liste doc. F-CODE Indique l'identifiant, le nom de la boîte (s'il y a lieu), le type de boîte et chaque numéro de fichier (ou de document) enregistré. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 4, [Valider]. page 11-3 Liste Boîte ENV. GR. Indique l'identifiant, le nom de destination, le numéro de fax et la date et l'heure programmée pour l'émission. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 5, [Valider]. page 9-13 Liste Doc. ENV. GR. Indique les numéros de fichiers des documents. Pour imprimer les numéros de fichiers des documents, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 6, [Valider]. page 9-13 Liste trnsfrt fax Indique pour chaque règle de transfert, l'identifiant, le numéro du fax distant vers lequel vous désirez que vos documents soient transférés, le réglage activé/désactivé, la programmation horaire et le réglage d'impression automatique. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 7, [Valider]. page 10-8 Liste Macros Enumère pour chaque macro, le numéro de touche et le nom de la tâche programmée dans la touche macro. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 8, [Valider]. page 12-3 Liste Param. scanner Enumère les paramètres scanner en vigueur. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 9, [Valider]. page 7-4 Liste Mém. doc. Imprime la quantité de mémoire utilisée par chaque document. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [2], 0, [Valider]. page 15-8 Rapport de confirmation d'émission S'imprime après l'émission de documents. page 15-7 Nom Description Référence Rapports & Listes 15 D 131F/191F 15-5 15.2 Journal d'activité Tout comme un relevé de compte qui enregistre vos transactions financières au jour le jour, votre machine tient un journal d'activité qui enregistre les 100 dernières transactions fax. Le journal d'activité fournit les informations suivantes pour chaque transaction : - Numéro assigné, commençant chaque jour à 001 - Destination appelée - Mode de définition - Date et heure de début - Durée, en minutes et secondes - Longueur, en nombre de pages - Code compte (voir page 13-3) - Résultat de l'appel Si cette mention est précédée d'un astérisque (*), cela indique une communication ECM. Si elle précédée par le signe (#), cela indique une communication via un modem haut débit V.34. - Toute opération spéciale Par exemple, un fax passé via un téléphone externe apparaîtra comme appel "Manuel". 15.2.1 Configurer le journal d'activité Votre machine fax imprime automatiquement le journal d'activité toutes les 100 transactions. Pour activer ou désactiver l'impression automatique du journal : 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [3], [1], [1], [Valider]. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner "Oui" ou "Non" et appuyez sur [Valider]. 15 Rapports & Listes 15-6 D 131F/191F 15.2.2 Impression manuelle du journal d'activité Pour imprimer immédiatement un journal d'activité sans attendre les 100 transactions : 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], [5], [Valider]. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner le type de journal que vous voulez imprimer. - L'option "Em. Rapport" n'imprime que le rapport d'émission. - L'option "Réc. Rapport" n'imprime que le rapport de réception. - L'option "Em./Réc. Rapport" imprime le rapport d'émission et le rapport de réception. 3 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 15.2.3 Définir l'ordre d'impression du journal d'activité Votre machine imprime sur le journal d'activité l'historique de chaque transaction fax. Par exemple, si votre machine doit rappeler un numéro, ces rappels figureront sur le journal. Si vous voulez énumérer ces activités dans l'ordre des numéros qui leur ont été assignés, vous pouvez changer l'ordre d'impression du journal d'activité. Pour changer l'ordre d'impression : 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [3], [1], [2], [Valider]. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner Oui ou Non. Si vous voulez imprimer le journal dans l'ordre des numéros assignés, choisissez "Oui". Sinon, la machine énumérera chaque transaction fax par commande et par destination. 3 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage. Rapports & Listes 15 D 131F/191F 15-7 15.3 Rapport de confirmation d'émission 15.3.1 Configurer le rapport de confirmation d'émission Votre machine peut imprimer un rapport de confirmation d'émission (TCR) après chaque envoi de fax à un télécopieur de Groupe 3. Le TCR fournit les informations suivantes pour chaque communication : - Date et heure d'impression du TCR - Destination appelée - Mode de définition - Date et heure de début - Durée, en minutes et secondes - Longueur, en nombre de pages - Résultat de l'appel - Toute opération spéciale Par exemple, un fax passé via un téléphone externe apparaîtra comme appel "Manuel". - Aperçu du document Image de la première page du document En cas d'erreur, le TCR indique le numéro de la destination concernée, le code d'erreur (page 16-26) et le message d'erreur (page 16-20). Pour définir l'impression du TCR : 1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [3], [1], [3], [Valider]. 2 Appuyez sur [,] ou +] jusqu'à afficher le paramètre désiré et appuyez sur [Valider]. 2 Note Si vous activez ou désactivez fréquemment cette fonction, vous pouvez l'assigner à une Touche de fonction programmable (voir page 12-3) pour accélérer la commande. 15 Rapports & Listes 15-8 D 131F/191F 15.4 Liste documents en mémoire Votre machine peut imprimer la liste des documents conservés en mémoire. Elle indique aussi la quantité de mémoire occupée par chaque document. Cette liste indique : - Type Affiche le type de document, "Boîte envoi groupé" par exemple. - Données (en Ko) Affiche la quantité de mémoire utilisée par le document. - Page Affiche le nombre de pages. - Note Autres informations, comme le numéro de boîte par exemple. Pour imprimer la liste des documents enregistrés en mémoire : % Appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [2], [0], [Valider]. Rapports & Listes 15 D 131F/191F 15-9 15.5 Notification de perte de document - Quand les données image conservées en mémoire sont effacées par accident, la machine imprime dès la restauration du courant électrique, une notification de perte de document avec des informations relatives aux données image effacées. - Voici un exemple d'un fichier reçu qui a été effacé. La machine peut également imprimer une notification pour "Commande effacée", "Doc. relève supprimés" et "Doc. Boîte F-code effacé". 1. No. Numéro de la communication 2. Nom Enregistré dans l'ordre suivant - Numéro TTI enregistré pour le nom de destination - Espace 3. Mode Définition pendant la communication 4. Départ Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé 5. Durée Heure programmée pour la communication 6. Page Nombre de pages reçues 7. Dep. Quand la fonction "Code département" a été définie, le numéro de compte figure dans cette rubrique. 15 Rapports & Listes 15-10 D 131F/191F 8. Résult. Résultats des communications. - OK : Achevé avec succès - * : Communication en mode ECM - # : Communication via Super G3 - Code d'erreur : Terminé anormalement Pour plus d'informations sur les codes d'erreur, voir page 16-26. 9. Note - Relève : Réception par relève - Manuel : Réception manuelle - F-Relève : Indique une relève F-code - Sécurité : Réception dans une boîte F-code sécurisée - Relais : Réception en relais F-code - Bulletin : Réception dans une boîte bulletin F-code 16 Entretien et dépannage Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-3 16 Entretien et dépannage 16.1 Entretien 16.1.1 Conseils de nettoyage Quelques recommandations pour le nettoyage de votre machine : - Il est important de nettoyer la machine. La poussière, en s'accumulant notamment autour des orifices de ventilation, est susceptible de réduire la longévité de votre machine. - Débranchez toujours la machine avant de la nettoyer. - Ne jamais pulvériser un détergent en direction de la machine. Le liquide déposé peut en s'écoulant à l'intérieur de la machine en détériorer des composants internes. - Ne tentez jamais de nettoyer à l'intérieur de la machine des composants scellés. C'est pour protéger l'utilisateur et la machine qu'ils sont obturés. - Pour nettoyer l'extérieur de la machine, utilisez un chiffon non pelucheux humidifié avec une solution détergente douce. - Dans les zones inaccessibles même avec des coton-tiges, utilisez de l'air comprimé sec et propre pour chasser la poussière et autres particules. 16.1.2 Nettoyage de la zone de numérisation 1 Essuyez la vitre d'exposition, la vitre de l'ADF et le couvre-document avec un chiffon doux, non pelucheux humidifié à l'eau. 2 Puis essuyez avec un chiffon doux, non pelucheux et sec jusqu'à séchage complet des surfaces. Couvre-document Vitre d'exposition Vitre de l'ADF 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-4 D 131F/191F 16.1.3 Nettoyage des rouleaux de l'ADF Si vous rencontrez des problèmes d'introduction avec vos documents, essayez la procédure suivante : 1 Mettez la machine hors tension et débranchez la prise. 2 Ouvrez la porte de l'ADF. 3 Nettoyez la surface des rouleaux à l'aide d'une lame pour rouleau caoutchouc humidifiée sur un chiffon. Faites tournez les rouleaux à la main pour nettoyer la totalité de leur surface. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-5 16.1.4 Nettoyage du fil de charge du tambour et de la tête d'impression LED Si le message suivant apparaît à l'écran LCD ou que l'impression donne un résultat de qualité médiocre, c'est le signe qu'il faut nettoyer le fil de charge de la cartouche tambour. 2 Note La machine peut encore imprimer une centaine de feuilles après l'apparition de ce message, mais lorsque le message "Imprimante hors service" s'affiche, il n'est plus possible d'imprimer tant que le fil de charge n'aura pas été nettoyé. 1 Ouvrez la porte avant. 2 Tirez vers vous puis repoussez dans la machine la tige bleue, doucement et à plusieurs reprises. Cette opération permet aussi de nettoyer en même temps la tête d'impression LED. 3 Refermez le volet frontal. Ouvir porte avant Suivre les instructions A 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-6 D 131F/191F 16.1.5 Remplacement de la cartouche de toner Lorsque le toner est épuisé, la machine indique "Toner Vide" et plus aucune page ne peut être imprimée avant l'installation d'une nouvelle cartouche de toner. Pour remplacer la cartouche toner : 1 Ouvrez le volet frontal. 2 Tournez vers la gauche le levier de déblocage de la cartouche toner (position déverrouillée). 3 Tirez la cartouche usagée pour la sortir. 4 Déballez la cartouche de toner. Puis, en la tenant à deux mains, secouez- la doucement pour répartir uniformément le toner à l'intérieur de la cartouche. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-7 7ATTENTION % Ne touchez pas le rouleau de la cartouche toner. 5 Insérez fermement la cartouche toner dans la machine jusqu'à ce qu'elle se verrouille en place. 6 Tournez vers la droite le levier de verrouillage de la cartouche jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche en place complètement. 7 Nettoyez le fil de charge et de la tête d'impression LED. (Voir "Nettoyage du fil de charge du tambour et de la tête d'impression LED" à la page 16-5.) 8 Refermez le volet frontal. 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-8 D 131F/191F 16.1.6 Remplacement de la cartouche tambour La cartouche tambour se remplace environ toutes les 30 000 pages. Lorsque le tambour approche de sa date limite, la machine indique "Prévoir Photocond.". A ce moment-là, il faudra vous procurer une nouvelle cartouche tambour. Lorsque la machine indique "Remplacer Photocond.", elle ne peut plus imprimer tant que la cartouche n'est pas remplacée. Pour remplacer la cartouche tambour : 1 Ouvrez le volet frontal et le volet latéral. 2 Tournez le levier de déverrouillage de la cartouche toner vers la gauche (position ouverture) puis sortez la cartouche. Il est nécessaire de déposer la cartouche de toner pour remplacer la cartouche tambour. 3 Tirez la cartouche tambour usagée pour la sortir. 4 Sortez la nouvelle cartouche tambour de son emballage et engagez-la fermement dans la machine jusqu'à ce qu'elle s'enclenche complètement en place. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-9 5 Réinstallez la cartouche toner puis tournez le levier de verrouillage vers la droite jusqu'à enclenchement complet. 6 Refermez le volet frontal et le volet latéral. 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-10 D 131F/191F 16.2 Incidents 16.2.1 Serrage document Situation 1 Si un serrage document se produit dans l'ADF, le message suivant s'affiche : Par ailleurs, si le serrage document se produit pendant une émission mémoire rapide ou pendant une émission en temps réel, le message d'erreur suivant s'imprimera pour indiquer quelle page le serrage a affecté. Situation 2 Si le serrage d'un document se produit pendant la numérisation en mémoire pour un tri de copies ou pour une émission mémoire normale, la machine indique : 1 Si vous voulez continuer l'opération, appuyez sur [Valider] et passez à l'étape 2. Pour abandonner l'opération, appuyez sur [Annuler]. 2 Note Si vous n'appuyez pas sur une touche dans les 3minutes, la machine abandonnera automatiquement l'opération. 2 La machine indique quelle page (plus précisément, son numéro) a été serrée dans la machine. Dégagez le document serré et réinstallez toutes les pages restantes du document dans l'ADF en commençant par la page qui a été serrée, et appuyez sur Début. Retransmettre. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-11 2 Note Si vous n'appuyez pas sur une touche dans les 3minutes, la machine lancera l'émission ou la copie du ou des documents chargés. Si vous voulez abandonner l'opération, appuyez sur [Stop]. La machine efface toutes les pages de sa mémoire et revient en mode attente. 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-12 D 131F/191F Serrage dans la zone d'entrée 1 Ouvrez la porte de l'ADF. 2 Tirez doucement sur le document pour l'extraire de l'ADF. Si l'opération est infructueuse, tournez le bouton de dégagement pour libérer le document serré. 3 Refermez le volet de l'ADF, en veillant à ce que les 2 côtés soient bien fermés. 2 Note Pour éviter le serrage de documents, il vaut mieux placer les documents gondolés ou déchirés sur la vitre d'exposition. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-13 Serrage dans la zone d'introduction 1 Ouvrez le couvre-original. Ouvrez le volet de l'ADF et tournez le bouton de dégagement pour libérer le document serré. 2 Refermez le couvre-original et le volet de l'ADF. 2 Note Pour éviter le serrage de documents, il vaut mieux placer les documents gondolés ou déchirés sur la vitre d'exposition. 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-14 D 131F/191F Serrage dans la zone de sortie 1 Ouvrez le couvre-original. Tirez doucement le document serré. Si cela n'est pas possible, ouvrez le volet de l'ADF et tournez le bouton de dégagement pour libérer le document serré. 2 Refermez le couvre-original et le volet de l'ADF. 2 Note Pour éviter le serrage de documents, il vaut mieux placer les documents gondolés ou déchirés sur la vitre d'exposition. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-15 16.2.2 Serrage papier En cas de serrage papier, le message suivant s'affiche : Pour dégager un serrage papier, appliquez la procédure suivante. En cas de serrage papier pendant une réception fax, la machine enregistre en mémoire le document reçu et l'imprimera une fois que le papier serré aura été dégagé. 7ATTENTION % Attention à NE PAS toucher le rouleau de fixation en ouvrant le volet latéral pour dégager le papier. L'unité de fixation est très chaude. % Ne touchez pas la surface de la cartouche du tambour. Cela pourrait provoquer des rayures ou des traces qui détérioreront la qualité d'impression. Dégagement d'un serrage papier 1 Tirez le levier de déverrouillage pour ouvrir le volet latéral. Si le deuxième magasin, en option, est installé, ouvrez aussi le volet latéral de celui-ci. 2 Avec précaution, tirez le papier serré dans la direction indiquée. 2 Note Attention à ne pas tâcher vos mains ou vos vêtements en dégageant le papier serré. 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-16 D 131F/191F Serrage dans la zone d'introduction Serrage dans la zone de fixation Serrage dans la zone de sortie papier Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-17 Si le serrage s'est produit alors que le papier a été introduit partiellement mais qu'il est difficile à saisir : 1 Ouvrez le magasin papier. Après l'avoir tiré à fond, levez légèrement l'avant du magasin pour l'extraire de la machine. 2 Avec précaution, enlevez le papier serré. 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-18 D 131F/191F 3 Refermez le volet latéral et réinsérez le magasin papier. Abaissez l'arrière du magasin pour l'aligner avec les rainures de la machine, puis repoussez- le à fond. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-19 Dégagement d'un serrage papier dans l'introducteur manuel Si l'introduction du papier dans l'introducteur manuel pose problème, la machine affiche le message suivant : 1 Tirez le levier de libération du rabat, et tirez le papier pour l'extraire de la machine. 2 Ouvrez puis refermez le volet frontal pour effacer le message de l'écran. 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-20 D 131F/191F 16.2.3 Message d'erreur à l'écran De temps à autre, il se peut que votre machine rencontre des problèmes pour envoyer ou recevoir des documents. Dans de tels cas, elle vous en informe par une alarme. Pour vous aider à identifier le problème, la machine affiche des messages à l'écran et imprime des messages d'erreur. Message à l'écran Cause probable/Solution Commande indisponib. La totalité des 99 commandes différées (le rappel automatique compte pour une) est enregistrée en mémoire et la machine ne peut plus en accepter d'autre. Attendez qu'une des commandes différées ait été exécutée par la machine, ou supprimez une des commandes enregistrées (voir "Consultation ou annulation de commandes" en page 9-13). Déjà mémorisé Vous avez tenté d'introduire un numéro de fax ou de téléphone qui est déjà introduit dans la machine. Tapez un numéro de téléphone ou de fax différent. Boîte utilisée Vous avez tenté d'effacer une boîte F-Code qui contient au moins un document. Effacer le ou les documents, puis réessayez. Appel SAV La lampe scanner est faible ou ne fonctionne pas. Réalisez plusieurs copies pour favoriser l'évaporation de l'humidité interne. Si le problème persiste, contactez votre SAV. Passer en mode Fax Vous avez tenté d'enregistrer un document pour relève (ou pour boîte F-code) alors que la machine est en mode copie. L'enregistrement du document fax n'est possible que lorsque la machine est en mode fax. Vérif. émission mém. Vous avez tenté d'activer la fonction Fax&Copie mais le paramètre d'émission mémoire est réglé sur Non. Pour utiliser la fonction Fax&Copie, l'émission mémoire doit être réglée sur Oui. Activez l'émission mémoire (voir page 14-3), puis réessayez. Vérif.format pap.Rec Ouvr&FermerCarterAv. La machine est chargée avec du papier différent du format que vous avez spécifié. Chargez du papier du format approprié ou modifiez le paramètre format papier (voir page 4-17). Ouvrez puis refermez le volet frontal pour réinitialiser l'imprimante. Fermer volet XXX Le volet indiqué à l'écran est ouvert ou n'a pas été bien fermé. Refermez- le correctement. Fermer magasin XXX Le magasin indiqué à l'écran est ouvert ou n'a pas été bien fermé. Refermez- le correctement. Err. communication Une erreur de communication a perturbé l'émission ou la réception. S'il s'agit d'une émission, appuyez sur [STOP] pour effacer le message d'erreur puis réessayez l'émission. S'il s'agit d'un fax en cours de réception, essayez se contacter l'autre personne et demandez-lui de recommencer l'émission du fax. (Il se peut que le problème vienne de sa machine, de sa ligne téléphonique, etc.) Copie impossible La protection copie est activée. Désactivez la protection de la copie (voir page 13-3). Comptes complets Vous avez tenté de créer un code compte de trop car votre machine ne peut enregistrer que 100 codes comptes. Boîte pleine Vous avez tenté d'enregistrer un document dans une boîte F-Code, mais la machine a atteint sa capacité maximale (30 documents). Supprimez un document inutile qui pourrait se trouver dans la boîte F-Code ou utilisez une autre boîte F-code. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-21 Serrage original Cont. Enreg. Val/Ann Un document a serré dans l'ADF. Voir page 16-10 pour dégager le document serré. Document en mémoire Vous avez tenté d'effacer une boîte d'envoi groupé qui contient au moins un document. Pour effacer une boîte d'envoi groupé, il faut effacer tous les documents enregistrés dans la boîte. Prog. Nº (0-32) Vous avez essayé d'enter un numéro de groupe supérieur à 32. Votre machine peut conserver 32 groupes d'appel, de 1 à 32 (le groupe d'appel 0 rassemblant tous les groupes). Tapez le numéro identifiant le groupe d'appel. Entrer Réd./Agrand. Vous avez tenté de copier votre document sur papier d'un format autre que A4, A5 ou F4 avec l'introducteur manuel, ou le taux zoom calculé est en dehors de la plage admissible (25 – 400%). Tapez manuellement le taux zoom bien qu'il puisse manquer une partie de l'image, ou changez le papier copie. Prog.format Analyse Lorsque vous utilisez la vitre d'exposition, vous devez entrer manuellement le format de numérisation de votre document. Appuyez sur [Format Doc.] pour sélectionner le format. Entrer le nom Vous n'avez rien introduit en mode Saisie du nom utilisateur. Entrez le nom utilisateur. Chargeur utilisé La commande que vous tentez d'introduire requiert l'utilisation de l'ADF lequel est déjà en cours d'utilisation. Attendez que la machine ait fini d'utiliser l'ADF, puis recommencez. Raccrocher téléphone Le combiné externe n'est pas correctement raccroché. Boîte relais ou boîte sécurisée Vous avez tenté d'enregistrer un document dans une boîte F-code qui est configurée pour être une boîte relais ou une boîte de réception sécurisée. Sélectionnez la boîte F-code qui est configurée comme boîte bulletin. Code I.D incorrect Le code I.D. de la boîte F-code que vous avez tapé n'est pas valide. Essayez de retaper le code I.D. de votre boîte F-code. Numéro incorrect Vous avez appuyé sur une touche qui n'a aucune fonction pendant l'opération en cours. Code accès incorrect Le code de protection (voir page 13-3) que vous avez entré, n'est pas valide. Réintroduisez le code de protection correct. MotPass invalide Le code d'accès que vous avez introduit n'est pas valide. (Voir page 13-3.) Entez le code correct. Ligne occupée Vous avez tenté d'effacer un document que quelqu'un est en train de relever sur votre machine. Attendez la fin de l'opération de relève. Utilisée par macro Vous avez tenté de changer la fonction d'une Touche de fonction programmable, mais cette touche contient déjà une macro-commande. La fonction de la Touche de fonction programmable ne peut être changée que si la macro est d'abord effacée de la touche. Effacez la macro, puis réessayez. Mémoire pleine Depart ou Annuler Vous avez tenté d'introduire plus de pages que la mémoire ne peut en contenir. Appuyez sur [Début] pour indiquer à la machine de conserver en mémoire le nombre maximal de pages, ou appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer de la mémoire toutes les pages enregistrées pendant l'opération (mais pas celles des opérations précédentes). Message à l'écran Cause probable/Solution 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-22 D 131F/191F Dépassement mémoire Appuyer sur Stop En Impression PC, la machine a reçu plus de données que sa mémoire ne peut contenir. Appuyez sur [STOP] pour annuler la tache d'impression. Effacez les documents inutiles, et réessayez une fois qu'un peu plus de mémoire devient disponible, ou bien divisez l'impression en deux opérations. Erreur scanner Le chariot du miroir de votre machine ne fonctionne plus. Contactez votre SAV. Miroir bloqué Le mode transport n'est pas déverrouillé. Déverrouillez le mode de transport (voir page 3-15). Pas de commande stockée Vous avez appuyé sur [Confirm. Job/Abandon Fax] pour revoir les commandes à venir, mais votre machine n'en a enregistré aucune. – ou – Vous avez appuyé sur touche macro à laquelle aucune commande n'a été assignée. Aucun compte de créé Vous avez tenté d'activer le paramètre code compte mais aucun code compte n'est enregistré dans la machine. Enregistrez au moins un code compte. – ou – Vous avez entré un code compte incorrect lors de l'émission d'un fax alors que la fonction compte est active. Tapez le code compte correct. Pas de doc. en mém. Vous avez tenté d'imprimer un document à partir de la mémoire, mais votre machine n'a rien enregistré. Absence photocond. La cartouche tambour est absente ou n'a pas été correctement installée dans la machine. Vérifiez la présence ou l'installation de la cartouche tambour. Vide Vous avez sélectionné un numéro du numéroteur auto, d'une boîte d'envoi groupé, ou d'une boîte F-code pour lequel aucun numéro de téléphone ou de fax n'a été programmé. Choisissez un autre numéro ou composez-le directement sur les touches numériques. Pas de code d'accès Vous avez tenté de programmer une fonction de sécurité (voir page 13-3), mais aucun code de protection n'est enregistré dans votre machine. Enregistrez un code de protection (voir page 13-3). Pas de code PIN Vous avez sélectionné "Mode1" pour le masque PIN et tenté d'appeler un numéro du numéroteur auto dans lequel aucun PIN n'a été enregistré, ou d'appeler en composant le numéro sur les touches numériques sans entrer le PIN. Tapez le PIN correspondant. Pas de rapport Vous avez demandé une journal d'activité ou un rapport de confirmation, mais aucune transaction fax n'a été effectuée. Abs. cartouche toner La cartouche de toner est absente ou n'a pas été correctement installée dans la machine. Vérifiez la présence ou l'installation de la cartouche de toner. Aucune donée util. Vous avez tenter d'exécuter les programmes N° 384 "Activation de l'Authentification Utilisateur", 385 "Remise à zéro du compteur utilisateur", ou 5125 "Impression de la liste Authentification Utilisateur" sans que des informations utilisateur soient enregistrées. Enregistrez d'abord les informations utilisateur. (Voir page 13-3.) Impossible en macro Pendant l'enregistrement de la macro, vous avez appuyé sur une touche qui ne peut pas être enregistrée comme macro. Message à l'écran Cause probable/Solution Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-23 Ouvir porte avant Suivre les instructions A Le fil de charge de la cartouche tambour est encrassé. Nettoyez le fil de charge. (Voir page 16-5.) Votre machine peut encore imprimer une centaine de feuilles après l'apparition de ce message, mais une fois que le message "Imprimante hors service" est apparu, aucune page ne pourra plus être imprimée tant que le fil de charge n'aura pas été nettoyé. Ouvrir volet lat. 1 Retirer le Papier Un serrage papier s'est produit dans la machine. Ouvrez le volet latéral et dégagez le serrage papier avec précaution et en douceur. (Voir page 16-15) Ouv&Ferm volet charg Replacer Original Votre document n'a pas été introduit correctement, ou bien le télécopieur appelé ne peut pas gérer la longueur de page de votre document. Réintroduisez la page et réessayez. Erreur papier Charger papier XXX Appuyer sur Stop En impression PC, le format du papier chargé dans le magasin ne correspond pas au format de papier spécifié par le pilote d'imprimante. Appuyez sur [STOP] pour annuler une tâche d'impression. Chargez le papier de format approprié et relancez l'impression. Erreur papier Rotation papier Appuyer sur Stop En Impression PC, l'orientation du papier A5 chargé dans l'introducteur manuel n'est pas correcte. Le format A5 n'est pas disponible pour l'impression PC. Réinstallez le papier A5 dans l'introducteur manuel. Appeler le SAV XXX La section imprimante de votre machine ne fonctionne plus. Contactez votre SAV. Ajouter du papier La magasin ou l'introducteur manuel n'a plus de papier. Rechargez le magasin et/ou l'introducteur manuel. Attendre SVP L'imprimante intégrée à votre machine est en cours de préchauffage ou occupée. Attendez que la machine ait terminé l'impression puis renouvelez votre commande ou votre opération. Relève en cours Vous avez tenté d'enregistrer dans votre machine, un document pour relève ordinaire, mais un document a déjà été enregistré. Attendez que la machine ait terminé l'opération de relève ordinaire ou supprimez le document enregistré. Imprimante utilisée La commande que vous tentez d'introduire requiert l'utilisation de l'imprimante, laquelle est déjà en cours d'utilisation. Attendez que la machine ait fini d'imprimer. Doc. protégé en mém. Un document reçu se trouvait dans la mémoire de la machine quand vous avez tenté de désactiver le code de réception sécurisée. Imprimez le document reçu pour vider la mémoire, puis recommencez l'opération voulue. Protection active Lorsque l'Authentification Utilisateur est active, la machine rejette l'opération concernée par l'enregistrement d'une restriction d'accès. Pour annuler cette limitation, réglez l'Authentification Utilisateur sur "Non". (Voir page 13-3.) Prévoir Photocond. Le tambour devra être bientôt remplacé. Contactez votre revendeur pour obtenir une nouvelle cartouche tambour, si vous n'en avez pas déjà une en votre possession. Remplacer Photocond. Imprim. Inutilis. Votre cartouche tambour ne fonctionne pas. La machine ne peut pas imprimer tant que la cartouche n'a pas été remplacée. Vider Intro Manuelle Ouvr& FermerCarterAv. Une feuille n'a pas été correctement introduite dans l'introducteur manuel. Tirez le levier de libération du rabat, et tirez le papier pour l'extraire de la machine. Puis, ouvrez puis refermez le volet frontal pour réinitialiser l'imprimante. Message à l'écran Cause probable/Solution 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-24 D 131F/191F Lecture en cours La commande que vous tentez d'introduire requiert l'utilisation du scanner, laquelle est déjà en cours d'utilisation. Attendez que la machine ait achevé la numérisation puis réessayez la commande désirée. Réc non sécurisée Vous avez tenté de commander la réception sécurisée en appuyant sur une touche programmée avec la fonction "Sécurité", mais le paramètre réception sécurisé n'est pas activé. Pour activer le paramètre réception sécurisée, voir page 13-3. Chois. format papier Vous avez tenté d'effectuer une copie dans les conditions suivantes : • La sélection du format papier est réglée sur "Auto". • L'introducteur manuel contient du papier autre que A4, A5 ou F4. • Le magasin papier est vide. Appuyez sur [Format papier/Doc.suivant] pour sélectionner le papier voulu. Adresse Utilisée Vous avez tenté d'entrer une adresse secondaire qui est la même que celle qui est utilisée par une autre boîte F-code. Entrez une adresse secondaire différente. Toner Presque Vide La machine va bientôt manquer de toner. Contactez prochainement votre revendeur pour obtenir une nouvelle cartouche toner, si vous n'en avez pas déjà une en votre possession. Toner Vide Imprim. Inutilis. La cartouche toner est vide. Remplacez la cartouche de toner. La machine ne peut pas imprimer tant que la cartouche n'a pas été remplacée. Trop de caractères Vous avez tenté d'entrer trop de numéros ou de caractères pour l'opération en cours. Appuyez sur [Annuler] pour supprimer les caractères surnuméraires, puis réessayez. Trop de destinations Vous avez tenté d'entrer trop de numéros pour une diffusion. Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 200 numéros du numéroteur auto et jusqu'à 30 numéros composés avec les touches numériques. Appuyez sur [Annuler] pour supprimer les numéros en trop. Trop d'étapes Vous avez tenté d'entrer trop d'étapes pour une macro. Une touche macro peut enregistrer jusqu'à 60 étapes. Réduction impossible En copie réduite avec l'ADF, si le ratio calculé est inférieur au ratio minimum de réduction, ce message apparaît et la copie réduite n'est pas possible. Utilisez la vitre d'exposition, il se peut cependant que des portions de l'image ne soit pas copiée. Tri impossible Début/ Stop En Impression PC, les données sont trop volumineuses pour permettre le tri. Appuyez sur [Début], et la machine effectue l'impression sans assemblage. Appuyez sur [Stop], et le travail d'impression PC en cours sera annulé. Util. Analyse à plat Vous avez tenté une copie agrandie avec l'ADF. La machine n'est pas prévue pour réaliser un agrandissement avec l'ADF. Placez votre document sur la vitre d'exposition pour réaliser la copie agrandie. Message à l'écran Cause probable/Solution Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-25 16.2.4 "Message d'erreur" imprimés En cas de problème avec un fax et que la machine détecte une erreur, elle imprime un message intitulé "Message d'erreur". Ce tirage papier fournit les informations suivantes sur la transaction fax : - Code d'erreur spécifique (Voir "Code d'erreur" à la page 16-26.) - Message d'erreur de communication (Voir "Signification des messages d'erreur" ci-dessous.) - Le TTI (ou le numéro de téléphone) du télécopieur distant avec lequel votre machine a tenté de communiquer. Signification des messages d'erreur Les messages d'erreur imprimés notifient diverses anomalies. En voici un bref résumé. Message d'erreur Causes possibles Vérifier appareil distant. • Anomalie appareil distant • Pas de signal de négociation de l'appareil distant • Mauvais numéro appelé Retransmettre. • Ligne téléphonique médiocre Pas de signal de négociation de l'appareil distant Mauvaise introduction ou comptage du document Impossibilité de contacter l'appareil distant à l'issue du nombre de rappels spécifié. Ligne occupée. • La ligne de l'appareil distant était occupée • L'appareil distant n'a pas décroché Conf. réception documents. • Le signal de confirmation n'a pas été reçu de l'appareil distant. • Une ligne de qualité médiocre a causé une image de basse qualité. Mémoire Pleine. • La mémoire de l'appareil distant est saturée N° de téléphone non défini. • Echec de la composition d'un numéro enregistré Arrêté. • Quelqu'un a appuyé sur [Stop] sur l'appareil distant au milieu de la négociation 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-26 D 131F/191F 16.2.5 Code d'erreur Erreurs de numérotation D.0.3, L'appareil distant n'a pas répondu, l'appel n'a pu aboutir ou la touche Stop a été activée D.0.8 pendant la numérotation. Renouvelez l'appel. Si vous obtenez le même message de la machine, appelez le destinataire pour vérifier que son appareil fonctionne correctement. D.0.2 L'appareil distant est occupé. Renouvelez l'appel. D.0.6, L'appareil distant n'a pas répondu, ou l'appel n'a pu aboutir ou D.0.7 La touche [Stop] a été activée pendant la numérotation. Renouvelez l'appel. Erreurs de réception R.1.1 L'appareil distant initiateur de l'appel n'a pas répondu à votre machine. Ceci peut se produire si l'appareil distant a composé un mauvais numéro ou s'il est paramétré pour filtrer les appels par un code d'accès. R.1.2 Les deux télécopieurs sont incompatibles. Votre machine est prévue pour l'émission et la réception de communication fax ITU-T Groupe 3, norme industrielle depuis le début des années 1980. R.1.4 La touche [Stop] a été activée sur la machine réceptrice. R.2.3 La mauvaise qualité de la ligne téléphonique a rendu la communication fax impossible. Contactez le destinataire. R.3.1 La machine émettrice a détecté de trop nombreuses erreurs de la part de la machine réceptrice. R.3.3 La machine émettrice est incompatible avec la machine réceptrice ou a rencontré un problème d'introduction du document pendant l'émission. R.3.4 Une mauvaise qualité de la ligne téléphonique a empêché votre machine d'imprimer correctement toutes ou partie des pages reçues. R.4.1 La machine a reçu des données de longueur trop importante excédant la limite de la machine. R.4.2 La ligne a été coupée avant l'émission ou le télécopieur émetteur a besoin d'une révision. R.4.4 La machine a atteint la limite de sa capacité mémoire. R.5.1, R.5.2 La réception ECM a échoué (peut-être en raison de parasites sur la ligne). R.8.1 Une erreur de compatibilité s'est produite. R.8.10 Des parasites sur la ligne ou d'autres problèmes ont empêché la détection de la ligne. R.8.11 Le fax a dépassé le délai imparti alors qu'il attendait le signal d'apprentissage. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-27 Erreurs d'émission T.1.1 L'appareil distant n'a pas répondu à votre machine. Contactez le destinataire. T.1.4 La touche [Stop] a été activée pendant l'émission. T.2.1 La ligne téléphonique a été coupée pendant l'émission ou la communication fax est devenue impossible en raison de la mauvaise qualité de la ligne. Renouvelez l'appel. T.2.2 Les deux télécopieurs sont incompatibles. Votre machine est prévue pour l'émission et la réception de communication fax ITU-T Groupe 3, norme industrielle depuis le début des années 1980. T.2.3 La mauvaise qualité de la ligne téléphonique a rendu la communication fax impossible. Les conditions peut changer rapidement, rappelez un peu plus tard. T.3.1 Le compteur pages de votre machine a détecté une erreur d'introduction pendant l'émission. Réintroduisez soigneusement le document dans l'introducteur et renouvelez l'appel. T.4.1 La ligne téléphonique a été coupée pendant l'émission à cause de nombreuses erreurs du modem ou parce que le fax distant n'avait plus de papier. Renouvelez l'appel. T.4.2 La qualité de la ligne s'est détériorée au cours de l'émission. Renouvelez l'appel. T.4.4 La mauvaise qualité de la ligne ont empêché l'émission. Renouvelez l'appel. T.5.1, L'émission ECM a échoué (peut-être en raison de parasites sur la ligne). Les conditions peuvent changer T.5.2, T.5.3 rapidement, renouvelez l'appel. T.8.1 Une erreur de compatibilité s'est produite. T.8.10 Des parasites sur la ligne ou d'autres problèmes ont empêché la détection de la ligne. T.8.11 Le fax distant n'a pas achevé la phase apprentissage d'égalisation. 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-28 D 131F/191F 16.2.6 Problèmes machine 16.2.7 Problèmes de télécopie Symptôme Suggestions L'écran n'affiche rien et les touches sont inopérantes. Vérifiez que la machine est sous tension. La machine ne s'allume quand on manoeuvre l'interrupteur. Vérifiez que le câble d'alimentation est bien branché. La machine affiche un message d'erreur et émet un signal sonore. Voir page "Message d'erreur à l'écran" à la page 16-20. Serrage fréquent de documents • Vérifiez que le capot de l'ADF est correctement fermé. • S'il y a un corps étranger dans l'ADF, enlevez-le. • Vérifiez que le papier du document présente le grammage adéquat. (Voir "Traitement des documents" à la page 4-7.) • Nettoyez les rouleaux de l'ADF (voir page 16-4.) Serrages fréquents de papier • Vérifiez que le papier présente le grammage adéquat. (Voir "Traitement du papier" à la page 4-10.) Symptôme Suggestions Emission impossible • Vérifiez que la ligne téléphonique est bien branchée. • Vérifiez que le numéro enregistré dans votre numéroteur auto est correct. • Vérifiez que la machine se trouve en mode fax. Dans le cas contraire, commutez la machine en mode fax en appuyant sur [CopieFaxScan]. Impossible d'arrêter l'émission • La touche [Stop] ne permet pas d'arrêter une émission. Pour annuler une émission, appuyez sur [Abandon Fax] et sélectionnez la tâche que vous voulez annuler, et appuyez sur [Valider]. (Voir "Confirmation ou annulation de commandes [CD]" à la page 9-13 pour plus de détails.) Réception automatique impossible • Vérifiez que la ligne téléphonique est bien branchée. • Vérifiez que la machine est en mode réception automatique (page 10-3). • La mémoire peut être saturée. Si le magasin est vide, chargez du papier afin d'imprimer le document reçu et conservé en mémoire. Réception manuelle impossible • Pour recevoir des fax manuellement, vérifiez que le téléphone externe est bien raccordé à votre machine. • En mode réception manuelle, vous devez appuyez sur [Début] avant de raccrocher le téléphone. • La mémoire peut être saturée. Si le magasin est vide, chargez du papier afin d'imprimer le document reçu et conservé en mémoire. Impossible d'enregistrer un document en mémoire • Vérifiez que la machine se trouve en mode fax. Dans le cas contraire, commutez la machine en mode fax en appuyant sur [CopieFaxScan]. • La mémoire peut être saturée. Si le magasin est vide, chargez du papier afin d'imprimer le document reçu et conservé en mémoire. • Le nombre limite de documents qui peuvent être conservés est atteint. Supprimez un document inutile. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-29 16.2.8 Problèmes de copie 16.2.9 Problèmes d'impression à partir d'un ordinateur Symptôme Suggestions Copie impossible • Vérifiez que la machine se trouve en mode copie. Dans le cas contraire, commutez la machine en mode copie en appuyant sur [CopieFaxScan]. • Vérifiez que le document est correctement chargé. Si vous utilisez la vitre d'exposition, la face à copier devrait être orientée vers le bas. Si vous utilisez l'ADF, la face à copier devrait être orientée vers le haut. Qualité copie médiocre Voir "Problèmes de qualité d'impression" à la page 16-31 Symptôme Suggestions Impression impossible d'un ordinateur • Le câble USB ou le câble parallèle IEEE-1284 n'est pas correctement connecté. Vérifiez le branchement des câbles. • Le paramétrage du port est incorrect. Vérifiez le paramétrage du port d'imprimante dans le Panneau de configuration Windows. • Il se peut que le pilote de l'imprimante ne soit pas installé correctement. Réinstallez le pilote d'imprimante. • Vérifiez le paramétrage du mode du port parallèle dans le BIOS (Basic Input/Output System) de votre ordinateur. Si le mode du port parallèle est réglé sur ECP (Extended Compatibilities Port), modifiez les paramètres sur mode Standard et Bidirectionnel. (Il se peut que le BIOS de votre ordinateur présente l'option Standard en tant que "Normal".) L'impression est trop lente • L'ordinateur n'a peut-être pas assez de mémoire. Installez plus de mémoire vive sur votre ordinateur. • La tâche d'impression est trop volumineuse ou complexe. Les tâches d'impression "lourdes" demandent beaucoup de temps pour être traitées par la machine. Attendez que la tâche en cours soit terminée. Qualité d'impression médiocre Voir "Problèmes de qualité d'impression" à la page 16-31 L'option d'impression n'affecte pas les tirages imprimés. Certaines applications logicielles écrasent l'option définie dans la page des propriétés de l'imprimante. Sélectionnez les options d'impression à partir de l'application. 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-30 D 131F/191F 16.2.10 Problèmes de Scanner Symptôme Suggestions Impossible de numériser un document Il se peut que le pilote TWAIN ne soit pas installé correctement. Réinstallez le pilote d'imprimante. Le Scanner Develop 131F/ 191F n'apparaît pas dans la liste des périphériques disponibles de votre application. Il se peut que le pilote TWAIN ne soit pas installé correctement. Réinstallez le pilote d'imprimante. Impossible de récupérer le document dans la boîte d'analyse. • Vérifiez qu'une application de numérisation est installée sur votre ordinateur. • Le câble USB ou le câble parallèle IEEE-1284 n'est pas correctement connecté. Vérifiez le branchement des câbles. • Il se peut que le pilote TWAIN ne soit pas installé correctement. Réinstallez le pilote d'imprimante. L'image numérisée présente un aspect sale • Il se peut que la vitre d'exposition ou de l'ADF soit sale. Nettoyez la vitre (voir page 16-3). • Modifiez le contraste de numérisation en appuyant sur [Contraste]. • Modifiez la définition de numérisation en appuyant sur [Définition Doc.]. Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-31 16.2.11 Problèmes de qualité d'impression Problème Cause possible Les pages restent blanches • Le document n'est pas correctement chargé. Placez votre document dans l'ADF face imprimée vers le haut ou sur la vitre d'exposition, face imprimée vers le bas. • Il se peut que la cartouche toner soit défectueuse. Déposez la cartouche toner et vérifiez qu'elle n'est pas abîmée. Si le problème persiste, remplacez la cartouche toner. Les pages sont noires • Il se peut que la cartouche toner soit défectueuse. Déposez la cartouche toner et vérifiez qu'elle n'est pas abîmée. Si le problème persiste, contactez votre SAV. • Il se peut que le fil de charge du tambour soit sale. Ouvrez la porte avant. Pour nettoyer le fil de charge du tambour, tirez à fond vers vous la tige bleue, puis repoussez-la à sa position d'origine. Voir page page 16-5. L'impression sur papier est trop claire • Le contraste de numérisation est sur un réglage trop clair. Sélectionnez un réglage plus foncé. • La cartouche toner est peut-être vide, ou le niveau de toner est peut-être très bas. Déposez la cartouche de toner et secouezla plusieurs fois pour répartir le toner à l'intérieur. Si le problème persiste, remplacez la cartouche toner. • Le papier est humide. Remplacez le papier. L'impression sur papier est trop foncée Le contraste de numérisation est sur un réglage trop foncé. Sélectionnez un réglage plus clair. ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-32 D 131F/191F Les tirages imprimés présentent un arrière-plan flou. • Il se peut que la vitre d'exposition ou de l'ADF soit sale. Nettoyez la surface de la vitre d'exposition avec un chiffon doux et sec. • Il se peut que la cartouche toner soit défectueuse. Déposez la cartouche toner et vérifiez qu'elle n'est pas abîmée. Si le problème persiste, remplacez la cartouche toner. • Il se peut que le fil de charge du tambour soit sale. Ouvrez la porte avant. Pour nettoyer le fil de charge du tambour, tirez à fond vers vous la tige bleue, puis repoussez-la à sa position d'origine. Voir page page 16-5. Les tirages imprimés présentent une densité irrégulière • Le toner est peut-être mal réparti dans la cartouche. Déposez la cartouche de toner et secouez-la plusieurs fois pour répartir le toner à l'intérieur. • Il se peut que la cartouche tambour soit défectueuse. Déposez la cartouche tambour et vérifiez qu'elle n'est pas abîmée. Si le problème persiste, remplacez la cartouche tambour. Les tirages imprimés présentent des irrégularités Le papier que vous utilisez peut avoir absorbé de l'humidité, peutêtre en raison d'une condensation ou parce que de l'eau a tout simplement été renversée sur le papier. Le toner n'adhère pas bien sur le papier humide. Remplacez le papier par du papier sec. Les tirages imprimés présentent des lignes blanches et/ou des lignes noires • La vitre ou les rouleaux de l'ADF sont peut-être sales. • Nettoyez la vitre de l'ADF et/ou les rouleaux de l'ADF. (Voir page 16-3.) • Il se peut que le fil de charge du tambour soit sale. Ouvrez le volet frontal, puis tirez et repoussez la tige bleue pour nettoyer le fil de charge. (Voir page 16-5.) • La cartouche toner ou la cartouche tambour est peut-être défectueuse. Déposez les cartouches et vérifiez leur état. Si le problème persiste, remplacez la ou les cartouches conformément aux instructions. • Il se peut que le fil de charge du tambour soit sale. Ouvrez la porte avant. Pour nettoyer le fil de charge du tambour, tirez à fond vers vous la tige bleue, puis repoussez-la à sa position d'origine. Voir page page 16-5. Problème Cause possible ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE BBBBB AAAAA CDE CDE CDE CDE CDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE Entretien et dépannage 16 D 131F/191F 16-33 Les tirages imprimés sont maculés de toner • La vitre d'exposition est sale. Nettoyez la surface de la vitre d'exposition avec un chiffon doux et sec. • Le tapis du presse-document est sale. Essuyez le tapis du couvre-document avec un chiffon doux imbibé d'un détergent neutre. • La cartouche toner ou la cartouche tambour est peut-être défectueuse. Déposez les cartouches et vérifiez leur état. Si le problème persiste, remplacez la ou les cartouches conformément aux instructions. • Si le verso des tirages imprimés est maculé de toner, il se peut que le rouleau de transport soit sale. Normalement le rouleau de transport est autonettoyant. Si d'autres remèdes ne règlent pas le problème, contactez votre SAV. • Il se peut que le fil de charge du tambour soit sale. Ouvrez la porte avant. Pour nettoyer le fil de charge du tambour, tirez à fond vers vous la tige bleue, puis repoussez-la à sa position d'origine. Voir page page 16-5. L'image n'est pas correctement alignée sur le papier • Le document n'est pas correctement positionné. Placez correctement l'original contre les réglettes document. Si vous utilisez l'ADF, ajustez soigneusement les guides document au format du document. • La vitre de l'ADF est sale (si utilisation de l'ADF). Nettoyez la vitre de l'ADF avec un chiffon doux et sec. (Voir page 16-3.) • Les réglettes document ne sont pas complètement poussées contre l'original. Faites coulisser les réglettes contre les bords du document. • Le magasin a été chargé avec du papier gondolé. Restaurez la planéité du papier avant de le recharger. Problème Cause possible ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 16 Entretien et dépannage 16-34 D 131F/191F 16.2.12 Si les informations contenues dans ce chapitre ne vous permettent pas de résoudre le problème Si vous rencontrez un problème machine que les informations contenues dans ce chapitre ne vous permettent pas de résoudre, contactez votre SAV. 7ATTENTION % Si la machine fait un bruit inhabituel, dégage de la fumée ou une odeur bizarre, débranchez-la immédiatement et contactez votre SAV. N'essayez pas de démonter ou de réparer vous-même la machine. % Toute intervention non autorisée sur la machine peut frapper votre garantie de nullité. 17 Annexe Annexe 17 D 131F/191F 17-3 17 Annexe 17.1 Caractéristiques 17.1.1 Autres Caractéristiques Multitâches Accès Quad Méthode d'analyse CCD à plat Méthode d'impression Analyse LED, impression électrophotographique Formats originaux acceptables (Voir page 4-7) Poids du document (Voir page 4-7) Format papier d'impression (Voir page 4-7) Caractéristiques électriques 220 à 240V AC, 50 à 60Hz Consommation de courant • Mode Economie d'énergie : 12 W • Veille : 41 Wh (D 131F), 48 Wh (D 191F) • Maximum : 940 W Température ambiante 10°C à 32°C Humidité relative 20 à 80% RH LCD 20 caractères × 2 lignes Capacité mémoire image* 8 Mo (650 pages environ) plus 32 Mo, en option, (environ 2720* pages de plus) (* Avec le document test 1 ITU-T à définition normale) Autonomie de l'alimentation de secours de la mémoire image * • 8 Mo : 72 heures* • 40 Mo : 24 heures* (* Doit être chargée pendant au moins 24 heures pour obtenir une charge complète) Poids Environ 22,9 Kg (avec les consommables) Capacité de l'ADF 80 feuilles max. (A4, 75 g/m2) Capacité du magasin papier • Magasin : 500 feuilles (80 g/m2) • Introducteur manuel : 50 feuilles (80 g/m2) Capacité du plateau de sortie papier 250 feuilles (60 à 90 g/m2) 17 Annexe 17-4 D 131F/191F Dimensions (lxPxH) 520 × 450 × 446 (mm) Caractéristiques 350 mm 450 mm 446 mm 520 mm Annexe 17 D 131F/191F 17-5 17.1.2 Fax 17.1.3 Copie Caractéristiques Compatibilité ITU-T Groupe 3 et Super Groupe 3 Réseau applicable Réseau téléphonique public commuté (PSTN) ou équivalent Méthode de codage MMR, MR, MH et JBIG de la norme ITU-T Vitesse modem 33 600, 31 200, 28 800, 26 400, 24 000, 21 600, 19 200, 16 800, 14 400, 12 000, 9 600, 7 200, 4 800, 2 400 bps Débit de repli automatique Numéro 1-Touche 40 destinations Numéros abrégés 160 destinations Groupes d'appel 32 groupes Diffusion 230 destinations Vitesse d'émission Environ 2 secondes/page.* (* Sur la base d'une émission mémoire à mémoire du document test 1 ITU-T à destination d'un télécopieur Develop. Les durées d'émission sont variables, mais votre machine assurera toujours la plus haute vitesse de transmission possible dans le cadre des directives ITU-T et en fonction des conditions de la ligne téléphonique.) Largeur de numérisation 208 mm Niveaux de gris 256 niveaux Définition de numérisation • Normal (8 points/mm × 3,85 lignes/mm) • Fin (8 points/mm × 7,7 lignes/mm) • Super fin (16 points/mm × 15,4 lignes/mm) • Gris (8 points/mm × 7,7 lignes/mm) (* Au cas où l'appareil distant est capable d'une définition de 16 points/mm × 15,4 lignes/mm. Sinon, la définition Super fin est de 8 points/mm × 15,4 lignes/mm.) Réduction sur réception Auto (50% à 100%) ou Fixe (100%) Caractéristiques Définition de numérisation 600 dpi. × 300 lpi. Largeur de numérisation 210 mm Délai avant 1ère copie Environ 12 secondes (avec du papier A4 dans le magasin 1) Vitesse d'impression 13 cpm pour D 131F, 19 cpm pour D 191F (sur papier A4 dans le magasin 1) Taux zoom • ADF : 25% à 100% • Vitre d'exposition : 25% à 400% Taux prédéfinis • ADF : 100%, 86%, 81%, 70%, 50% • Vitre d'exposition : 200%, 141%, 122%, 115%, 100%, 86%, 81%, 70%, 50% 17 Annexe 17-6 D 131F/191F 17.1.4 Imprimante 17.1.5 Scanner 17.1.6 Consommables * Avec une couverture du document de 6% document et l'impression de 2 pages A4 à intervalles. 2 Note Les caractéristiques peuvent être modifiées sans préavis. Caractéristiques Définition d'impression 600 dpi Vitesse d'impression 13 cpm pour D 131F, 19 cpm pour D 191F (sur papier A4 dans le magasin 1) Couleur/Mono Monochrome Système d'exploitation Voir page 3-24. Pilote d'imprimante GDI, PCL (option) Interface Port USB Port parallèle IEEE-1284 (en option) Port Ethernet (en option) Caractéristiques Compatibilité TWAIN (Version 1.9) Couleur/Mono Couleur ou monochrome Définition de numérisation 600 dpi, 300 dpi, 200 dpi Largeur de numérisation 208 mm Niveaux de gris 256 niveaux Boîtes d'analyse 20 boîtes Système d'exploitation Voir page 3-24. Caractéristiques Longévité de la cartouche tambour Environ 30 000 pages* Longévité de la cartouche toner Environ 16 000 pages* Longévité de la cartouche toner de départ Environ 3 000 pages* 18 Index Index 18 D 131F/191F 18-3 18 Index A Alimentation .............................2-9 B Basculer en mode de réception automatique ou en mode de réception manuelle ............10-6 C Caractères Correction ...........................4-5 Saisie ..................................4-4 Caractères spéciaux de numérotation ............................8-4 Chargement des documents ....4-9 Chargement du papier Dans l'introducteur manuel ...........................................4-15 Dans le magasin ...............4-12 Code .....................................16-26 Code d'erreur .......................16-26 Combinaison de définition document et contraste différents .....9-4 Combiné .................................5-11 Commandes ...........................9-13 Contraste de numérisation .......................................... 5-6, 9-4 Copie recto-verso ..................5-13 D Date & Heure ..........................3-19 Définition de la langue ............3-18 Définition de numérisation ........9-4 Détection de tonalité ..............3-20 E Emission mémoire rapide ........ 9-5 Emission sans mémoire ......... 9-11 Environnement ....................... 2-11 Espace requis ........................ 2-10 É Émission en temps réel ...9-5, 9-11 Émission mémoire ................... 9-7 Émission avec l'ADF .......... 9-7 Émission par la vitre d’exposition ........................ 9-9 F Fonctions Avancées Copie ................................ 5-10 Émission fax ..................... 9-13 Réception fax ................... 10-8 I Incidents .............................. 16-10 Installation du pilote ............... 3-24 J Journal ................................... 15-5 Journal d'activité ................... 15-5 L Listes Liste .................................. 15-3 Liste de réacheminement fax .......................................... 15-3 Liste des boîtes d'envoi groupé .......................................... 15-3 Liste des boîtes F-code ... 15-3 Liste des codes comptes . 15-3 Liste des commandes ...... 15-3 Liste des documents enregistrés .................................15-3, 15-8 18 Index 18-4 D 131F/191F Liste des documents envoi groupé ...................................... 15-3 Liste des documents F-code ........................................... 15-3 Liste des fonctions ........... 15-3 Liste des groupes ............. 15-3 Liste des macro-commandes ........................................... 15-3 Liste des numéros 1-Touche ........................................... 15-3 Liste des numéros 1-Touches ........................................... 15-3 Liste des numéros abrégés ........................................... 15-3 Liste des numéros bloqués ........................................... 15-3 Liste des paramètres copie ........................................... 15-3 Liste des paramètres fax .. 15-3 Liste des paramètres machine ........................................... 15-3 Liste des paramètres scan ........................................... 15-3 Liste des paramètres scanner ........................................... 15-3 M Message de dépassement mémoire ...........................................5-4, 9-6 Messages d'erreur ............... 16-20 Mode de numérisation Mode Boîte Analyse ........... 7-4 Mode de numérisation en temps réel ........................... 7-4 Mode de réception fax ........... 10-3 Mode Economie d'énergie ..... 3-22 Mode transport ...................... 3-15 N Nettoyage Fil de charge ..................... 16-5 Rouleaux de l'ADF ............ 16-4 Zone de numérisation ....... 16-3 Numérisation ............................7-3 Numéros abrégés ...................8-12 Numérotation par répertoire ...8-16 Numérotation pour groupe d’appel ....................................8-16 O Onglet Mise en page ................6-9 Onglet Option périph. .............6-11 Onglet Qualité ...........................6-9 Onglet Sortie ...........................6-11 P Propriétés de l'imprimante .......6-4 R Rappel ....................................9-13 Rapport ...................................15-7 Rapport de confirmation .........15-7 Remplacement de la cartouche de toner ..................................16-6 Remplacement de la cartouche tambour ..................................16-8 Réception sans papier ............10-7 Réglage délai d'inactivité ........3-22 Réglages initiaux Date & Heure .....................3-19 Détection de tonalité .........3-20 Langue ..............................3-18 Mode de réception fax ......3-19 Réglage délai d'inactivité ..3-22 Sélection du TTI usuel ......3-21 TTI (Votre Nom) .................3-21 Votre numéro de fax .........3-20 Réglementation en matière de copie ..................................2-13 Index 18 D 131F/191F 18-5 S Saisie de caractères spéciaux ..4-5 Sélection du TTI usuel ............3-21 Site d'installation ......................2-9 T Tableau des fonctions ..............4-6 Taux zoom ................................5-7 Téléphone externe ..................3-10 Touches 1-Touche ...................8-5 Traitement des documents ......4-7 Document acceptables .......4-7 Traitement du papier Papier acceptable ...............4-7 Spécification du format papier ................................4-17 Tri ...........................................5-15 TTI (Votre Nom) ......................3-21 Type de document ...................5-6 V Volume haut-parleur ...............3-16 Votre numéro de fax ...............3-20 18 Index 18-6 D 131F/191F User’s Guide [Enlarge Display Operations] 751/601 x-1 Introduction Thank you for choosing this machine. The bizhub 751/601 User’s Guide [Enlarge Display Operations] contains details on the operation of the various functions available in the Enlarge Display mode of the bizhub 751/601 and on the various operating precautions. In order to ensure that this machine is used correctly and efficiently, carefully read the Enlarge Display Mode Operations volume of the User’s Guide before using the machine. For descriptions on trademarks and copyrights, refer to [Trademarks/Copyrights]. Views of the actual equipment may be slightly different from the illustrations used in this Enlarge Display Mode Operations volume of the User’s Guide. Explanation of manual conventions 7 CAUTION CAUTION % Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in serious injuries or property damage. Observe all cautions in order to ensure safe use of this machine. 2 Reminder Text highlighted in this manner indicates operation precautions. Carefully read and observe this type of information. ! Detail Text highlighted in this manner provides more detailed information concerning operating procedures and other descriptions. 2 Note Text highlighted in this manner indicates sections containing additional information. If necessary, refer to the indicated sections. [ ] Names highlighted as shown above indicate keys on the control panel and buttons in the touch panel. x-2 751/601 Contents 1 Before use 1.1 Names of control panel parts and their functions...............................................................................1-3 1.2 Adjusting the angle of the control panel ..............................................................................................1-5 1.2.1 To adjust the angle of the control panel...................................................................................................1-5 1.3 Screens in Enlarge Display mode .........................................................................................................1-7 1.3.1 Displaying screens in Enlarge Display mode ...........................................................................................1-7 1.4 Touch panel ............................................................................................................................................1-8 1.4.1 Touch panel operation .............................................................................................................................1-8 1.4.2 Icons that appear in the screen................................................................................................................1-8 1.4.3 Paper type icons ......................................................................................................................................1-8 1.4.4 Paper supply icons...................................................................................................................................1-9 1.5 Feeding the original..............................................................................................................................1-10 1.5.1 Loading the original into the ADF...........................................................................................................1-10 1.5.2 Placing the original on the original glass................................................................................................1-11 1.6 Specifying original settings .................................................................................................................1-12 1.6.1 Copying originals of mixed sizes ("Mixed Original" setting)...................................................................1-12 1.6.2 Loading folded originals ("Z-Folded Original" setting) ...........................................................................1-13 1.6.3 Selecting the original orientation (Original Direction settings)................................................................1-15 1.6.4 Selecting the position of the binding margin (Original Binding Position/Binding Position settings) ....................................................................................................................................1-17 2 Using copy functions 2.1 General copy operation .........................................................................................................................2-3 2.2 Selecting the Paper settings .................................................................................................................2-5 2.2.1 Automatically selecting the paper size ("Auto" Paper setting) .................................................................2-5 2.2.2 Manually selecting the desired paper size ...............................................................................................2-6 2.3 Specifying a Zoom setting.....................................................................................................................2-7 2.3.1 Selecting a zoom ratio..............................................................................................................................2-8 2.4 Selecting original and copy settings ....................................................................................................2-9 2.4.1 Selecting single-sided or double-sided copies......................................................................................2-10 2.5 Selecting a combined copy setting ....................................................................................................2-12 2.6 Selecting Finishing settings ................................................................................................................2-14 2.6.1 Selecting the finishing method...............................................................................................................2-15 2.6.2 Selecting Staple/Punch settings ............................................................................................................2-16 2.6.3 Selecting a folding or binding setting.....................................................................................................2-18 2.7 Selecting not to rotate the image .......................................................................................................2-20 2.8 Selecting the quality of the original ....................................................................................................2-21 2.9 Selecting the density settings.............................................................................................................2-23 2.9.1 Adjusting the print density (Density settings) .........................................................................................2-23 2.9.2 Adjusting the background density (Background Removal settings) ......................................................2-24 2.10 Selecting the Paper settings ...............................................................................................................2-26 2.10.1 Selecting a Paper Type setting for the bypass tray ...............................................................................2-26 2.10.2 Selecting a Paper Size setting for the bypass tray ................................................................................2-28 2.11 Scanning the next original to be copied while a copy job is being printed (next job reservation)....................................................................................................2-31 2.12 Pausing scanning/printing...................................................................................................................2-32 2.13 Printing a proof to check the settings (Proof Copy) .........................................................................2-33 3 Using fax/scan functions 3.1 General fax/scan operation...................................................................................................................3-3 3.2 Specifying a destination ........................................................................................................................3-5 3.2.1 Selecting a destination from the address book .......................................................................................3-6 751/601 x-3 3.2.2 Selecting a destination from the job log .................................................................................................. 3-7 3.2.3 Selecting a destination with an LDAP search .......................................................................................... 3-8 3.2.4 Directly typing in the number ................................................................................................................. 3-11 3.3 Specifying scanning settings (Scan Settings) ................................................................................... 3-13 3.3.1 Simplex/Duplex...................................................................................................................................... 3-13 3.3.2 Original Type.......................................................................................................................................... 3-14 3.3.3 Resolution .............................................................................................................................................. 3-15 3.3.4 Density ................................................................................................................................................... 3-17 3.3.5 File Type................................................................................................................................................. 3-18 3.3.6 Background Removal ............................................................................................................................ 3-20 3.3.7 Scan Size ............................................................................................................................................... 3-21 3.3.8 Original Settings..................................................................................................................................... 3-23 3.4 Using a program................................................................................................................................... 3-26 3.5 Checking the destinations .................................................................................................................. 3-27 4 Logging on and logging off 4.1 When a logon screen appears .............................................................................................................. 4-3 4.1.1 When the screen to enter the user name appears................................................................................... 4-3 4.1.2 When the screen to enter the account name and password appears..................................................... 4-5 x-4 751/601 1 Before use 751/601 1-3 Before use 1 1 Before use 1.1 Names of control panel parts and their functions 2 Note For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations], the User’s Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 1 2 4 5 3 6 7 12 11 8 13 14 15 16 10 9 17 18 19 No. Part name Description 1 Touch panel Displays various screens and messages. Specify the various settings by directly touching the panel. 2 Main Power indicator Lights up in green when the machine is turned on with the main power switch. 3 [Power] (auxiliary power) key Press to turn on/off machine operations. When turned off, the machine enters a state where it conserves energy. 4 [Mode Memory] key Programmed fax/scan settings can be recalled to be used again. (p. 3-26) 5 [Utility/Counter] key Press to display the Meter Count screen and the Utility screen. 6 [Reset] key Press to clear all settings (except programmed settings) entered in the control panel and touch panel. 7 [Stop] key Pressing the [Stop] key during an operation temporarily stops the operation. 8 [Proof Copy] key Press to print a single proof copy to be checked before printing a large number of copies. (p. 2-33) 1 Before use 1-4 751/601 9 [Start] key Press to start the operation. When this machine is ready to begin the operation, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue. If the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange, the operation cannot begin. Press to restart a stopped job. 10 Data indicator Flashes in blue while a print job or fax is being received. Lights up in blue while a print job or fax is queued to be printed or is being printed. 11 [C] (clear) key Press to clear a value (such as the number of copies, a zoom ratio, or a size) entered using the keypad. 12 Keypad Use to type in the number of copies to be produced. Use to type in the zoom ratio. Use to type in the various settings. 13 [Enlarge Display] key Press to enter or exit Enlarge Display mode. 14 [Accessibility] key Press to display the screen for specifying settings for user accessibility functions. 15 [Power Save] key Press to enter Low Power mode. While the machine is in Low Power mode, the indicator on the [Power Save] key lights up in green and the touch panel goes off. To cancel Low Power mode, press the [Power Save] key again. 16 [Access] key If user authentication or account track settings have been applied, press this key after entering the user name and password (for user authentication) or the account name and password (for account track) in order to use this machine. 17 Brightness dial Use to adjust the brightness of the touch panel. 18 [Fax/Scan] key Press to enter Fax/Scan mode. While the machine is in Fax/Scan mode, the indicator on the [Fax/Scan] key lights up in green. 19 [Copy] key Press to enter Copy mode. (As a default, the standard-sized Copy mode screen is displayed.) While the machine is in Copy mode, the indicator on the [Copy] key lights up in green. No. Part name Description 751/601 1-5 Before use 1 1.2 Adjusting the angle of the control panel The control panel can be adjusted to either of three angles. In addition, the control panel can be tilted to the left. Adjust the control panel to the angle that allows for easy operation. 1.2.1 To adjust the angle of the control panel 1 Pull the control panel release lever toward you to raise or lower the control panel. ➀ Upper position (base position) ➁ Middle position ➂ Lower position ➃ Left tilt position 1 Before use 1-6 751/601 2 To tilt the control panel to the left, hold the bottom of the control panel, and then tilt the panel to the left. – Do not grab the touch panel when turning the control panel to the left or right. 751/601 1-7 Before use 1 1.3 Screens in Enlarge Display mode 1.3.1 Displaying screens in Enlarge Display mode 1 Press the [Copy] or [Fax/Scan] key in the control panel to display the desired screen. 2 Press the [Enlarge Display] key in the control panel. – Depending on the settings specified in Accessibility mode, a message appears, requesting confirmation to cancel the settings that cannot be specified in Enlarge Display mode. For details on specifying settings in the Accessibility screen, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. The screen is displayed in Enlarge Display mode. While screens are displayed in Enlarge Display mode, pressing the [Copy] or [Fax/Scan] key displays the normal screen. 3 To return to the standard-sized screens from the screens in Enlarge Display mode, press the [Enlarge Display] key in the control panel. ! Detail The default settings for Enlarge Display mode can be changed. To change the default settings, specify desired settings in Enlarge Display mode, and then press the [Accessibility] key. On the Accessibility Setting screen 2/2, touch [Default Enlarge Display Settings], press the [Copy] key or the [Fax/Scan] key, and then specify "Current Setting". The default settings can be also changed in Utility mode. For details, refer to the User's Guide [Copy Operations]. 1 Before use 1-8 751/601 1.4 Touch panel 1.4.1 Touch panel operation To activate a function or to select a setting, lightly touch the button in the touch panel for the desired function or setting. 2 Reminder Do not apply extreme pressure to the touch panel, otherwise it may be scratched or damaged. Never push down on the touch panel with force, and never use a hard or pointed object to make a selection in the touch panel. 1.4.2 Icons that appear in the screen 1.4.3 Paper type icons 2 Note For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. If paper other than plain paper is specified for the selected paper tray when using a copy function, the icon indicating the paper type appears under "Paper" in the Basic screen. Paper type icons that appear Icon Description This button appears when there is a message indicating that a print error occurred. Touch this button to display the message, and then perform the necessary steps. Touch this button to display the message at an enlarged size. This button appears when there is a message indicating that consumables must be replaced or the machine requires maintenance. Touch this button to display the message, and then perform the replacement or maintenance procedure. Transparency Special Paper Thick Paper 751/601 1-9 Before use 1 1.4.4 Paper supply icons The amount of paper remaining is indicated in the Copy mode screen where the paper size is selected. For details about the screen for selecting the paper size, refer to "Selecting the Paper settings" on page 2-5. Paper supply icons that appear Letterhead Colored Paper Trace User Paper1 User Paper2 User Paper3 Thin Paper Tab paper Fine Recycled Labels Icon Description This icon indicates that very little paper remains in the paper tray. This icon indicates that paper is not loaded in the paper tray. 1 Before use 1-10 751/601 1.5 Feeding the original 2 Note For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations] and the User’s Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. The original can be fed in either of the following ways. Be sure to position the original correctly according to the type of original being scanned. - Using the ADF - Using the original glass 1.5.1 Loading the original into the ADF 1 Place the original in the original feed tray in the order to be scanned with the side to be scanned faces up. – Load the original pages so that the top of the original is toward the back or the right side of the machine. 2 Slide the guides against the edges of the original. A A 751/601 1-11 Before use 1 1.5.2 Placing the original on the original glass 1 Lift open the ADF. – When placing the original on the original glass, be sure to lift open the ADF at least 20°. If the original is placed on the original glass without the ADF being lifted at least 20°, the correct original size will not be detected. 2 Place the original on the original glass with the side to be scanned faces down. – Load the original pages so that the top of the original is toward the back or the left side of the machine. 3 Align the original with the mark in the back-left corner of the original scales. 4 Close the ADF. Original scales 1 Before use 1-12 751/601 1.6 Specifying original settings 2 Note For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. The following describes necessary settings depending on the status and placement of the originals to copy them as desired. For details on selecting the original type when using fax/scanning functions, refer to "Original Settings" on page 3-23. 1.6.1 Copying originals of mixed sizes ("Mixed Original" setting) Originals of different sizes can be loaded together into the ADF to be fed and scanned one by one automatically. 1 Slide the lateral guides of the ADF to fit the size of the largest page. 2 Align the originals as the references so that the side to be scanned faces up. 3 Place the original in the original feed tray in the order to be scanned with the side to be scanned faces up. – Slide the guides against the edges of the original. – Load the original pages into the ADF so that the top of the pages is toward the left side of the machine. 751/601 1-13 Before use 1 4 In the main screen, touch the Original Settings tab. The Original Settings screen appears. 5 Touch [Mixed Original]. – To cancel the "Mixed Original" setting, touch [Mixed Original] again to deselect it. 1.6.2 Loading folded originals ("Z-Folded Original" setting) If folded originals are loaded into the ADF to be copied, the original size is correctly detected. 2 Note Load the original into the ADF. The length of the first page of the original is detected, and all pages of the original are scanned at that size. 2 Reminder Unfold folded originals before loading them into the ADF. If the original is copied without being unfolded, a paper misfeed may occur. 1 Before use 1-14 751/601 1 Position the original to be copied. 2 In the main screen, touch the Original Settings tab. The Original Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [Z-Folded Original]. – To cancel the "Z-Folded Original" setting, touch [Z-Folded Original] again to deselect it. 751/601 1-15 Before use 1 1.6.3 Selecting the original orientation (Original Direction settings) When copying double-sided originals or making double-sided copies or combined copies, specify the original orientation, otherwise the copies may not be printed in the correct page order or correct front and back page arrangement. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 1-10. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine]. Otherwise, touch the Original Settings tab. Setting Description Select this setting for an original loaded with the top toward the back of this machine. Select this setting for an original loaded with the top toward the front of this machine. Select this setting for an original loaded into the ADF with the top of the original toward the left side of this machine. Select this setting for an original placed on the original glass with the top of the original toward the right side of this machine. Select this setting for an original loaded into the ADF with the top of the original toward the right side of this machine. Select this setting for an original placed on the original glass with the top of the original toward the left side of this machine. 1 Before use 1-16 751/601 3 Touch [Original Direction]. From the Duplex/Combine screen From the Original Settings screen The Original Direction screen appears. 4 Touch the button for the orientation of the loaded original, and then touch [OK]. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. 751/601 1-17 Before use 1 1.6.4 Selecting the position of the binding margin (Original Binding Position/Binding Position settings) If a double-sided original is loaded into the ADF, specify the position of the top of the back side of the original by specifying the binding margin position for the original. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 1-10. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine]. Otherwise touch the Original Settings tab. Setting Description Left Bind Left Select this setting if the original is loaded with the binding margin at the left. Top Select this setting if the original that is loaded has a binding margin at the top. Right Bind Right Select this setting if the original is loaded with the binding margin at the right. Auto With this setting, the binding margin is set at the top or at the left. Select this setting to automatically select the position of the binding margin. If the original length is 297 mm or less, a binding position along the long side of the original is selected. If the original length is more than 297 mm, a binding position along the short side of the original is selected. 1 Before use 1-18 751/601 3 In the Duplex/Combine screen, touch [Original Binding Pos.]. Otherwise, touch [Binding Position] in the Original Settings screen. From the Duplex/Combine screen From the Original Settings screen 751/601 1-19 Before use 1 4 Touch the button for the desired binding margin position, and then touch [OK]. From the Original Binding Position screen From the Binding Position screen – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. 1 Before use 1-20 751/601 2 Using copy functions 751/601 2-3 Using copy functions 2 2 Using copy functions 2.1 General copy operation 2 Note For details on the copy operation, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. This section contains information on the general operation for making copies. 1 Press the [Copy] key in the control panel, and then press the [Enlarge Display] key. The Copy mode screen appears in Enlarge Display mode. 2 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 1-10. 3 Specify the desired copy settings. – For details on specifying original settings, refer to page 1-12. – For details on selecting the Paper settings, refer to page 2-5. – For details on selecting the Zoom setting, refer to page 2-7. – For details on selecting the original and copy settings, refer to page 2-9. – For details on selecting a Combine setting, refer to page 2-12. – For details on selecting Finishing settings, refer to page 2-14. – For details on specifying settings to not rotate the image, refer to page 2-20. – For details on selecting the original image quality, refer to page 2-21. – For details on selecting a copy density setting, refer to page 2-23. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 4 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. – If the number of copies was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad, and then specify the correct number of copies. 2 Using copy functions 2-4 751/601 5 Press the [Start] key. 751/601 2-5 Using copy functions 2 2.2 Selecting the Paper settings The paper size can be selected automatically according to the original size or it can be specified manually. Specify the paper size according to the corresponding procedure, depending on the desired copy settings. 2.2.1 Automatically selecting the paper size ("Auto" Paper setting) The size of the loaded original is detected, and copies are produced using paper of the same size. If the "Full Size" Zoom setting was specified, paper of the same size as the original is selected. If the zoom ratio was increased or decreased, a paper size that corresponds to the specified zoom ratio is automatically selected. 2 Note The "Auto Zoom" setting and the "Auto" Paper setting cannot both be selected at the same time. If the "Auto Paper Select" was selected at the "Auto Zoom" setting, the Zoom screen appears. Touch the button for the desired zoom ratio. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Touch [Auto]. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Using copy functions 2-6 751/601 2.2.2 Manually selecting the desired paper size The paper tray loaded with paper of the desired size can be selected manually. By also selecting the Auto Zoom setting, the most appropriate zoom ratio is selected based on the size of the loaded original and the specified paper size. 2 Note Load the papers of the appropriate size into the paper tray in advance. For details on loading paper, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Select the paper tray loaded with paper of the desired size. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 751/601 2-7 Using copy functions 2 2.3 Specifying a Zoom setting The zoom ratio can be set in order to make a copy on paper with a size different than the original or to enlarge or reduce the size of the copy image. The zoom ratio can be specified in any of the following ways. *1 The "Auto Zoom" setting and the "Auto" Paper setting cannot both be selected at the same time. If the "Auto Zoom" was selected at the "Auto Paper Select" setting, the Paper screen appears. Touch the button for the desired paper. *2 When selecting a Reduce setting or a programmed zoom ratio, "Minimal" can be selected. Touch [Minimal] to produce a copy with the original image slightly reduced (93.0%) and centered in the paper. The zoom ratio of the "Minimal" setting can be changed (between 90.0% and 99.9%). For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. *3 The programmed zoom ratios can be changed. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. Follow the procedure described below to specify the Zoom setting. Setting Description Auto Zoom*1 The most appropriate zoom ratio is automatically selected based on the size of the loaded original and the specified paper size. Full Size A copy that is the same size as the original (100.0%) is produced. Enlarge The most suitable enlargement zoom ratios for copying from common standard original sizes to standard paper sizes are preset. Reduce*2 The most suitable reduction zoom ratios for copying from common standard original sizes to standard paper sizes are preset. Zoom By using the keypad, a zoom ratio between 25.0% and 400.0% can be typed in directly without changing the height-to-width ratio. Set Zoom Ratio*2*3 Programmed zoom ratios can be recalled to be used again for copying. 2 Using copy functions 2-8 751/601 2.3.1 Selecting a zoom ratio 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the desired zoom ratio. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. – If "Enlarge", "Reduce" or "Set Zoom Ratio" was selected, select the desired zoom ratio, and then touch [OK]. – If "Zoom" was selected, use the keypad to type in the desired zoom ratio, and then touch [OK]. – Touch [+] to enlarge the zoom ratio, and touch [-] to reduce the zoom ratio in 0.1% increments. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 751/601 2-9 Using copy functions 2 2.4 Selecting original and copy settings The type of original and copy can be specified. The following original and copy settings are available. *1 If "1 > 2" or "2 > 2" is selected, specify the binding margin position for the copy and the orientation of the loaded original, otherwise the copies will not be printed as desired. For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation (Original Direction settings)" on page 1-15. *2 If "2 > 1" or "2 > 2" is selected, select the position of the binding margin and the orientation of the loaded original, otherwise the copies will not be printed as desired. For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation (Original Direction settings)" on page 1-15. For details on specifying the binding margin position of the original, refer to "Selecting the position of the binding margin (Original Binding Position/Binding Position settings)" on page 1-17. ! Detail When the original is scanned from the original glass using the "1 > 2", "2 > 1" or "2 > 2" settings, the scanned pages are stored and printed together. Follow the procedures described below to select original and copy settings. Setting Description 1 > 1 Select this setting to produce single-sided copies from single-sided originals. 1 > 2*1 Select this setting to produce one double-sided copy from two single-sided originals. 2 > 1*2 Select this setting to produce two single-sided copies from one double-sided original. 2 > 2*1*2 Select this setting to produce double-sided copies from double-sided originals. 2 Using copy functions 2-10 751/601 2.4.1 Selecting single-sided or double-sided copies 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine]. The Duplex/Combine screen appears. 2 Touch [Original > Copy]. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Duplex Settings screen appears. 751/601 2-11 Using copy functions 2 3 Touch the button for the desired settings, and then touch [OK]. – If "1 > 2" or "2 > 2" is selected, touch [Output Bind Direction], select the binding position for the copy, and then touch [OK]. – If "Auto" is selected, the binding margin is set at the top or at the left. The binding position is automatically determined according to the orientation of the loaded original. If the original length is 297 mm or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the original length is more than 297 mm, a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected. 4 Touch [Close]. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Using copy functions 2-12 751/601 2.5 Selecting a combined copy setting Two original images can be combined and printed on a single page, reducing paper use. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine]. The Duplex/Combine screen appears. 2 Touch [Combine]. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Combine screen appears. 751/601 2-13 Using copy functions 2 3 Touch [2in1], and then touch [OK]. 4 Touch [Close]. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Using copy functions 2-14 751/601 2.6 Selecting Finishing settings Various settings can be selected for sorting and finishing copies fed into the output tray. The following Finishing settings are available. *1 If no finisher is installed and all of the following conditions are met, printed copies can be fed out and sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern. A4- or B5-size paper is used. Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one paper tray and with the v orientation in another tray. The "Auto" Paper setting is selected. The "Auto" Paper setting is not selected when the "Mixed Original" setting is selected. *2 The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. *3 The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit or Z folding unit is installed with the optional finisher. *4 The number of punched holes differs depending on the country (region) where the unit is installed. For details, consult your service representative. *5 The Half-Fold, Center Staple & Fold and Tri-Folding settings are available only if the optional Finisher FS- 610 is installed. *6The Z-Fold setting is available only if the Z folding unit is installed with the optional finisher. 2 Note Certain finishing settings cannot be used together. Follow the procedures described below to select Finishing settings. Setting Description Collate (By Set) Select this setting to separate each set of a multi-page original. Group Select this setting to separate the copies of each page in a multi-page original. Offset*1 Select this setting to feed out and sort printed copies in an alternating crisscross pattern if the sorting conditions are met when no finisher is installed. Select this setting to feed out and stack the printed copies on top of each other with each set shifted to separate it when a finisher is installed. Face Up The copies are output with their front sides facing up. Staple*2 Select one of these settings to bind the printed copies with staples. "Corner" or "2 Position" can be selected. Punch*3*4 Select one of these settings to punch holes in the copies for filing them. Half-Fold*5 Select this setting to fold copies in half before feeding them out. Center Staple & Fold*5 Select this setting to staple copies at two places along the center before feeding them out. Tri-Fold*5 Select this setting to fold copies in three before feeding them out. Z-Fold*6 Select this setting to fold copies in half along the center, and additionally mountainfold one of the halves before feeding them out. 751/601 2-15 Using copy functions 2 2.6.1 Selecting the finishing method 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 2 Select the desired Finishing settings. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Using copy functions 2-16 751/601 2.6.2 Selecting Staple/Punch settings 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. 2 Touch [Staple/Punch]. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Staple/Punch screen appears. 751/601 2-17 Using copy functions 2 3 Touch the button for the desired settings, and then touch [Position Setting]. 4 Select the desired position. – Touch [Auto] to automatically determine the stapling or hole-punching position according to the orientation of the loaded original. The paper is stapled or holes are punched along the long side of the paper if the original length is 297 mm or less or along the short side of the paper if the original length is more than 297 mm. When the "2 Position" Staple setting is selected 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note The number of punched holes differs depending on the country (region) where the unit is installed. For details, consult your service representative. 2 Using copy functions 2-18 751/601 2.6.3 Selecting a folding or binding setting 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. 2 Touch [Fold/Bind]. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Fold/Bind screen appears. 3 Select the desired settings. – To cancel the setting, touch [No]. 751/601 2-19 Using copy functions 2 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Using copy functions 2-20 751/601 2.7 Selecting not to rotate the image Copies can be printed with the image not rotated to fit the orientation of the loaded paper. 2 Note Depending on the paper size and zoom ratio, some parts of the image may be lost. Follow the procedure described below to select the setting to not rotate the image. 1 Touch [Auto Rotate OFF]. – To cancel the setting for not rotating the image, touch [Auto Rotate OFF] again. 751/601 2-21 Using copy functions 2 2.8 Selecting the quality of the original Select an original quality setting. Select the setting for the original type to better adjust the copy quality. The following Original Type settings are available. Follow the procedure described below to select an Original Type setting. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 1-10. 2 Touch the Original Settings tab. The Original Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [Original Type]. The Original Type screen appears. Setting Description Text Select this setting when copying originals containing only text. Dot Matrix Original Select this setting when copying originals containing only text that appears faint (such as that written with a pencil). Text/Photo Select this setting when copying originals containing both text and photos. Photo Select this setting when copying originals containing only photos (halftones). 2 Using copy functions 2-22 751/601 4 Touch the button for the quality setting most appropriate for the loaded original. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. 5 Touch [OK]. The Original Settings screen appears again. 751/601 2-23 Using copy functions 2 2.9 Selecting the density settings Specify the copy density and background density. Adjust to the best density according to the status of the originals. The following density adjustments are available. Follow the procedures described below to select the density settings. 2.9.1 Adjusting the print density (Density settings) 1 Touch [Density/Background] on the Basic screen. The Density/Background screen appears. 2 Touch [Density]. The Density screen appears. Parameter Description Density The print image density can be adjusted to one of nine levels. Background Removal The density of the background color of the original can be adjusted to one of nine levels. 2 Using copy functions 2-24 751/601 3 Select the desired Density setting. – Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level. – To select the center setting (default setting), touch [Standard]. – Touch [Auto] to have the machine detect the density of the original image and automatically select the appropriate exposure for the copy. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. 2.9.2 Adjusting the background density (Background Removal settings) 1 Touch [Density/Background] on the Basic screen. The Density/Background screen appears. 751/601 2-25 Using copy functions 2 2 Touch [Background Removal]. The Background Removal screen appears. 3 Select the desired Background Removal setting. – Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level. – To select the center setting (default setting), touch [Standard]. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Using copy functions 2-26 751/601 2.10 Selecting the Paper settings 2.10.1 Selecting a Paper Type setting for the bypass tray If paper other than plain paper, such as OHP transparencies or label sheets, is loaded in the bypass tray, be sure to change the paper type setting as described below. 2 Note A paper type for the other trays than the bypass tray can be selected in the User setting. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. 2 Reminder If special paper is loaded into the bypass tray, be sure to select the corresponding paper type, otherwise a paper misfeed may occur. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the bypass tray, and then touch [Change Settings]. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. – To specify a special paper for any paper tray other than the bypass tray, touch the button for the corresponding paper tray. – If a setting for special paper is selected for the bypass tray, that tray is not selected automatically with the "Auto" Paper setting. 751/601 2-27 Using copy functions 2 3 Touch [Paper Type]. 4 Select the appropriate setting for the type of special paper that is loaded. Touch the button for the desired paper type. – To print on thin paper, tab paper, fine paper, recycled paper and label sheets, touch [ ] or [ ]. – [Tab Paper] cannot be selected if "Paper Size" is set to "Standard Size", "Custom Size" or "Wide Paper". 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Using copy functions 2-28 751/601 2.10.2 Selecting a Paper Size setting for the bypass tray The paper size can be set for the bypass tray so that it can be used with the specified paper size. 2 Note For details on loading paper, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. The paper size can be selected for the bypass tray in any of the following ways. *1In order to specify a custom paper size in Enlarge Display mode, the custom paper size must first be stored before entering Enlarge Display mode. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. 2 Note For details on specifying a paper size for the other trays than the bypass tray, refer to the User's Guide [Copy Operations]. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. Setting Description Auto Detect Select this setting to automatically detect the size of the paper loaded into the bypass tray. Standard Size A standard paper size can be set so that the paper tray is used specifically with the selected paper size. Custom Size*1 A custom paper size can be set so that the paper tray is used specifically with the selected paper size. Wide Paper A wide paper size can be set so that the paper tray is used specifically with the selected paper size. 751/601 2-29 Using copy functions 2 2 Touch the button for the bypass tray, and then touch [Change Settings]. – To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen]. 3 Touch [Paper Size]. 4 Touch either [Auto Detect] or select the desired paper size. 2 Using copy functions 2-30 751/601 – If a button other than [Auto Detect] was touched, select the desired paper size, and then touch [OK]. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. The Basic screen appears again. ! Detail In order to specify a custom paper size in Enlarge Display mode, the custom paper size must first be stored before entering Enlarge Display mode. [Standard Size], [Custom Size] or [Wide Paper] cannot be selected if "Paper Type" is set to "Tab Paper". 751/601 2-31 Using copy functions 2 2.11 Scanning the next original to be copied while a copy job is being printed (next job reservation) The settings for the next copy job can be specified and the original can be scanned while a job is being printed so that it can be printed once the current copy job is finished. ! Detail Up to 51 copy jobs, including the current copy job, can be queued. A copy job can be reserved after scanning of the loaded original is finished. The next job cannot be reserved while an original is being scanned. 1 If the message "Ready to accept another job." appears while printing the current job, an original can be loaded, and copy settings can be specified for the next copy job. – If the "Copy Operating Screen" parameter was set to "Yes", touch [Next Copy Job] in the screen that appears during printing to display the Basic screen. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 1-10. 2 Press the [Start] key. 3 After the current job is finished, the next copy job begins. 2 Using copy functions 2-32 751/601 2.12 Pausing scanning/printing Follow the procedure described below to temporarily stop scanning the original and stop the printing operation. 1 Press the [Stop] key while an original is being scanned or a job is being printed. – Scanning/printing temporarily stops. – If an original is being scanned for a job, pressing the [Stop] key temporarily stops scanning. The message "Job has stopped." appears. 2 To continue all temporarily stopped jobs, press the [Start] key. – To delete a temporarily stopped job, select the job that you wish to delete, and then touch [Delete]. – Select only one job at a time to be deleted. 751/601 2-33 Using copy functions 2 2.13 Printing a proof to check the settings (Proof Copy) Before printing a large number of copies, a single proof copy can first be printed so that it can be checked. This prevents copy errors from occurring. 2 Note When printing a proof copy, specify multiple copies. This feature cannot be used if the "Group" setting is selected. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 1-10. 2 Select the desired copy settings. 3 Press the [Proof Copy] key. – If the original was loaded on the original glass, touch [Finish], and then press the [Start] key. A single proof copy is printed. 4 Check the proof copy. – To change the copy settings, press the [C] (clear) key or the [Reset] key, and then change the settings. 5 Touch [Print]. The remaining copies are queued as a copy job. 2 Using copy functions 2-34 751/601 3 Using fax/scan functions 751/601 3-3 Using fax/scan functions 3 3 Using fax/scan functions 3.1 General fax/scan operation 2 Note For details on performing fax and scan operations, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. ! Detail Specify the fax settings and network settings and register destinations before entering Enlarge Display mode. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations] and the User’s Guide [Network Administrator]. This section contains information on the general operation for sending faxes and scans. 1 Press the [Fax/Scan] key in the control panel, and then press the [Enlarge Display] key. The Fax/Scan mode screen appears in Enlarge Display mode. 2 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to page 1-10. 3 Specify the destination. – For details on specifying destinations, refer to page 3-5. – To erase the entered destination, press the [C] (clear) key. 4 Specify the necessary scanning settings. – For details on specifying scanning settings, refer to page 3-13. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-4 751/601 5 Press the [Start] key. – If the machine is set to display the transmission result report screen, a screen appears, requesting confirmation to print the transmission result report. To print the transmission result report, touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. – To stop the transmission, press the [Stop] key. Scanning of the original begins, and then the fax is sent. ! Detail If the "Destination Check Display Function" parameter was set to "ON", the Destination Settings screen appears. Check the destinations, and then touch [Send]. If the machine is set to print the transmission result report, the transmission result report is printed if the transmission could not be completed. Pressing the [Stop] key during scanning temporarily stops the scan operation. 751/601 3-5 Using fax/scan functions 3 3.2 Specifying a destination ! Detail Destinations must first be registered in Utility mode. Fax transmission destinations can also be registered. For details on registering destinations, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. The scan data can be sent in any of the following ways. Network Scan operations Fax operations Network Fax operations ! Detail Multiple destinations can be specified at the same time. To send or receive faxes manually, touch [Off-Hook]. When this button is touched, the dial tone can be heard from the speaker. For more details, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. This feature is not available with Internet faxing or IP address faxing. Also, if "Confirm Address (TX)" is specified in the administrator settings, [Off-Hook] cannot be used. The procedure for specifying the destination where scan data is to be sent is described below. Method Description Scan to E-mail The Scan to E-Mail operation is used to send scan data to a specified E-mail address as a file attachment. Scan to FTP In a network environment with an FTP server, scan data can be sent to a specified folder in the FTP server on the network. This function is suitable for transmitting large-sized data, such as high-resolution data. Scan to SMB Scan data can be sent directly to a specific computer on the network. In order to perform a Scan to SMB operation, first specify shared file settings in Windows on the computer receiving the data. Scan to File (WebDAV) In a network environment with a WebDAV server, scan data can be sent to a specified folder in the WebDAV server on the network. WebDAV is based on extended specifications of HTTP, and therefore the security technology of HTTP can be used. These settings ensure safer file transmission by encrypting communication with the WebDAV server using SSL. Method Description Fax transmission The scan data can be sent to the fax number specified for the destination. Method Description Internet fax transmission The scan data can be sent as an E-mail attachment (TIFF format) through an intranet (company network) or the Internet. IP address fax transmission Faxes can be sent on an IP network. Scan data can be sent to the IP address or host name specified for the destination. This operation can only be used through an intranet. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-6 751/601 3.2.1 Selecting a destination from the address book Follow the procedure described below to select an already registered destination. Touch the button for the desired destination in the Address Book screen to select a destination. A destination can be searched for by the destination type or the destination name. 1 In the Address Book screen, touch [Other Dest.]. The Other Destinations screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the desired destination type. 751/601 3-7 Using fax/scan functions 3 – To select the index characters, touch [Next ]. – To select a destination from registered group, touch [Group] in Address Type. To select all destinations registered with the selected group, touch [Select All] in the Group Details screen. To cancel all of the selected destinations, touch [Reset]. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. 3 Touch the button for the desired destination, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel a selection, touch the button for a selected destination again. 4 Touch [Close]. 3.2.2 Selecting a destination from the job log Follow the procedure described below to select a destination from the job log. 2 Note This feature is not available with Internet faxing or IP address faxing. If "Confirm Address (TX)" is specified in the administrator settings, Job History tab cannot be used. For details on the settings of "Confirm Address (TX)", refer to the User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-8 751/601 1 Touch the Job History tab. The Job History list appears. 2 Select the desired destination. – The last five destinations where a transmission was sent are displayed. – To cancel a selection, touch the button for a selected destination again. 3.2.3 Selecting a destination with an LDAP search Follow the procedure described below to search in the LDAP server and select the destination. ! Detail In order to perform an LDAP search, LDAP must be enabled and an LDAP server must be registered. For details on specifying LDAP settings, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Administrator]. If "Manual Destination Input" in Administrator mode is set to "Restrict", the LDAP search function cannot be used. For details on specifying the setting for the "Manual Destination Input" parameter, refer to the User's Guide [Network Administrator]. If user authentication is applied, whether or not to accept "Manual Destination Input" is specified for each registered user. For details on the user registration, refer to the User's Guide [Copy Operations]. 751/601 3-9 Using fax/scan functions 3 1 Touch the Address Search tab. – If multiple LDAP servers are specified, select the server to be searched, and then touch [OK]. 2 Select the search method. – To specify a search word, touch [Search]. To specify multiple search conditions, touch [Advanced Search]. – When there is only one LDAP server 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-10 751/601 – When there are multiple LDAP servers – Authentication may be necessary, depending on the LDAP server that is specified. 3 Specify the search conditions, and then touch [Start Search]. For a simple search For an advanced search The search results are displayed. 751/601 3-11 Using fax/scan functions 3 4 Touch the button for the desired destination, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel a selection, touch the button for a selected destination again. 3.2.4 Directly typing in the number Follow the procedure described below to directly type in the fax number or the registration number for an address book destination during a fax transmission. 2 Note If "Manual Destination Input" in Administrator mode is set to "Restrict", a fax number cannot be entered. For details on specifying the setting for the "Manual Destination Input" parameter, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Administrator]. If user authentication is applied, whether or not to accept "Manual Destination Input" is specified for each registered user. For details on the user registration, refer to the User's Guide [Copy Operations]. In Enlarge Display mode, SIP faxes cannot be transmitted by directly typing in the number. 1 Touch [Fax Number]. The Fax Number screen appears. 2 Using the control panel keypad or the keypad that appears in the touch panel, type in the fax number. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-12 751/601 – Otherwise, touch [Enter Registered No.], use the keypad to type in destination registration number, and then touch [Apply]. – To specify an additional recipient, touch [Next Destination], and then enter the number. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. – When typing in a fax number: [Tone]: If pulse dialing is being used, touch this button to send a push-button tone. This is used when a fax information service is being used. "T" appears in the screen. If pulse dialing is being used, use [ ] to switch to a push-button tone. [Pause]: Touch this button to insert a pause when dialing. Touch [Pause] once to insert a 1-second pause. In addition, multiple pauses can be entered. "P" appears in the screen. If the PBX (private branch exchange) connection is enabled, touch [Pause] after the outside line access code (for example, "0") for reliable dialing when transmitting from an inside line to an outside line. "P" appears in the screen. [–]: Touch this button to insert the dash as separator symbol while dialing. This has no effect on the dialing. "–" appears in the screen. – To change a character in the entered text, touch [ ] and [ ] to move the cursor to the character to be changed, and then touch [Delete]. 3 Touch [OK]. – If a destination registration number is entered, touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 2 Note If "Confirm Address (TX)" is specified to enter fax number directly, a screen appears prompting you to enter the fax number again. 751/601 3-13 Using fax/scan functions 3 3.3 Specifying scanning settings (Scan Settings) Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen, and then specify the original scanning settings. 3.3.1 Simplex/Duplex Select the appropriate ADF scanning method according to your original. The following scanning methods are available. 1 Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. The Scan Settings screen appears. 2 Touch [Simplex/Duplex]. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Simplex/Duplex screen appears. Setting Description 1-Sided Select this setting to scan a single-sided original. 2-Sided Select this setting to scan a double-sided original. Cover + 2-Sided Select this setting to scan an original where the first page is single-sided and the remaining pages are double-sided. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-14 751/601 3 Select the scanning method. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. 3.3.2 Original Type Select the appropriate Original Type setting according to your original. The following Original Type settings are available. 1 Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. The Scan Settings screen appears. Setting Description Text Select this setting when scanning originals consisting only of text. If an original containing photos is scanned using this setting, the halftones of the photo will not be reproduced and the entire photo will appear black. Text/Photo Select this setting when scanning originals consisting of both text and photos (halftones). This setting should be selected for originals containing text and photos combined in a single page or over multiple pages. Photo Select this setting when scanning originals consisting of only photos (halftones). Dot Matrix Original Select this setting when scanning originals with faint text (such as that written in pencil). 751/601 3-15 Using fax/scan functions 3 2 Touch [Original Type]. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Original Type screen appears. 3 Touch the button for the quality setting most appropriate for the loaded original. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. 3.3.3 Resolution Select the detailedness for scanning originals. The following Resolution settings are available. Setting Description 200 × 100 (Standard) Select this setting to reduce the transmission time. 200 × 200 (Fine) Select this setting when scanning regular originals. 300 × 300 dpi Select this setting to scan originals at a higher resolution than that of regular originals. 400 × 400 (Super Fine) Select this setting when scanning originals with small print or with illustrations. 600 × 600 (Ultra Fine) Select this setting when scanning originals with particularly fine print or with detailed illustrations. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-16 751/601 1 Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. The Scan Settings screen appears. 2 Touch [Resolution]. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Resolution screen appears. 751/601 3-17 Using fax/scan functions 3 3 Select the resolution. – A more finely scanned original has more information to be sent, therefore, the transmission time increases. – If "600 × 600 (Ultra Fine)" or "400 × 400 (Super Fine)" is selected, the fax is sent with a resolution appropriate for the recipient’s machine if it cannot receive a fax with the specified resolution. – "300 × 300 dpi" is not available with fax functions. "300 × 300 dpi" can be selected; however, the setting will change to 200 × 200 dpi when the fax is sent. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. 3.3.4 Density Select the appropriate Density setting according to your original. The density can be adjusted to one of nine levels. 1 Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. The Scan Settings screen appears. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-18 751/601 2 Touch [Density]. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Density screen appears. 3 Select the desired Density setting. – Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level. – To select the center setting (default setting), touch [Std.]. – Touch [Auto] to have the machine detect the density of the original image and automatically select the appropriate exposure for the copy. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. 3.3.5 File Type Select the file format for saving the scan data. The following file formats are available. 2 Note For fax transmissions and Internet fax transmissions, the file type is fixed to the TIFF format. In order to save the data in the XPS format, the optional hard disk is required. Setting Description PDF Select this setting to save the data in the PDF format. TIFF Select this setting to save data in the TIFF format. XPS Select this setting to save the data in the XPS format. 751/601 3-19 Using fax/scan functions 3 1 Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. The Scan Settings screen appears. 2 Touch [File Type]. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. The File Type screen appears. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-20 751/601 3 Select the file format and the page setting. – If "Single Page" under "Scan Setting" is selected, a file is created for each page of the original. – If "Multi Page" is selected under "Scan Setting", a single file is created from the entire scanned original. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. 3.3.6 Background Removal The scanning density of the original background can be adjusted. When originals printed on colored paper are scanned in color, the background may become black. In that case, the density of the background can be adjusted. 1 Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. The Scan Settings screen appears. 751/601 3-21 Using fax/scan functions 3 2 Touch [Background Removal]. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Background Removal screen appears. 3 Adjust the density as desired. – Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level. – To select the center setting (default setting), touch [Standard]. – Touch [Auto] to automatically adjust the level of the background density according to the original being copied. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. 3.3.7 Scan Size Specify the size of paper to be scanned. The scan size can be specified with any of the following methods. Settings Description Auto Select this setting to detect the size of the first page in the loaded original. Full Scan Select this setting to scan the entire page of the original. Even if text is printed to the edges of the original, it can be scanned without being cut off. Metric Sizes Select a preset paper size (such as A4 or B5) and orientation. Inch Sizes Select a preset paper size and orientation in inch sizes. Other Select a preset paper size and orientation in a size other than metric or inch sizes. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-22 751/601 1 Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. The Scan Settings screen appears. 2 Touch [Scan Size]. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Scan Size screen appears. 3 Select the desired size and orientation. 751/601 3-23 Using fax/scan functions 3 – If [Metric Sizes], [Inch Sizes] or [Other] was touched, select the desired paper size, and then touch [OK]. – To scan the entire page of the original, touch [Full Bleed Scan]. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. 3.3.8 Original Settings Select the binding position and orientation of the original. These functions can be used together. 2 Note [Original Direction] is not available with fax function. 1 Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. The Scan Settings screen appears. Parameter Description Original Direction Select the orientation of the original. After the original is scanned, the data is processed so that it is correctly oriented. For details on selecting the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation (Original Direction settings)" on page 1-15. Binding Position Select the binding position, for example, when holes are punched in the original or the original is stapled. In addition, specify the binding position when a double-sided original is loaded. This adjusts the scan of double-sided originals so that the binding position is not reversed. Left: Select this setting for an original with a binding margin on the left side. Top: Select this setting for an original with a binding margin at the top. Auto: The binding margin is on the long side if the page is 297 mm or less, or it is on the short side if the page is more than 297 mm. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-24 751/601 2 Touch [Original Settings]. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. The Original Settings screen appears. 3 Select the original settings. – Touching [Original Direction] displays the Original Direction screen. Touch the button for the desired orientation, and then touch [OK]. 751/601 3-25 Using fax/scan functions 3 – Touching [Binding Position] displays the Binding Position screen. Touch the button for the desired original binding position, and then touch [OK]. 4 Touch [Close], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen]. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-26 751/601 3.4 Using a program "Program" refers to the set of destinations and scan settings that are registered together. These are convenient for frequently sending transmissions with the same settings. The following procedure describes how to send data by selecting a program that has been registered in advance. 2 Note If no destinations are registered with programs, destinations cannot be selected. For details on registering programs, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 1 With the Fax/Scan mode screen displayed, press the [Mode Memory] key. The Recall Scan/Fax Program screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the desired program. – Touch [Page List] to select the page of programs to be displayed. – Touch [ Previous Page] or [Next Page ] to display the previous or next page of programs. – To scroll through the page, touch [ ] or [ ]. – To cancel the setting, touch the button again to deselect it. – Only one program can be selected. 3 Touch [OK] or [Main Screen]. – To specify multiple destinations, add a destination. For details, refer to "Specifying a destination" on page 3-5. 751/601 3-27 Using fax/scan functions 3 3.5 Checking the destinations The specified destinations can be checked. In addition, destinations can be removed or their information can be checked. 1 In the Fax/Scan mode screen, touch [Dest. Settings]. The Destination Settings screen appears, and the specified destinations can be checked. 2 Select the desired destination from the list of destinations. – To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen]. 3 Using fax/scan functions 3-28 751/601 3 Touch [Details], and then check the destination details. – To delete a destination, select a destination, and then touch [Delete] to display a message requesting confirmation to delete the destination. 4 Touch [Close]. 4 Logging on and logging off 751/601 4-3 Logging on and logging off 4 4 Logging on and logging off 4.1 When a logon screen appears 2 Note For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. 4.1.1 When the screen to enter the user name appears If the message "Enter User Name and password, and then touch [Login] or press the [Access] key." appears, user authentication settings have been specified on this machine. If user authentication settings have been applied, this machine can only be used by users who enter their user name and password. When the following screen appears, type in the user name and password. For a user name and password, contact the machine’s administrator. 1 Touch [User Name]. – The screen that appears differs depending on the Authentication method settings in the Administrator Settings. – If an authentication unit (biometric type) has been installed, place your finger on the authentication unit (biometric type) to display the Basic screen. For details on performing authentication using the authentication unit (biometric type) and registering information, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. – If the authentication unit (IC card type) has been installed, place the IC card on the authentication unit (IC card type) to complete authentication and display the Basic screen. For details on performing authentication using the authentication unit (IC card type) and registering information, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations]. – If [ User Name List] appears, the desired user name can be selected from the list. Touch [User Name List], touch the button for the desired user name to select it, and then touch [OK]. Continue with step 3. – If "Public User Access" on the General Settings screen is set to "Allow", users with no access to a user name and password can touch [Public User Access] to use this machine. – If external server authentication was selected as the user authentication method, [Server Name] appears. Touch [Server Name], and then select the desired server. 4 Logging on and logging off 4-4 751/601 2 Using the control panel keypad or the keyboard that appears in the touch panel, type in the user name, and then touch [OK]. – Touch [Shift] to change the characters that are displayed. – To change a character in the entered text, touch [ ] and [ ] to move the cursor to the character to be changed, touch [Delete], and then type in the desired letter or number. – To clear all entered text, press the [C] (clear) key. – To revert to the previously entered text, touch [Undo]. 3 Touch [Password]. 4 Using the control panel keypad or the keyboard that appears in the touch panel, type in the password, and then touch [OK]. – To return to the main screen without changing the settings, touch [Cancel]. 751/601 4-5 Logging on and logging off 4 5 Touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. – If account track settings have been applied in Administrator mode, the account track screen appears. However, if "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" in Administrator mode has been set to "Synchronize", the account track screen does not appear if the users and accounts are synchronized. The Basic screen appears. 6 When you are finished performing the desired operations, press the [Access] key. A message appears, requesting confirmation to log off. 7 Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. The main screen appears again. ! Detail It is possible to specify so that the logging-off confirmation screen does not appear. For details, refer to the User's Guide [Copy Operations]. 4.1.2 When the screen to enter the account name and password appears If the message "Enter Account Name and password, and then touch [Login] or press the [Access] key." appears, account track settings have been specified on this machine. If account track settings have been applied, this machine can only be used by users who enter their account name and password. When the following screen appears, type in the account name and password. For an account name and password, contact the machine’s administrator. ! Detail The "Account Track Input Method" in the Administrator Settings is set to "Password Only", only "Password" is displayed in the authentication screen. The password can be directly entered in the authentication screen using the keypad. If the password consists of numerals only, touching [Login] or pressing the [Access] key allows logging on without displaying a keyboard screen. For details, refer to the User's Guide [Copy Operations]. 4 Logging on and logging off 4-6 751/601 1 Touch [Account Name]. – The screen that appears differs depending on the Authentication method settings in the Administrator Settings. 2 Using the control panel keypad or the keyboard that appears in the touch panel, type in the account name, and then touch [OK]. – Touch [Shift] to change the characters that are displayed. – To change a character in the entered text, touch [ ]and [ ] to move the cursor to the character to be changed, touch [Delete], and then type in the desired letter or number. – To clear all entered text, press the [C] (clear) key. – To revert to the previously entered text, touch [Undo]. 751/601 4-7 Logging on and logging off 4 3 Touch [Password]. 4 Using the control panel keypad or the keyboard that appears in the touch panel, type in the password, and then touch [OK]. – To return to the main screen without changing the settings, touch [Cancel]. 5 Touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. The Basic screen appears. 6 When you are finished performing the desired operations, press the [Access] key. A message appears, requesting confirmation to log off. 4 Logging on and logging off 4-8 751/601 7 Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. – The original screen appears again. The screen that appears differs depending on the Administrator mode settings that have been specified. ! Detail It is possible to specify so that the logging-off confirmation screen does not appear. For details, refer to the User's Guide [Copy Operations]. User’s Guide Copy Operations . bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Contents-1 Contents 1 Introduction 1.1 Available features............................................................................................................................ 1-3 1.2 Explanation of manual conventions .............................................................................................. 1-9 1.3 Descriptions of originals and paper ............................................................................................ 1-10 1.4 User manuals................................................................................................................................. 1-11 1.4.1 Printed manual ................................................................................................................................ 1-11 1.4.2 Introduction to the user manual DVD.............................................................................................. 1-11 2 Before making copies 2.1 Machine configuration.................................................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.1 Options.............................................................................................................................................. 2-3 2.1.2 External ............................................................................................................................................. 2-5 2.1.3 Internal............................................................................................................................................... 2-8 2.1.4 Large Capacity Unit LU-405............................................................................................................ 2-10 2.1.5 Large Capacity Unit LU-406............................................................................................................ 2-11 2.1.6 Finisher FS-524/Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505.................................................................................... 2-12 2.1.7 Finisher FS-525/Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505.................................................................................... 2-14 2.1.8 Finisher FS-610/Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505.................................................................................... 2-16 2.1.9 Z Folding Unit ZU-604/ZU-605 ....................................................................................................... 2-19 2.1.10 Post Inserter PI-504 ........................................................................................................................ 2-21 2.1.11 Shift Tray SF-602 ............................................................................................................................ 2-22 2.1.12 Output Tray OT-505 ........................................................................................................................ 2-22 2.1.13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101 ................................................................................. 2-23 2.1.14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201 .................................................................................... 2-23 2.1.15 Control panel................................................................................................................................... 2-24 2.1.16 Basic settings screens .................................................................................................................... 2-26 2.1.17 Icons that appear in the screen....................................................................................................... 2-28 2.2 Adjusting the angle of the control panel ..................................................................................... 2-29 2.2.1 To adjust the angle of the control panel.......................................................................................... 2-29 2.3 Turning on the main power and the auxiliary power.................................................................. 2-31 2.3.1 Turning on the machine................................................................................................................... 2-31 2.3.2 Scanning during warm-up............................................................................................................... 2-32 2.3.3 Turning off the machine .................................................................................................................. 2-33 2.3.4 Automatically clearing settings (Automatic panel reset) ................................................................. 2-34 2.3.5 Automatically canceling the mode screen (System Auto Reset)..................................................... 2-34 2.3.6 Automatically conserving energy (Low Power mode) ..................................................................... 2-34 2.3.7 Automatically conserving energy (Sleep mode) .............................................................................. 2-35 2.3.8 Manually conserving energy............................................................................................................ 2-36 2.3.9 Automatically turning the machine on/off (Weekly Timer)............................................................... 2-36 2.3.10 Controlling each user’s use of this machine (User Authentication)................................................. 2-38 2.3.11 Controlling each account’s use of this machine (Account Track) ................................................... 2-42 2.3.12 Controlling use of this machine with Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) .................................... 2-45 2.3.13 Controlling use of this machine with the Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) ................................. 2-47 2.4 Loading paper into the tray 1 or 2................................................................................................ 2-50 2.5 Loading paper into the tray 3 or 4 ............................................................................................... 2-51 2.6 Loading paper into the LCT (LU-405/LU-406)............................................................................. 2-52 2.7 Loading paper into the bypass tray ............................................................................................. 2-55 2.8 Loading paper of a different size into paper trays ..................................................................... 2-59 2.8.1 Changing the size of paper that is loaded ...................................................................................... 2-59 2.8.2 When 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 or A5-size thick paper is loaded into a paper tray.......................................... 2-60 Contents-2 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Basic copy operations 3.1 General copy operation................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.2 Operations that cannot be combined............................................................................................ 3-6 3.2.1 Operations where the setting specified last is given priority ............................................................. 3-6 3.2.2 Operations where the setting specified first is given priority............................................................. 3-8 3.3 Feeding the original ......................................................................................................................... 3-9 3.3.1 Loading the original into the ADF ...................................................................................................... 3-9 3.3.2 Placing the original on the original glass ......................................................................................... 3-10 3.3.3 Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting) ............................................. 3-11 3.3.4 Scanning a multi-page original from the original glass ................................................................... 3-15 3.4 Specifying original settings .......................................................................................................... 3-19 3.4.1 Specifying the original size ("Original Size" settings) ...................................................................... 3-19 3.4.2 Copying originals of mixed sizes ("Mixed Original" setting) ............................................................ 3-21 3.4.3 Loading folded (Z-folded) originals.................................................................................................. 3-23 3.4.4 Loading tab paper (Tab original settings) ........................................................................................ 3-24 3.4.5 Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)...................................................... 3-26 3.4.6 To select an original direction setting.............................................................................................. 3-27 3.4.7 Selecting the position of the binding margin ("Binding Position" settings) ..................................... 3-29 3.4.8 To select a binding position setting................................................................................................. 3-30 3.4.9 Changing scan settings for each original ........................................................................................ 3-32 3.5 Selecting a paper setting .............................................................................................................. 3-36 3.5.1 Automatically selecting the paper size ("Auto" paper setting) ........................................................ 3-36 3.5.2 Manually selecting the desired paper size ...................................................................................... 3-38 3.6 Specifying a zoom setting............................................................................................................. 3-39 3.6.1 Automatically selecting the zoom ratio ("Auto" zoom Setting)........................................................ 3-39 3.6.2 Specifying the zoom ratio of the original ("Full Size" setting).......................................................... 3-40 3.6.3 Typing in the zoom ratio (XY zoom setting) ..................................................................................... 3-41 3.6.4 Slightly reducing the copy ("Minimal" setting)................................................................................. 3-43 3.6.5 Selecting a preset zoom ratio (Enlarge and reduce settings) .......................................................... 3-44 3.6.6 Typing in separate X and Y zoom ratios (Individual zoom settings) ................................................ 3-45 3.6.7 Selecting a stored zoom ratio.......................................................................................................... 3-47 3.6.8 Storing the desired zoom ratio ........................................................................................................ 3-48 3.7 Selecting an original > copy setting............................................................................................. 3-50 3.7.1 Selecting single-sided copies.......................................................................................................... 3-51 3.7.2 Selecting double-sided copies ........................................................................................................ 3-52 3.8 Selecting a combined copy setting.............................................................................................. 3-55 3.8.1 Copying multiple original pages onto a single page (Combined copy settings) ............................. 3-57 3.9 Selecting the quality of the original ............................................................................................. 3-59 3.9.1 Loading originals with small print or photos ("Original Type" settings)........................................... 3-59 3.9.2 To select an original type setting..................................................................................................... 3-60 3.10 Selecting the density settings ...................................................................................................... 3-61 3.10.1 Adjusting the print density (Density settings) .................................................................................. 3-62 3.10.2 Adjusting the background density (Background removal settings) ................................................. 3-63 3.11 Selecting finishing settings........................................................................................................... 3-64 3.11.1 Separating copies by sets ("Sort" setting)....................................................................................... 3-66 3.11.2 Separating copies by pages ("Group" Setting)................................................................................ 3-67 3.11.3 Selecting the Output Tray................................................................................................................ 3-68 3.11.4 Outputting copies with their front sides facing up (Face up settings) ............................................. 3-69 3.11.5 Stapling copies (Staple settings) ..................................................................................................... 3-71 3.11.6 Punching holes in copies (Punch settings) ...................................................................................... 3-74 3.12 Selecting a folding setting ............................................................................................................ 3-77 3.12.1 Folding copies in half ("Half-Fold" setting) ...................................................................................... 3-78 3.12.2 Binding copies at the center ("Center Staple & Fold" setting)......................................................... 3-79 3.12.3 To fold copies in three ("Tri-Fold" setting)....................................................................................... 3-81 3.12.4 Z-Folding and outputting papers ("Z-Fold" setting) ........................................................................ 3-83 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Contents-3 3.13 Manually using the finisher........................................................................................................... 3-86 3.14 Selecting not to rotate the image ................................................................................................ 3-89 3.15 Scanning the next original to be copied while a copy job is being printed (next job reservation) .................................................................................................................... 3-90 3.16 Temporarily stopping scanning/printing..................................................................................... 3-91 3.17 Deleting a paused job ................................................................................................................... 3-92 4 Additional copy operations 4.1 Checking the copy settings (Check Job) ...................................................................................... 4-3 4.1.1 To check the settings ........................................................................................................................ 4-3 4.1.2 To change the settings...................................................................................................................... 4-5 4.2 Printing a proof to check the settings (Proof Copy) .................................................................... 4-6 4.3 Checking the print image as a preview image (Advanced Preview) .......................................... 4-9 4.3.1 Preview screen.................................................................................................................................. 4-9 4.3.2 Checking the advanced preview..................................................................................................... 4-13 4.4 Interrupting a copy job (Interrupt mode)..................................................................................... 4-15 4.5 Registering copy programs (Mode Memory).............................................................................. 4-16 4.5.1 Deleting a copy program................................................................................................................. 4-19 4.6 Copying with programmed copy settings (Mode Memory)....................................................... 4-20 4.7 Displaying function descriptions (Help) ...................................................................................... 4-22 4.7.1 Overview of help screens ................................................................................................................ 4-22 4.7.2 Displaying main help screens.......................................................................................................... 4-25 4.8 Specifying control panel settings (Accessibility mode)............................................................. 4-27 4.8.1 Displaying the accessibility setting screen...................................................................................... 4-27 4.8.2 Setting the "Touch Panel Adjustment" function.............................................................................. 4-27 4.8.3 Setting the "Key Repeat Start/Interval Time" functions .................................................................. 4-29 4.8.4 Setting the "System Auto Reset Confirmation" function ................................................................ 4-31 4.8.5 Setting the "Auto Reset Confirmation" function ............................................................................. 4-33 4.8.6 Setting the "Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation" function ............................................................ 4-35 4.8.7 Setting the "Message Display Time" function................................................................................. 4-37 4.8.8 Setting the "Sound Setting" functions ............................................................................................ 4-38 5 Troubleshooting 5.1 When an error code appears.......................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2 When the message "misfeed detected." appears........................................................................ 5-5 5.2.1 Location of paper misfeed and illustration........................................................................................ 5-6 5.2.2 Paper misfeed indications................................................................................................................. 5-7 5.2.3 Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 1 "1" .............................................................................................. 5-8 5.2.4 Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 2 "2" ............................................................................................ 5-11 5.2.5 Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 3 and tray 4 "3""4" ...................................................................... 5-12 5.2.6 Clearing a paper misfeed in the LCT (Large Capacity Unit)"5"....................................................... 5-14 5.2.7 Clearing a paper misfeed in the bypass tray "6"............................................................................. 5-15 5.2.8 Clearing a paper misfeed in the vertical transport section "7" ....................................................... 5-15 5.2.9 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "8"................................................................................. 5-16 5.2.10 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "9"................................................................................. 5-18 5.2.11 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "10"............................................................................... 5-20 5.2.12 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "11"............................................................................... 5-21 5.2.13 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "12"............................................................................... 5-23 5.2.14 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "13"............................................................................... 5-25 5.2.15 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADF "14" ...................................................................................... 5-27 5.2.16 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADF "15" ...................................................................................... 5-28 5.2.17 Clearing a paper misfeed in Finisher FS-524/FS-525 "16" "18"..................................................... 5-29 5.2.18 Clearing a paper misfeed in Finisher FS-610 "16" "18".................................................................. 5-34 5.2.19 Clearing a paper misfeed in the Shift Tray "16".............................................................................. 5-38 5.2.20 Clearing a paper misfeed in the Post Inserter "17"......................................................................... 5-39 Contents-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5.2.21 Clearing a paper misfeed in the Z Folding Unit "20" ....................................................................... 5-39 5.3 Simple troubleshooting................................................................................................................. 5-43 5.4 Main messages and their remedies............................................................................................. 5-47 6 Specifications 6.1 Specifications................................................................................................................................... 6-3 6.1.1 Main unit ............................................................................................................................................ 6-3 6.1.2 Automatic Document Feeder DF-614................................................................................................ 6-4 6.2 Option specifications ...................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.2.1 Large Capacity Unit LU-405 .............................................................................................................. 6-5 6.2.2 Large Capacity Unit LU-406 .............................................................................................................. 6-5 6.2.3 Finisher FS-524 ................................................................................................................................. 6-6 6.2.4 Finisher FS-525 ................................................................................................................................. 6-7 6.2.5 Finisher FS-610 ................................................................................................................................. 6-8 6.2.6 Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505................................................................................................................. 6-9 6.2.7 Z Folding Unit ZU-604/ZU-605.......................................................................................................... 6-9 6.2.8 Post Inserter PI-504......................................................................................................................... 6-10 6.2.9 Shift Tray SF-602............................................................................................................................. 6-10 6.2.10 Output Tray OT-505......................................................................................................................... 6-11 6.2.11 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101.................................................................................. 6-11 6.2.12 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201..................................................................................... 6-12 6.2.13 Other options................................................................................................................................... 6-12 7 Copy paper/originals 7.1 Copy paper ....................................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.1 Paper tray and equipment ................................................................................................................. 7-3 7.1.2 Paper weight...................................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.3 Paper Tray/Output Tray capacity ...................................................................................................... 7-4 7.1.4 Paper size .......................................................................................................................................... 7-4 7.1.5 Special paper..................................................................................................................................... 7-6 7.1.6 Precautions for paper ........................................................................................................................ 7-8 7.1.7 Paper storage .................................................................................................................................... 7-8 7.1.8 Auto Tray Switch Function ................................................................................................................ 7-8 7.2 Selecting the paper settings for bypass tray ................................................................................ 7-9 7.2.1 Automatically detecting the paper size ("Auto Detect" setting)......................................................... 7-9 7.2.2 Selecting a paper size setting (Size setting) .................................................................................... 7-10 7.2.3 Specifying a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings) ........................................................ 7-12 7.2.4 Storing a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings).............................................................. 7-14 7.2.5 Selecting a setting for oversized paper (Wide paper settings) ........................................................ 7-17 7.2.6 Specifying a paper type for bypass tray.......................................................................................... 7-19 7.3 Paper type setting for a tray ......................................................................................................... 7-21 7.3.1 To display the paper tray setting screen ......................................................................................... 7-21 7.3.2 To specify a standard size paper ("Standard Size 1" settings) ....................................................... 7-23 7.3.3 To specify a setting for standard special-sized paper (Special size settings)................................. 7-24 7.3.4 To specify a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings)......................................................... 7-25 7.3.5 To select a setting for oversized paper ........................................................................................... 7-27 7.3.6 Specifying a paper type................................................................................................................... 7-29 7.4 Originals.......................................................................................................................................... 7-31 7.4.1 Originals that can be loaded into the ADF....................................................................................... 7-31 7.4.2 Precautions for loading originals into the ADF ................................................................................ 7-32 7.4.3 Originals that can be loaded on the original glass .......................................................................... 7-33 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Contents-5 8 Application functions 8.1 Inserting paper between OHP transparencies ("OHP Interleave" function) .............................. 8-3 8.2 Adding cover pages ("Cover Sheet" function).............................................................................. 8-6 8.3 Inserting different paper into copies ("Insert Sheet" function)................................................. 8-10 8.4 Inserting copies of a different original for a specified page ("Insert Image" function) .............................................................................................................. 8-14 8.5 Specifying pages to be printed on the front side ("Chapters" function).................................. 8-17 8.6 Scanning originals with different settings and printing copies all together ("Program Jobs" function)............................................................................................................ 8-21 8.7 Reversing black-and-white gradation of the original ("Neg./Pos. Reverse" function) ........... 8-26 8.8 Producing separate copies of each page in a page spread ("Book Copy" function) ............. 8-27 8.9 Tiling copy images ("Image Repeat" function) ........................................................................... 8-33 8.10 Dividing spread image into right and left pages using ADF ("Page Separation" function)........................................................................................................ 8-38 8.11 Adding a binding margin to copies ("Page Margin" function)................................................... 8-41 8.12 Adjusting the image to fit the paper ("Image Adjust" settings) ................................................ 8-44 8.13 Copying with the page layout of a booklet ("Booklet" function) .............................................. 8-47 8.14 Erasing specified area of copies (Erase)..................................................................................... 8-50 8.14.1 Erasing black marks along borders ("Erase" function).................................................................... 8-51 8.14.2 Erasing black marks along center fold ("Center Erase" function) ................................................... 8-53 8.14.3 Erasing outside areas of the original ("Non-Image Area Erase" function)....................................... 8-55 8.15 Printing the date/time or page number on copies (Stamp/Composition functions)............... 8-56 8.15.1 Printing the date/time ("Date/Time" function) ................................................................................. 8-57 8.15.2 Printing the page number ("Page Number" function)...................................................................... 8-60 8.15.3 Printing previously registered stamps ("Stamp" function) .............................................................. 8-63 8.15.4 Printing copy protection text ("Copy Protect" function).................................................................. 8-66 8.15.5 Printing repeating stamps ("Stamp Repeat" function) .................................................................... 8-73 8.15.6 Printing the image scanned first overlapped by the remaining original pages ("Overlay" function) 8-78 8.15.7 Saving a scanned image as a registered overlay ("Registered Overlay" function) ......................... 8-81 8.15.8 Using a registered overlay ("Registered Overlay" function) ............................................................ 8-85 8.15.9 Printing a header/footer ("Header/Footer" function) ....................................................................... 8-87 8.15.10 Printing the distribution control number ("Distribution Control Number" function)......................... 8-89 8.15.11 Printing the watermark onto copies ("Watermark" function)........................................................... 8-91 8.16 Saving the scanned original in a user box ("Save in User Box" function)................................ 8-93 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9.1 Replacing the toner cartridge ........................................................................................................ 9-3 9.1.1 To replace the toner cartridge........................................................................................................... 9-5 9.2 Replacing the staple cartridge....................................................................................................... 9-7 9.2.1 To replace the staple cartridge in Finisher FS-524 ........................................................................... 9-8 9.2.2 To replace the staple cartridge in Finisher FS-525 ......................................................................... 9-11 9.2.3 To replace the staple cartridge in Finisher FS-610 ......................................................................... 9-15 9.3 Emptying hole-punch scrap boxes.............................................................................................. 9-18 9.3.1 To empty the hole-punch scrap box of the finisher ........................................................................ 9-20 9.3.2 To empty the hole-punch scrap box of the Z Folding Unit ............................................................. 9-21 10 Care of the machine 10.1 Cleaning ......................................................................................................................................... 10-3 10.1.1 Cleaning the left partition glass....................................................................................................... 10-3 10.1.2 Cleaning the original glass .............................................................................................................. 10-3 10.1.3 Cleaning the document pad............................................................................................................ 10-4 10.1.4 Cleaning the paper take-up roller.................................................................................................... 10-4 10.1.5 Cleaning the main unit..................................................................................................................... 10-4 Contents-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10.1.6 Cleaning the control panel............................................................................................................... 10-5 10.1.7 Care of Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101..................................................................... 10-6 10.1.8 Care of Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201........................................................................ 10-7 10.2 Viewing counters (Meter Count)................................................................................................... 10-8 10.2.1 Viewing counters ............................................................................................................................. 10-8 10.3 When the message "It is time for the scheduled inspection of the device." appears ............ 10-9 11 Managing jobs 11.1 Overview of Job List screen ......................................................................................................... 11-3 11.1.1 Jobs................................................................................................................................................. 11-3 11.1.2 Multi-job feature .............................................................................................................................. 11-3 11.1.3 Job List screens .............................................................................................................................. 11-4 11.1.4 Left panel Job List ........................................................................................................................... 11-7 11.2 Performing operations on jobs..................................................................................................... 11-8 11.2.1 Deleting a job................................................................................................................................... 11-8 11.2.2 Checking job settings .................................................................................................................... 11-10 11.2.3 Checking job details ...................................................................................................................... 11-10 11.2.4 Displaying the Current Jobs list (stored jobs and active jobs) ...................................................... 11-12 11.2.5 Displaying the Job History list ....................................................................................................... 11-13 11.2.6 Printing a proof copy of a stored job............................................................................................. 11-14 11.2.7 Printing a stored job ...................................................................................................................... 11-15 11.2.8 Increasing printing priority ............................................................................................................. 11-17 12 Utility mode 12.1 Overview of Utility mode parameters .......................................................................................... 12-3 12.1.1 List of registration information and parameters .............................................................................. 12-3 12.2 Registering a destination.............................................................................................................. 12-8 12.2.1 Create One-Touch Destination ........................................................................................................ 12-8 12.2.2 Create User Box .............................................................................................................................. 12-8 12.2.3 Limiting Access to Destinations ...................................................................................................... 12-8 12.2.4 Displaying the destination registration screen............................................................................... 12-16 12.3 Specifying user settings.............................................................................................................. 12-17 12.3.1 System Settings............................................................................................................................. 12-17 12.3.2 Custom Display Settings ............................................................................................................... 12-19 12.3.3 Copier Settings .............................................................................................................................. 12-21 12.3.4 Scan/Fax Settings ......................................................................................................................... 12-23 12.3.5 Printer Settings .............................................................................................................................. 12-23 12.3.6 Change Password ......................................................................................................................... 12-23 12.3.7 Change E-Mail Address................................................................................................................. 12-23 12.3.8 Toner Supply ................................................................................................................................. 12-24 12.3.9 Change Icon .................................................................................................................................. 12-24 12.3.10 Displaying the User Settings screen.............................................................................................. 12-24 12.4 Specifying administrator settings .............................................................................................. 12-26 12.4.1 System Settings............................................................................................................................. 12-26 12.4.2 Administrator/Machine Settings .................................................................................................... 12-32 12.4.3 One-Touch/User Box Registration ................................................................................................ 12-32 12.4.4 User Authentication/Account Track............................................................................................... 12-33 12.4.5 Network Settings ........................................................................................................................... 12-36 12.4.6 Copier Setting................................................................................................................................ 12-37 12.4.7 Printer Settings .............................................................................................................................. 12-37 12.4.8 Fax Settings................................................................................................................................... 12-38 12.4.9 System Connection ....................................................................................................................... 12-38 12.4.10 Security Settings............................................................................................................................ 12-38 12.4.11 License Settings ............................................................................................................................ 12-41 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Contents-7 12.4.12 OpenAPI Authentication Management Setting ............................................................................. 12-41 12.4.13 Displaying the Administrator Settings screen ............................................................................... 12-42 12.5 Overview of weekly timer settings............................................................................................. 12-44 12.6 Finisher Adjustment .................................................................................................................... 12-45 12.6.1 Center Staple Position Adjustment ............................................................................................... 12-45 12.6.2 Half-Fold Position.......................................................................................................................... 12-47 12.6.3 Punch Vertical Position Adjustment .............................................................................................. 12-49 12.6.4 Punch Unit Vertical Position Adjustment ...................................................................................... 12-51 12.6.5 Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment.......................................................................................... 12-53 12.6.6 Punch Unit Horizontal Position Adjustment .................................................................................. 12-55 12.6.7 Punch Resist Loop Size Adjustment ............................................................................................. 12-56 12.6.8 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment/2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment ................................................ 12-58 12.6.9 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment......................................................................................................... 12-60 12.6.10 2-Position Staple Pitch Adjustment .............................................................................................. 12-62 12.6.11 Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment ............................................................................................... 12-63 12.7 Header/Footer Settings .............................................................................................................. 12-64 12.7.1 Specifying headers/footers ........................................................................................................... 12-64 12.7.2 Editing headers/footers ................................................................................................................. 12-66 12.8 Authentication Method ............................................................................................................... 12-67 12.8.1 User authentication and account track ......................................................................................... 12-67 12.8.2 When user authentication and account track are synchronized................................................... 12-67 12.8.3 When user authentication and account track are used separately ............................................... 12-68 12.8.4 Selecting an authentication method.............................................................................................. 12-69 12.9 User Authentication Setting ....................................................................................................... 12-72 12.9.1 Administrative Settings—List ........................................................................................................ 12-72 12.9.2 Default Function Permission ......................................................................................................... 12-73 12.9.3 Public User Access ....................................................................................................................... 12-74 12.9.4 User Registration........................................................................................................................... 12-74 12.9.5 User Counter ................................................................................................................................. 12-78 12.9.6 Viewing user counters ................................................................................................................... 12-79 12.10 Account Track Setting ................................................................................................................ 12-80 12.10.1 Account Track Registration........................................................................................................... 12-80 12.10.2 Account Track Counter ................................................................................................................. 12-83 12.10.3 Viewing account counters ............................................................................................................. 12-84 12.11 Password Rules........................................................................................................................... 12-85 12.11.1 Conditions of the password rules ................................................................................................. 12-85 12.12 Enhanced Security Mode............................................................................................................ 12-87 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13.1 Safety information......................................................................................................................... 13-3 13.2 Using Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101.................................................................. 13-5 13.2.1 Settings of this machine.................................................................................................................. 13-6 13.2.2 Registering users............................................................................................................................. 13-8 13.2.3 Logging on to this machine........................................................................................................... 13-20 13.2.4 ID & Print function ......................................................................................................................... 13-22 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14.1 Safety information......................................................................................................................... 14-3 14.2 Using Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201 ..................................................................... 14-5 14.2.1 Settings of this machine.................................................................................................................. 14-5 14.2.2 Registering users............................................................................................................................. 14-8 14.2.3 Logging on to this machine........................................................................................................... 14-22 14.2.4 ID & Print function ......................................................................................................................... 14-24 Contents-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 15 Appendix 15.1 Entering text................................................................................................................................... 15-3 15.1.1 Enlarging the keyboard.................................................................................................................... 15-5 15.1.2 To type text...................................................................................................................................... 15-6 15.1.3 List of available characters .............................................................................................................. 15-6 15.2 Glossary.......................................................................................................................................... 15-7 16 Index 1 Introduction bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1-3 Introduction 1 1 Introduction Thank you for choosing this machine. This manual contains details on the operation of the various functions of the machine, precautions on its use, and basic troubleshooting procedures. In order to ensure that this machine is used correctly and efficiently, carefully read this manual as needed. For descriptions on trademarks and copyrights, refer to [Trademarks/Copyrights]. The illustrations used in this manual may appear slightly different from views of the actual equipment. 1.1 Available features Automatically selecting the paper The most appropriate paper size can automatically be selected based on the size of the loaded original and the specified zoom ratio. For details, refer to "Automatically selecting the paper size ("Auto" paper setting)" on page 3-36. Adjusting copies to the size of the paper The most appropriate zoom ratio can automatically be selected based on the size of the loaded original and the specified paper size. For details, refer to "Automatically selecting the zoom ratio ("Auto" zoom Setting)" on page 3-39. Specifying separate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios By specifying separate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios, copies of the original can be resized as desired. For details, refer to "Typing in separate X and Y zoom ratios (Individual zoom settings)" on page 3-45. Scanning the original in separate batches An original with a large number of pages can be divided and scanned in separate batches. Double-sided copies can be produced by using the original glass or the original pages can be alternately loaded onto the original glass or into the ADF, and then all pages can be copied together as a single job. For details, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11 and "Scanning a multi-page original from the original glass" on page 3-15. Carrying out half-fold/center staple & fold/tri-fold/Z-fold finishing process Copies can be folded at their center ("Half-Fold" setting) or bound with staples after being folded in half ("Center Staple & Fold" setting). In addition, the copies can be folded in three ("Tri-fold" setting) or Z-folded ("Z-fold" setting). For details, refer to "Selecting a folding setting" on page 3-77. ABC ABC ABC Half-Fold Center Staple & Fold Tri-Fold Z-Fold 1 Introduction 1-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Sorting copies The finishing method for copies can be selected. For details, refer to "Separating copies by sets ("Sort" setting)" on page 3-66, "Separating copies by pages ("Group" Setting)" on page 3-67. Stapling copies Multi-page originals can be copied and stapled together. For details, refer to "Stapling copies (Staple settings)" on page 3-71. Punching holes in copies Holes for filing can be punched in the copies. For details, refer to "Punching holes in copies (Punch settings)" on page 3-74. Copying multiple original pages onto a single page Multiple pages of the original can be printed together on a single page. For details, refer to "Copying multiple original pages onto a single page (Combined copy settings)" on page 3-57. Copying an original containing various page sizes An original with various page sizes can be scanned and copied together. For details, refer to "Copying originals of mixed sizes ("Mixed Original" setting)" on page 3-21. ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC DEF ABC DEF ABC ABC bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1-5 Introduction 1 Adjusting copies according to the image quality of the original The copies can be adjusted according to the image quality of the original. For details, refer to "Loading originals with small print or photos ("Original Type" settings)" on page 3-59. Inserting paper between copies of OHP In order to prevent OHP from becoming stuck to each other, a page (interleaf) can be inserted between the transparency copies. For details, refer to "Inserting paper between OHP transparencies ("OHP Interleave" function)" on page 8-3. Adding a cover page Cover pages can be added to copies, or copies can be made using different paper (for example, colored paper) for only the cover pages. For details, refer to "Adding cover pages ("Cover Sheet" function)" on page 8-6. Inserting different paper into copies Different paper (such as colored paper) can be inserted for specified pages in the copies. For details, refer to "Inserting different paper into copies ("Insert Sheet" function)" on page 8-10. Inserting pages from a different original at specified locations in a copy An original scanned later can be inserted for specified pages in an original scanned earlier for copying. For details, refer to "Inserting copies of a different original for a specified page ("Insert Image" function)" on page 8-14. ABDCEF DEF ABC ABC COVERABC ABC ABC DEF ABC DEF ABC 1 Introduction 1-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Printing double-sided copies with the specified page on the front side Double-sided copies can be printed with the specified pages on the front side. For details, refer to "Specifying pages to be printed on the front side ("Chapters" function)" on page 8-17. Copying with reversed colors An original can be copied with the light- and dark-colored areas of the original image inversed. For details, refer to "Reversing black-and-white gradation of the original ("Neg./Pos. Reverse" function)" on page 8-26. Separately copying a page spread A page spread, such as in an open book or catalog, can be copied onto separate pages. For details, refer to "Producing separate copies of each page in a page spread ("Book Copy" function)" on page 8-27. Repeating copy images An original image can be repeatedly printed on a single sheet of paper. For details, refer to "Tiling copy images ("Image Repeat" function)" on page 8-33. 2 4 4 25 3 1 3 1 1 12 5 2 5 4 4 3 3 2 1 2 1 1 ABC ABC ABC DEF bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1-7 Introduction 1 Splitting an original page into two copies A single original page can be divided in two and each half can be printed on separate copies. For details, refer to "Dividing spread image into right and left pages using ADF ("Page Separation" function)" on page 8-38. Making copies for filing Copies can be printed with a filing margin so they can easily be stored in filing binders. For details, refer to "Adding a binding margin to copies ("Page Margin" function)" on page 8-41. Adjusting the image to fit the paper size When the copy paper is larger than the original, copies can be printed so that the original image fills the paper. For details, refer to "Adjusting the image to fit the paper ("Image Adjust" settings)" on page 8-44. Copying with the page layout of a magazine Copies can be made with the pages arranged in a layout for center binding, such as for a magazine. For details, refer to "Copying with the page layout of a booklet ("Booklet" function)" on page 8-47. Erasing sections of copies Areas, such as the shadows of punched holes, bindings/edges of books, and transmission information in received faxes, can be erased in copies. For details, refer to "Erasing black marks along borders ("Erase" function)" on page 8-51. ABC DEF ABC DEF DEGFHI GHI ABC ABCDEF ABC ABC 11 12 2 11 12 1 2 1 ABC ABC 1 Introduction 1-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Printing a sample copy Before printing a large number of copies, a single sample copy can be printed so that it can be checked. For details, refer to "Printing a proof to check the settings (Proof Copy)" on page 4-6. Printing date/time or page number on copies The date/time, page number, copy protect (hidden text for preventing unauthorized copying) or account track number per set can be printed on copies. For details, refer to "Printing the date/time or page number on copies (Stamp/Composition functions)" on page 8-56. Managing jobs The print status of copy jobs can be checked and the jobs can be managed. For details, refer to "Managing jobs" on page 11-3. Programming copy settings Frequently used copy settings can be programmed and recalled to be used with other copy jobs. For details, refer to "Registering copy programs (Mode Memory)" on page 4-16. Checking the copy settings Screens showing the current copy settings can be displayed. From these screens, the copy settings can also be changed. For details, refer to "Checking the copy settings (Check Job)" on page 4-3. Enlarging the size of text in touch panel screens The text and buttons in the touch panel can be displayed in a larger size that is easier to read, allowing basic operations to be easily performed. For details, refer to the User manual – Enlarge Display Operations. Displaying explanations of functions and settings The name and function of parts and details of functions and settings appears in the Help screens. For details, refer to "Displaying function descriptions (Help)" on page 4-22. Interrupting a copy job The copy job being printed can be interrupted in order for a different copy job to be printed. For details, refer to "Interrupting a copy job (Interrupt mode)" on page 4-15. DEGFHI ABC DEGFHI ABC DEGFHI ABC bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1-9 Introduction 1 1.2 Explanation of manual conventions The marks and text formats used in this manual are described below. Safety advices 6 DANGER Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in fatal or critical injuries in fact of electrical power. % Observe all dangers in order to prevent injuries. 7 WARNING Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in serious injuries or property damage. % Observe all warnings in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use of the machine. 7 CAUTION Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in slight injuries or property damage. % Observe all cautions in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use of the machine. Sequence of action 1 The number 1 as formatted here indicates the first step of a sequence of actions. 2 Subsequent numbers as formatted here indicate subsequent steps of a sequence of actions. ? Text formatted in this style provides additional assistance. % Text formatted in this style describes the action that will ensure the desired results are achieved. Tips 2 Note Text highlighted in this manner contains useful information and tips to ensure safe use of the machine. 2 Reminder Text highlighted in this manner contains information that should be reminded. ! Detail Text highlighted in this manner contains references for more detailed information. Special text markings [Stop] key The names of keys on the control panel are written as shown above. MACHINE SETTING Display texts are written as shown above. An illustration inserted here shows what operations must be performed. 1 Introduction 1-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Note The machine illustrations shown in this manual can vary and depend on the machine configuration. 1.3 Descriptions of originals and paper The descriptions used in this manual for originals and paper are explained below. Whenever original and paper dimensions are mentioned in this manual, the value shown as Y in the illustration refers to the width, and the value shown as X refers to the length. Lengthwise (w) If the width (Y) of the paper is shorter than the length (X), the paper has a vertical or portrait orientation, indicated by w. Crosswise (v) If the width (Y) of the paper is longer than the length (X), the paper has a horizontal or landscape orientation, indicated by v. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1-11 Introduction 1 1.4 User manuals This machine is provided with printed manuals and PDF manuals on the User manual DVD. 1.4.1 Printed manual Quick Guide – Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations This manual contains operating procedures and descriptions of the most frequently used functions, allowing the machine to immediately be used. In addition, this manual contains notes and precautions that should be followed for safe use of the machine. Be sure to read this manual before using the machine. 1.4.2 Introduction to the user manual DVD The user manual DVD is included with this machine. In the initial screen, select the user manual to be viewed, and then check the details for the various functions. User manual – Copy Operations (this manual) This user manual contains descriptions of Copy mode operations and machine maintenance. Refer to this user manual for details on paper and originals, copy procedures using convenient Application functions, replacing consumables and troubleshooting operations such as clearing paper misfeeds. User manual – Enlarge Display Operations This user manual contains details on operating procedures in Enlarge Display mode. Refer to this manual for details on using copy, scanner, G3 fax and network fax operations in Enlarge Display mode. User manual – Print Operations (IC-208) This user manual contains details on the printing functions that can be specified with the optional image controller. Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for using the printer functions. User manual – Box Operations This user manual contains operating procedures for using the user boxes on the optional hard disk. Refer to this user manual for details on saving data in user boxes, retrieving data from user boxes and transferring data. User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations This user manual contains details on the network scan, G3 fax, and network fax operations. Refer to this manual for details on using network scan function by E-Mail or FTP, G3 fax, Internet fax and IP address fax operations. In order to use the fax functions, the optional fax kit must be purchased separately. User manual – Fax Driver Operations This user manual contains details of the fax driver functions that can be used to send a fax directly from a computer. Refer to this user manual for operating procedures on using the PC-FAX functions. In order to use the fax functions, the optional fax kit must be purchased separately. User manual – Network Administrator This user manual contains descriptions on setting methods for each function utilizing network connection, mainly using the PageScope Web Connection. Refer to this user manual for details on using network functions. 1 Introduction 1-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) User manual – Advanced Function Operations This manual describes overview and usage of functions that become available by registering the optional license kit and enabling its function, and functions that become available by connecting the MFP with applications. In order to use the functions effectively, please read this manual. 2 Before making copies bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-3 Before making copies 2 2 Before making copies 2.1 Machine configuration 2.1.1 Options 18 19 1 2 3 6 5 4 7 8 9 10 11 12 12 12 13 10 10 9 14 9 15 16 17 20 21 22 2 Before making copies 2-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) * Parts marked with an asterisk are not shown in the illustration. No. Part name Description 1 Main unit Consists of a scanner, a printer, an ADF, and paper trays (4 trays and 1 bypass tray). 2 Large capacity unit LU-405 Can be loaded with up to 4,000 sheets of paper (80 g/m2). 3 Large capacity unit LU-406 Can be loaded with up to 4,000 sheets of paper (80 g/m2). 4 Local Interface Kit EK-703 Installed when using the machine as a printer connected directly with a PC. 5 Security Kit SC-506 Installed to encode the data saved on the hard disk so that the hard disk can be used more safely. 6 Hard Disk HD-510 Installed to increase the scanning capacity or enabling scanning of multiple jobs. 7 Output Tray OT-505 Collects printed sheets. 8 Shift Tray SF-602 Separates copies fed out at an offset. 9 Z Folding Unit ZU-605/ ZU-604 Installed with the finisher to enable Z-folding and hole punching. 10 Post Inserter PI-504 Installed with the finisher to enable insertion of the cover sheet into the printed sheets. In addition, you can operate the finisher manually. 11 Finisher FS-610 Collects printed sheets. Provides selectable finishing functions: sort, group, offset-sort, offset-group, staple, face up, center staple & fold, half-fold, and trifold. 12 Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 Installed with the finisher to enable hole punching. 13 Finisher FS-525 Collects printed sheets. Provides selectable finishing functions: sort, group, offset-sort, offset-group, face up, and staple. 14 Finisher FS-524 Collects printed sheets. Provides selectable finishing functions: sort, group, offset-sort, offset-group, face up, and staple. 15 Image Controller IC-208 Installed when this machine is used for network printing and network scanning. 16 Fax Kit FK-502 Allows this machine to be used as a fax machine. 17 Mount Kit MK-716 Used to install the Fax kit. 18 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101 Scans vein patterns in the finger to verify user authentication. 19 Authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201 Reads the information stored on an IC card to verify user authentication. 20 Working Table WT-504 Provides an area to temporarily place originals and other materials. This is also used when the authentication unit is installed. 21 Key Counter Socket Required for installing the key counter. 22 Key Counter Installed onto this machine to make the counter function available for printed sheets. 23 i-Option LK-101* Allows the Web Browser and Image Panel functions to be used from the control panel. For details, refer to the User manual – Advanced Function Operations. 24 i-Option LK-102* Allows PDF encryption, digital signatures and properties to be specified when transmitting PDF documents with Scan mode or User Box mode operations. For details, refer to the User manual – Advanced Function Operations. 25 Upgrade Kit UK-202* Required in order to use i-Option LK-101 or i-Option LK-102. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-5 Before making copies 2 2.1.2 External 2 Reminder Do not grab the control panel to move the machine. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 18 20 21 2 Before making copies 2-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) No. Part name Description 1 Left partition glass Scans the original loaded into the ADF. 2 Document scales Use as a guide when placing the original on the original glass. 3 Document pad Presses down on the original positioned on the original glass. 4 Original glass Scans the original placed face down. 5 Adjustable paper guides Used to align the loaded original. 6 Paper tray Load with the originals to be scanned facing up. 7 Original output tray Feeds out scanned originals. 8 Control panel Used to specify the various settings and perform operations such as starting. 9 [Power] (auxiliary power) key Turns on/off the copying and scanning functions. Turning it off will terminate all the functions other than printing, and receiving and outputting facsimile data, and then enter the sleep mode. 10 Adjustable document guides Used to align the loaded paper. 11 Bypass tray Opened and used when printing onto paper that is not or cannot (such as thick paper, overhead projector transparencies, envelopes or label sheets) be loaded into a paper tray. 12 Release lever for the vertical transport door of the main unit Used to open the vertical transport door when clearing paper misfeeds. 13 Tray 4 A maximum of 550 sheets of A3 to A5 plain paper (64 g/m2) can be loaded. 14 Tray 3 A maximum of 550 sheets of A3 to A5 plain paper (64 g/m2) can be loaded. 15 Tray 2 A maximum of 1,100 sheets of A4 to A5 plain paper (64 g/m2) can be loaded. 16 Tray 1 A maximum of 1,650 sheets of A4 to A5 plain paper (64 g/m2) can be loaded. 17 Right front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 18 Left front door Opened when turning the main power switch on and off and when clearing paper misfeeds. 19 Toner cartridge door Opened when replacing a toner cartridge. 20 Machine status indicator Indicates machine status by combining the color (blue or red) and the state (steady on or blinking). 21 USB port (type A) USB 2.0/1.1 Used for connecting external memory (USB memory device). bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-7 Before making copies 2 22 23 24 25 27 26 28 29 No. Part name Description 22 Network connector (10Base-T/100Base- TX/1000Base-T) Used for connecting the network cable when this machine is used for network printing and network scanning. 23 USB port (type A) USB 2.0/1.1 Used for connecting the USB cable for the authentication unit (biometric type) or the authentication unit (IC card type). 24 RS-232C port Used for connecting the modem for CS Remote Care. 25 Telephone jack 1 (LINE PORT1) Used for connecting a general subscriber line. 26 Telephone jack 2 (LINE PORT2) Used for connecting a general subscriber line. This jack is used when the optional fax multi line kit has been installed. 27 Jack for connecting a telephone (TEL PORT1) Used for connecting the cord from a telephone. 28 Jack for connecting a telephone (TEL PORT2) Used for connecting the cord from a telephone. 29 Power cord Supplies power to the machine. 2 Before making copies 2-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.1.3 Internal 1 2 3 4 9 8 7 6 5 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-9 Before making copies 2 No. Part name Description 1 Drum section Forms the copy image. 2 Vertical transport door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds in the vertical transport section. 3 Dial M1 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit. 4 ADU unit Pulled out when clearing paper misfeeds. 5 Cover M12 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit. 6 Dial m2 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit. 7 Cover M3 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit. 8 Cover M11 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit. 9 Lever M4 Lowered to the left in order to pull out the ADU unit when clearing paper misfeeds. 10 Transport lever Switched when printing on A5-size or 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 thick paper. 11 Dial M9 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit. 12 Dial M7 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit. 13 Lever M5 Lowered to the left when clearing paper misfeeds. 14 Cover M8 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit. 15 Cover M6 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit. 16 Fusing unit Fuses the image that was formed onto the paper. 17 Dial M10 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit. 18 Main power switch Used to turn the machine on and off. 19 Toner-cartridge-securing lever Pull toward you to remove the toner unit when replacing a toner cartridge. 20 Toner cartridge Replaced when the toner is empty. 2 Before making copies 2-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.1.4 Large Capacity Unit LU-405 2 Reminder Do not climb on, or place objects on this unit to prevent any damage. Large Capacity Unit LU-405 1 2 3 4 5 6 No. Part name Description 1 Upper cover Opened when loading paper or clearing paper misfeeds. 2 Lateral guides Secures the sides of the paper to be loaded. 3 Tray bottom plate Raised as the paper is used. Lower by pressing the bottom-plate-lowering button. 4 Trailing edge stopper Secures the trailing edges of the paper to be loaded. 5 Large capacity tray front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 6 Tray bottom plate lower button Pressed to lower the bottom plate in the paper tray when loading paper. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-11 Before making copies 2 2.1.5 Large Capacity Unit LU-406 2 Reminder Do not climb on, or place objects on this unit to prevent any damage. Large Capacity Unit LU-406 1 3 2 5 4 6 No. Part name Description 1 Upper cover Opened when loading paper or clearing paper misfeeds. 2 Lateral guides Secures the sides of the paper to be loaded. 3 Tray bottom plate Raised as the paper is used. Lower by pressing the bottom-plate-lowering button. 4 Trailing edge stopper Secures the trailing edges of the paper to be loaded. 5 Large capacity tray front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 6 Tray bottom plate lower button Pressed to lower the bottom plate in the paper tray when loading paper. 2 Before making copies 2-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.1.6 Finisher FS-524/Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 9 11 12 13 14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-13 Before making copies 2 Finisher FS-524 Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 No. Part name Description 1 Front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge. 2 Main finishing tray (Tray 2) Collects printed pages. 3 Sub finishing tray (Tray 1) Collects printed pages. 4 Guide lever FN4 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 5 Guide lever FN1 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 6 Misfeed-clearing dial FN3 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher. 7 Guide lever FN2 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 8 Stacker unit Removed when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge. 9 Staple cartridge holder Removed from the stacker unit when clearing jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge. 10 Handle FN7 Grabbed when removing and inserting the stacker unit. 11 Misfeed-clearing dial FN6 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher. 12 Guide lever FN5 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. No. Part name Description 13 Punch kit Punches holes for filing printed pages when the punch kit is installed with Finisher FS-524. 14 Hole-punch scrap box Removed when emptying punch scraps that have accumulated from using the Punch settings. 2 Before making copies 2-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.1.7 Finisher FS-525/Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 9 11 12 13 14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-15 Before making copies 2 Finisher FS-525 Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 No. Part name Description 1 Front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge. 2 Main finishing tray (Tray 2) Collects printed pages. 3 Sub finishing tray (Tray 1) Collects printed pages. 4 Guide lever FN4 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 5 Guide lever FN1 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 6 Misfeed-clearing dial FN3 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher. 7 Guide lever FN2 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 8 Stacker unit Removed when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge. 9 Staple cartridge holder Removed from the stacker unit when clearing jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge. 10 Handle FN7 Grabbed when removing and inserting the stacker unit. 11 Misfeed-clearing dial FN6 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher. 12 Guide lever FN5 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. No. Part name Description 13 Punch kit Punches holes for filing printed pages when the punch kit is installed with Finisher FS-525. 14 Hole-punch scrap box Removed when emptying punch scraps that have accumulated from using the Punch settings. 2 Before making copies 2-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.1.8 Finisher FS-610/Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 17 14 18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-17 Before making copies 2 15 16 2 Before making copies 2-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Finisher FS-610 Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 No. Part name Description 1 Main finishing tray (Tray 2) Collects printed pages. 2 Sub finishing tray (Tray 1) Collects printed pages. 3 Front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge. 4 Guide lever FN4 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 5 Guide lever FN1 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 6 Misfeed-clearing dial FN3 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher. 7 Guide lever FN2 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 8 Guide lever FN5 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 9 Guide lever FN9 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 10 Stacker unit Pulled out when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge. 11 Guide lever FN8 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 12 Misfeed-clearing dial FN7 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher. 13 Handle FN6 Grabbed when removing and inserting the stacker unit. 14 Booklet tray Collects copies printed using a Fold/Bind setting. 15 Guide lever FN10 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 16 Staple cartridge holder Removed from the stacker unit when clearing jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge. No. Part name Description 17 Punch kit Punches holes for filing printed pages when the punch kit is installed with Finisher FS-610. 18 Hole-punch scrap box Removed when emptying punch scraps that have accumulated from using the Punch settings. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-19 Before making copies 2 2.1.9 Z Folding Unit ZU-604/ZU-605 1 2 4 3 5 6 7 8 9 11 10 2 Before making copies 2-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) No. Part name Description 1 Z folding/transport unit Pulled out when removing jammed paper. 2 Guide lever FN1 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 3 Hole-punch scrap box Removed when emptying punch scraps that have accumulated from using the Punch settings. 4 Front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds or punch scraps. 5 Guide lever FN6 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 6 Guide lever FN7 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 7 Guide lever FN8 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 8 Handle FN2 Grabbed when removing and inserting the unit. 9 Misfeed-clearing dial FN5 Turned when removing paper jammed in the Z folding unit. 10 Guide lever FN3 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds. 11 Misfeed-clearing dial FN4 Turned when removing paper jammed in the Z folding unit. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-21 Before making copies 2 2.1.10 Post Inserter PI-504 2 1 3 5 4 6 No. Part name Description 1 Post inserter control panel Operate when manually using the finisher. (See p. 3-86.) 2 Lower tray paper guide Slide to fit the size of paper being loaded when loading with cover sheets. 3 Lower tray Load with cover sheets. 4 Upper tray Load with cover sheets. 5 Upper tray paper guide Slide to fit the size of paper being loaded when loading with cover sheets. 6 Upper unit release lever Raised to slide the upper unit to the left when clearing paper misfeeds. 2 Before making copies 2-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.1.11 Shift Tray SF-602 2.1.12 Output Tray OT-505 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-23 Before making copies 2 2.1.13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101 2.1.14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201 Precautions for using the finisher: - Do not place objects on top of the finisher and below the paper output trays, otherwise the machine may be damaged. 1 Top view Rear view 2 3 No. Part name Description 1 Status indicator Indicates the status of the authentication unit. 2 Security slot Used for connecting the security cable to prevent thefts. (complies with the security cable standards of the Kensington Computer Products Group) 3 USB port (type mini-B) Used to connect a USB cable (mini-B plug). 1 2 No. Part name Description 1 Card scanning area Position the IC card on this area. 2 USB cable Used for connecting this device to the machine. 2 Before making copies 2-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.1.15 Control panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 14 13 12 11 10 9 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 No. Part name Description 1 Touch panel Displays various screens and messages. Specify the various settings by directly touching the panel. 2 Main Power indicator Lights up in green when the machine is turned on with the main power switch. 3 [Power] (auxiliary power) key Press to turn on/off machine operations. When turned off, the machine enters a state where it conserves energy. 4 [Mode Memory] key Press to register (store) the desired copy/fax/scan settings as a program or to recall a registered program. (See p. 4-16.) 5 [Utility/Counter] key Press to display the Meter Count screen and the Utility screen. 6 [Reset] key Press to clear all settings (except programmed settings) entered in the control panel and touch panel. 7 [Interrupt] key Press to enter Interrupt mode. While the machine is in Interrupt mode, the indicator on the [Interrupt] key lights up in green and the message "Now in Interrupt mode." appears on the touch panel. To cancel Interrupt mode, press the [Interrupt] key again. 8 [Stop] key Pressing the [Stop] key while copying, scanning or printing temporarily stops the operation. 9 [Proof Copy] key Press to print a single proof copy to be checked before printing a large number of copies. You can also display a finishing image using the current settings in the touch panel. (Only when a hard disk is installed.) (See p. 4-6.) 10 [Start] key Press to start the copy, scan or fax operation. When this machine is ready to begin the operation, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue. If the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange, the operation cannot begin. Press to restart a stopped job. For details on jobs, refer to "Overview of Job List screen" on page 11-3. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-25 Before making copies 2 2 Reminder Do not apply extreme pressure to the touch panel, otherwise it may be scratched or damaged. Never push down on the touch panel with force, and never use a hard or pointed object to make a selection in the touch panel. 11 Data indicator Flashes in blue while a print job is being received. Lights up in blue when a print job is queued to be printed or while it is being printed. The indicator lights up in blue when there is saved fax data or unprinted fax data. 12 [C] (clear) key Press to clear a value (such as the number of copies, a zoom ratio, or a size) entered using the keypad. 13 Keypad Use to type in the number of copies to be produced. Use to type in the zoom ratio. Use to type in the various settings. 14 [Help] key Press to display the Help Menu screen. From this screen, descriptions of the various functions and details of operations can be displayed. (See p. 4-22.) 15 [Enlarge Display] key Press to enter Enlarge Display mode. 16 [Accessibility] key Press to display the screen for specifying settings for user accessibility functions. If authentication is performed with PageScope Authentication Manager, it does not enter Enlarge Display mode. 17 [Power Save] key Press to enter Power Save mode. While the machine is in Power Save mode, the indicator on the [Power Save] key lights up in green and the touch panel goes off. To cancel Power Save mode, press the [Power Save] key again. 18 [Access] key If user authentication or account track settings have been applied, press this key after entering the user name and password (for user authentication) or the account name and password (for account track) in order to use this machine. 19 [Brightness] dial Use to adjust the Brightness of the touch panel. 20 [User Box] key Press to enter User Box mode. While the machine is in User Box mode, the indicator on the [User Box] key lights up in green. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. 21 [Fax/Scan] key Press to enter Fax/Scan mode. While the machine is in Fax/Scan mode, the indicator on the [Fax/Scan] key lights up in green. For more details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. 22 [Copy] key Press to enter Copy mode. (As a default, the machine is in Copy mode.) While the machine is in Copy mode, the indicator on the [Copy] key lights up in green. No. Part name Description 2 Before making copies 2-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.1.16 Basic settings screens When the machine is ready to begin making copies after being turned on, the Basic screen appears. To activate a function or to select a setting, lightly touch the desired button in the touch panel. Basic screen Quick Copy screen 6 5 8 9 1 7 3 2 4 5 9 1 7 3 2 4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-27 Before making copies 2 Touching displays Density settings, Background Removal settings, and [Finishing] in the left panel. ! Detail The basic settings screen (Basic screen or Quick Copy screen) that appears can be set with the "Copier Settings" parameter in the Custom Display Settings screen (displayed from the User Setting screen in Utility/Counter mode). The arrangement of the buttons and screens differ with the Basic screen and Quick Copy screen; however, the functions that can be set are the same. As a default, "Basic" is selected. This manual contains descriptions of procedures using the Basic screen that appears when "Basic" is selected. The Quick Copy screen displays all of the settings from the Basic screen so that many settings can easily be specified. ! Detail For details on switching the basic settings screen, refer to "Custom Display Settings" on page 12-19. No. Item Name Description 1 Message display area The status of the machine and details on operations are displayed. 2 Functions/settings display area Tabs and buttons for displaying screens containing various functions are displayed. Touch a tab or button to display the corresponding screen for specifying the settings. 3 Icon display area Icons indicating the status of jobs and the machine are displayed. 4 [Auto Rotate OFF] button Touch to copy with the image not rotated to fit the orientation of the loaded paper. 5 [Separate Scan] button Touch to scan the original in separate batches. An original scanned in different batches can be treated as a single copy job. 6 [Finishing] button Touch to specify settings for collating, grouping, stapling, or hole punching. 7 Left panel When the [Job List] button is pressed, a screen showing the jobs currently being performed or waiting to be performed is displayed. When the [Check Job] button is pressed, a screen showing the result of the specified settings is displayed. 8 [Check Job] button The result of the specified settings is displayed. 9 [Job List] button Jobs currently being performed or waiting to be performed are displayed. Various commands for checking and managing jobs are available. 2 Before making copies 2-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Note If settings have been changed from the factory defaults, the tab for the screen containing the changed settings appears framed with a green line. The green line can be changed to another color with the "Color Selection Settings" parameter in the Custom Display Settings screen (displayed from the User Setting screen in Utility/Counter mode). 2.1.17 Icons that appear in the screen Icon Description Indicates that data is being sent from the machine, regardless of the current mode. Indicates that data is being received from the machine, regardless of the current mode. If the warning screen was closed when a warning occurred, touch this button to display the warning screen again. Appears when there is a message indicating that consumables must be replaced or the machine requires maintenance. Touch this icon to display the message, and then perform the replacement or maintenance procedure. Appears when an error occurs with the connection to the POP server. Indicates that paper is not loaded in the paper tray. Indicates that very little paper remains in the paper tray. Indicates that "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON". Appears when a USB drive is connected. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-29 Before making copies 2 2.2 Adjusting the angle of the control panel The control panel can be adjusted to any of three angles. In addition, the control panel can be tilted to the left. Adjust the control panel to the angle that allows for easy operation. 2.2.1 To adjust the angle of the control panel 1 Pull the control panel release lever toward you, to release the positioning lock. 2 Move the control panel to the desired position, then release the lever. 2 Before making copies 2-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 To tilt the control panel to the left, hold the bottom of the control panel, and then tilt the panel to the left. 2 Reminder When tilting the control panel, do not grab the touch panel or the control panel. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-31 Before making copies 2 2.3 Turning on the main power and the auxiliary power This machine has two power controls: the main power switch and the [Power] (auxiliary power) key. 2.3.1 Turning on the machine The main power switch turns on/off all functions of the machine. Normally, the main power switch is turned on. The [Power] (auxiliary power) key turns on/off machine operations, for example, for copying, printing or scanning. When the [Power] (auxiliary power) key is turned off, the machine enters a state where it conserves energy. 1 Open the left front door, and then set the main power switch to "n". 2 Close the left front door. 3 Press the [Power] (auxiliary power) key. Check that the touch panel is turned on. ! Detail When the [Power] (auxiliary power) key is turned on, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange, and a screen indicating that the machine is starting up appears. After a few seconds, the message "Warming up. Ready to scan." appears on the touch panel, and the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue, indicating that a job can now be queued. The default settings are the settings that are selected immediately after the machine is turned on (the power switch is set to "n") and before any setting is specified from the control panel or touch panel, and those that are selected when the [Reset] key is pressed to cancel all settings specified from the control panel or touch panel. The default settings can be changed. For more details, refer to "Custom Display Settings" on page 12-19. The factory default settings are the settings that were selected when this machine was sent from the factory. 2 Note A job can also be queued while the machine is warming up after the [Power] (auxiliary power) key is turned on. For details, refer to "Scanning during warm-up" on page 2-32. After the machine has finished warming up, the scanned image will be printed. Refer to "Main unit" on page 6-3 for warm up time. 2 Before making copies 2-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.3.2 Scanning during warm-up 1 Press the [Power] (auxiliary power) key. – For details on turning on the machine, refer to "Turning off the machine" on page 2-33. The indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange. After the warm-up message is displayed, the Basic screen appears. The indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue. 2 Check that the message "Warming up. Ready to scan." appears on the touch panel. 3 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 4 Specify any other desired copy settings. 5 Using the keypad, specify the desired number of copies. – For details on specifying the number of copies, refer to "General copy operation" on page 3-3. 6 Press the [Start] key. The original is scanned, and the job is added to the list of queued jobs. – If the "Copy Operating Screen" parameter in Utility mode was set to "Yes", touch [Next Copy Job] to display the Basic screen. – After the machine has finished warming up, the jobs will automatically be printed. ? How can the job being printed be stopped? % Press the [Stop] key. For details, refer to "Temporarily stopping scanning/printing" on page 3-91. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-33 Before making copies 2 ! Detail While the machine is warming up to begin printing after it is turned on using the [Power] (auxiliary power) key, copy settings can be specified and an original can be scanned to reserve a copy job. After the machine has finished warming up, the copies are automatically printed. The print order can be changed or jobs can be deleted from the Detail screen of a job from the Current Jobs list in the Job List screen. For details, refer to "Managing jobs" on page 11-3. 2.3.3 Turning off the machine 1 Press the [Power] (auxiliary power) key. Check that the touch panel is turned off. 2 Open the front door, and then set the main power switch to "o". 3 Close the front door. 2 Reminder When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off. Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch or the [Power] (auxiliary power) key while it is making copies or printing, otherwise a paper misfeed may occur. Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch or the [Power] (auxiliary power) key while it is scanning or sending or receiving data, otherwise all scan data or transmission data will be deleted. Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch while a queued job or stored data is waiting to be printed, otherwise the jobs will be deleted. ! Detail The following are cleared when the main power switch and [Power] (auxiliary power) key are turned off. Settings that have not been programmed Jobs queued to be printed 2 Before making copies 2-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.3.4 Automatically clearing settings (Automatic panel reset) If no operation is performed for a specified length of time (even if the [Reset] key is not pressed), settings that have not been programmed, such as the number of copies, are cleared and return to their default settings. This is the automatic panel reset operation. As the factory default, the automatic panel reset operation is performed after 1 minute. ! Detail The length of time until the automatic panel reset operation is performed and whether or not it is performed can be set from Utility mode. For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-26. Whether or not the automatic panel reset operation is performed when there is a change of user can be set from the Utility mode. For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-26. 2.3.5 Automatically canceling the mode screen (System Auto Reset) If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, the screen is automatically changed to that for the mode given priority. This is the System Auto Reset operation. As the factory default, the Copy mode screen is displayed after 1 minute. ! Detail The mode screen that is displayed when the System Auto Reset operation is performed can be changed from the Utility mode. For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-26. 2.3.6 Automatically conserving energy (Low Power mode) If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, the touch panel goes off and the machine automatically enters a mode where it conserves energy. This is the Low Power mode. The machine can receive jobs even while it is in Low Power mode. As the factory default, the machine enters Low Power mode after 15 minutes. To recover from Low Power mode 1 Press the [Power Save] key. 2 The machine can receive jobs while it is warming up. – The touch panel comes on again and, after the machine has finished warming up, it is ready to begin printing. 2 Note As the factory default, pressing the [Power Save] key causes the machine to enter Low Power mode. Settings in the Administrator Settings mode can be changed to put the machine in Sleep mode instead. For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-26. The Low Power mode can also be canceled by pressing any key in the control panel or by touching the touch panel. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-35 Before making copies 2 ! Detail The length of time until the machine enters Low Power mode can be changed. For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17 and page 12-26. 2.3.7 Automatically conserving energy (Sleep mode) If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, the machine automatically enters a mode where it conserves energy. Although the machine conserves more energy in Sleep mode than in Low Power mode, the machine must warm up when Sleep mode is canceled to begin printing again, therefore taking more preparation time than Low Power mode. As the factory default, the machine enters Sleep mode after 60 minutes. To recover from Sleep mode 1 Press the [Power Save] key. 2 The machine can receive jobs while it is warming up. – The touch panel comes on again and, after the machine has finished warming up, it is ready to begin printing. 2 Note The Sleep mode can also be canceled by pressing any key in the control panel or by touching the touch panel. ! Detail As a default, the machine enters Low Power mode if no operation is performed for 15 minutes, and then the machine enters Sleep mode after 60 minutes have elapsed. The length of time until the machine enters Sleep mode can be changed. For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17 and "System Settings" on page 12-26. Specify whether to bring the machine to the same condition as mains power off when the machine enters Sleep mode or when the sub power switch is turned off. For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-26. 2 Before making copies 2-36 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.3.8 Manually conserving energy The machine can be manually set to an energy conservation mode (Low Power mode or Sleep mode). % Press the [Power Save] key (or press the [Power] (auxiliary power) key). – As the factory default, the machine enters Low Power mode. ! Detail Whether the machine enters Low Power mode or Sleep mode when the [Power Save] key is pressed can be set from the Administrator Settings mode. For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-26. 2.3.9 Automatically turning the machine on/off (Weekly Timer) The machine can be set to automatically enter Sleep mode according to a usage schedule determined by the administrator so the machine’s use can be limited. This is the Weekly Timer. Follow the procedure described below to use the machine while the Weekly Timer is being used. ! Detail As the factory default, the Weekly Timer is not set. For details on setting the Weekly Timer, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-26. 1 Press the [Power Save] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-37 Before making copies 2 2 Type in the password (up to 8 digits) for non-business hours. – For details on setting the password for non-business hours, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-26. 3 Touch [OK]. The message "It is now non-business hour. Set the Sleep Mode time." appears. 4 Using the keypad, again type in the length of time until the machine enters Sleep mode. – Specify a length of time between 5 minutes and 9 hours and 59 minutes. ? How can a single digit be entered? % First, type in "0". If a minutes setting of less than 5 is entered, the setting changes to 5 minutes. In addition, a minutes setting of 60 or more cannot be specified. 5 Touch [OK]. The message "Ready to copy." appears on the touch panel. 2 Note If the message "It is now non-business hour. Set the Sleep Mode time." or "It is now non-business hour. To use the device, enter password using the keyboard or keypad and then touch [OK]." appears after the [Power] (auxiliary power) key is pressed, the Weekly Timer is set. 2 Before making copies 2-38 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) ! Detail During the set time, the copy operations can be performed as usual. From the Password for Non-Business Hours screen (displayed from Administrator Settings mode), the machine can be set so that the screen for entering the password for non-business hours is not displayed. The default setting for the "Password for Non-Business Hours" parameter is "No" (the screen is not displayed). 2.3.10 Controlling each user’s use of this machine (User Authentication) If user authentication settings have been specified by the administrator, only users that have been registered can use this machine. In addition, the number of printed pages can be managed for each user. 0 When user authentication settings have been specified, only users who enter passwords for specified users can use this machine. 0 Contact the administrator for a user name and password and for the server name. 0 If machine authentication or external server authentication has been set, a total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered. 1 Touch [User Name]. – If a list of user names can be displayed, the desired user name can be selected from the list. Touch [User Name List], touch the button for the desired user name to select it, and then touch [OK]. – Users who have no access to a user name and password can touch [Public User Access] to use this machine. For details on specifying public user settings, refer to "Selecting an authentication method" on page 12-69 and "Public User Access" on page 12-74. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-39 Before making copies 2 – If "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON", [Public User Access] and [User Name List] do not appear. – If external server authentication was selected as the user authentication method, [Server Name] appears with the name of the default server. Touch [Server Name] to display the names of the registered servers, and then select the desired server. For details on specifying settings for an external server authentication, refer to "Selecting an authentication method" on page 12-69. 2 Type in the user name, and then touch [OK]. 2 Before making copies 2-40 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Password]. 4 Type in the password, and then touch [OK]. 5 Touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. The Basic screen appears. If account track settings have been applied, the account track screen appears. However, if "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" has been set to "Synchronize", the account track screen does not appear if the users and accounts are synchronized. 6 Make copies using the desired copy settings. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-41 Before making copies 2 7 When you are finished printing, press the [Access] key. A message appears, requesting confirmation to log off. 8 Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. The user authentication screen appears. ! Detail For details on specifying user authentication settings, refer to "User Authentication/Account Track" on page 12-33. It is possible to specify so that the logging-off confirmation screen does not appear. For details, refer to "User Authentication/Account Track" on page 12-33. 2 Note The user authentication settings can be used together with the account track settings. If the "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" parameter is set to "Synchronize", complete user authentication, and then log on by using the account track screen. User authentication settings can be specified using the User Authentication parameters in Administrator Settings mode, available from the Utility mode. Settings should be specified by the administrator. 2 Before making copies 2-42 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.3.11 Controlling each account’s use of this machine (Account Track) If the account track settings have been specified by the administrator, only users of registered accounts can use this machine. In addition, the number of prints produced with each account can be controlled. This is account track. 0 When account track settings have been specified, only users who enter passwords for specified accounts can use this machine. 0 If you do not know the account name or password, contact your administrator. 0 A total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered. 1 Touch [Account Name]. – If [Password Only] is specified in the Administrator Settings, the following screen appears. Touch [Password] and continue with step 4. – If the "Account Track Input Method" in the Administrator Settings is set to "Password Only", only [Password] is displayed in the authentication screen. The password can be directly entered in the authentication screen using the keypad. If the password consists of numerals only, touching [Login] or pressing the [Access] key allows logging on without displaying a keyboard screen. – If the password consists of alphabet characters, numerals and symbols, touch [Password] and continue with step 4. – After entering numerals using the keypad, touching [Password] allows alphabet characters or symbols to be entered in succession. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-43 Before making copies 2 2 Type in the account name, and then touch [OK]. 3 Touch [Password]. 4 Type in the password, and then touch [OK]. 2 Before making copies 2-44 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5 Touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. The Basic screen appears. 6 Make copies using the desired copy settings. 7 When you are finished printing, press the [Access] key. A message appears, requesting confirmation to log off. 8 Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. The account track screen appears. ! Detail The accounts can be managed in Administrator Settings mode, available from the Utility mode. Settings should be specified by the administrator. If "Account Track Input Method" on the General Settings screen of Administrator Settings mode was set to "Password Only", log on is possible by only entering the password. For details, refer to "User Authentication/Account Track" on page 12-33. For details on specifying account track settings, refer to "Selecting an authentication method" on page 12-69. It is possible to specify so that the logging-off confirmation screen does not appear. For details, refer to "User Authentication/Account Track" on page 12-33. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-45 Before making copies 2 2.3.12 Controlling use of this machine with Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) An authentication unit (biometric type) can be used with this machine to perform authentication. The authentication unit (biometric type) authenticates the user by scanning the vein patterns in the finger. 2 Note 1-to-many authentication: Authentication is performed simply by positioning the finger. 1-to-1 authentication: Authentication is performed by typing in the user name and positioning the finger. ! Detail To use biometric authentication, register the vein patterns in the finger in advance. For details on specifying authentication settings for the authentication unit (biometric type) and on registering finger vein patterns, refer to chapter 12, "Authentication unit (Biometric Type AU-101)" of this manual. When "1-to-many authentication" has been specified % Place your finger on the authentication unit (biometric type). 2 Before making copies 2-46 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) The basic screen appears. When "1-to-1 authentication" has been specified 1 Type in the user name. 2 Place your finger on the authentication unit (biometric type). bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-47 Before making copies 2 The basic screen appears. 2 Note If the authentication unit (biometric type) cannot be used, it is possible to use this machine by entering a [User name] and [Password]. 2.3.13 Controlling use of this machine with the Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) An authentication unit (IC card type) can be used with this machine to perform authentication. The authentication unit (IC card type) authenticates users by reading the information registered on their IC card. 2 Note Card Authentication: Authentication is performed simply by positioning the IC card. Card Authentication + Password: Authentication is performed by positioning the IC card and entering the password. ! Detail To use card authentication, register the card information in advance. For details on specifying authentication settings for the authentication unit (IC card type) and on registering IC card information, refer to chapter 13, "Authentication unit (IC Card Type AU-201)" of this manual. When "Card Authentication" has been specified 2 Before making copies 2-48 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) % Place the IC card horizontally on the card scanning area of the authentication unit (IC card type). The Basic screen appears. When "Card Authentication + Password" has been specified bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-49 Before making copies 2 1 Place the IC card horizontally on the card scanning area of the authentication unit (IC card type). 2 Type in the password and then touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. The Basic screen appears. 2 Note If the authentication unit (IC card type) cannot be used, it is possible to use this machine by entering a user name and password. 2 Before making copies 2-50 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2.4 Loading paper into the tray 1 or 2 To load paper (tray 1 or 2) 1 Pull out the tray 1 or 2. 2 Raise the paper take-up roller. 3 Load the paper into the tray. – Load the paper so that it is flush against the right side of the tray. 4 Fully push in the paper tray. 2 Reminder Do not load so much paper that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark. Make sure that the trailing-edge guide is adjusted to fit the size of the loaded paper. If there is space between the trailing-edge guide and the paper, the paper will not be fed correctly. Do not close the paper tray with too much force, otherwise the weight of the tray and paper will apply an impact to the machine that may cause damage. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-51 Before making copies 2 2.5 Loading paper into the tray 3 or 4 To load paper (tray 3 or 4) 1 Pull out the tray 3 or 4. 2 Raise the paper take-up roller. 3 Load the paper into the tray. – Load the paper so that it is flush against the right side of the tray. 4 Slide the lateral guide to fit the size of paper being loaded. – Move the lateral guide while holding the release button pressed. When the button is released, the guide is locked in place. 5 Fully push in the paper tray. 2 Reminder Do not load so much paper that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark. 2 Reminder Make sure that the trailing-edge guide is adjusted to fit the size of the loaded paper. If there is space between the trailing-edge guide and the paper or if the trailing-edge guide is not correctly positioned, the paper will not be fed correctly. Make sure that the lateral guide is correctly positioned against the edge of the loaded paper. If the lateral guide is not positioned correctly, the paper size will not be correctly detected or the punched holes will not be correctly positioned. If custom-sized paper is loaded, there may be some space between the paper and the trailing-edge guide. When loading the paper, make sure that it fits well against the right side of the paper tray, not the trailing-edge guide. 2 Before making copies 2-52 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Reminder Do not close the paper tray with too much force, otherwise the weight of the tray and paper will apply an impact to the machine that may cause damage. 2.6 Loading paper into the LCT (LU-405/LU-406) 2 Note LCT is the optional Large capacity unit LU-405/LU-406. 2 Reminder If the machine is turned off, the bottom plate cannot be raised. In addition, the bottom plate cannot be lowered, even after the tray bottom plate lower button is pressed. When loading paper into the LCT, be sure that the machine is turned on with both the main power switch and the auxiliary power key. To load paper (LCT) 1 Open the upper cover. 2 Press the tray bottom plate lower button. – The tray bottom plate is lowered. (LU-405) (LU-406) bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-53 Before making copies 2 3 Load the paper into the tray. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the tray bottom plate cannot be lowered any further. 5 Close the upper cover. (LU-405) (LU-406) ) (LU-405) (LU-406) 2 Before making copies 2-54 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Reminder Do not load the LCT with paper of other sizes than previously specified. Do not load so much paper that the top of the stack does not exceed the , mark. Make sure that the trailing edge stopper is adjusted to fit the size of the loaded paper. If there is space between the trailing edge stopper and the paper, the paper will not be fed correctly. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-55 Before making copies 2 2.7 Loading paper into the bypass tray Paper can be fed manually through the bypass tray if you wish to copy onto paper that is not loaded into a paper tray, or if you wish to copy onto thick paper, thin paper, tracing paper, tab paper, OHP transparencies, label sheets, etc. 1 Open the bypass tray. 2 With the side to be printed on facing down, insert the paper as much as possible into the feed slot. 3 Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of paper being loaded. – Push the paper guides firmly up against the edges of the paper. ? How is curled paper loaded? % Flatten the paper before loading it. 2 Before making copies 2-56 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Select the paper type. – To display a different list of paper types, touch . 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-57 Before making copies 2 2 Reminder When loading OHP transparencies, load them in the v orientation, as shown in the illustration. Do not load OHP transparencies in the w orientation. Load OHP transparencies one sheet at a time. When loading tab papers, load them in the v orientation, as shown in the illustration. Do not load tab papers in the w orientation. Load label sheets one sheet at a time. 2 Before making copies 2-58 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Be sure to load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces up, and select [Letterhead] for the paper type of the bypass tray. 2 Note The image will be printed on the surface of the paper facing down when the paper is loaded into the bypass tray. ! Detail For details on the paper sizes, refer to "Copy paper" on page 7-3. For details on selecting a setting for standard size paper, refer to "Selecting a paper size setting (Size setting)" on page 7-10. For details on selecting a setting for non-standard-size paper, refer to "Specifying a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings)" on page 7-12. For details on selecting a setting for wide paper, refer to "Selecting a setting for oversized paper (Wide paper settings)" on page 7-17. ABC ABC bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-59 Before making copies 2 2.8 Loading paper of a different size into paper trays The paper loaded into the tray 3 and 4 can be changed to that of a different size. 2 Note To load paper of a different size into the tray 1 and 2 and the LCT, contact your service representative. 2.8.1 Changing the size of paper that is loaded 1 Pull out the tray 3 or 4. 2 Raise the paper take-up roller. 3 Remove the trailing-edge guide, and then insert it at the position for the desired paper size. – Press the button to remove the trailing-edge guide. – Insert the trailing-edge guide into the hole corresponding to the size indicated on the bottom plate. 4 Load paper of the new size, and then slide the lateral guide to fit the size of the paper. – Move the lateral guide while holding the release button pressed. When the button is released, the guide is locked in place. 5 Fully push in the paper tray. – If paper other than standard-size paper or thick paper was loaded, specify the settings for the loaded paper in the Paper Type screen. Refer to "Paper type setting for a tray" on page 7-21. 2 Before making copies 2-60 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Reminder Be sure to insert the trailing-edge guide at the position for the specified size. If there is space between the trailing-edge guide and the paper, the paper will not be fed correctly. Make sure that the lateral guide is correctly positioned against the edge of the loaded paper. If the lateral guide is not positioned correctly, the paper size will not be correctly detected. Do not close the paper tray with too much force, otherwise the weight of the tray and paper will apply an impact to the machine that may cause damage. 2.8.2 When 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 or A5-size thick paper is loaded into a paper tray If 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 or A5-size thick paper is loaded into a paper tray, the bypass tray or the LCT, the transport lever must be correctly set in order to prevent paper misfeeds. To set the transport lever 1 Open the front doors (left and right). 2 Turn lever M4 to the left, and then pull out the ADU unit. 3 Set the transport lever to "5-1/2 e 8-1/2, A5 Thick paper". 4 Return the ADU unit to its original position. 5 Close the front doors (left and right). 2 Note After using 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 or A5-size thick paper, be sure to reset the transport lever to "NORMAL". M4 Transport lever 3 Basic copy operations bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-3 Basic copy operations 3 3 Basic copy operations 3.1 General copy operation This section contains information on the general operation for making copies. The following procedure describes how to copy a single-sided original using basic copy operations. 2 Note The maximum loading capacity of the output trays for the optional finisher may be limited depending on the paper size and selected Finishing settings. With continuous printing (multiple jobs), the warning "The output tray has reached its capacity. Remove paper from the tray indicated by %." may appear, even if the paper was removed from the output trays. For details on multiple jobs, refer to "Multi-job feature" on page 11-3. Interrupting a print job resets the loading capacity of the output tray. For details on the limitations of the loading capacity for the output trays, refer to "Specifications" on page 6-3. Some settings cannot be used together. For details on the settings that cannot be combined, refer to "Operations that cannot be combined" on page 3-6. 1 Press the [Copy] key to display the Basic screen in Copy mode. 2 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to page 3-9. 3 Basic copy operations 3-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Specify the desired copy settings. – The factory default settings for this machine are listed below. [Density]: Auto [Background Removal]: Standard [Paper]: Auto (Auto Paper Select) [Zoom]: Full Size (100.0%) [Duplex/Combine]: 1 > 1 [Original Type]: Text/Photo – For details on selecting settings in the Original Setting screen, refer to page 3-19. – For details on selecting a Paper setting, refer to page 3-36. – For details on specifying a Zoom setting, refer to page 3-39. – For details on selecting the original and copy settings, refer to page 3-50. – For details on selecting the original image quality, refer to page 3-59. – For details on selecting a copy density setting, refer to page 3-61. – For details on specifying combined copy settings, refer to page 3-55. – For details on selecting Finishing settings, refer to page 3-64. – For details on selecting the Fold/Bind settings, refer to page 3-77. – For details on specifying settings to not rotate the image, refer to page 3-89. – For details on specifying settings for the Application functions, refer to page 8-3. 4 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. – If the number of copies was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad, and then specify the correct number of copies. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-5 Basic copy operations 3 5 Press the [Start] key. – To stop the copy operation being performed, press the [Stop] key. For details, refer to page 3-91. – The next copy operation can be queued while a copy operation is being performed. For details, refer to page 3-90. 3 Basic copy operations 3-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.2 Operations that cannot be combined Certain copy settings cannot be used together. Specifying settings that cannot be combined will result in one of the following occurring. - The setting specified last is given priority. (The setting specified first is canceled.) - The setting specified first is given priority. (A warning message appears.) 3.2.1 Operations where the setting specified last is given priority The procedure for setting the "Booklet" function after selecting the "2 Position" Staple setting is described below. 1 Select the "2 Position" Staple setting. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-7 Basic copy operations 3 2 Set the "Booklet" function. The "2 Position" Staple setting is automatically canceled, and the "Booklet" function is set. To select the "2 Position" Staple setting, cancel the "Booklet" function, and then select the "2 Position" setting. 3 Basic copy operations 3-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.2.2 Operations where the setting specified first is given priority If a warning message appears, indicating that settings cannot be combined, those settings cannot be specified together. The procedure for selecting the "2 Position" Staple setting after setting the "Booklet" function is described below. 1 Set the "Booklet" function. 2 Select the "2 Position" Staple setting. The message "Cannot be set with Booklet." appears and the "2 Position" Staple setting cannot be selected. The "Booklet" function remains selected and the "2 Position" Staple setting is canceled. To select the "2 Position" Staple setting, cancel the "Booklet" function, and then select the "2 Position" Staple setting. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-9 Basic copy operations 3 3.3 Feeding the original The original can be fed in either of the following two ways. Be sure to position the original correctly according to the type of original being copied. 3.3.1 Loading the original into the ADF 0 Do not load originals that are bound together, for example, with paper clips or staples. 0 For details on the types of originals that can be loaded into the ADF, refer to "Originals" on page 7-31. 0 Do not load more than 100 sheets or so many sheets that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark, otherwise an original misfeed or damage to the original or machine may occur. However, a original that exceeds 100 sheets can be scanned in separate batches. For details, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11. 0 If the original is not loaded correctly, it may not be fed in straight or an original misfeed or damage to the original may occur. 0 If the original is loaded in any orientation other than with the top of the original toward the back of the machine, be sure to select the original orientation. For details on selecting the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. 1 Place the original in the original feed tray in the order to be scanned with the side to be scanned faces up. – Load the original pages so that the top of the original is toward the back or the right side of the machine. 2 Adjust the lateral guides to the size of the original. – For details on loading originals of mixed sizes, refer to "Copying originals of mixed sizes ("Mixed Original" setting)" on page 3-21. – For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. – For details on specifying the binding margin position, refer to "Selecting the position of the binding margin ("Binding Position" settings)" on page 3-29. Document Feed Method Features Using the ADF By using the ADF, a multi-page original can be fed automatically, one page at a time. This feed method can also be used to automatically scan double-sided originals. Using the original glass Place the original directly on the original glass so that it can be scanned. This method is best with books and other originals that cannot be fed through the ADF. A A 3 Basic copy operations 3-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.3.2 Placing the original on the original glass 0 For details on the types of originals that can be placed on the original glass, refer to "Originals" on page 7-31. 0 When placing the original on the original glass, be sure to lift open the ADF at least 20°. If the original is placed on the original glass without the ADF being lifted at least 20°, the correct original size may not be detected. 0 Do not place objects weighing more than 6.8 kg on the original glass. In addition, do not press down extremely hard on a book spread on the original glass, otherwise the original glass may be damaged. 0 For thick books or large objects, make the copy without closing the ADF. When an original is being scanned with the ADF open, do not look directly at the light that may shine through the original glass. Although the light that shines through the original glass is bright, it is not a laser beam and, therefore, is not as dangerous. 1 Lift open the ADF or the original cover. 2 Place the original face down on the original glass. – Load the original pages so that the top of the original is toward the back or the left side of the machine. 3 Align the original with the mark in the back-left corner of the original scales. – For details on selecting the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. – For details on specifying the binding margin position, refer to "Selecting the position of the binding margin ("Binding Position" settings)" on page 3-29. – For transparent or translucent originals, place a blank sheet of paper of the same size as the original over the original. Original scales bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-11 Basic copy operations 3 – For bound originals spread over two facing pages, such as a book or magazine, position the top of the original toward the back of this machine and align the original with the mark in the back-left corner of the original scales, as shown. 4 Close the ADF. 3.3.3 Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting) A large original can be divided and scanned in a number of batches. A maximum of 100 original pages can be loaded into the ADF at one time. However, by specifying the "Separate Scan" setting, an original that exceeds 100 pages can be scanned and treated as a single copy job. In addition, the scanning location can be switched between the original glass and the ADF during the scanning operation. 0 The loading capacity of the ADF is 100 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2). Do not allow the original to be loaded over the limit mark (,), even though the original count is less than 100. 0 The output method used with the "Separate Scan" setting can be set to "Page Print" or "Batch Print". As a default, "Page Print" is selected. 0 For details on the output method used with the "Separate Scan" setting, refer to the description for "Separate Scan Output Method" in "Copier Settings" on page 12-21. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Separate Scan]. – To cancel the "Separate Scan" setting, touch [Separate Scan] again to deselect it. 3 Basic copy operations 3-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Press the [Start] key. After the original has been scanned, the following message appears. – Load the next batch of the original, and then press the [Start] key. – If the "Separate Scan Output Method" parameter is set to "Batch Print", touch [Finish] in the following screen, which appears while the original is scanned with the ADF, to continue to step 5 – If the original cannot be loaded into the ADF, place it on the original glass. For details on the types of originals that can be loaded into the ADF, refer to "Originals" on page 7-31. – To change the scanning settings, touch [Change Setting]. For details on changing the scanning settings, refer to "Changing scan settings for each original" on page 3-32. – The buttons that appear in the screen for changing the settings differ depending on the specified settings. Settings for the following can be changed. 1-Sided/2-Sided, Density/Background, Original Type, Binding Position, Zoom, Original Size, Frame Erase, Center Erase bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-13 Basic copy operations 3 – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – The amount of memory available can be checked beside "Memory" in the lower-left corner of the screen. To delete the image data, press the [Stop] key, and then delete the job. For details, refer to "Temporarily stopping scanning/printing" on page 3-91. 4 After all original pages have been scanned, touch [Finish]. 3 Basic copy operations 3-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5 Press the [Start] key. – If the "Separate Scan Output Method" parameter is set to "Batch Print", touch [Print] or press the [Start] key. – If the "Separate Scan Output Method" parameter is set to "Batch Print", the copy settings can be changed. To change the copy settings, touch [Change Setting], and then touch [OK] after changing the settings as desired. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-15 Basic copy operations 3 3.3.4 Scanning a multi-page original from the original glass When making double-sided or combined copies using the original glass, place each page of a multi-page original on the original glass to scan it. The following procedure describes how to place single-sided original pages on the original glass to make double-sided copies. 0 The output method used with the "Separate Scan" setting can be set to "Page Print" or "Batch Print". As a default, "Page Print" is selected. 0 For details on the output method used with the "Separate Scan" setting, refer to "Copier Settings" on page 12-21. 1 Lift open the ADF. 2 Position the first page or the first side of the original face down onto the original glass. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Placing the original on the original glass" on page 3-10. 3 Close the ADF. 4 In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine]. The Duplex/Combine screen appears. 3 Basic copy operations 3-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5 Touch [1-Sided > 2-Sided]. 6 Touch [Binding Position], select the binding position for the copy, and then touch [OK]. – For details on specifying the binding position, refer to "Selecting double-sided copies" on page 3-52. 7 Touch [Original Direction], select the orientation of the loaded original, and then touch [OK]. – For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. 8 Touch [OK]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-17 Basic copy operations 3 9 Press the [Start] key. Scanning begins. 10 Position the second page or second side of the original onto the original glass, and then press the [Start] key. – To scan the remaining pages in the original, repeat step 10. – To change the scanning settings, touch [Change Setting]. For details on changing the scanning settings, refer to "Changing scan settings for each original" on page 3-32. – The buttons that appear in the screen for changing the settings differ depending on the specified settings. Settings for the following can be changed. 1-Sided/2-Sided, Density/Background, Original Type, Binding Position, Zoom, Original Size, Frame Erase, Center Erase – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 3 Basic copy operations 3-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11 After all original pages have been scanned, touch [Finish]. 12 Press the [Start] key. – If the "Separate Scan Output Method" parameter is set to "Batch Print", touch [Print] or press the [Start] key. – If the "Separate Scan Output Method" parameter is set to "Batch Print", the copy settings can be changed. To change the copy settings, touch [Change Setting], and then touch [OK] after changing the settings as desired. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-19 Basic copy operations 3 3.4 Specifying original settings The following describes necessary settings depending on the status and placement of the originals to copy them as desired. 3.4.1 Specifying the original size ("Original Size" settings) Copies can be produced after specifying the original scanning size if the original size cannot be detected automatically or if you wish to specify a certain original size. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Original Setting]. The Original Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [Original Size]. The Original Size screen appears. 3 Basic copy operations 3-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Select the original size, and then touch [OK]. – Touch or to display a different list of standard sizes. – To specify a standard size, touch the button for the desired original size. – To specify a custom size, touch [Custom Size] to display the Custom Size screen. Specify the X and Y sides of the paper, and then touch [OK]. – Touch [X] or [Y], touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [-] and [+] to specify the size of the paper. – If a decimal value is displayed in the Custom Size screen, use the keypad to type in the setting. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. Custom Size screen bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-21 Basic copy operations 3 3.4.2 Copying originals of mixed sizes ("Mixed Original" setting) Originals of different sizes can be loaded together into the ADF to be fed and scanned one by one automatically. 0 Do not load more than 100 sheets or so many sheets that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark, otherwise an original misfeed or damage to the original or machine may occur. However, an original that exceeds 100 sheets can be scanned in separate batches. For details, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11. 0 If the original is not loaded correctly, it may not be fed in straight or an original misfeed or damage to the original may occur. 1 Slide the adjustable lateral guides of the ADF to fit the size of the largest page. – The possible combinations of original sizes differ depending on the widest original loaded (position of the adjustable lateral guides). – For details on the mixed original sizes that can be loaded in the ADF, refer to "Originals that can be loaded into the ADF" on page 7-31. 2 Align the originals as the references so that the side to be scanned faces up. 3 Place the original in the original feed tray in the order to be scanned with the side to be scanned faces up. Slide the adjustable lateral guides against the edges of the original. – Load the original pages into the ADF so that the top of the pages is toward the back or the left side of the machine. 3 Basic copy operations 3-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 In the Basic screen, touch [Original Setting]. The Original Setting screen appears. 5 Touch [Mixed Original]. – To cancel the "Mixed Original" setting, touch [Mixed Original] again to deselect it. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-23 Basic copy operations 3 3.4.3 Loading folded (Z-folded) originals If folded originals are loaded into the ADF to be copied, the original size is correctly detected. 0 Load the original into the ADF. 0 The length of the first page of the original is detected, and all pages of the original are scanned at that size. 1 Position the original to be copied. – Unfold folded originals before loading them into the ADF. If the original is copied without being unfolded, a paper misfeed may occur. – For details on loading the original, refer to "Loading the original into the ADF" on page 3-9. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Original Setting]. The Original Setting screen appears. 3 Basic copy operations 3-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Z-Folded Original]. – To cancel the "Z-Folded Original" setting, touch [Z-Folded Original] again to deselect it. 3.4.4 Loading tab paper (Tab original settings) Using tab papers enables copying of an original including its index part. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on loading the original, refer to "Loading the original into the ADF" on page 3-9. 2 Load tab papers into the bypass tray. – Tab papers can be loaded into the bypass tray. For details, refer to "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-55. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-25 Basic copy operations 3 3 In the Basic screen, touch [Original Setting]. The Original Setting screen appears. 4 Touch [Tab Original]. The Tab Original screen appears. 5 Select an original size, and then touch [OK]. 3 Basic copy operations 3-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.4.5 Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings) When copying double-sided originals or making double-sided copies or combined copies, specify the original orientation, otherwise the copies may not be printed in the correct page order or correct front and back page arrangement. 2 Note As the factory default, the first setting (with the top of the original at the top (toward the back of the machine)) is selected. Original loading orientation Using the ADF Using the original glass Icon Description Select this setting for an original loaded with the top toward the back of this machine. Select this setting for an original loaded with the top toward the front of this machine. • Select this setting for an original loaded into the ADF with the top of the original toward the left side of this machine. • Select this setting for an original placed on the original glass with the top of the original toward the right side of this machine. • Select this setting for an original loaded into the ADF with the top of the original toward the right side of this machine. • Select this setting for an original placed on the original glass with the top of the original toward the left side of this machine. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-27 Basic copy operations 3 3.4.6 To select an original direction setting 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Original Setting]. The Original Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [Original Direction]. The Original Direction screen appears. 3 Basic copy operations 3-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch the button for the orientation of the loaded original, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-29 Basic copy operations 3 3.4.7 Selecting the position of the binding margin ("Binding Position" settings) If a double-sided original is loaded into the ADF, specify the position of the top of the back side of the original by specifying the binding margin position for the original. 2 Note As the factory default, "Auto" is selected as the position of the binding margin. Original binding margin position Original binding margin Icon Description Left Select this setting if the original is loaded with the binding margin at the left. Right Select this setting if the original is loaded with the binding margin at the right. Top Select this setting if the original that is loaded has a binding margin at the top. When the original length is 297 mm or less: When the original length is more than 297 mm: Auto Select this setting to automatically select the position of the binding margin. If the original length is 297 mm or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the original length is more than 297 mm: a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected. 2 Note If "Auto" is selected, the binding margin is set at the top or at the left. ABC AB ABCBC ABC ABC ABC AB ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC AB 3 Basic copy operations 3-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.4.8 To select a binding position setting 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. – When loading an original with a binding margin, position the top of the original toward the back of the machine. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Original Setting]. The Original Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [Binding Position]. The Binding Position screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-31 Basic copy operations 3 4 Touch the button for the desired binding margin position, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 3 Basic copy operations 3-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.4.9 Changing scan settings for each original When scanning an original while using the "Separate Scan" setting or when multi-page originals are scanned from the original glass, the scan settings can be changed for each original. The following procedure describes how to change the settings when the "Separate Scan" setting is used. 1 Position the original to be copied. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Separate Scan]. 3 Press the [Start] key. Scanning begins. 4 Touch [Change Setting]. A screen appears, allowing you to change the settings. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-33 Basic copy operations 3 5 Touch the button of the setting to be changed, select the desired setting, and then touch [OK]. – The buttons that appear in the screen for changing the settings differ depending on the specified settings. Settings for the following can be changed. 1-Sided/2-Sided, Density/Background, Original Type, Binding Position, Zoom, Original Size, Frame Erase, Center Erase – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. Binding Position screen Density/Background screen 3 Basic copy operations 3-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Original Type screen Frame Erase screen Zoom screen bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-35 Basic copy operations 3 – For details on specifying the Zoom setting, refer to "Specifying a zoom setting" on page 3-39. For details on specifying "Frame Erase" and "Center Erase" settings, refer to "Erasing black marks along borders ("Erase" function)" on page 8-51. – The Original Size screen appears only when the "Mixed Original" setting is selected. 6 Touch [OK]. Original Size screen Center Erase screen 3 Basic copy operations 3-36 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.5 Selecting a paper setting The paper size can be selected automatically according to the original size or it can be specified manually. Specify the paper size according to the corresponding procedure, depending on the desired copy settings. As the factory default, "Auto" is selected. 2 Note If a setting for special paper is selected for a paper tray, that tray is not selected automatically with the "Auto" Paper setting. (However, a paper tray set to "Single Side Only" is given priority to be selected with single-sided printing.) Be sure to specify a paper setting when special paper is loaded into a paper tray. For details, refer to "Specifying a paper type for bypass tray" on page 7-19. If the "Auto Paper Select" was selected at the "Auto Zoom" setting, the Zoom screen appears. Touch the button for the desired zoom ratio. The "Auto" Paper setting cannot be combined with the "Auto" Zoom setting. For details on specifying the priority of paper trays, refer to "Specifying user settings" on page 12-17. 3.5.1 Automatically selecting the paper size ("Auto" paper setting) The size of the loaded original is detected, and copies are produced using paper of the same size. If the "Full Size" Zoom setting was specified, paper of the same size as the original is selected. If the zoom ratio was increased or decreased, a paper size that corresponds to the specified zoom ratio is automatically selected. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-37 Basic copy operations 3 2 Touch [Auto]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 3 Basic copy operations 3-38 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.5.2 Manually selecting the desired paper size 0 By also selecting the "Auto" Zoom setting, the most appropriate zoom ratio is selected based on the size of the loaded original and the specified paper size. For details on the "Auto" Zoom setting, refer to "Automatically selecting the zoom ratio ("Auto" zoom Setting)" on page 3-39. 0 Load the appropriate papers into the paper tray in advance. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Select the paper tray loaded with the desired paper. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-39 Basic copy operations 3 3.6 Specifying a zoom setting The zoom ratio can be set in order to make a copy on paper with a size different than the original or to enlarge or reduce the size of the copy image. As the factory default, "Full Size" is selected. The following procedures describe how to specify the Zoom setting. 2 Note The "Auto" Zoom setting cannot be combined with the "Auto" Paper setting. 3.6.1 Automatically selecting the zoom ratio ("Auto" zoom Setting) The most appropriate zoom ratio is automatically selected based on the size of the loaded original and the specified paper size. 0 If the "Auto" Zoom setting is selected and an enlargement is to be copied on paper larger than the original, load the original with the same orientation as the paper. 0 If the "Auto Zoom" was selected at the "Auto Paper Select" setting, the Paper screen appears. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch [Auto]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 3 Basic copy operations 3-40 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.6.2 Specifying the zoom ratio of the original ("Full Size" setting) A copy that is the same size as the original (100%) is produced. 0 Touch [+] to enlarge the zoom ratio, and touch [-] to reduce the zoom ratio in 0.1% increments. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch [Full Size]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-41 Basic copy operations 3 3.6.3 Typing in the zoom ratio (XY zoom setting) By using the keypad, a zoom ratio between 25.0% and 400.0% can be typed in directly without changing the height-to-width ratio. 0 If a value outside the allowable range is specified, the message "Input error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. 0 The entered zoom ratio can be stored. For details on storing zoom ratios, refer to "Storing the desired zoom ratio" on page 3-48. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch [XY Zoom]. 3 Basic copy operations 3-42 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Using the keypad, type in the desired zoom ratio (between 25.0% and 400.0%). 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-43 Basic copy operations 3 3.6.4 Slightly reducing the copy ("Minimal" setting) An original image can be printed slightly smaller (93.0%) than the original size and centered in the copy. 0 The zoom ratio of the "Minimal" setting can be changed (between 90.0% and 99.9%). For details on changing the zoom ratio for the "Minimal" setting or programming custom zoom ratios, refer to "Storing the desired zoom ratio" on page 3-48. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch [Minimal]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 3 Basic copy operations 3-44 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.6.5 Selecting a preset zoom ratio (Enlarge and reduce settings) The most suitable zoom ratios for copying from common standard original sizes to standard paper sizes are preset. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the appropriate zoom ratio beside "Enlarge" and "Reduce", depending on the original and paper sizes. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-45 Basic copy operations 3 3.6.6 Typing in separate X and Y zoom ratios (Individual zoom settings) By using the keypad, separate zoom ratios can be typed in directly for the horizontal direction (between 25.0% and 400.0%) and for the vertical direction (between 25.0% and 400.0%). By combining different horizontal and vertical zoom ratios, the copy image can be adjusted as shown below. 0 If a value outside the allowable range is specified, the message "Input error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch [XY Zoom]. 3 Basic copy operations 3-46 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [X] under "Set Individual Zoom", and then use the keypad to type in the desired zoom ratio (between 25.0% and 400.0%) for the X direction. 4 Touch [Y] under "Set Individual Zoom", and then use the keypad to type in the desired zoom ratio (between 25.0% and 400.0%) for the Y direction. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-47 Basic copy operations 3 3.6.7 Selecting a stored zoom ratio Copy zoom ratios that have been stored can be recalled to be used when desired. In addition, stored copy zoom ratios can be changed. 0 As the factory default, "Full Size" is selected. 0 Touch [+] to enlarge the zoom ratio, and touch [-] to reduce the zoom ratio in 0.1% increments. 0 Stored zoom ratios can be changed to desired zoom ratios. For details on storing zoom ratios, refer to "Storing the desired zoom ratio" on page 3-48. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the desired zoom ratio under "Set Zoom Ratio". 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 3 Basic copy operations 3-48 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.6.8 Storing the desired zoom ratio Three frequently used zoom ratios and the zoom ratio for the "Minimal" setting can be stored. 0 If a value outside the allowable range is specified, the message "Input error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. 0 To store a "Minimal" zoom ratio, type in the desired zoom ratio between 90.0% and 99.9%. 0 The default zoom ratios (400.0%, 200.0% and 50.0%) are stored. When a new zoom ratio is stored, it overwrites the zoom ratio stored with the selected button. If a button stored with a zoom ratio is not touched before [OK] is touched, no setting is changed. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch [XY Zoom]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-49 Basic copy operations 3 3 Using the keypad, type in the desired zoom ratio (between 25.0% and 400.0%). – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 4 Touch [Set Zoom]. 5 Touch the button or [Minimal] where the new zoom ratio is to be stored. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The specified zoom ratio is stored. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. The Basic screen appears again. 3 Basic copy operations 3-50 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.7 Selecting an original > copy setting The following four Original > Copy setting combinations are possible. The following procedures describe how to select Original and Copy setting. Original > Copy setting Description 1-Sided > 1-Sided Select this setting to produce single-sided copies from single-sided originals. 1-Sided > 2-Sided Select this setting to produce one double-sided copy from two singlesided originals. 2-Sided > 1-Sided Select this setting to produce two single-sided copies from one doublesided original. 2-Sided > 2-Sided Select this setting to produce double-sided copies from double-sided originals. 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-51 Basic copy operations 3 3.7.1 Selecting single-sided copies 0 As the factory default, "1-Sided > 1-Sided" is selected. 0 For details on using the original glass to scan multi-page originals, refer to "Scanning a multi-page original from the original glass" on page 3-15. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine]. The Duplex/Combine screen appears. 2 Touch [1-Sided > 1-Sided] or [2-Sided > 1-Sided]. – If "2-Sided > 1-Sided" is selected, specify the position of the binding margin and the orientation of the loaded original, otherwise the copies will not be printed as desired. – If the binding position for the original is set to "Auto", the position of the binding margin is automatically selected. A binding margin along the long side of the paper is selected if the original length is 297 mm or less. If the original length is more than 297 mm, a binding margin along the short side of the paper is selected. – If "Auto" is selected under "Original Bind Direction", the binding margin is set at the top or at the left. 3 Basic copy operations 3-52 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – For a double-sided original, touch [Binding Position], select the binding position of the original, and then touch [OK]. 3 Touch [Original Direction], select the orientation of the loaded original, and then touch [OK]. – For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. 4 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 3.7.2 Selecting double-sided copies 0 As the factory default, "1-Sided > 1-Sided" is selected. 0 For details on using the original glass to scan multi-page originals, refer to "Scanning a multi-page original from the original glass" on page 3-15. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine]. The Duplex/Combine screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-53 Basic copy operations 3 2 Touch [1-Sided > 2-Sided] or [2-Sided > 2-Sided]. – Specify the position of the binding margin and the orientation of the loaded original, otherwise the copies will not be printed as desired. – If the binding position for the original is set to "Auto", the position of the binding margin is automatically selected. A binding margin along the long side of the paper is selected if the original length is 297 mm or less. If the original length is more than 297 mm, a binding margin along the short side of the paper is selected. – If "Auto" is selected under "Original Binding Position", the binding margin is set at the top or at the left. – If the binding position for the copy is set to "Auto", the binding position is automatically determined according to the orientation of the loaded original. If the original length is 297 mm or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the original length is more than 297 mm, a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected. – If the binding position for the copy is set to "Auto", the binding position is set at the top or at the left. 3 Touch [Binding Position]. – For a single-sided original, select the binding position for the copy, and then touch [OK]. 3 Basic copy operations 3-54 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – For a double-sided original, select the binding positions for the original and the copy, and then touch [OK]. 4 Touch [Original Direction], select the orientation of the loaded original, and then touch [OK]. – For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. 5 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-55 Basic copy operations 3 3.8 Selecting a combined copy setting Original images of multiple pages (2, 4 or 8 pages) can be combined and printed on a single page, reducing paper use. The following three combined copy settings are available. ! Detail When select the combined copy setting, copies are produced with the most appropriate zoom ratio (recommended zoom ratio) selected for the original and paper size. The zoom ratio that is selected can be changed manually. 2 Note As the factory default, "Auto Display Zoom Ratio" is selected. The "Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet" parameter in Utility mode can be set so that the recommended zoom ratios are not used. In that case, specify the zoom ratio manually. For details, refer to "Custom Display Settings" on page 12-19. Setting Description 2in1 Select this setting to print two original pages on one page. 4in1 Select this setting to print four original pages on one page. The page arrangement (Numbering Direction setting) can be specified. Horizontal Vertical 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 Horizontal Vertical 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 1 1 3 3 2 2 4 4 1 1 3 3 2 2 4 4 3 Basic copy operations 3-56 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) The following procedure describes how to select a combined copy setting. 8in1 Select this setting to print eight original pages on one page. The page arrangement (Numbering Direction setting) can be specified. Horizontal Vertical Setting Description 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 1 1 3 3 5 5 7 7 2 2 4 4 6 6 8 8 1 1 5 5 2 2 6 6 3 3 7 7 4 4 8 8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-57 Basic copy operations 3 3.8.1 Copying multiple original pages onto a single page (Combined copy settings) If a combined copy setting is selected, specify the position of the binding margin and the loading orientation for the original, otherwise the copies may not be printed in the desired arrangement. For details on specifying the position of the binding margin, refer to "Selecting the position of the binding margin ("Binding Position" settings)" on page 3-29. For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine]. The Duplex/Combine screen appears. 2 Select the desired combined copy setting. 3 Basic copy operations 3-58 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – Select the setting and page arrangement according to the orientation and number of the combined pages. If "4in1 / 8in1" is selected, whether the "Horizontal" or "Vertical" paper arrangement is selected can be viewed in the touch panel. However, this appears only if the "Left Pane Display Default" parameter in Utility mode is set to "Check Job Settings". If "2in1" was selected, the pages will be arranged as shown below. – If "4in1 / 8in1" the 4in1/8in1 screen appears. Touch [Vertical] or [Horizontal] to select the combination order of the original, and press [OK]. – To cancel the setting, touch [No]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. Vertical Horizontal bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-59 Basic copy operations 3 3.9 Selecting the quality of the original 3.9.1 Loading originals with small print or photos ("Original Type" settings) Select the setting for the text and image type of the original to better adjust the copy quality. The following Original Type settings are available. 2 Note As the factory default, "Text/Photo" is selected. The following procedure describes how to select an Original Type setting. Icon Description Text Select this setting when copying originals containing only text. The edges of copied text are reproduced with sharpness, providing an image that is easy to read. Text/Photo Select this setting when copying originals containing both text and images. Photo Select this setting to produce better reproductions of halftone original images (photographs, etc.) that cannot be reproduced with the usual settings. Dot Matrix Original Select this setting when copying originals containing only text that appears faint (such as that written with a pencil). The copied text is reproduced so that it is darker, making it easier to read. 3 Basic copy operations 3-60 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.9.2 To select an original type setting 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Original Type]. The Original Type screen appears. 3 Touch the button for the quality setting most appropriate for the loaded original. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-61 Basic copy operations 3 3.10 Selecting the density settings Specify the copy density and background density. Adjust to the best density according to the status of the originals. The following two density adjustments are available. The following procedures describe how to specify the density settings. Function Description Density The print image density can be adjusted to one of nine levels. Each time [Lighter] or [Darker] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level. Touch [Standard] to select the middle setting of the nine levels. Touch [Auto] to automatically adjust the density level according to the original being copied. Background Removal The density of the background color of the original can be adjusted to one of nine levels. Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the background density is lightened or darkened by one level. Touch [Standard] to select the middle setting of the nine levels. 3 Basic copy operations 3-62 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.10.1 Adjusting the print density (Density settings) 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Density/Background]. The Density/Background Removal screen appears. 2 Select the desired Density setting. – Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level. – To select the center setting (default setting), touch [Standard]. – Touch [Auto] to automatically adjust the density level according to the original being copied. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 3 Touch [OK]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-63 Basic copy operations 3 3.10.2 Adjusting the background density (Background removal settings) 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Density/Background]. The Density/Background Removal screen appears. 2 Select the desired Background Removal setting. – Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level. – To select the middle setting of the nine levels (default setting), touch [Standard]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 3 Touch [OK]. 3 Basic copy operations 3-64 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.11 Selecting finishing settings Various settings can be selected for sorting and finishing copies fed into the copy output tray. 2 Note As the factory default, "Group" is selected. ! Detail If no finisher is installed and all of the following conditions are met, printed copies are fed out and sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern. A4 - or B5-size paper is used. Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one paper tray and with the v orientation in another tray. The "Auto" Paper setting is selected. The "Auto" Paper setting is not selected when the "Mixed Original" setting is selected. 2 Note From Administrator Settings mode, the machine can be set so that copies are fed out without being shifted when the finisher is installed. As a factory default, the machine is set to shift the copies that are fed out. For details on specifying settings for shifting copies that are fed out when the finisher is installed, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. For details on "Fold/Bind", refer to "Selecting a folding setting" on page 3-77. When the post inserter is installed with the finisher, the finisher can be operated manually. For details, refer to "Manually using the finisher" on page 3-86. Available Finishing Settings Setting Description Sort Select this setting to separate each set of a multi-page original. Group Select this setting to separate the copies of each page in a multi-page original. 1 1 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-65 Basic copy operations 3 The following procedures describe how to select Finishing settings. 2 Reminder The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit or Z folding unit is installed with the optional finisher. Offset If no finisher is installed If the sorting conditions are met, printed copies are fed out and sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern. If a finisher is installed The copies are fed out and stacked on top of each other with each set shifted to separate it. Face Up The copies are output with their front sides facing up. Fold/Bind Select this setting to fold copies. The copies can also be bound with staples at the same time. The "Fold/Bind" setting can be used if the optional Finisher FS-610 is installed. Output Tray The copies are output to the specified paper tray. Staple Select one of these settings to bind the copies with a staple in the corner or with two staples. Punch Holes are punched (2 or 4 holes) in the copies for filing them. Setting Description 1 1 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 Basic copy operations 3-66 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.11.1 Separating copies by sets ("Sort" setting) 0 As the factory default, "Group" is selected. 0 If offset sorting is selected while no finisher is installed, printed copies will be fed out and sorted in an alternating w and v pattern if the following conditions are met. A4 - or B5-size paper is used. Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one paper tray and with the v orientation in another tray. The "Auto" Paper setting is selected. The "Auto" Paper setting is not selected when the "Mixed Original" setting is selected. 0 If offset sorting is selected while a finisher is installed, printed copies are fed out and stacked on top of each other with each set shifted to separate it. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 2 Touch [Sort]. – To separate each set of copies, touch [Yes] under "Offset". 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-67 Basic copy operations 3 3.11.2 Separating copies by pages ("Group" Setting) 0 As the factory default, "Group" is selected. 0 If offset sorting is selected while no finisher is installed, printed copies will be fed out and sorted in an alternating w and v pattern if the following conditions are met. A4- or B5-size paper is used. Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one paper tray and with the v orientation in another tray. The "Auto" Paper setting is selected. The "Auto" Paper setting is not selected when the "Mixed Original" setting is selected. 0 If offset sorting is selected while a finisher is installed, printed copies are fed out and stacked on top of each other with each set shifted to separate it. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 2 Touch [Group]. – To separate each set of pages, touch [Yes] under "Offset". – When "Offset" is selected, the following Finishing settings are not available. Face Up Staple 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 3 Basic copy operations 3-68 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.11.3 Selecting the Output Tray 0 The output tray can be selected only if the optional finisher is installed. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. – When "Offset" is selected, the following Finishing settings are not available. Face Up Staple The Finishing screen appears. 2 Touch [Output tray]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-69 Basic copy operations 3 3 Select the output tray where copies are to be fed, and then touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 3.11.4 Outputting copies with their front sides facing up (Face up settings) The copies are output with their front sides facing up. ! Detail This can be specified for both sort output and group output. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 3 Basic copy operations 3-70 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Touch [Face Up]. – To cancel the settings, touch [Face Up] again. – As the factory default, "OFF" is selected. The copies are output with their back sides facing up. – The following settings cannot be used together with the "Face Up" setting. Booklet Double-sided copying Center Staple & Fold Half-Fold – When "Face Up" is selected, the following Finishing settings are not available. Offset Staple Punch Tri-Fold Z-Fold 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-71 Basic copy operations 3 3.11.5 Stapling copies (Staple settings) Copies can be fed out stapled either in the corner or at two places. ! Detail In order for the copies to be stapled, all of the following conditions must be met. The paper width must be between 182 mm and 314 mm. The paper length must be between 139 mm and 458 mm. If the "Mixed Original" setting is selected, all copies must have the same paper width. 2 Reminder Copies can be fed out stapled either in the corner or at two places only when the finisher is installed. Copies can be fed out stapled either in the corner or at two places. Finisher FS-524/FS-525 *1 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. *2 The value is for when using paper of which the length is between 150 mm and 417 mm. The value will be 50 sets if the paper length is not within this range. *3 This is the loading capacity when Finisher FS-525 has been installed Maximum number of bound pages: Finisher FS-524:50 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Finisher FS-525:100 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) Finisher FS-610 *1 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. *2 The value is for when using paper of which the length is 417 mm or less. The value will be 50 sets if the length exceeds 418 mm. Maximum number of bound pages: 50 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) Tray Paper weight Paper size Loading capacity Main finishing tray (Tray 2) FS-524: 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 FS-525: 60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*1, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) 2 sheets to 9 sheets binding: 100 sets*2 10 sheets to 20 sheets binding: 50 sets 21 sheets to 30 sheets binding: 30 sets 31 sheets to 40 sheets binding: 25 sets 41 sheets to 50 sheets binding: 20 sets 51 sheets to 60 sheets binding: 15 sets*3 61 sheets to 100 sheets binding: 10 sets*3 Tray Paper Weight Paper Size Loading Capacity Main finishing tray (Tray 2) 60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*1, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) 2 sheets to 9 sheets binding: 100 sets*2 10 sheets to 20 sheets binding: 50 sets 21 sheets to 30 sheets binding: 30 sets 31 sheets to 40 sheets binding: 25 sets 41 sheets to 50 sheets binding: 20 sets 3 Basic copy operations 3-72 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 2 Under "Staple", touch either [Corner] or [2 Position]. – To cancel the Staple setting, touch [None]. – When a Staple setting is selected, the "Sort" setting is automatically selected. – The following settings cannot be used together with a Staple setting. Offset Face Up bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-73 Basic copy operations 3 3 Touch [Position Setting]. – Select the stapling position, and then touch [OK]. – When the "2 Position" Staple setting is selected. – When the "Corner" Staple setting is selected. 3 Basic copy operations 3-74 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – Touch [Auto] to automatically determine the stapling position according to the orientation of the loaded original. If the original length is 314 mm or less, the long side of the paper is stapled. If the original length is more than 314 mm, the short side of the paper is stapled. – If "Auto" is selected for the stapling position, load the original with the top toward the back of the machine. If the original is loaded in any other orientation, the stapling will not be correctly positioned. – If "Auto" is selected, the stapling position is set at the top or at the left. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 4 If desired, touch [Original Direction], and then select the setting appropriate for the original. – For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. 5 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 3.11.6 Punching holes in copies (Punch settings) ! Detail In order to be punch holes in the copies, all of the following conditions must be met. The paper width must be between 182 mm and 297 mm. The paper length must be between 182 mm and 432 mm. If a Punch setting is to be selected, select the orientation in which the original is positioned. If an Original Direction setting is not selected, holes may not be punched in the copies as desired. For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. 2 Note The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit or Z folding unit is installed with the optional finisher. * Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. Tray Paper Weight Paper Size Main finishing tray (Tray 2) Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 128 g/m2) 2-Hole: A3 w to A5 w/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*, 8K w, 16K w/v 4-Hole: A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, 16K v bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-75 Basic copy operations 3 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 2 Under "Punch", touch [2-Hole] or [4-Hole]. – To cancel the Punch setting, touch [None]. – A Punch setting cannot be used together with the "Face Up" setting. 3 Touch [Position Setting]. 3 Basic copy operations 3-76 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – Select the punched hole position, and then touch [OK]. – Touch [Auto] to automatically determine the position of the punched holes according to the orientation of the loaded original. If the original length is 297 mm or less, the holes are punched along the long side of the paper. If the original length is more than 297 mm, the holes are punched along the short side of the paper. – If "Auto" is selected for the stapling position, load the original with the top toward the back of the machine. If the original is loaded in any other orientation, the stapling will not be correctly positioned. – If "Auto" is selected, the punched hole position is set at the top or at the left. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 4 If desired, touch [Original Direction], and then select the setting appropriate for the original. – For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. 5 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-77 Basic copy operations 3 3.12 Selecting a folding setting By installing optional equipments, copies can be folded, or folded and bound with staples at the same time, and then fed out. Available settings differ depending on the optional equipments installed. 2 Note Copies can be folded in half or in three or bound at the center only if Finisher FS-610 is installed. Z-folding is available when the Z folding unit is installed with the finisher. For details, refer to "Z-Folding and outputting papers ("Z-Fold" setting)" on page 3-83. Setting Description Compatible models Half-Fold Select this setting to fold copies in half before feeding them out. (Refer to page 3-78.) FS-610 Center Staple & Fold Select this setting to staple copies at two places along the center, then fold the copies in half before feeding them out. (Refer to page 3-79.) FS-610 Tri-Fold Select this setting to fold copies in three before feeding them out. (Refer to page 3-81.) FS-610 Z-Fold Select this setting to fold copies in half along the center, and additionally mountain-fold one of the halves before feeding them out. FS-524 FS-525 FS-610 3 Basic copy operations 3-78 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.12.1 Folding copies in half ("Half-Fold" setting) Finisher FS-610 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 2 Touch [Fold/Bind]. The Fold/Bind screen appears. Paper weight Paper size Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Standard sizes: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4Ww, 11 e 17W w,8-1/2 e 11W w) Custom sizes: 210 mm e 279 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Maximum number of folded sheets Paper capacity 3 sheets When folding 3 sheets (80 g/m2): 25 sets or less (with a paper length of 299 mm or less) 33 sets or less (others) bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-79 Basic copy operations 3 3 Touch [Half-Fold]. – As the factory default, the "Booklet" function is automatically specified when "Half-Fold" is selected. – To cancel the "Half-Fold" setting, touch [No] or the button for a different setting. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] again. The Basic Screen appears again. 3.12.2 Binding copies at the center ("Center Staple & Fold" setting) Finisher FS-610 Maximum number of sheets that can be bound in the center - 20 or more sheets (60 - 80 g/m2) or 19 + 1 sheets (200 g/m2) Capacity - 20 copies or less - 15 copies or less (paper length: 299 mm or less) 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. Paper weight Paper size Maximum number of bound sheets 60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 Standard sizes: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w) Custom sizes: 210 mm e 279 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm 20 sheets 81 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 16 sheets 3 Basic copy operations 3-80 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) The Finishing screen appears. 2 Touch [Fold/Bind]. The Fold/Bind screen appears. 3 Touch [Center Staple & Fold]. – If a cover sheet is added with the "Cover Sheet" function, the cover sheet (200 g/m2) can be stapled. – When the "Center Staple & Fold" setting is selected, the following factory default settings are automatically selected. 1-Sided > 2-Sided Booklet Recommended zoom ratio (64.7%) when the "Booklet" function is selected – When the "Center Staple & Fold" setting is selected, the following Finishing settings are not available. Group Offset Staple Punch Face Up – To cancel the "Center Staple & Fold" setting, touch [No] or the button for a different setting. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] again. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-81 Basic copy operations 3 3.12.3 To fold copies in three ("Tri-Fold" setting) Finisher FS-610 ! Detail When copies are to be folded in three, settings can be specified to select whether the printed side is on the inside or the outside. For details on selecting the setting, refer to "Copier Settings" on page 12-21. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 2 Touch [Fold/Bind]. The Fold/Bind screen appears. Paper weight Paper size Maximum number of tri-folded sheets 60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 A4 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 16K w 3 sheets 81 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 1 sheet Number of folded sheets Maximum number of sets 1 sheet 50 sets or less 3 Basic copy operations 3-82 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Tri-Fold]. – When the "Tri-Fold" setting is selected, the following Finishing settings are not available. Group Offset Staple Punch Face Up – To cancel the "Tri-Fold" setting, touch [No] or the button for a different setting. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] again. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-83 Basic copy operations 3 3.12.4 Z-Folding and outputting papers ("Z-Fold" setting) Copies can be Z-folded and output. In addition, originals of mixed sizes can be Z-folded and output in the same specified paper size. ! Detail The Z-folding function is not available in the following cases. When the original size and output paper size are the same. When a paper size on which a part of the original image will be lost is selected. 2 Note Punching or stapling can be carried out with Z-folding before feeding the copies out. ! Detail For details on setting the mixed (size) originals, refer to "Copying originals of mixed sizes ("Mixed Original" setting)" on page 3-21. Finisher FS-524/FS-525/FS-610 and Z folding unit * Can be specified when the output paper size is A3 w, 11 e 17, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8K w. 2 Note Z-folding multiple overlapped papers as one unit is not possible. When the finished size is A4 Item Description Paper weight 50 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 Paper size A3 w, B4 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8K w Z-folded & stapled copies* 5 sheets Paper capacity 30 sheets or less 3 Basic copy operations 3-84 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) ! Detail When loading the originals into ADF, load them in the orientation where the side to be folded is on the right. When placing the original on the original glass, place it in the orientation where the side to be folded is on the left. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 2 Touch [Fold/Bind]. The Fold/Bind screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-85 Basic copy operations 3 3 Touch [Z-Fold]. – To cancel the "Z-Fold" setting, touch [Z-Fold] or the button for a different setting. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] again. 3 Basic copy operations 3-86 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.13 Manually using the finisher If the post inserter is installed onto the finisher, the finisher can be operated manually by using the control panel of the post inserter. The following Finishing settings are available with each of the option configurations. Finisher FS-524/FS-525 and post inserter "Corner" Staple, "2 Position" Staple Finisher FS-610 and post inserter - "Corner" Staple, "2 Position" Staple - Center Staple & Fold - Tri-Fold Finisher FS-524/FS-525, post inserter and punch kit - "Corner" Staple, "2 Position" Staple - Punch settings Finisher FS-610, post inserter and punch kit - "Corner" Staple, "2 Position" Staple - Center Staple & Fold - Tri-Fold - Punch settings 2 Reminder Only load paper into the lower tray. Do not use the upper tray. Corner Staple 2 Position Staple Center Staple & Fold Tri-Fold Punch Paper weight Paper size Number of sheets Output tray "Corner" Staple, "2 Position" Staple Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*1, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Finisher FS-524 50 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Main finishing tray (Tray 2) Finisher FS-525 100 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) Finisher FS-610 50 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) 16 sheets (81 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Punch settings Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Thick paper (91 g/m2 to 128 g/m2) 2 holes: A3 w to A5 w/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*1, 8K w, 16K w/v 4 holes: A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v, 11 e 17 w to 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, 16K v 200 sheets Main finishing tray (Tray 2) bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-87 Basic copy operations 3 *1 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. *2 Can be used only with Finisher FS-610. ! Detail When manually performing the hole-punching operation from the post inserter control panel, only two holes can be punched. Names of control panel parts Center Staple & Fold*2 Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) Standard sizes: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w) Custom sizes: 210 mm e 279 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm 20 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) 16 sheets (81 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Booklet tray Tri-Fold*2 Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) A4 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 16K w 3 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) 1 sheet (81 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Booklet tray Paper weight Paper size Number of sheets Output tray [Punch] key [Start/stop] key Tri-Fold 2 Position Staple Corner Staple Center Staple & Fold [Finishing] key 3 Basic copy operations 3-88 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Finishing 1 Load the paper into the lower tray of the post inserter. – If the "Corner" or "2 Position" Staple settings are to be used, load the paper face up – If a Punch setting is to be used, load the paper face up. – If the paper is to be stapled and folded at the center, load the paper so that the side that is to be the front when bound is face up. – If the paper is to be folded in three, load the paper so that the side that is to be the outside when folded in three is face up. – The loaded paper will be finished into one set. 2 Slide the paper guides to fit the size of the paper. 3 Press the [Finishing] key or [Punch] key, and then select the desired Finishing settings. – When the "Corner" or "2 Position" Staple settings, or the "Center Staple & Fold" or "Tri-Fold" setting is selected, press the [Finishing] key, and the indicator lights up. When a Punch setting is selected, press the [Punch] key, and the indicator lights up. – A Punch can be selected at the same time as the "Corner" or "2 Position" Staple setting. If the settings are selected at the same time, the indicator lights up when the [Finishing] key is pressed. When only a Punch setting is selected, all indicators except the one on the [Punch] key go off. 4 Press the [Start/Stop] key. – Press the [Start/Stop] key during an operation to stop the operation. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-89 Basic copy operations 3 3.14 Selecting not to rotate the image Copies can be printed with the image not rotated to fit the orientation of the loaded paper. 2 Note Depending on the paper size and zoom ratio, some parts of the image may be lost. % In the Basic screen, touch [Auto Rotate OFF]. Original Auto Rotate OFF Auto Rotate 3 Basic copy operations 3-90 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.15 Scanning the next original to be copied while a copy job is being printed (next job reservation) The settings for the next copy job can be specified and the original can be scanned while a copy job is being printed so that it can be printed once the current copy job is finished. 0 Up to 51 copy jobs, including the current copy job, can be reserved. 0 A copy job can be reserved after scanning of the loaded original is finished. The next job cannot be reserved while an original is being scanned. 0 To delete a reserved copy job, touch [Job List] in the left panel, and then touch [Job Details]. For details, refer to "Deleting a job" on page 11-8. 1 When the message "Ready to accept another job." appears while the current job is being printed, an original can be loaded, and copy settings can be specified for the next copy job. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. – If the "Copy Operating Screen" parameter in Utility mode is set to "Yes", touch [Next Copy Job] while printing to display the Basic screen. – For details on specifying the screen that appears while printing, refer to "Custom Display Settings" on page 12-19. 2 Press the [Start] key. 3 After the current copy job is finished, the next copy job begins. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-91 Basic copy operations 3 3.16 Temporarily stopping scanning/printing Follow the procedure described below to temporarily stop scanning the original and stop the printing operation. 0 If an original is being scanned for a job, pressing the [Stop] key stops scanning. 0 For details on deleting a temporarily stopped job, refer to "Deleting a paused job" on page 3-92. 1 Press the [Stop] key while an original is being scanned or a job is being printed. Scanning/printing stops. The Stopped Jobs screen appears. 2 To continue all stopped jobs, press the [Start] key. 3 Basic copy operations 3-92 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3.17 Deleting a paused job Follow the procedure described below to delete a temporarily stopped job. 0 For details on temporarily stopping a job being scanned or printed, refer to "Temporarily stopping scanning/printing" on page 3-91. 0 Select only one job at a time to be deleted. 0 To continue a temporarily stopped job, press the [Start] key. 1 Press the [Stop] key while an original is being scanned or a job is being printed. Scanning/printing stops. The Stopped Jobs screen appears. 2 Select the job to be deleted, and then touch [Delete]. The selected job is deleted. 4 Additional copy operations bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-3 Additional copy operations 4 4 Additional copy operations 4.1 Checking the copy settings (Check Job) From the Check Job Details screens, the current copy settings can be checked and changed if desired. 4.1.1 To check the settings 1 Touch [Check Job] in the left panel, and then touch [Check Details]. The Check Job Settings screen appears. 4 Additional copy operations 4-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-5 Additional copy operations 4 2 After checking the settings, touch [Close]. The Basic screen appears again. ! Detail There are seven Check Job Settings screens. The number of the currently displayed screen appears to the right of the screen title. To display the previous screen, touch [ Back]. To display the next screen, touch [Forward ]. If the setting for a function has been changed from the default, the button for that function appears with a colored box around it. 4.1.2 To change the settings 1 Touch [Check Job] in the left panel, and then touch [Check Details]. 2 Touch [ Back] or [Forward ] until the button for the function to be changed is displayed. 3 Touch the button for the function whose setting is to be changed. The screen for specifying the setting appears. 4 Follow the appropriate procedure to change the setting. 4 Additional copy operations 4-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4.2 Printing a proof to check the settings (Proof Copy) Before printing a large number of copies, a single proof copy can first be printed so that it can be checked. This prevents copy errors from occurring. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Select the desired copy settings. – When printing a proof copy, specify multiple copies. 3 Press the [Proof Copy] key. – If an optional hard disk is not installed, go to step 6. – If an optional hard disk is not installed, the Select Proof Copy Method screen does not appear. The Select Proof Copy Method screen appears. 4 Touch [Print] for Mode, and then select the original direction. – When the original is placed on the original glass: – When the original is loaded into the ADF: bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-7 Additional copy operations 4 5 Press the [Start] key. 6 If the original was placed on the original glass, touch [Finish], and then press the [Start] key. – If the original was loaded into the ADF, printing of the proof copy begins without the screen appearing confirming that scanning of the original is finished. A single proof copy is printed. 7 Check the proof copy. – If the proof copy was printed as desired, continue with step 8. – To change the copy settings, continue with step 6. 8 Touch [Change Setting] in the screen that appeared when the proof copy was printed. – To stop copying while the proof copy screen is displayed, press the [Reset] key or the [C] (clear) key. Otherwise, select the proof copy job to be stopped from the list of jobs in the left panel, and then touch [Delete]. In the screen that appears, requesting confirmation to delete the job, touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. – If no operation is performed within the specified length of time while this screen is displayed, the copy job being proofed is registered as a stored job and the Basic screen appears again. Jobs are registered as stored jobs under the following conditions. When the automatic system reset operation is performed After one minute (when "System Auto Reset" is set to "OFF") For details on stored jobs, refer to page 11-14. If "System Auto Reset" is set to "OFF", the job is stored if no operation is performed for 1 minute. – For details on the automatic system reset operation, refer to "Automatically conserving energy (Sleep mode)" on page 2-35. – The number under "Number of Sets" in the screen that appeared when a proof copy is printed indicates the number of sets printed as proof copies/total Number of Sets specified. – The number under "Total # of Pages Printed" in the screen that appeared when a proof copy is printed indicates the number of copies printed as proof copies/the number of pages printed in the proof copy. 4 Additional copy operations 4-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9 In the screen allowing you to change the settings, change the copy settings as desired, and then touch [OK]. To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – If the copy settings cannot be changed, stop printing the proof copy. Next, press the [Reset] key to cancel the copy settings, and then specify the desired settings. – To stop copying while the screen for changing the settings is displayed, select the proof copy job to be stopped from the list of jobs in the left panel, and then touch [Delete]. In the screen that appears, requesting confirmation to delete the copy program, touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings in the screen for changing the settings, press the [Reset] key while the screen for changing the settings is displayed to reset the settings to those specified in step 2. – The number beside "Copies" in the screen for changing the settings is the number of copies that will be printed when [Finish] is touched. 10 Press the [Proof Copy] key to print another proof copy. – To stop the proof copy while scanning or printing, perform the operation described in "Temporarily stopping scanning/printing" on page 3-91. 11 Touch [Print]. The remaining copies are queued as a copy job. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-9 Additional copy operations 4 4.3 Checking the print image as a preview image (Advanced Preview) Print image can be checked as a preview image before printing. This prevents print errors from occurring. If an optional hard disk is not installed, print image cannot be checked with the Preview screen displayed. 4.3.1 Preview screen In the Preview screen, originals that have been scanned in a wrong direction can be rotated and settings specified before scanning can be changed. Screen Layout 3 6 1 2 4 7 5 8 No. Item Name Description 1 [Prev. Page]/[Next Page] Moves to the previous or next page from the current page. 2 - The preview image appears. Press [View Finishing] to apply the finishing status to the preview image. 3 Scroll bar If the preview image is enlarged, use the scroll bar to scroll up or down, or to the left or right of the image. 4 Zoom Enlarges or reduces the preview image. For details, refer to "Zoom" on page 4-10. 5 Page Rotation Rotates the preview image by 180 degrees. For details, refer to "Page Rotation" on page 4-10. 6 [View Finishing] Applies the finishing state to the preview image. Touching [View Finishing] again cancels the finishing preview. For details, refer to "View Finishing" on page 4-11. 7 [Change Setting] Settings for the scanned originals can be changed. For details, refer to "Change Setting" on page 4-12. 8 [View Status]/[View Pages] Switches the Preview screen between the status view and the page view. Images can be rotated and settings can be changed in [View Pages]. Loading of the image is finished in [View Status]. 4 Additional copy operations 4-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Zoom In Zoom, the preview image can be enlarged to check the original in detail. By touching [+] or [-], the zoom ratio can be changed between the full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. Use the scroll bars in the right end and bottom end of the image to view the desired section of the image. ! Detail If the display size is changed, the finishing status cannot be viewed. Page Rotation In Page Rotation, a preview image can be rotated by 180 degrees to correct wrong original direction. % Touch [Rotate current page] to rotate the currently displayed page by 180 degrees. % Touch [Select page(s) to rotate] to display the list of scanned pages. Up to 8 scanned pages can be displayed, and touching the arrows switches between the pages. % Touch [Select Odd] to rotate the odd pages among the scanned pages. % Touch [Select Even] to rotate the even pages among the scanned pages. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-11 Additional copy operations 4 % Touch [Select All ]to rotate all the scanned pages. Directly selecting a scanned page rotates the selected page. View Finishing % Touch [View Finishing] to display the finishing settings in the preview image with icons and texts, and finishing status can be checked. – Press [View Finishing] again to cancel the finishing view of the preview image. 4 Additional copy operations 4-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Change Setting In Change Setting, settings for the original to be scanned next can be changed. 2 Note For details on the setting method, refer to the appropriate description section. Touching [Preview] in the left pane displays the preview image. The settings displayed in the preview image are limited to those apply to all original pages. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-13 Additional copy operations 4 4.3.2 Checking the advanced preview In Preview, finishing image of copies can be checked before printing. 1 Place the original on the original glass, or load the original into the ADF. 2 Select the desired copy settings. 3 Press the [Proof Copy] key. The Select Proof Copy Method screen appears. 4 Touch [Preview on Screen] for Mode, and then select the original direction. – When the original is placed on the original glass: – When the original is loaded into the ADF: 5 Press the [Start] key. Scanning of the original starts, and the Preview screen (View Status) appears. 4 Additional copy operations 4-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Check the preview image. – To change the settings, touch [View Pages]. Go to step 7. – To start printing, press the [Start] key. – To scan more originals, touch [Finish], place (or load) the originals, and then press the [Start] key. – Press the [Stop] key to cancel the preview. 7 Change the settings, and then touch [View Status]. – For details on the View Pages screen, refer to "Preview screen" on page 4-9. 8 Press the [Start] key. – Start printing. ! Detail When originals are scanned using the Program Jobs function, the finishing image can be previewed after all the originals are scanned and [Finish] is touched. For details on the Program Jobs function, refer to "Scanning originals with different settings and printing copies all together ("Program Jobs" function)" on page 8-21. When originals are scanned with the insert pages specified, the finishing image can be previewed both after the originals are scanned first and after the insert pages are scanned. For details on the insert pages, refer to "Inserting copies of a different original for a specified page ("Insert Image" function)" on page 8-14. When the Book Copy function or Booklet function is specified, the finishing status cannot be checked. Print and check the finishing. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-15 Additional copy operations 4 4.4 Interrupting a copy job (Interrupt mode) The current jobs can be temporarily interrupted so an original can be copied with different copy settings. This is convenient for quickly making a copy. ! Detail For details on making a copy after printing of the current job is finished, refer to "Increasing printing priority" on page 11-17. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on loading the original, refer to "Loading the original into the ADF" on page 3-9. 2 Press the [Interrupt] key. – If a job is being printed, the message "The job is stopping." appears. The indicator on the [Interrupt] key lights up in green and printing of the current job stops. ? What settings are selected when the [Interrupt] key is pressed? % When the [Interrupt] key is pressed, all functions and settings are reset to their defaults. ? Why is the [Interrupt] key not available? % The [Interrupt] key cannot be pressed while an original is being scanned. 3 Select the desired copy settings. 4 Press the [Start] key. Printing for the interrupting job begins. 5 After the interrupting job has finished printing, press the [Interrupt] key. The indicator on the [Interrupt] key goes off. The copy settings return to those specified before printing was interrupted. 2 Note If the interrupting job is cancelled, printing for the interrupted job automatically restarts. 4 Additional copy operations 4-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4.5 Registering copy programs (Mode Memory) Frequently used copy settings can be stored together as a program to easily be recalled. A maximum of 30 programs can be registered. A name of up to 16 characters can be specified for the registered copy programs. 2 Note If the optional hard disk is installed, a maximum of 100 copy programs can be registered. 1 Using the touch panel and control panel keys, specify the copy settings to be registered in the copy program. ? Can the current settings be checked? % To check the currently specified copy settings, touch [Check Job] in the left panel, and then touch [Job Details]. For details, refer to "Checking the copy settings (Check Job)" on page 4-3. 2 Press the [Mode Memory] key. The Recall Copy Program screen appears. 3 From the copy program buttons that appear in the screen, touch the button where you wish to store the copy settings, and then touch [Register Program]. – There are three Recall Copy Program screens. Touch and to display a different screen. – If 30 copy programs have been registered, delete an unnecessary copy program. For details on deleting copy programs, refer to "Deleting a copy program" on page 4-19. The Register Copy Program screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-17 Additional copy operations 4 4 Use the control panel keypad and the keyboard that appears in the touch panel to type in the name of the copy program. – The program name can contain a maximum of 16 characters. – For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3. 5 After typing in the name, touch [OK]. – The copy program can be given the same name as a copy program that has already been registered. – To stop specifying the name of the copy program, touch [Cancel]. 4 Additional copy operations 4-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) The Recall Copy Program screen appears again. The copy program is registered and a button with the entered copy program name appears. ? Can the copy program name be corrected? % To change the entered copy program name, touch the button whose name is to be changed, and then touch [Edit Name]. The Edit Name screen appears. Return to step 4 and repeat the procedure to change the copy program name. ? Can the specified settings for a copy program be checked? % To check the programmed copy settings, touch the button for the desired copy program, and then touch [Check Program Settings]. For details, refer to "Copying with programmed copy settings (Mode Memory)" on page 4-20. 6 Touch [OK] or [Cancel]. – To return to the Basic screen, press the [Mode Memory] key. ! Detail To stop registering the program, press the [Reset] key or the [Mode Memory] key. No matter which screen is displayed, the registration is cancelled. Otherwise, continue to touch [Cancel] until the Basic screen is displayed. The settings of a copy program cannot be changed. If the copy program that was selected has been locked, [Edit Name] and [Delete] do not appear. For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-19 Additional copy operations 4 4.5.1 Deleting a copy program 1 In the Recall Copy Program screen, touch the button for the copy program to be deleted. – If the copy program to be recalled is not displayed, touch and until the desired copy program is displayed. 2 Touch [Delete]. A message appears, requesting confirmation to delete the copy program. 3 Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. The Recall Copy Program screen appears again. The copy settings registered in the copy program are erased. 4 Additional copy operations 4-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4.6 Copying with programmed copy settings (Mode Memory) Programmed copy settings can be recalled to be used again for copying. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Press the [Mode Memory] key. The Recall Copy Program screen appears. 3 Touch the button for the copy program registered with the copy settings to be recalled. – If the copy settings in the selected copy program are not to be checked, continue with step 8. – If the copy program to be recalled is not displayed, touch and until the desired copy program is displayed. 4 Press the [Check Program Settings] key. – The copy settings cannot be changed from the Check Job Settings screens. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-21 Additional copy operations 4 The Check Job Settings screen appears. There are four Check Job Settings screens. The number to the right of the screen title indicates the number of the currently displayed screen. To display the previous screen, touch [ Back]. To display the next screen, touch [Forward ]. 5 Check the copy settings registered with the selected copy program. 6 Touch [Close]. The Recall Copy Program screen appears again. 7 Again touch the button for the copy program registered with the copy settings to be recalled. – If [OK] is touched with no copy program selected, the Basic screen appears again without a copy program being recalled. 8 Touch [OK]. The programmed copy settings are recalled and the Basic screen appears again. 9 Press the [Start] key. Copying begins with the recalled copy settings. 2 Note To stop recalling a copy program, press the [Reset] key or the [Mode Memory] key or touch [Cancel]. 4 Additional copy operations 4-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4.7 Displaying function descriptions (Help) Descriptions of the various functions and details of operations can be viewed. There are two methods for displaying the Help screens. - Main Help screens (from the Basic screen) - Help screens for settings (from screens other than the Basic screen) 4.7.1 Overview of help screens The following items are provided in the Help Menu screen. Help Menu screen (1st level) ! Detail The Help screens cannot be displayed when the following operations are being performed. While scanning, while printing a proof copy, during Enlarge Display mode, during Accessibility mode While the Help screens are displayed, the following keys are not available. [Start], [Stop], [C] (clear), [Interrupt], [Proof Copy], [Access], [Mode Memory], [Enlarge Display] Items in the Help Menu screen and other Help screens can be selected by touching the button or by pressing the key in the keypad for the number of the desired item. To display the next screen higher in the menu structure, touch [Close]. Touch [Exit] to exit the Help mode and return to the screen that was displayed before the [Help] key was pressed. Item Description [Function] Use to search for descriptions from a Help menu divided by the function types and names. [Search by Operation] Use to search for descriptions from a Help menu divided by the operations. [Function Map] Displays the Function Map screen, which contains a chart of the available functions and settings. [Other Functions] Check descriptions by selecting a Guidance menu grouped by useful function. [Name and Function of Parts] Displays the Help menu for the name and function of each part. Use to check the description of the main unit and its options. [Service/Admin. Information] Displays the name, extension number and e-mail address of the administrator. [Replace Consumables] Use to view the maintenance procedures for the machine. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-23 Additional copy operations 4 Help screen (2nd level) (Example: Function) ! Detail The items displayed in the Help menu for the name and function of each part differ depending on the options that are installed. Help screen (bottom level) (Example: Function % Copy % Density/Background % Density) Item Description [Copy], [Scan/Fax], [User Box], [Job List], [Print], [Customize], [Image Panel], [Web Browser] Displays the first Help screen for each description. 4 Additional copy operations 4-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Help screen (bottom level) (Example: Search by Operation % Copying % Copying Special Documents) % Touch [Shortcut to Function] to set the selected function. ! Detail If you are viewing the Help screen of a different function from the one that is currently selected, [Shortcut to Function] cannot be selected. For example, if you are in the Fax/Scan mode, [Shortcut to Function] on the Help screen for the Copy mode, which is a different function from the Fax/Scan mode, cannot be selected. Function Map screen (Example: Copy) A chart of the available functions and settings are displayed in the function maps. % Select an item from the chart for the Help screen that you wish to view. ! Detail There are 12 Function Map screens for Copy mode. The top number indicates the number of the 12 screens that is currently displayed. To display the previous screen, touch . To display the next screen, touch . Press the key in the keypad for the number of the desired item in the Function Map screen. To display the Help screen for "Function" that contains the selected item, touch [Close] in the Help screen displayed by selecting an item in a Function Map screen. To quit the Help mode, press the [Help] key or touch [Exit]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-25 Additional copy operations 4 4.7.2 Displaying main help screens As an example, the following procedures describe the Help screens that are displayed for copy operations by using "Function". 1 With the Basic screen displayed, press the [Help] key. The Help Menu screen appears. 2 Touch [Function] or press the [1] key in the keypad. The Help screen for "Function" appears. ? Is there more information about the buttons of the Help screens? % Refer to "Overview of help screens" on page 4-22. 4 Additional copy operations 4-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Copy] or [Open], or press the [1] key in the keypad. The Copy Help screen appears. 4 Touch [Open] or the right of the desired information, or press the key in the keypad for the number to the left of the desired information to display the corresponding Help screen. 5 After checking the Help information, touch [Exit] or press the [Help] key again. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-27 Additional copy operations 4 4.8 Specifying control panel settings (Accessibility mode) This section contains details on the procedures for specifying control panel settings and adjusting the touch panel. 4.8.1 Displaying the accessibility setting screen % Press the [Accessibility] key. The Accessibility Setting screen appears. ! Detail To exit the Accessibility Setting screen and return to the Basic screen, press the [Accessibility] key or the [Reset] key, or touch [Close]. When the Enlarge Display mode is selected, the [Default Enlarge Display Setting] button appears to allow specifying the default settings of the copy and fax/scan operations in the Enlarge Display mode. 4.8.2 Setting the "Touch Panel Adjustment" function If the touch panel buttons do not respond correctly, the position of buttons in the touch panel may not be correctly aligned with the position of the actual touch sensor and may need to be adjusted. 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the accessibility setting screen" on page 4-27. 2 Touch [Touch Panel Adjustment] or press the [1] key in the keypad. 4 Additional copy operations 4-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) The Touch Panel Adjustment screen appears. ? Why does the machine not respond when [Touch Panel Adjustment.] is touched? The touch sensors are not aligned on the touch panel. % Press the [1] key in the keypad. 3 Touch the four check points [+], making sure that a sound is produced with each. – The check points [+] can be touched in any order. – To reset the adjustment, press the [C] (clear) key, and then touch the four check points [+]. If the check points have been touched correctly, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue. 4 Press the [Start] key. The touch panel is adjusted, and the Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 5 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note If the touch panel cannot be adjusted, contact the service representative. ! Detail To cancel the touch panel adjustment, press the [Stop] key or the [Reset] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-29 Additional copy operations 4 4.8.3 Setting the "Key Repeat Start/Interval Time" functions The length of time until the value begins to change after a touch panel button is held down and the length of time for the value to change to the next number can be specified. 0 The settings specified for the Key Repeat Start/Interval Time functions are only applied in the Enlarge Display mode. 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the accessibility setting screen" on page 4-27. 2 Touch [Key Repeat Start/Interval Time] or press the [2] key in the keypad. The Key Repeat Start/Interval Time screen appears. 4 Additional copy operations 4-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [+] and [-] to specify the starting time and the interval for the key repeat feature. – To extend the time, touch [+]. – To reduce the time, touch [-]. – Both settings can be set between 0.1 and 3.0 seconds in 0.1-second increments. – To cancel changes to the settings, press the [Reset] key. 4 Touch [OK]. The Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 5 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note The Enlarge Display mode is compatible with basic copy, scanning and fax functions. With the Enlarge Display mode, text and illustrations are displayed at a larger size so that they can be seen more easily. For details, refer to the User manual – Enlarge Display Operations. As the factory default, "Time To Start" is set to 0.8 second and "Interval" is set to 0.3 second. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-31 Additional copy operations 4 4.8.4 Setting the "System Auto Reset Confirmation" function When the system auto reset operation is performed in Enlarge Display mode, a message can be displayed, allowing you to choose either to continue operating without exiting Enlarge Display mode or to exit Enlarge Display mode and return to the Basic screen. In addition, it is possible to specify the display time for the message requesting confirmation to exit Enlarge Display mode. Yes: Enlarge Display mode is not exited. No: Enlarge Display mode is exited, and the Basic screen is displayed. 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the accessibility setting screen" on page 4-27. For details on the automatic system reset operation, refer to "Automatically conserving energy (Sleep mode)" on page 2-35. 2 Touch [System Auto Reset Confirmation] or press the [3] key in the keypad. 4 Additional copy operations 4-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) The System Auto Reset Confirmation screen appears. 3 Touch the button for the desired display time. – To not display the message requesting confirmation to exit Enlarge Display mode, touch [No]. – To display the message requesting confirmation to exit Enlarge Display mode, touch the button ([30 second], [60 second], [90 second] or [120 second]) for the length of time that the message is to be displayed. – To cancel changes to the settings, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. 4 Touch [OK]. The Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 5 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note The Enlarge Display mode is compatible with basic copy, scanning and fax functions. With the Enlarge Display mode, text and illustrations are displayed at a larger size so that they can be seen more easily. For details, refer to the User manual – Enlarge Display Operations. As the factory default, "No" is selected. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-33 Additional copy operations 4 4.8.5 Setting the "Auto Reset Confirmation" function When the automatic panel reset operation is performed in Enlarge Display mode, a message can be displayed, allowing you to choose either to continue operating without resetting the current settings or to reset the settings. In addition, it is possible to specify when the message is displayed, requesting confirmation to reset the settings in Enlarge Display mode. As the factory default, "No" is selected. Yes: The current settings are not reset. No: The current settings are reset to the default settings. 2 Note For details on the automatic panel reset operation, refer to "Automatically clearing settings (Automatic panel reset)" on page 2-34. 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the accessibility setting screen" on page 4-27. 2 Touch [Auto Reset Confirmation] or press the [4] key in the keypad. 4 Additional copy operations 4-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) The Auto Reset Confirmation screen appears. 3 Touch the button for the desired display time. – To not display the message requesting confirmation to reset the settings, touch [No]. – To display the message requesting confirmation to reset the settings, touch the button ([30 second], [60 second], [90 second] or [120 second]) for the length of time that the message is to be displayed. – To cancel changes to the settings, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. 4 Touch [OK]. The Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 5 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note The Enlarge Display mode is compatible with basic copy, scanning and fax functions. With the Enlarge Display mode, text and illustrations are displayed at a larger size so that they can be seen more easily. For details on the Enlarge Display mode, refer to the User manual – Enlarge Display Operations. If the time setting is the same for the automatic panel reset operation and the automatic system reset operation, the display of the message requesting confirmation to exit Enlarge Display mode is given priority and the message requesting confirmation to reset the settings in Enlarge Display mode is not displayed. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-35 Additional copy operations 4 4.8.6 Setting the "Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation" function When the [Enlarge Display] key is pressed to change the display of the screen, a message can be displayed, requesting confirmation to cancel the settings that cannot be specified in Enlarge Display mode. As the factory default, "OFF" is selected. Yes: The settings that cannot be displayed are cancelled, and the Enlarge Display mode is entered. No: The Enlarge Display mode is not entered. 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the accessibility setting screen" on page 4-27. 2 Touch [Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation] or press the [5] key in the keypad. The Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation screen appears 4 Additional copy operations 4-36 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Select whether or not the message is displayed. – To cancel changes to the settings, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. 4 Touch [OK]. The Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 5 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note The Enlarge Display mode is compatible with basic copy, scanning and fax functions. With the Enlarge Display mode, text and illustrations are displayed at a larger size so that they can be seen more easily. For details on the Enlarge Display mode, refer to the User manual – Enlarge Display Operations. If "OFF" is selected in the Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation screen, the screen is not displayed. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-37 Additional copy operations 4 4.8.7 Setting the "Message Display Time" function It is possible to specify the length of time for displaying warning messages, which appear, for example, when an incorrect operation is performed. As the factory default, "3 seconds" is selected. 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen, and then touch to display the next screen. – For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the accessibility setting screen" on page 4-27. 2 Touch [Message Display Time] or press the [1] key in the keypad. The Message Display Time screen appears. 3 Select setting for the desired amount of time that messages are displayed. – Touch [3 seconds] or [5 seconds] to select how long messages are displayed. – To cancel changes to the settings, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. 4 Additional copy operations 4-38 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch [OK]. The Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 5 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. 4.8.8 Setting the "Sound Setting" functions With the Sound Setting functions, The sound level can be adjusted by selecting on from 16 levels provided for the sounds that are produced, for example, when a key is pressed. Specified sound can also be muted in this setting. For details, see the table below. As the factory default, "8" is selected for all operation sounds. Operation Confirmation Sound Sound ON/OFF Settings All Sounds Select to turn on/off all sounds in Sound Setting. Operation Confirmation Sound Select to turn on/off all sounds in Operation Confirmation Sound setting. Successful Completion Sound Select to turn on/off all sounds in Successful Completion Sound setting. Completed Preparation Sound Select to turn on/off the Completed Preparation Sound setting. Caution Sound Select to turn on/off all sounds in Caution Sound setting. Operation Confirmation Sound Input Confirmation Sound When pressing a key in the control panel or a button on the touch panel Invalid Input Sound When incorrectly pressing a key in the control panel or a button on the touch panel Basic Sound When switching settings and the default setting is selected Successful Completion Sound Completed Operation Sound When an operation is completed successfully Completed Transmission Sound When a communication operation is completed successfully Completed Preparation Sound When a device has finished setting up Caution Sound Simple Caution Sound (Level 1) When it is almost time to replace supplies or a replaceable part and a message appears in the touch panel Simple Caution Sound (Level 2) When a user has performed an operation incorrectly Simple Caution Sound (Level 3) When an error occurs that can be corrected by the user by referring to the message that appeared or the user manual Severe Caution Sound When an error occurs that cannot be corrected by the user or requires a service representative bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-39 Additional copy operations 4 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen, and then touch to display the next screen. – For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the accessibility setting screen" on page 4-27. 2 Touch [Sound Setting] or press the [2] key in the keypad. The Sound Setting screen appears. 3 Touch the button or press the key in the keypad for the desired sound setting (2-5). – Sound settings 2 through 5 are available only if the corresponding sound setting on the Sound ON/OFF Settings screen is set to "ON". The screen for selected sound setting appears. 4 Additional copy operations 4-40 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch the button or press the key in the keypad for the desired sound setting. The screen for adjusting sound level appears. 5 Adjust the sound level. – To produce the sound, touch [Yes]. The sound level can be selected from 16 levels. Every touching [Lower]/[Higher] increases/decreases a single level. To mute the sound, touch [No]. – To cancel changes to the settings, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. 6 Touch [OK], then touch [Close]. The Sound Setting screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-41 Additional copy operations 4 7 To enable/disable the sound setting collectively from 2 to 5, touch [Sound ON/OFF Settings] or press the [1] key in the keypad. The Sound ON/OFF Settings screen appears. 8 Select [On] or [No] for the desired setting item. 9 Touch [OK]. The sound Setting screen appears again. 10 Touch [Close]. The Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 11 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. 4 Additional copy operations 4-42 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5 Troubleshooting bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-3 Troubleshooting 5 5 Troubleshooting 5.1 When an error code appears There are three types of errors; errors that can be cleared by opening and closing the front door, errors that can be cleared by turning the power off/on, and errors that cannot be cleared. Clear the error by following the on-screen instructions. If the error cannot be cleared or released, contact your service representative with the error code. The phone number and fax number for the usual service representative appear in the center of the screen. Example: Error that can be cleared by turning the power off/on (C-E0002) Display in Enlarge Display mode If the internal error occurs, the screen shown below appears. 2 Reminder Since the machine may be damaged, contact the service representative according to the procedure described below as soon as the call service representative screen appears. 5 Troubleshooting 5-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1 Write down the trouble code (for example, C-E0002) in the call service representative screen. 2 Turn the machine off by using the [Power] (auxiliary power) key and the main power switch. 3 Unplug the machine. 4 Contact the service representative, and inform them of the trouble code. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-5 Troubleshooting 5 5.2 When the message "misfeed detected." appears If a misfeed occurs during printing, the message "A paper misfeed has been detected. Remove the paper according to the guide or illustration." appears, and the location of the misfeed is indicated by a number accompanied with the procedure for clearing misfed paper on the screen. At this time, printing cannot continue until the misfeed is adequately cleared. Misfeed Location screen 5 Troubleshooting 5-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5.2.1 Location of paper misfeed and illustration If paper misfeeds have occurred at multiple locations, multiple numbers appear or flash. The flashing number indicates the location where the paper misfeed should be cleared first. Touching the [Illustration] key on the Misfeed Location screen displays another screen with the message "Remove the misfed paper according to the guide or illustration.", and also with a description and illustration for clearing misfed paper. If the description extends over multiple pages, the [Next%] key is displayed. Touch [Next] to proceed to the next screen. Touching [JAM Location Display] returns to the Misfeed Location screen. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-7 Troubleshooting 5 5.2.2 Paper misfeed indications * The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional Finisher FS-610, Z folding unit, post inserter and Large Capacity Unit LU-405 installed. * The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional shift tray installed. * The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional output tray installed. 5 Troubleshooting 5-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5.2.3 Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 1 "1" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Pull out tray 1. – If the misfed paper extends over tray 1 and tray 2, also pull out tray 2. 2 Remove any misfed paper. No. Description 1 Paper misfeed in tray 1 2 Paper misfeed in tray 2 3 Paper misfeed in tray 3 4 Paper misfeed in tray 4 5 Paper misfeed in the LCT (Large Capacity Unit LU-405/LU-406) 6 Paper misfeed in the bypass tray 7 Paper misfeed in the vertical transport section 8 Paper misfeed in the ADU unit 9 Paper misfeed in the ADU unit 10 Paper misfeed in the ADU unit 11 Paper misfeed in the ADU unit 12 Paper misfeed in the ADU unit 13 Paper misfeed in the ADU unit 14 Paper misfeed in the ADF 15 Paper misfeed in the ADF 16 Paper misfeed in Finisher FS-524/FS-525/FS-610 or shift tray 17 Paper misfeed in the post inserter 18 Paper misfeed in Finisher FS-524/FS-525/FS-610 20 Paper misfeed in the Z folding unit bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-9 Troubleshooting 5 3 Lift up the paper take-up roller, and then remove any paper remaining in the tray. 4 Load the paper into the tray again, lower the paper take-up roller, and then close the tray. 5 Pull out tray 2, and then pull out the horizontal transport unit. 6 Open the horizontal transport unit cover. 7 Remove any misfed paper in the horizontal transport unit. 8 Return the horizontal transport unit and tray 2 to their original positions. 5 Troubleshooting 5-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9 Open the vertical transport door. – If a large capacity unit is installed, open its large capacity tray front door, and then open the vertical transport door. 10 Remove any misfed paper in the vertical transport section. 11 Close the vertical transport door. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-11 Troubleshooting 5 5.2.4 Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 2 "2" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Pull out tray 2. 2 Remove any misfed paper. 3 Lift up the paper take-up roller, and then remove any paper remaining in the tray. 4 Load the paper into the tray again, lower the paper take-up roller, and then close the tray. 5 Open the vertical transport door. – If a large capacity unit is installed, open its large capacity tray front door, and then open the vertical transport door. 5 Troubleshooting 5-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Remove any misfed paper in the vertical transport section. 7 Close the vertical transport door. 5.2.5 Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 3 and tray 4 "3""4" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Pull out tray 3 or tray 4. 2 Remove any misfed paper. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-13 Troubleshooting 5 3 Lift up the paper take-up roller, and then remove any paper remaining in the tray. 4 Load the paper into the tray again, lower the paper take-up roller, and then close the tray. 5 Open the vertical transport door. – If a large capacity unit is installed, open its large capacity tray front door, and then open the vertical transport door. 6 Remove any misfed paper in the vertical transport section. 7 Close the vertical transport door. 5 Troubleshooting 5-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5.2.6 Clearing a paper misfeed in the LCT (Large Capacity Unit)"5" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Open the large capacity tray front door. 2 Remove any misfed paper. 3 Open the upper cover. 4 Lift up the paper take-up roller, and then remove any paper remaining in the tray. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-15 Troubleshooting 5 5 Load the paper into the tray again, lower the paper take-up roller, and then close the upper cover. 5.2.7 Clearing a paper misfeed in the bypass tray "6" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Remove all paper from the bypass tray. 2 Load the paper into the tray again. 5.2.8 Clearing a paper misfeed in the vertical transport section "7" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Open the vertical transport door. – If a large capacity unit is installed, open its large capacity tray front door, and then open the vertical transport door. 2 Remove any misfed paper in the vertical transport section. 5 Troubleshooting 5-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Close the vertical transport door. 5.2.9 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "8" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Open the right front door and the left front door. 2 Turn dial M2 to feed out the paper. 3 Lower lever M4, and then pull out the ADU unit. M2 M2 M4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-17 Troubleshooting 5 4 Raise lever M3, and then remove any paper. 5 Return the ADU unit to its original position. 6 Return lever M4 to its original position, and then close the right front door and the left front door. 7 WARNING Precaution for electrical shock High voltage is generated around the drum unit inside the machine. % In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. 7 CAUTION Precaution for high temperature The fusing unit inside the machine is extremely hot. % In order to reduce the risk of burns, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. M3 5 Troubleshooting 5-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5.2.10 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "9" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Open the right front door and the left front door. 2 Turn dial M1 and M2 to feed out the paper. 3 Lower lever M4, and then pull out the ADU unit. 4 Raise cover M12, and then remove any paper. M2 M1 M2 M1 M4 M12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-19 Troubleshooting 5 5 Raise cover M3, and then remove any paper. 6 Return the ADU unit to its original position. 7 Return lever M4 to its original position, and then close the right front door and the left front door. 7 WARNING Precaution for electrical shock High voltage is generated around the drum unit inside the machine. % In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. 7 CAUTION Precaution for high temperature The fusing unit inside the machine is extremely hot. % In order to reduce the risk of burns, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. M3 5 Troubleshooting 5-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5.2.11 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "10" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Open the right front door and the left front door. 2 Lower lever M4, and then pull out the ADU unit. 3 Remove all paper from the ADU unit. 4 Return the ADU unit to its original position. 5 Return lever M4 to its original position, and then close the right front door and the left front door. 7 WARNING Precaution for electrical shock High voltage is generated around the drum unit inside the machine. % In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. M4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-21 Troubleshooting 5 7 CAUTION Precaution for high temperature The fusing unit inside the machine is extremely hot. % In order to reduce the risk of burns, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. 5.2.12 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "11" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Open the right front door and the left front door. 2 Turn dial M9 and M10 to feed out the paper. 3 Remove all paper from the outlet. – If the finisher, shift tray or Z folding unit is installed, clear paper misfeeds from each unit. M9 M10 M9 M10 5 Troubleshooting 5-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Lower lever M4, and then pull out the ADU unit. 5 Lower lever M5. 6 Open covers M6 and M8. 7 Turn dial M7, and then remove any paper. 8 Raise the lever for cover M6, and then close cover M6. 9 Return the ADU unit to its original position. 10 Return lever M4 to its original position, and then close the right front door and the left front door. M4 M5 M8 M6 M7 M7 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-23 Troubleshooting 5 7 WARNING Precaution for electrical shock High voltage is generated around the drum unit inside the machine. % In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. 7 CAUTION Precaution for high temperature The fusing unit inside the machine is extremely hot. % In order to reduce the risk of burns, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. 5.2.13 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "12" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Open the right front door and the left front door. 2 Lower lever M4, and then pull out the ADU unit. M4 5 Troubleshooting 5-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Open cover M11. 4 Turn dial M9, and then remove any paper. 5 Return cover M11 to its original position. 6 Return the ADU unit to its original position. 7 Return lever M4 to its original position, and then close the right front door and the left front door. 7 WARNING Precaution for electrical shock High voltage is generated around the drum unit inside the machine. % In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. 7 CAUTION Precaution for high temperature The fusing unit inside the machine is extremely hot. % In order to reduce the risk of burns, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. M11 M9 M9 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-25 Troubleshooting 5 5.2.14 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "13" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Open the right front door and the left front door. 2 Lower lever M4, and then pull out the ADU unit. 3 Open cover M11. 4 Remove any paper. M4 M11 5 Troubleshooting 5-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5 Return cover M11 to its original position. 6 Return the ADU unit to its original position. 7 Return lever M4 to its original position, and then close the right front door and the left front door. 7 WARNING Precaution for electrical shock High voltage is generated around the drum unit inside the machine. % In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. 7 CAUTION Precaution for high temperature The fusing unit inside the machine is extremely hot. % In order to reduce the risk of burns, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-27 Troubleshooting 5 5.2.15 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADF "14" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Remove all original pages remaining in the paper tray. 2 Open the left-side cover, and then remove any original pages. 3 Open the paper feed unit, and then remove any original pages. 4 Close the paper feed unit and the left-side door. 5 Troubleshooting 5-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5 Lift up the paper tray, and then remove any original pages. 6 Return the paper tray to its original position. 5.2.16 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADF "15" 2 Note For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7. 1 Remove all original pages remaining in the paper tray. 2 Lift open the ADF. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-29 Troubleshooting 5 3 Open the document pad. 4 Open the original exit guides, and then remove any original pages. 5 Close the document pad. 5.2.17 Clearing a paper misfeed in Finisher FS-524/FS-525 "16" "18" This procedure describes the operations to be performed along the paper path where paper misfeeds may occur. Depending on the selected Finishing settings, the paper path changes, resulting in different locations in the finisher where paper misfeeds may occur. The method for clearing paper misfeeds in Finisher FS-524 is the same as that for FS-525. Here, the method for FS-524 is described as an example. 1 Open the machine’s front door. 5 Troubleshooting 5-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Lower guide lever FN2, and then remove any paper. 3 Return guide lever FN2 to its original position. 4 Lower guide lever FN4, and then remove any paper. – If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial FN3 to feed out the paper. 5 Return guide lever FN4 to its original position. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-31 Troubleshooting 5 6 Lower guide lever FN5, and then remove any paper. – If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial FN3 to feed out the paper. 7 Return guide lever FN5 to its original position. 8 Grab handle FN7, and then pull out the stacker unit. – Slowly pull out the stacker unit as far as possible. 5 Troubleshooting 5-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9 Remove any misfed paper from the stacker unit. – If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial FN6 to feed out the paper. 10 Return the stacker unit to its original position. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-33 Troubleshooting 5 – When returning the stacker unit to its original position, do not grab any part other than handle FN7, otherwise your hand or fingers may be pinched. 11 Close the front door. 5 Troubleshooting 5-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5.2.18 Clearing a paper misfeed in Finisher FS-610 "16" "18" This procedure describes the operations to be performed along the paper path where paper misfeeds may occur. Depending on the selected Finishing settings, the paper path changes, resulting in different locations in the finisher where paper misfeeds may occur. 1 Open the machine’s front door. 2 Lower guide lever FN2, and then remove any paper. 3 Return guide lever FN2 to its original position. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-35 Troubleshooting 5 4 Lower guide lever FN4, and then remove any paper. – If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial FN3 to feed out the paper. 5 Return guide lever FN4 to its original position. 6 Lower guide lever FN5, and then remove any paper. – If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial FN3 to feed out the paper. 7 Return guide lever FN5 to its original position. 5 Troubleshooting 5-36 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8 Grab handle FN6, and then pull out the stacker unit. – Slowly pull out the stacker unit as far as possible. 9 Lower guide lever FN9, and then remove any paper. 10 Open guide lever FN8, and then remove any paper. – If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial FN7 to feed out the paper. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-37 Troubleshooting 5 11 Lower guide lever FN10, and then remove any paper. – If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial FN7 to feed out the paper. 12 Return the stacker unit to its original position. 5 Troubleshooting 5-38 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – When returning the stacker unit to its original position, do not grab any part other than handle FN6, otherwise your hand or fingers may be pinched.Return the stacker unit to its original position. 13 Close the front door. 5.2.19 Clearing a paper misfeed in the Shift Tray "16" 1 Open the shift tray cover, and then slowly remove any misfed paper. 2 Close the shift tray cover. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-39 Troubleshooting 5 5.2.20 Clearing a paper misfeed in the Post Inserter "17" ! Detail For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7 1 Raise the upper unit release lever, and then slide the upper unit to the left. 2 Slowly remove any misfed paper. 3 Return the upper unit to its original position. 5.2.21 Clearing a paper misfeed in the Z Folding Unit "20" This procedure describes the operations to be performed along the paper path where paper misfeeds may occur. Depending on the selected Finishing settings, the paper path changes, resulting in different locations in the Z folding unit where paper misfeeds may occur. 1 Open the machine’s front door. 5 Troubleshooting 5-40 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Raise guide lever FN1, and then remove any paper. 3 Return guide lever FN1 to its original position. 4 Lower guide lever FN8 and guide lever FN2 of the finisher, and then remove any paper. 5 Grab handle FN2, and then pull out the Z folding/transport unit. – Slowly pull out the Z folding/transport unit as far as possible. 6 Lower guide lever FN3, and then remove any paper. FN1 FN8 FN2 FN2 FN3 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-41 Troubleshooting 5 – If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial FN4 to feed out the paper. 7 Lower guide lever FN6, and then remove any paper. 8 Raise guide lever FN7, and then remove any paper. – If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial FN5 to feed out the paper. 9 Return guide lever FN6 to its original position FN4 FN4 FN6 FN7 FN5FN5 FN5 5 Troubleshooting 5-42 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10 Return the Z folding/transport unit to its original position. – When returning the Z folding/transport unit to its original position, do not grab any part other than handle FN2, otherwise your hand or fingers may be pinched. 11 Close the front door. FN2 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-43 Troubleshooting 5 5.3 Simple troubleshooting Symptom Possible cause Remedy Main unit The machine does not start up when the main power switch is turned on. Is no power supplied from the electrical outlet? Correctly insert the power supply plug into the electrical outlet. Has the [Power] (auxiliary power) key been turned on? Turn on the [Power] (auxiliary power) key. Copying does not start. Is the right front door of the machine open? Securely close the upper right-side door of the machine. Is there no paper that matches the original? Load paper of the appropriate size into the paper tray. The printed output is too light. Is the copy density set too light? Touch [Dark] in the Density screen to copy at the desired copy density. (See p. 3-61.) Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. (See p. 2-50, p. 2-51 and p. 2-55.) The printed output is too dark. Is the copy density set too dark? Touch [Light] in the Density screen to copy at the desired copy density. (See p. 3-63.) Was the original not pressed close enough against the original glass? Position the original so that it is pressed closely against the original glass. (See p. 3-10.) The printed output is blurry. Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. (See p. 2-50, p. 2-51 and p. 2-55.) Was the original not pressed close enough against the original glass? Position the original so that it is pressed closely against the original glass. (See p. 3-10.) There are dark specks or spots throughout the printed output. There are streaks in the printed output. Is the original glass dirty? Wipe the glass with a soft, dry cloth. (See p. 10-3.) Is the left partition glass dirty? Clean the left partition glass with a soft, dry cloth. (See p. 10-3.) Is the document pad dirty? Clean the document pad with a soft cloth dampened with a mild detergent. (See p. 10-4.) Was the original printed on highly translucent material, such as diazo photosensitive paper or OHP transparencies? Place a blank sheet of paper on top of the original. (See p. 3-10.) Is a double-sided original being copied? If a thin double-sided original is being copied, the print on the back side may be reproduced in the copy. Touch [Light] on the Background Removal screen to select a lighter background density. (See p. 3-52.) 5 Troubleshooting 5-44 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) The image is not aligned properly on the paper. Is the original incorrectly positioned? Correctly position the original against the original scales. (See p. 3-10.) Load the original into the ADF, and slide the adjustable paper guides to fit the size of the original. (See p. 3-9.) Is the original incorrectly positioned in the ADF? If the original cannot be fed correctly through the ADF, make copies by positioning the original on the original glass. (See p. 3-10.) Is the left partition glass dirty (while using the ADF)? Clean the left partition glass with a soft, dry cloth. (See p. 10-3.) Are the adjustable lateral guides incorrectly positioned against the edges of the original? Slide the adjustable lateral guides against the edges of the original. Was curled paper loaded into the paper tray? Flatten the paper before loading it. The printed page is curled. Was paper that curls easily (as with recycled paper) used? Remove the paper from the paper tray, turn it over, and then load it again. Replace the paper with paper that is not damp. (See p. 2-50, p. 2-51 and p. 2-55.) The edge of the printed output is dirty. Is the document pad dirty? Clean the document pad with a soft cloth dampened with a mild detergent. (See p. 10-4.) Was the selected paper size larger than the original (with a Zoom setting of "Full Size" (100.0%)? Select a paper size that is the same size as the original. Otherwise, select the "Auto" Zoom setting to enlarge the copy to the selected paper size. (See p. 3-36.) Is the orientation of the original different from the orientation of the paper (with a Zoom setting of "Full Size" (100.0%)? Select a paper size that is the same size as the original. Otherwise, select a paper orientation that is the same as that of the original. Was the copy reduced to a size smaller than the paper (with a reduced zoom ratio specified)? Select a zoom ratio that adjusts the original size to the selected paper size. (See p. 3-36.) Otherwise, select the "Auto" Zoom setting to reduce the copy to the selected paper size. (See p. 3-39.) Even though the paper misfeed was cleared, copies cannot be produced. Are there paper misfeeds at other locations? Check the touch panel for other paper misfeed indications, and then remove any misfed paper at all other locations. (See p. 5-7.) Printing with the "2-Sided > 1-Sided" or "2-Sided > 2-Sided" settings are not possible. Have settings been selected that cannot be combined? Check the combinations of the selected settings. Copying is not possible even though the password is entered on a machine with user authentication/ account track settings specified. Did the message "Your account has reached its maximum allowance." appear? Contact your administrator. ADF The original is not fed. Is the ADF slightly open? Securely close the ADF. Is the original one that does not meet the specifications? Check that the original is one that can be loaded into the ADF. (See p. 7-31 and p. 7-32.) Is the original correctly loaded? Position the original correctly. (See p. 3-9.) Symptom Possible cause Remedy bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-45 Troubleshooting 5 Finisher The finisher cannot be used. Is no power supplied to the connector? Check that the cord is correctly inserted into the connector. The pages cannot be stapled. Have the staples run out? Replace the staple cartridge. (See p. 9-7.) The staple is incorrectly positioned by 90 degrees. Is the staple position correctly specified? Specify the desired position for stapling. (See p. 3-71.) The pages that were fed out were not uniformly loaded and the punched holes or staples are incorrectly positioned. Is the paper curled? Remove the paper from the paper tray, turn it over, and then load it again. Is there a gap between the lateral guides in the paper tray and the sides of the paper? Slide the lateral guides in the paper tray against the sides of the paper so that there is no gap. Even though a Punch setting was selected, holes are not punched. (when the punch unit is installed on the finisher) Did the message "Empty the holepunch scrap box." appear? Empty the hole-punch scrap box. (See p. 9-18) Symptom Possible cause Remedy Trouble Possible cause Remedy Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) The USB cable is connected between the authentication unit and the machine, but the status indicator is not lit in green. The USB port of the machine may be malfunctioning. Turn the machine off with the main power switch and temporarily disconnect the USB cable from the authentication unit or the machine before connecting it again and waiting 10 seconds before turning on the machine with the main power switch. The USB cable is connected between the authentication unit and the computer, but the status indicator is not lit in green. The USB port of the computer may be malfunctioning. Restart the computer. Is the authentication unit correctly installed? Refer to "Registering from Data Administrator", and check if the driver is correctly installed on the computer. (p. 13-9) A tone does not sound from the machine when scanning begins and when authentication is completed. Has the tone setting on the machine been set to "OFF"? Refer to "Registering users", and set the tone setting to "ON". (p. 13-15) The message "Failed to register". appears on a machine where registration failed. With the authentication unit, the scanning time is limited for each scan. This message appears if scanning is not possible within the limited period of time. For details on the scanning time, consult with the technical representative. Refer to the Quick Guide Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU- 101) and check how to position the finger for authentication and scanning in order to complete scanning within the limited period of time. Correctly position the finger to be scanned on the scanner, and do not move the finger until the scanning results are received. If the area of the finger to be scanned is dirty or chapped, a correct image cannot be created and scanning may not be completed. Wash your hands and try scanning again, or try to correct chapped fingers. If the area of the finger to be scanned is too wide or too thin (outside of the finger width range of 10 mm to 25 mm), a correct image cannot be created and scanning may not be completed. Try widening your finger or inserting it deeper or less deep into the scanner. Logon failed. The message "Failed to Authenticate." appears on the machine. The message "Failed to read data. Place your finger once again and click the [Start reading] button." appears on a computer where registration failed. With the authentication unit, the scanning time is limited to five seconds for each scan. This message appears if scanning is not possible within the five-second time period. 5 Troubleshooting 5-46 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) If any message other than those listed above appears, perform the operation described in the message. If the problem is not corrected after the described operation is performed, contact your service representative. Scanning does not begin. Is the finger correctly positioned? Refer to the Quick Guide Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU- 101) and check how to position the finger for authentication and scanning. Correctly position the finger to be scanned on the scanner, and do not move the finger until the scanning results are received. If the area of the finger to be scanned is dirty or chapped, a correct image cannot be created and scanning may not be completed. Wash your hands and try scanning again, or try to correct chapped fingers. If the area of the finger to be scanned is too wide or too thin (outside of the finger width range of 10 mm to 25 mm), a correct image cannot be created and scanning may not be completed. Try widening your finger or inserting it deeper or less deep into the scanner. Was the machine restarted after the authentication unit was connected to it? Turn the machine off with the main power switch and temporarily disconnect the USB cable from the authentication unit or the machine before connecting it again and waiting 10 seconds before turning on the machine with the main power switch. The Add New Hardware Wizard starts when the authentication unit is connected to the computer. Is the authentication unit connected to the same USB port used when the driver was installed? If the authentication unit is connected to a USB port different from the one used when the driver was installed, the Add New Hardware Wizard may start. Use the same USB port used when the driver was installed. Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) The USB cable is connected between the authentication unit and the machine, but the status indicator is not lit in green. With the authentication unit, the scanning time is limited to 10 seconds. This message appears if scanning was not possible within the limited period of time. Refer to the Quick Guide Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) and check how to position the IC card in order to complete scanning within the limited period of time. The message appears on a computer where registration failed Logon failed. The message "Failed to Authenticate." appears on the machine. If "Card Authentication + Password" was selected: Is the password typed in correctly? Check the password, and type it in correctly. Scanning does not begin. Was the machine restarted after the authentication unit was connected to it? Turn the machine off with the main power switch and temporarily disconnect the USB cable from the authentication unit or the machine before connecting it again and waiting 10 seconds before turning on the machine with the main power switch. The Add New Hardware Wizard starts when the authentication unit is connected to the computer. Is the authentication unit connected to the same USB port used when the driver was installed? If the authentication unit is connected to a USB port different from the one used when the driver was installed, the Add New Hardware Wizard may start. Use the same USB port used when the driver was installed. Trouble Possible cause Remedy bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-47 Troubleshooting 5 5.4 Main messages and their remedies Message Cause Remedy Originals left on original glass. The original was left on the original glass. Remove the original from the original glass. Paper of matching size is not available. Select the paper size. Paper of a suitable size is not loaded in a paper tray. Either select paper of a different size or load paper of a suitable size. Load paper into the bypass tray. Paper of a suitable size is not loaded in the bypass tray. Load paper of the appropriate size into the bypass tray. The original size cannot be detected. Select the paper size. 1: The original is not positioned correctly. 2: An original with a non-standard size or with a size too small to be detected is loaded. 1: Position the original correctly. 2: Select the correct paper size. The image will not fit on selected paper. Change the direction of the original. The image does not fit in the paper. Load the original turned 90 degrees. Cannot be set with XXX. Functions that cannot be used together are selected. Make copies using only one of the functions. The output tray has reached its capacity. Remove all paper from the tray indicated by %. Since the maximum amount of copies for the indicated finisher output tray has been exceeded, the machine is unable to make copies. Remove all paper from the indicated tray. Enter User Name and password, and then touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. User authentication settings have been specified. Copies cannot be made unless a user name and its correct password are entered. Type in your user name and password. (See p. 2-38.) Enter Account Name and password, and then touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. Account track settings have been specified. Copies cannot be made unless an account name and its correct password are entered. Type in your user name and password. (See p. 2-42.) Your account has reached its maximum allowance. The limit on the number of pages that can be printed has been reached. Contact the administrator of the machine. The part indicated by % is open. Ensure that it is properly closed. Since a machine door or cover is open or an option is not installed correctly, the machine is unable to make copies. Make sure that all doors and covers are closed and that all options are installed correctly. Install toner cartridge, and close all doors. The toner cartridge is not installed correctly. Reinstall the supplies or parts, or contact your service representative. Replenish paper. The indicated tray has run out of paper. Load paper into the indicated tray. (See p. 2-50, p. 2-51, and p. 2-55.) No more staples. Replace the staple cartridge, or cancel stapling. The staples have run out. Replace the staple cartridge. (See p. 9-7.) Misfeed detected. Since a paper misfeed occurred, the machine is unable to make copies. Clear the paper misfeed. (See p. 5-5.) Reinsert the following # of originals. After clearing a paper misfeed, it is necessary to reload certain pages of the original that have already been fed through the ADF. Load the indicated original pages into the ADF. An internal error occurred. Open and then close the front door. If the trouble code appears again contact your Service Rep. The machine malfunctioned and is unable to make copies. Clear the error by following the onscreen instructions. If the error cannot be cleared or released, contact your service representative with the error code displayed on the screen. Malfunction detected. Please call your Service Rep. The machine malfunctioned and is unable to make copies. Inform your service representative of the code displayed on the touch panel. Now Downloading Program Data from Firmware server. 1: CS Remote Care was activated by the service representative. 2: Internet ISW is being downloaded. Do not turn off the machine with the [Power] (auxiliary power) key while this message is displayed. After turning off the machine with the [Power] (auxiliary power) key, turn off the main power switch, and then contact the service representative. 5 Troubleshooting 5-48 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) If any message other than those listed above appears, perform the operation described in the message. Cannot be accessed due to unauthorized access. Please contact your administrator. The authentication information has become invalid since the authentication attempts have failed the specified number of times. Contact the administrator of the machine. The Administrator Password is not valid due to unauthorized access. The administrator password has become invalid since the authentication attempts have failed the specified number of times. Turn the machine off, then on again. Turn off the main power switch, and then wait about 10 seconds before turning it on again. Message Cause Remedy 6 Specifications bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-3 Specifications 6 6 Specifications 6.1 Specifications 6.1.1 Main unit Item Description Name bizhub 751/601 Type Console Document holder Stationary (mirror scanning) Photoconductor OPC Luminous source White inert gas fluorescent lamp Copying system Laser electrostatic copy method Developing system Dry-type dual-component reverse magnetic brush developing Fusing system Heat roller fixing Resolution Scanning: 600 dpi e 600 dpi, Printing: 2400 dpi e 600 dpi Document Types: sheets, books (spread), three-dimensional objects Size: Max. A3, 11 e 17 Thickness: Max. 30 mm, Weight: 6.8 kg Detectable sizes for original glass: A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v Detectable sizes for ADF: A3 w to A5 w/v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 v, Foolscap*2 Paper types Normal paper: 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2, thin paper*1: 50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2, thick paper: 91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2, overhead projector transparencies*1, labels*1, tab paper*1, trace paper*1, special paper*1, high-quality paper, user paper, recycled paper, colored paper, letterhead Paper sizes Tray 1 and tray 2: A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 8-1/2 e 11 v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, 16K v Tray 3 and tray 4: Standard sizes: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*2, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4W w/v, B5W w/v, A5W v, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 140 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Bypass tray: Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, 11 e 17 w, 8/1/2 e 11 v, Foolscap*2, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4W w/v, B5W w/v, A5W w/v,11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v) Custom sizes: 100 mm e 140 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Image blank Single-sided copying: Leading edge and trailing edge: less than 3 mm, front and rear: less than 2 mm Double-sided copying: Front side: Leading edge and trailing edge: less than 4 mm, front and rear: less than 2 mm Back side: Leading edge and trailing edge: less than 3 mm, front and rear: less than 2 mm Paper tray capacity Tray 1: 1650 sheets (64 g/m2 plain paper) Tray 2: 1100 sheets (64 g/m2 plain paper) Tray 3 and tray 4: 550 sheets (64 g/m2 plain paper) Bypass tray: 100 sheets (64 g/m2 plain paper) Warm-up time bizhub 751: within 300 seconds, bizhub 601: within 270 seconds First copy bizhub 751: within 2.9 seconds, bizhub 601: within 3.3 seconds Copy speed bizhub 751: 75 sheets/min. (A4 v), 35 sheets/min. (A3 w) bizhub 601: 60 sheets/min. (A4 v), 30 sheets/min. (A3 w) 6 Specifications 6-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) *1 Can only be fed through the bypass tray. *2 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, and 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. *3 The indicated spaced requirements represent the space required to fully extend the bypass tray. In order to incorporate improvements, these product specifications are subject to change without notice. 6.1.2 Automatic Document Feeder DF-614 * Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, and 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. Magnification ratios Full size: e 1.000 ± 1.0% or less Enlargement (Fixed Zoom): e 1.154, e 1.224, e 1.414, e 2.000 Reduction (Fixed Zoom): e 0.500, e 0.707, e 0.816, e 0.866 Minimal Copy: 0.930 Zoom with Constant × and Y Ratio: e 0.250 to 4.000 (in 0.001 increments) Independent Zoom: vertical e 0.250 to 4.000 (in 0.001 increments), horizontal e 0.250 to 4.000 (in 0.001 increments) User-set zoom ratio: 3 Multiple copies/sets 1 to 9999 copies/1 to 9999 sets Density adjustment Copy Density: Automatic and manual (9 levels) Background adjustment: Manual (9 levels) Power requirements AC 220 - 240 V, 10 A, 50 - 60Hz Noise 75 dB or less (bizhub 751/601) Power consumption Max. 2,000 W (including options) Dimensions 886 (W) e 859 (D) e 1140 (H) mm (main unit, ADF and control panel) Space requirements *3 1275 (W) e 791 (D) mm (main unit and ADF) Memory 1 GB Weight Approx. 224 kg (Main unit and ADF) Item Description Item Description Name DF-614 Document feed methods Standard original: Single-sided, double-sided Mixed original: Single-sided, double-sided Original paper types 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Original sizes 100 mm e 139.7 mm to 297 mm e 431.8 mm Detectable sizes: A3 w to A5 w/v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 v, Foolscap* Capacity of document feeder Max. 100 sheets (80 g/m2) Power requirements Supplied from main unit Maximum power consumption 53 W or less Dimensions 625 (W) e 576 (D) e 154 (H) mm Weight Approx. 12.9 kg bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-5 Specifications 6 6.2 Option specifications 6.2.1 Large Capacity Unit LU-405 6.2.2 Large Capacity Unit LU-406 * Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. Item Description Name LU-405 Paper types Normal paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2) Paper sizes Standard sizes: A4 v, B5 v, 8-1/2 e11 v, 16K v, wide paper (A4W v, B5W v, 8-1/2 e 11W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 257 mm to 223 mm e 314 mm Paper tray capacity 4,000 sheets (80 g/m2) Power requirements Supplied from main unit Maximum power consumption 82 W or less Dimensions 430 (W) e 639 (D) e 690 (H) mm Weight Approx. 30 kg Configuration 1 paper tray Item Description Name LU-406 Paper types Normal paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2) Paper sizes Standard sizes: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, Foolscap*, 8K w, 16K v, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4W w/v, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v) Custom sizes: 195 mm e 210 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Paper tray capacity 4,000 sheets (80 g/m2) Power requirements Supplied from main unit Maximum power consumption 100 W or less Dimensions 670 (W) e 639 (D) e 695 (H) mm Weight Approx. 42 kg Configuration 1 paper tray 6 Specifications 6-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6.2.3 Finisher FS-524 *1 Cannot be used with Finishing settings. *2 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. Item Description Name FS-524 Function Straight delivery (sorted, grouped) Offset delivery (sort and offset, group and offset) Staple delivery Output trays Main finishing tray (Tray 1), sub finishing tray (Tray 2) Offset width 30 mm Paper types Main finishing tray (Tray 2): Sort, group, sort and offset, group and offset: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2), thin paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), label sheets, OHP transparencies, trace paper, tab paper, special paper, high-quality paper, user paper, recycled paper, colored paper, letterhead Staple: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), recycled paper, high-quality paper, user paper, letterhead, special paper, thin paper, thick paper, colored paper Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): Sort, group: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2), thin paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), label sheets, OHP transparencies, trace paper, tab paper Paper sizes Main finishing tray (Tray 2): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w*1/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w*1/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 148 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm, 128 mm e 139 mm*1 Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v,13 e 19 w, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W w/v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v) Custom sizes: 100 mm e 139 mm to 331 mm e 488 mm Staple: Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Output tray capacity Main finishing tray (Tray 2): B4 or larger: 1500 sheets A4 to B5: 3000 sheets A5 or smaller: 500 sheets Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): 200 sheets Staple settings Maximum number of bound sheets: 50 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Punch settings Uses the optional punch settings. Power requirements Supplied from main unit Maximum power consumption 80 W or less Dimensions 680 (800 when trays are pulled out) (W) e 656 (D) e 990 (H) mm Weight 60 kg Consumables Staple cartridge bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-7 Specifications 6 6.2.4 Finisher FS-525 *1 Cannot be used with Finishing settings. *2 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. Item Description Name FS-525 Function Straight delivery (sorted, grouped) Offset delivery (sort and offset, group and offset) Staple delivery Output trays Main finishing tray (Tray 2), sub finishing tray (Tray 1) Offset width 30 mm Paper types Main finishing tray (Tray 2): Sort, group, sort and offset, group and offset: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2), thin paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), label sheets, OHP transparencies, trace paper, tab paper, special paper, high-quality paper, user paper, recycled paper, colored paper, letterhead Staple: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), recycled paper, high-quality paper, user paper, letterhead, special paper, thin paper, thick paper, colored paper Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): Sort, group: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2), thin paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), label sheets, OHP transparencies, trace paper, tab paper Paper sizes Main finishing tray (Tray 2): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w*1/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w*1/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 148 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm, 128 mm e 139 mm*1 Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w/ v, B6 w, A6 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/ v, 13 × 19 w, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/ v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W w/v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v) Custom sizes: 100 mm e 139 mm to 331 mm e 488 mm Staple: Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Output tray capacity Main finishing tray (Tray 2): B4 or larger: 1500 sheets A4 to B5: 3000 sheets A5 or smaller: 500 sheets Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): 200 sheets Staple settings Maximum number of bound sheets: 100 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) Punch settings Uses the optional punch settings. Power requirements Supplied from main unit Maximum power consumption 80 W or less Dimensions 680 (800) (W) e 656 (D) e 990 (H) mm The value in parentheses is the dimension when the tray is pulled out. Weight 60 kg Consumables Staple cartridge 6 Specifications 6-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6.2.5 Finisher FS-610 Item Description Name FS-610 Function Straight delivery (sorted, grouped) Offset delivery (sort and offset, group and offset) Staple, half-fold, center staple & fold, tri-fold Output trays Main finishing tray (Tray 2), sub finishing tray (Tray 1), Booklet tray Offset width 30 mm Paper types Main finishing tray (Tray 2): Sort, group, sort and offset, group and offset: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2), thin paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), label sheets, OHP transparencies, trace paper, tab paper, special paper, high-quality paper, user paper, recycled paper, colored paper, letterhead Staple: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2), recycled paper, high-quality paper, user paper, letterhead, special paper, thin paper, thick paper, colored paper Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): Sort, group: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2), thin paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), tab paper Booklet tray: Half-fold, tri-fold: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Center staple & fold: Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) Paper sizes Main finishing tray (Tray 2): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w*1/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w*1/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 148 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm, 128 mm e 139 mm*1 Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): Standard sizes: A3w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W w/v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v) Custom sizes: 100 mm e 139 mm to 331 mm e 488 mm Staple: Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Booklet tray: Standard sizes (Half-fold, center staple & fold): A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w) Standard sizes (Tri-fold): A4 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 16K w Custom sizes (Half-fold, center staple & fold): 210 mm e 279 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Output tray capacity Main output tray (Tray 2): B4 or larger: 1500 sheets A4 to B5: 2500 sheets A5 or smaller: 500 sheets Sub output tray (Tray 1): 200 sheets Booklet tray: Half-fold (3 sheets): 25 to 33 sets Center staple & fold (5 sheets): 15 to 20 sets Tri-fold (1 sheet): 50 sets Staple settings Maximum number of bound sheets: 50 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) Maximum number of sheets bound with center staple & fold: 20 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) Punch settings Uses the optional punch settings. Power requirements Supplied from main unit Maximum power consumption 80 W or less Dimensions 680 (800) (W) e 656 (D) e 990 (H) mm The value in parentheses is the dimension when the tray is pulled out. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-9 Specifications 6 *1 Cannot be used with Finishing settings. *2 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. 6.2.6 Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 * Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. 6.2.7 Z Folding Unit ZU-604/ZU-605 * Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. Weight Approx. 65 kg Consumables Staple cartridge Item Description Item Description Name PK-505/PK-504 Function Hole-punches for filing. Number of holes 2 holes or 4 holes Hole diameter 6.5 +/- 0.5 mm Hole pitch 2-Hole/4-Hole: 80.0 +/- 0.5 mm 4-Hole Swedish punch: 21 mm +/- 1 mm / 70 mm +/- 1 mm / 21 mm +/- 1 mm Paper types Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 128 g/m2) Paper sizes 2 holes: A3 w to A5 w/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*, 8K w, 16K w/v 4 holes: A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, 16K v Power requirements Supplied from finisher Dimensions 148 (W) e 509 (D) e 122 (H) mm Weight Approx. 3 kg Item Description Name ZU-604/ZU-605 Function Hole-punches for filing. Z-fold Number of holes 2 holes or 4 holes Hole diameter 6.5 +/- 0.5 mm Hole pitch 2-Hole/4-Hole: 80.0 +/- 0.5 mm 4-Hole Swedish punch: 21 mm +/- 1 mm / 70 mm +/- 1 mm / 21 mm +/- 1 mm Paper type for outputting hole-punched paper Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thin paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2) Paper size for outputting hole-punched paper 2 holes: A3 w to A5 w/v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*, 8K w, 16K w/v 4 holes: A3 w to A4 w, B5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, 16K v Fold type Z-fold Paper type for outputting zfolded paper Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thin paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2) Paper size for outputting zfolded paper A3 w, B4 w Power requirements Supplied from main unit Dimensions 169 (W) e 660 (D) e 930 (H) mm Weight Approx. 38 kg 6 Specifications 6-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6.2.8 Post Inserter PI-504 * Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. 6.2.9 Shift Tray SF-602 *1 Cannot be used with Finishing settings. *2 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 × 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 × 13 w, 8-1/2 × 13 w, 8 × 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. Item Description Name PI-504 Configuration 2 (upper and lower) paper trays Cover sheet type Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2), thin paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2) Cover sheet size Upper tray: Standard sizes: A4 w/v to A5 v, 8-1/2 e 11w/v to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2v, 16Kw/v, wide paper (A4W w/v to A5W v, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Lower tray: Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v, A3W w to A5W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Paper capacity 200 sheets for each of the upper and lower trays Power requirements Supplied from finisher Maximum power consumption 30 W or less Dimensions 511 (W) e 620 (D) e 220 (H) mm Weight Approx. 10.5 kg Item Description Name SF-602 Function Straight delivery (sorted, grouped) Offset stack (sort and offset, group and offset) Amount of shift 30 mm Paper types Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 216 g/m2), thin paper (52 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), OHP transparencies*1, trace paper*1, tab paper*1 Paper sizes Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w*1, A6 w, 11 × 17 w to 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w/v, 7-1/4 × 10-1/2 w*1/v*1, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v Custom sizes: 105 mm × 139 mm to 305 mm × 458 mm*1, 139 mm × 139 mm to 314 mm × 458 mm Output tray capacity A4 to B5: 1250 sheets B4 or larger, A5 v: 500 sheets A5 w or smaller: 100 sheets Power requirements Supplied from main unit Dimensions 400 (490) (W) × 600 (D) × 480 (H) mm The value in parentheses is the dimension when the tray is pulled out. Weight Approx. 14 kg bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-11 Specifications 6 6.2.10 Output Tray OT-505 6.2.11 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101 Item Description Name OT-505 Function Paper output tray for main unit Paper types Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2), thin paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), OHP transparencies, trace paper, tab paper Output tray capacity Max. 150 sheets Dimensions 215 (335) (W) × 365 (D) × 70 (H) mm The value in parentheses is the dimension when the tray is pulled out. Weight Approx. 0.56 kg Item Description Name AU-101 Compatible finger width 10 mm to less than 25 mm Interface USB 2.0 Dimensions Approx. 78 mm (W) × 95 mm (D) × 55 mm (H) Weight Approx. 150 g (not including the USB cable) Power consumption DC 5 V, 500 mA Environment conditions (when operating) Temperature 10 to 35 °C Humidity 10 to 80% (Must be no condensation) Environment conditions (when not operating) Temperature -10 to 60 °C Humidity 10 to 80% (Must be no condensation) Computer Processor PC/AT compatible, 1 GHz or more Memory 128 MB or more Hard disk drive Available hard disk space: 100 MB or more Monitor 800 × 600 pixels, 16-bit color or more Network TCP/IP protocol Application Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 (SP1 or later) Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 (Windows 2000) Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 SP2 (Windows XP) Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 (Windows Vista) Interface USB 1.1 or later Supported operating systems Windows 2000 Professional (SP4) Windows XP Professional (SP3 or later) Windows XP Professional x64 Edition (SP2 or later) Windows Vista Enterprise (SP2 or later)* Windows Vista Ultimate (SP2 or later)* *Supports 32-bit (x86)/64-bit (x64) environment. 6 Specifications 6-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6.2.12 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201 6.2.13 Other options Image Controller IC-208 Mount Kit MK-716 Fax Kit FK-502 Hard Disk HD-510 Staple Kit SK-602 Staple MS-10A Staple MS-5C Key Counter Kit Key Counter Socket Security Kit SC-506 Working Table WT-504 Local Interface Kit EK-703 i-Option LK-101 i-Option LK-102 Upgrade Kit UK-202 Item Description Name AU-201 Dimensions Approx. 92 mm (W) × 64 mm (D) × 16 mm (H) Weight Approx. 120 g Power consumption Through USB port Environment conditions (when operating) Temperature 0 to 40 °C Humidity 20 to 85% (Must be no condensation) Environment conditions (when not operating) Temperature -20 to 50 °C Humidity 20 to 85% (Must be no condensation) Radio waves classification Induced reading/writing communication equipment Compatible card Processor Contactless IC card compliant with ISO 14443 Type A and FeliCa Computer Processor PC/AT compatible, 1 GHz or more Memory 128 MB or more Hard disk drive Available hard disk space: 100 MB or more Monitor 800 × 600 pixels, 16-bit color or more Network TCP/IP protocol Application Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 (SP1 or later) Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 (Windows 2000) Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 SP2 (Windows XP) Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 (Windows Vista) Interface USB 1.1 or later Supported operating systems Windows 2000 Professional (SP4) Windows XP Professional (SP3 or later) Windows XP Professional x64 Edition (SP2 or later) Windows Vista Enterprise (SP2 or later)* Windows Vista Ultimate (SP2 or later)* *Supports 32-bit (x86)/64-bit (x64) environment. 7 Copy paper/originals bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-3 Copy paper/originals 7 7 Copy paper/originals 7.1 Copy paper Available paper size/type is restricted in each equipment. 7.1.1 Paper tray and equipment This machine is equipped with the following trays for loading copy paper. - Main unit trays: Tray 1, 2, 3 and 4 - Bypass tray - Large capacity unit LU-405/406 Also, the following equipment is provided for conveying/delivering copies. - ADU (Automatic Duplex Unit) (built in to the main unit) - Finisher FS-524 (built-in staple unit) - Finisher FS-525 (built-in staple unit) - Finisher FS-610 (built-in stable unit and folding unit) - Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 (for Finisher FS-524/525/610) - Z Folding Unit ZU-604/ZU-605 (built-in punch kit) - Post Inserter PI-504 (for Finisher FS-524/525/610) - Shift Tray SF-602 (for the machine without finisher) - Output Tray OT-505 (for the machine without finisher) 7.1.2 Paper weight Paper trays Paper Weight Main unit trays (Tray 1, 2, 3 and 4) 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 Select "thick paper" when loading 91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 paper. Select "thin paper" when loading 50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2 paper. Large capacity unit LU-405 Large capacity unit LU-406 Bypass tray Post Inserter PI-504 Equipment Paper Weight Automatic Duplex Unit 60 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Finisher FS-524 + Punch Kit PK-505/ PK-504 Sort, group: 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Sort and offset, group and offset: 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Staple: 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 Punch: 60 g/m2 to 128 g/m2 Finisher FS-525 + Punch Kit PK-505/ PK-504 Sort, group: 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Sort and offset, group and offset: 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Staple: 60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 Punch: 60 g/m2 to 128 g/m2 Finisher FS-610 + Punch Kit PK-505/ PK-504 Sort, group: 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Sort and offset, group and offset: 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Staple: 60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 Half-fold, Tri-fold: 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 Center staple & fold: 60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 Punch: 60 g/m2 to 128 g/m2 Z Folding Unit ZU-604/ZU-605 Z-fold: 50 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 Shift Tray SF-602 52 g/m2 to 216 g/m2 Output Tray OT-505 52 g/m2 to 216 g/m2 7 Copy paper/originals 7-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7.1.3 Paper Tray/Output Tray capacity 7.1.4 Paper size Paper trays Capacity Main unit paper tray (Tray 1) 1650 sheets (64 g/m2) Main unit paper tray (Tray 2) 1100 sheets (64 g/m2) Main unit paper tray (Tray 3/4) 550 sheets (64 g/m2) Large capacity unit LU-405 4000 sheets (80 g/m2) Large capacity unit LU-406 4000 sheets (80 g/m2) Bypass tray Plain paper: 100 sheets (80 g/m2) Special paper: 1 sheet Post Inserter PI-504 200 sheets (80 g/m2) Equipment Capacity Automatic Duplex Unit Unlimited Finisher FS-524 Main finishing tray (Tray 2): B4 or larger: 1500 sheets (80 g/m2) A4 to B5: 3000 sheets (80 g/m2) A5 or smaller: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) Staple: 100 to 20 sets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): 200 sheets (80 g/m2) Finisher FS-525 Main finishing tray (Tray 2): B4 or larger: 1500 sheets (80 g/m2) A4 to B5: 3000 sheets (80 g/m2) A5 or smaller: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) Staple: 100 to 20 sets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): 200 sheets (80 g/m2) Finisher FS-610 Main finishing tray (Tray 2): B4 or larger: 1500 sheets (80 g/m2) A4 to B5: 2500 sheets (80 g/m2) A5 or smaller: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) Staple: 100 to 20 sets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): 200 sheets (80 g/m2) Booklet tray: Half-fold (tri-fold): 25 to 33 sets (80 g/m2) Center staple & fold (5 sheets): 15 to 20 sets (80 g/m2) Tri-fold (1 sheet): 50 sets (80 g/m2) Shift Tray SF-602 A4 to B5: 1250 sheets (80 g/m2) B4 or larger, A5 v: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) A5 w or smaller: 100 sheets (80 g/m2) Output Tray OT-505 150 sheets (80 g/m2) Paper Trays Available Size Main unit paper tray (Tray 1/2) A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 8-1/2 e 11 v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, 16K v Main unit paper tray (Tray 3/4) Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 140 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Large capacity unit LU-405 Standard sizes: A4 v, B5 v, 8-1/2 e 11 v, 16K v, wide paper (A4W v, B5W v, 8-1/2 e 11W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 257 mm to 223 mm e 314 mm bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-5 Copy paper/originals 7 * Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. Large capacity unit LU-406 Standard sizes: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11w/v, Foolscap*, 8K w, 16K w, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4W w/v, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v) Custom sizes: 195 mm e 210 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Bypass tray Standard sizes: A3 v to B6 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W w/v, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v) Custom sizes: 100 mm e 140 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Post Inserter PI-504 Upper tray: Standard sizes: A4 w/v to A5 v, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, 16K w/v, wide paper (A4W w/v to A5W v, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 139 mm to 216 mm e 297 mm Lower tray: Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Equipment Available Size Automatic Duplex Unit Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W w/v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v) Custom sizes: 105 mm e 140 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Finisher FS-524 Main finishing tray (Tray 2): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w*1/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w*1/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 148 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm, 128 mm e 139 mm*1 Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W w/v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v) Custom sizes: 100 mm e 139 mm to 331 mm e 488 mm Staple: Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Finisher FS-525 Main finishing tray (Tray 2): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w*1/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w*1/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 148 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm, 128 mm e 139 mm*1 Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W w/v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v) Custom sizes: 100 mm e 139 mm to 331 mm e 488 mm Staple: Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Paper Trays Available Size 7 Copy paper/originals 7-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) *1 Cannot be used with Finishing settings. *2 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. 7.1.5 Special paper When loading the paper except normal (overhead projection transparent film, thick paper, colored paper etc.), select the appropriate name from 10. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the Auto Paper Select setting is specified or when the paper trays are switched automatically. Available paper types depend on the paper tray. For details on the paper setting for bypass tray, see "Specifying a paper type for bypass tray" on page 7-19. For details on paper type setting for "Paper type setting for a tray" on page 7-21. Finisher FS-610 Main finishing tray (Tray 2): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w*1/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w*1/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 148 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm, 128 mm e 139 mm*1 Sub finishing tray (Tray 1): Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W w/v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v) Custom sizes: 100 mm e 139 mm to 331 mm e 488 mm Staple: Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v) Custom sizes: 182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Booklet tray: Standard sizes (Half-fold, center staple & fold): A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w) Standard sizes (Tri-fold): A4 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 16K w Custom sizes (Half-fold, center staple & fold): 210 mm e 279 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Shift Tray SF-602 Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w*1, A6 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 w*1/v*1, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v Custom sizes: 105 mm e 139 mm to 305 mm e 458 mm*1, 139 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Output Tray OT-505 Standard sizes: A3 w, B4 w, A4v, B5 w/v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4W v, B5W w/v, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v) Custom sizes: 100 mm e 140 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm Equipment Available Size No. Paper type/Icon Description 1 OHP Select this setting when overhead projection transparent films are loaded. 2 Special Paper Select this setting when special paper, for example, high-quality paper, is loaded as plain paper with a weight of 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-7 Copy paper/originals 7 3 Thick Paper Select this setting when the thick paper that is loaded has a weight to 91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2. 4 Thin Paper Select this setting when the Thin paper that is loaded has a weight of 50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2. 5 Letterhead Select this setting when plain paper that is loaded has a weight of 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 and is already printed with a company name or preset text. 6 Colored Paper Select this setting when plain colored paper weighing from 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 is loaded. 7 Tab Paper 1 Select this setting when tab paper is loaded. 8 Trace Paper Select this setting when trace paper is loaded. 9 User Paper 1 Select this setting when paper that is loaded has a weight of 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 and does not match with any other paper type. For details, contact your service representative. 10 User Paper 2 Select this setting when paper that is loaded has a weight of 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 and does not match with any other paper type. For details, contact your service representative. 11 User Paper 3 Select this setting when paper that is loaded has a weight of 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 and does not match with any other paper type. For details, contact your service representative. 12 Recycled Select this setting when using recycled paper. 13 Fine Select this setting when high-quality paper is loaded. 14 Labels Select this setting when label sheets are loaded. No. Paper type/Icon Description 7 Copy paper/originals 7-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7.1.6 Precautions for paper Do not use the following types of paper. Otherwise, decreased print quality, paper misfeeds or damage may result. - OHP transparencies that have already been fed through the machine (even if the transparency is still blank) - Paper that has been printed on with a heat-transfer printer or an inkjet printer - Paper that is either extremely thick or extremely thin - Folded, curled, wrinkled, or torn paper - Paper that has been left unwrapped for a long period of time - Damp paper, perforated paper, or paper with punched holes - Extremely smooth or extremely rough paper, or paper with an uneven surface - Paper that has been treated, such as carbon-backed, heat-sensitive or pressure-sensitive paper - Paper that has been decorated with foil or embossing - Paper of a non-standard shape (not rectangular) - Paper that is bound with glue, staples or paper clips - Paper with labels attached - Paper with ribbons, hooks, buttons, etc., attached 7.1.7 Paper storage Store paper in a cool, dark location with little humidity. If the paper becomes damp, paper misfeeds may occur. Paper that has not been loaded should be kept wrapped or placed in a plastic bag and stored in a cool, dark location with little humidity. Store the paper laying flat, not standing on its edge. Curled paper may cause paper misfeeds. Keep paper out of the reach of children. 7.1.8 Auto Tray Switch Function If the selected paper tray runs out of paper while a job is being printed and a different paper tray is loaded with paper meeting the following conditions, the other paper tray is automatically selected so printing can continue. If the optional large capacity unit LU-203 is installed, a maximum of 5,650 copies can be made continuously. (The paper tray is automatically switched only if the "ATS Permission parameter" in the Utility mode is set to "Permit".) Operating Conditions (Set the following condition at "1 System Setting>3 Paper Tray Setting" of User Setting.) - Select the paper trays to be selected automatically by "Auto Tray Select Setting", if Auto paper select is functioned. Tray Priority is available. - Select "Allow" at "Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF" - Select the same paper type at "Paper Type". Load the following paper into the paper trays. - The same size in the same orientation. - The same paper type. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-9 Copy paper/originals 7 7.2 Selecting the paper settings for bypass tray This section describes the procedures for specifying the size and type of paper loaded in bypass tray. ! Detail For details on loading the paper into the bypass tray, refer to "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-55. 7.2.1 Automatically detecting the paper size ("Auto Detect" setting) The size of the paper loaded into bypass tray can be detected automatically. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Touch the button for bypass tray. 3 Touch [Change Tray Settings]. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch [Auto Detect]. As the factory default, "Auto Detect" is selected. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. 7.2.2 Selecting a paper size setting (Size setting) The paper size can be set for the bypass tray so that it can be used with the specified paper size. This is useful, for example, when the size of the paper that is loaded cannot be automatically detected (such as with paper in inch sizes). The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for 8-1/2 e 11 w loaded into the bypass tray. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-11 Copy paper/originals 7 2 Select the button for the bypass tray. 3 Touch [Change Tray Settings]. 4 Touch [Standard Size]. The Standard Size screen appears. 5 Touch [8-1/2 e 11 w]. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. The Basic screen appears again. The paper size for the bypass tray is set. 2 Reminder If paper other than the specified paper size is loaded, a paper misfeed may occur since the paper size is not automatically detected. 7.2.3 Specifying a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings) If paper other than standard-size paper is loaded into the bypass tray, it will be necessary to enter the paper size. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Select the button for the bypass tray. 3 Touch [Change Tray Settings]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-13 Copy paper/originals 7 4 Touch [Custom Size]. The Custom Size screen appears. 5 Type in the length (X) and width (Y) of the paper. – Make sure that [X] is selected, touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to type in the length of side X. (139.7 mm to 458.0 mm) – Make sure that [Y] is selected, touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to type in the length of side Y. (100.0 mm to 314.0 mm) – If a decimal value is displayed in the Custom Size screen, use the keypad to type in the setting. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. ? Can paper sizes be stored? % Five non-standard paper sizes can be stored. % To recall a stored paper size, touch the corresponding memory key. % The names "memory1" through "memory5" can be changed. For details on changing the names, refer to "Storing a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings)" on page 7-14. % For details on storing paper sizes, refer to "Storing a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings)" on page 7-14. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. The Basic screen appears again. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7.2.4 Storing a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings) Five non-standard paper sizes can be stored. Storing paper sizes that are used often allows the paper size to be quickly selected, without having to reenter the setting. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Select the button for the bypass tray. 3 Touch [Change Tray Settings]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-15 Copy paper/originals 7 4 Touch [Custom Size]. The Custom Size screen appears. 5 Specify the × and Y sides of the paper, and then touch [Store]. – Make sure that [X] is selected, touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to type in the length of side X. (139.7 mm to 458.0 mm) – Make sure that [Y] is selected, touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to type in the length of side Y. (100.0 mm to 314.0 mm) – If a decimal value is displayed in the Custom Size screen, use the keypad to type in the setting. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Touch the memory button where the paper size is to be stored. – To change the name of a memory key, touch [Change Custom Size Name], and then touch the key to be renamed. Using the keyboard that appears, type in the name of the key, touch [OK], and then touch [Close]. For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3. 7 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next three screens that appear. The Basic screen appears again. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-17 Copy paper/originals 7 7.2.5 Selecting a setting for oversized paper (Wide paper settings) If paper one size larger than a standard size is being used in the bypass tray, specify a setting for wide paper. ! Detail By specifying paper one size larger than the document as wide paper, the document can be copied at the center so that there is no loss of the document image. When specifying wide paper for the bypass tray, non-standard-sized paper can be specified. When using non-standard-sized paper, enter the paper size. For details on the setting for tray 3 and tray 4, refer to "To select a setting for oversized paper" on page 7-27 For details on loading the paper into the bypass tray, refer to "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-55. The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for wide paper loaded into the bypass tray. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the bypass tray. 3 Touch [Change Tray Settings]. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch [Wide Paper]. The Wide Paper screen appears. 5 Select the size of the paper to be loaded. – Touch and until the button for the desired paper size is displayed. 6 To change the size, touch [Change Size]. The Change Size screen for oversized paper appears. 7 Specify the X and Y sides of the paper, and then touch [OK]. – Touch either [X] or [Y], press the [C] (clear) key to clear the current setting, and then use the keypad to type in the size. – If a decimal value is displayed in the Custom Size screen, use the keypad to type in the setting. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. – If the orientation of the loaded paper does not match the sizes specified for "X" and "Y", "Input error" appears, even if the values are within the allowable range. In addition, do not enter the same size for "X" and "Y". – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-19 Copy paper/originals 7 To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 8 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note The selected size button is programmed with the entered paper size, so that the paper size is available to be selected again without being typed in. In addition, the size can be changed. 7.2.6 Specifying a paper type for bypass tray If paper other than plain paper, such as OHP transparencies or special paper, is loaded in bypass tray, be sure to change the paper type setting. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Touch the button for the bypass tray. – If a setting for special paper is selected, the bypass is not selected automatically with the "Auto" Paper setting. – The auto tray switch feature applies only to paper trays specified with the same paper type setting. 3 Touch [Change Tray Settings]. 4 Select the appropriate setting for the type of special paper that is loaded. – Touch the button for the desired paper type. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Reminder If special paper is loaded into the bypass tray, be sure to select the corresponding paper type, otherwise a paper misfeed may occur. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-21 Copy paper/originals 7 7.3 Paper type setting for a tray This section describes the procedures for specifying the size of paper loaded in the tray 3 and 4 and the type of paper loaded in each paper tray. 7.3.1 To display the paper tray setting screen The following procedure describes how to display the Paper Tray Setting screen. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [2 User Setting]. – An item can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for the number beside the desired button. – For "2 User Setting", press the [2] key in the keypad. 3 Touch [1 System Setting]. The System Setting screen appears. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch [3 Paper Tray Setting]. The Paper Tray Setting screen appears. 2 Note To change the paper size for paper loaded into the tray 3 and 4 and the LCT, contact your service representative. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-23 Copy paper/originals 7 7.3.2 To specify a standard size paper ("Standard Size 1" settings) A standard paper size can be set for the tray 3 and 4. The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for standard-sized paper loaded into the tray 3. 1 In the Paper Tray Setting screen, touch [5 Paper Type/Size Settings]. – For details on displaying the Paper Tray Setting screen, refer to "To display the paper tray setting screen" on page 7-21. – For details on loading the paper into tray 3 and 4, refer to "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-55. The Paper Type/Size settings screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the tray 3, and then touch [Standard Size 1] under "Paper Size". 3 Touch [OK]. If standard-sized paper is loaded into a paper tray, the paper size is automatically detected. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7.3.3 To specify a setting for standard special-sized paper (Special size settings) If standard centimeter-sized paper is being used in the tray 3 and 4, specify a setting for standard specialsized paper. The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for standard special-sized paper loaded into the tray 3. 1 In the Paper Tray Setting screen, touch [5 Paper Type/Size Settings]. – For details on displaying the Paper Tray Setting screen, refer to "To display the paper tray setting screen" on page 7-21. – For details on loading the paper into tray 3 and 4, refer to "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-55. The Paper Type/Size Settings screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the tray 3, and then touch [Special Size] under "Paper Size". bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-25 Copy paper/originals 7 3 Select the size of the paper to be loaded. 4 Touch [OK]. 7.3.4 To specify a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings) If custom-sized paper is being used in the tray 3 and 4, specify a setting for custom-sized paper. The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for custom-sized paper loaded into the tray 3. 1 In the Paper Tray Setting screen, touch [5 Paper Type/Size Settings]. – For details on displaying the Paper Tray Setting screen, refer to "To display the paper tray setting screen" on page 7-21. – For details on changing the paper size for the tray 3 and 4, refer to "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-55. The Paper Type/Size Settings screen appears. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Touch the button for the tray 3, and then touch [Custom Size] under "Paper Size". The Paper Size screen appears. 3 Type in the length (X) and width (Y) of the paper. – Touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to type in the length of side X. (139.7 mm to 458.0 mm) – Touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to type in the length of side Y. (182.0 mm to 314.0 mm) – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen, use the keypad to type in the length. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. 4 Touch [OK]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-27 Copy paper/originals 7 7.3.5 To select a setting for oversized paper If paper one size larger than a standard size is being used in the tray 3 and 4, specify a setting for wide paper. The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for wide paper loaded into the tray 3. 1 In the Paper Tray Setting screen, touch [5 Paper Type/Size Settings]. – For details on displaying the Paper Tray Setting screen, refer to "To display the paper tray setting screen" on page 7-21. – For details on loading the paper into tray 3 and 4, refer to "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-55. The Paper Type/Size Settings screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the tray 3, and then touch [Wide Paper] under "Paper Size". The Paper Size screen appears. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Select the size of the paper to be loaded. – Touch [X] or [Y] in "Change size", touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to specify the size of the paper. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen, use the keypad to type in the setting. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. 4 Select the desired image position. 5 Touch [OK]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-29 Copy paper/originals 7 7.3.6 Specifying a paper type This section describes the procedure for specifying a type of paper loaded in each tray. 2 Note Selecting "Letterhead" will change the print side to the reverse side. If a special paper type is selected, that tray is not selected automatically with the "Auto" Paper setting. The auto tray switch feature applies only to the trays specified with the same paper type setting. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter]. 2 Touch [2 User Settings], [1 System Settings], [3 Paper Tray Settings], and [5 Paper Type/Size Settings] in sequence. The Paper Type Settings screen appears. 7 Copy paper/originals 7-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch to highlight the desired tray key under "Paper Tray" in the left side area of the screen, then touch [Paper Type] on the right side. The Paper Type screen appears. 4 Touch the desired paper type key to highlight it. 5 Touch [OK] to complete the setting. – To cancel the change, touch [Cancel]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-31 Copy paper/originals 7 7.4 Originals When making copies, load the original into the ADF or position it on the original glass. To copy originals that cannot be loaded into the ADF, position them on the original glass. 7.4.1 Originals that can be loaded into the ADF There are two methods for using the ADF. The machine will detect the original size automatically when the original is positioned in the ADF, then select an appropriate paper size automatically by Auto Paper Select function. There are limits on the types of original that can be positioned with each method. - Normal method - For originals of mixed sizes - For Z-folded original Normal method Mixed Original Setting The following chart shows the possible combinations of standard- size paper that can be used with the "Mixed Original" setting. Z-Folded Original Setting Item Description Original paper weight 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Original size 100 mm e 139.7 mm to 297 mm e 431.8 mm Auto original size detect A3 w to A5 w/v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 v Curling tolerance 10 mm or less Paper capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m2) Item Description Original paper weight 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Auto original size detect Two types of size combination are determined by the ADF guide width. Width of A3 w/A4 v: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 v, A5 v Width of B4 w/B5 v: B4 w, A4 w, B5 w/v, A5 v Width of A4 w/A5 v: A4 w, B5 w, A5 v Width of A5 w: A5 w, B6 w Curling tolerance 10 mm or less Paper capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m2) Item Description Original paper weight 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Original size 100 mm e 139.7 mm to 297 mm e 431.8 mm Auto original size detect A3 w to A5 w/v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 v Curling tolerance 10 mm or less Paper capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m2) 7 Copy paper/originals 7-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Tab Original Setting 7.4.2 Precautions for loading originals into the ADF The following types of original should not be positioned into the ADF, otherwise paper misfeeds, damage to the original or the machine trouble may occur. - Wrinkled, folded, curled, or torn original - Highly translucent or transparent original, such as overhead transparencies or trace paper - Coated original such as carbon-backed paper - Original printed on paper thicker than 201 g/m2 - Original printed on paper thinner than 50 g/m2 - Original printed on paper thicker than 50 g/m2 during double-sided copying - Original that are bound, for example, with staples or paper clips - Original that are bound in a book or booklet - Original that are bound together with glue - Original pages that have been cut or contain cutouts - Label sheets - Offset printing masters - Original with binder holes - Original that have just been printed with this machine Item Description Original paper weight 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 Original size A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v Curling tolerance 10 mm or less Paper capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m2) bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-33 Copy paper/originals 7 7.4.3 Originals that can be loaded on the original glass Use the original glass when originals are not suitable for use with the ADF, or when setting copying conditions incompatible with the ADF. The machine will detect the original size automatically when the original is positioned on the original glass with ADF closed, then select an appropriate paper size automatically by Auto Paper Select function. * Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative. Observe the following precautions when placing the original on the original glass. - The size of original printed on paper in inch sizes (such as 11 e 17, 8-1/2 e 14, 8-1/2 e 11) cannot be automatically detected. The setting must be specified by the service representative. For details, contact the service representative. - If a custom-sized original is positioned, the "Auto Paper Select" and "Auto Zoom" settings cannot be used since the original size cannot be detected automatically. If a custom-sized original is positioned, select the size of the paper to be copied. - If highly translucent or transparent original, such as overhead transparencies or trace paper, are positioned, the original size cannot be detected automatically. Place a blank sheet of paper of the same size over the original. - Do not place objects exceeding 6.8 kg on the original glass, otherwise the original glass may be damaged. - If a book is placed on the original glass, do not press it down extremely hard, otherwise the original glass may be damaged. Item Description Original type Sheets, books (spreads), three-dimensional objects Original Size 128 mm e 139.7 mm to 297 mm e 431.8 mm Auto Original Size Detect A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*, 8K w, 16K w/v Maximum original weight 6.8 kg Maximum original thickness 30 mm 7 Copy paper/originals 7-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8 Application functions bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-3 Application functions 8 8 Application functions 8.1 Inserting paper between OHP transparencies ("OHP Interleave" function) In order to prevent copies printed onto OHP transparencies from sticking together as a result of the heat that is produced during copying, paper (interleaves) can be inserted between the transparencies. The interleaf can be kept blank, or copied from the same original as the transparency. 0 No Finishing setting can be used. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. – For details on loading OHP transparencies, refer to "Paper weight" on page 7-3 and "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-55. 2 Load the OHP transparencies into the bypass tray, and load the interleaf paper into the desired paper tray. – Use interleaf paper with the same size as the OHP transparencies. 3 Select [Transparency] as the paper type for the bypass tray, and then touch [OK]. – For details on specifying the paper type settings, refer to "Specifying a paper type for bypass tray" on page 7-19. 8 Application functions 8-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears. 5 Touch [OHP Interleave]. The OHP Interleave screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-5 Application functions 8 6 Select the paper tray loaded with the interleaf paper. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. – To cancel the "OHP Interleave" function, touch [No]. 7 Select [Copy] or [Blank]. – Selecting [Copy] will copy the original image also onto interleaves. To leave the interleaves blank, touch [Blank]. 8 Touch [OK]. 9 Specify any other desired copy settings. – The number of copies is set to "1" and cannot be changed. 10 Press the [Start] key. 8 Application functions 8-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8.2 Adding cover pages ("Cover Sheet" function) Copies can be made using paper different from the main body of the original (excluding the cover pages), and cover pages can be added using paper different from the copy. The following types of cover pages and front and back cover page settings are available. 2 Note If the optional post inserter is installed, outer front and back cover pages can be inserted from the post inserter. Cover page settings can be specified for paper loaded in the post inserter and in the paper trays. Paper loaded in the post inserter is added at the front when it is specified as the outer front cover or it is added at the back when it is specified as the outer back cover. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. – For an original that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11. 2 Load the paper for the cover pages and the paper for the main body of the original into separate paper trays. – Use paper with the same size for the cover pages and for the main body of the original, and load them in the same orientation. Setting Description Front Cover Front (Copy) The first page of the original is copied onto paper for the front cover sheet. With double-sided copying, the second page of the original is copied onto the back of the front cover sheet. Front (Blank) Paper for the front cover sheet is added as the first page of the copy. The same operation is performed with double-sided copying. Back Cover Back (Copy) The last page of the original is copied onto the back cover page. With double-sided copying, a double-sided copy of the last two pages of the original is printed on paper for the back cover sheet if the original contains an even number of pages. Back (Blank) Paper for the back cover sheet is added after the last page of the copy. The same operation is performed with double-sided copying. 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 4 4 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 REPORT bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-7 Application functions 8 3 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. – For details on using thick paper for the cover sheets and on loading the paper, refer to "Paper weight" on page 7-3 and "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-55. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears. 4 Touch [Cover Sheet]. The Cover Sheet screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5 Select the desired cover page settings. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. – To cancel the "Cover Sheet" function, touch [No]. – The default setting for the paper tray loaded with cover pages can be specified from the Utility mode. For details, refer to "Copier Settings" on page 12-21. – If the optional post inserter has been installed, [Outer Cover Sheet] appears. – If paper for cover pages has been loaded in the main unit, continue with step 6. – If paper for cover pages has been loaded in a tray of the post inserter, continue with step 9. 6 If desired, touch [Paper] under "Front Cover" or "Back Cover". The corresponding Cover Paper screen appears. 7 Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the cover pages, and then touch [OK]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-9 Application functions 8 8 Touch [Outer Cover Sheet], and then specify the tray loaded with paper for the outer front cover or the outer back cover. 9 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 10 Specify any other desired copy settings. 11 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 12 Press the [Start] key. 8 Application functions 8-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8.3 Inserting different paper into copies ("Insert Sheet" function) Different paper (such as colored paper) can be inserted for specified pages in the copies. There are settings ("Copy" and "Blank") for selecting whether or not the inserted pages are printed. When the settings are combined with single-sided copying or double-sided copying, the copies are printed as shown below. If "Copy" is selected, the original is copied with the specified paper inserted for the specified pages. When page 2 is specified Copy If "Blank" is selected, the specified paper is inserted after the specified page. When page 3 is specified Blank Finishing Description Single-sided copies The specified paper is inserted for the 2nd sheet of the copy, and the 2nd sheet of the original is copied onto it. Double-sided copies The back side of the 1st sheet of the copy is left blank, the specified paper is inserted for the 2nd sheet of the copy, and a double-sided copy of the 2nd and 3rd sheets of the original are printed onto it. 6 6 4 4 5 2 2 3 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 1 1 REPORT Finishing Description Single-sided copies The specified paper is inserted as the 4th sheet of the copy. Double-sided copies The back side of the 2nd sheet of the copy is left blank, and the specified paper is inserted for the 3rd sheet of the copy. 6 6 4 4 5 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 1 1 2 REPORT bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-11 Application functions 8 ! Detail The specified paper can be inserted at a maximum of 60 locations within an original of up to 999 pages. In double-sided originals, one double-sided page is considered to be two pages (one for the front and one for the back). 2 Note If the optional post inserter is installed, paper can be inserted from the post inserter. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. – For an original that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11. 2 Load the paper to be used for the insertions sheets and the main body of the original into the desired paper trays. – Use paper with the same size for the insertion sheets and for the main body of the original, and load them in the same orientation. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. 3 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. – For details on using thick paper for the insertion sheets and on loading the paper, refer to "Paper weight" on page 7-3 and "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-55. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch [Insert Sheet]. – To cancel the "Insert Sheet" function, touch [No]. The Insert Sheet screen appears. 5 Touch a button for a page number, and then use the keypad to type in the number of the page where the paper is to be inserted. – There are four Insert Sheet screens. Touch or to display a different screen. – To arrange the page numbers in order, starting with the lowest number, touch [Sort]. – To remove a page number that has been specified, touch the button for the page to be removed, and then press the [C] (clear) key. – If the same page number is entered multiple times, copying is not possible. Delete repeated page numbers. – If the entered page number is greater than the number of pages in the original, paper is not inserted. – [Post Inserter] appears if the optional post inserter has been installed. – If the insertion sheets are loaded into a paper tray of the main unit, continue with step 6. – If the insertion sheets are loaded into a tray of the post inserter, continue with step 10. 6 Under "Insert Type", touch either [Copy] or [Blank]. – If "Copy" is selected, the original is copied with the specified paper inserted for the specified page. If "Blank" is selected, the specified paper is inserted after the specified page. 7 Touch [Insert Paper]. The Insert Paper Settings screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-13 Application functions 8 8 Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the insertion sheets, and then touch [OK]. 9 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 10 Touch [Post Inserter]. – Touch a button for a page number, and then use the keypad to type in the number of the page where the paper is to be inserted. – There are four Post Inserter screens. Touch or to display a different screen. – To arrange the page numbers in order, starting with the lowest number, touch [Sort]. – To remove a page number that has been specified, touch the button for the page to be removed, and then press the [C] (clear) key. – If the same page number is entered multiple times, copying is not possible. Delete repeated page numbers. – If the entered page number is greater than the number of pages in the original, paper is not inserted. 11 Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the insertion sheets, and then touch [OK]. 12 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 13 Specify any other desired copy settings. 14 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 15 Press the [Start] key. 8 Application functions 8-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8.4 Inserting copies of a different original for a specified page ("Insert Image" function) A multi-page original later scanned from the original glass can be inserted at the specified location in an original first scanned with the ADF. The inserted original is added after the specified pages. ! Detail A separate original can be inserted at a maximum of 30 locations within an original of up to 999 pages. In double-sided originals, one double-sided page is considered to be two pages (one for the front and one for the back). 1 Load the original into the ADF. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. – For an original that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears. 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT A B 3 4 B 2 1 A 1 REPORT bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-15 Application functions 8 3 Touch [Insert Image]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. – To cancel the "Insert Image" function, touch [No]. The Insert Image screen appears. 4 Using the keypad, specify the pages where the image is to be inserted. – There are two Insert Image screens. Touch and to display a different screen. – The inserted original is added after the specified page. – To arrange the page numbers in order, starting with the lowest number, touch [Sort]. – To remove a page number that has been specified, touch the button for the page to be removed, and then press the [C] (clear) key. – If the original scanned from the original glass has more pages than the number of pages specified in the Insert Image screen, the extra pages of the insertion original are printed at the end of the original. – If the original scanned from the original glass has fewer pages than the number of pages specified in the Insert Image screen, the missing insertion pages are not printed. – If the same page number is specified twice, two insertion original pages are added at the specified location. – If the specified page number is greater than the total number of pages in the main original, the corresponding insertion original page is added at the end of the original copy. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 6 Specify any other desired copy settings. 7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 8 Application functions 8-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8 Press the [Start] key. Scanning begins. 9 Place the original to be inserted on the original glass. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 10 Press the [Start] key. Scanning begins. 11 Touch [Finish]. – To insert a multi-page original, repeat steps 9 and 10 until all pages of the insertion original are scanned in the order that they are to be inserted. 12 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-17 Application functions 8 8.5 Specifying pages to be printed on the front side ("Chapters" function) When making double-sided copies, the pages specified as the first page of a chapter can be printed on the front side of the paper. If the original was arranged so that the specified page would be printed on the back side of a page, the page is left blank and the specified page is printed on the front side of the next page. In addition, the specified page can be printed on different paper. ! Detail A maximum of 30 pages can be specified to be printed on the front side of the paper within an original of up to 999 pages. In double-sided originals, one double-sided page is considered to be two pages (one for the front and one for the back). 2 Note Make sure that the paper loaded for the first page of the chapter and for the copy have the same size and orientation. 3 7 7 38 6 2 6 4 4 25 3 3 3 7 7 38 5 5 6 3 3 4 8 3 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 1 1 1 12 1 1 1 12 2 4 4 3 3 2 1 2 1 1 8 Application functions 8-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. – For an original that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears. 3 Touch [Chapters]. The Chapter screen (for editing) appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-19 Application functions 8 4 Using the keypad, specify the first page of the chapters. – There are two Chapter screens. Touch and to display a different screen. – To arrange the page numbers in order, starting with the lowest number, touch [Sort]. – To remove a page number that has been specified, touch the button for the page to be removed, and then press the [C] (clear) key. – Under "Original > Copy", select "1-Sided > 2-Sided". – If the same page number is entered multiple times, copying is not possible. Delete repeated page numbers. – If the specified page number is greater than the number of pages in the original, that page number is ignored. 5 Under "Chapter Paper", touch [Copy Insert] or [None]. – If "None" is selected, all pages of the copy are printed on the same paper. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. – To cancel the "Chapters" function, touch [No]. 8 Application functions 8-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – If "Copy Insert" is selected, [Chapter Paper] appears. Touch [Chapter Paper], select the paper to be used for the first page of the chapter, and then touch [OK]. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 7 Specify any other desired copy settings. 8 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 9 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-21 Application functions 8 8.6 Scanning originals with different settings and printing copies all together ("Program Jobs" function) Loaded original pages can be scanned with different settings and their copies can be printed together. Different Zoom or Paper settings can be specified for a part of the original or Finishing settings or a numbering function can be set after the entire original is scanned, and then all copies can be printed together. 2 Note 100 original batches can be set. The "Group" Finishing setting is not available when programming jobs. Instead, select "Sort". 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. – When saving scanned data in a user box, some scanned data may be lost if more than 10,000 pages are saved in the box. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears. 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 4 2 3 3 2 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 1 1 0001REPORT Original 2 Original 1 Original 3 8 Application functions 8-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Program Jobs], and then touch [OK]. 4 Select the desired copy settings, and then press the [Start] key. – To print a single copy to be checked, press the [Proof Copy] key. Scanning begins. 5 Touch [Fix], and then touch [OK]. – If the original was loaded on the original glass, touch [Finish] in the screen that appears, requesting confirmation that scanning is finished. – If "Retry" was selected, touch [Change Setting] to change the copy settings. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-23 Application functions 8 6 Position the next original, and then touch [Change Setting]. 7 Select the desired copy settings, and then press the [Start] key. – To print a single copy to be checked, press the [Proof Copy] key. – Repeat steps 5 to 7 until all originals have been scanned. The amount of memory available can be checked beside "Memory" in the lower-left corner of the screen. In addition, the number of original batches can be checked beside "Scanned Batches". – When the memory is full, a message appears. Select whether to delete the last part of the data and scan it again, delete the last part of the data and print, or delete all of the original data. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. Scanning begins. After scanning is finished, touch [Fix], and then touch [OK]. ? Is there more information about the settings? % Refer to the appropriate section. 8 After all original pages have been scanned, touch [Finish]. A message appears, requesting confirmation that scanning is finished. 8 Application functions 8-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9 Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. – If "No" was selected, touch [Change Setting] to change the copy settings. 10 Specify any other desired copy settings. – Touch [Print List], and then specify the printing method for the entire scanned original. ? Is there more information about the settings? % Refer to the appropriate section. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-25 Application functions 8 11 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 12 Touch [Start] or press the [Start] key. – If [Cancel] is touched, a message appears, requesting confirmation to delete the data. To stop printing, touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. 8 Application functions 8-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8.7 Reversing black-and-white gradation of the original ("Neg./Pos. Reverse" function) 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. 3 Touch [Neg./Pos. Reverse]. ? To cancel the "Neg./Pos. Reverse" function % Touch [Neg./Pos. Reverse] again. 4 Specify any other desired copy settings. 5 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 6 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-27 Application functions 8 8.8 Producing separate copies of each page in a page spread ("Book Copy" function) An open book or catalog can be copied with the left and right pages on separate sheets of paper. The following copy methods are available, and there are settings for adding front and back covers. 0 Place the original on the original glass. Be sure to keep the ADF open throughout the scanning job. 1 Place the pages on the original glass, starting with the first page. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. – If "Front and Back Cover" was selected, the front cover is scanned before the back cover, and then all page spreads are scanned in order. ? How are the front and back covers copied? % Scan the front cover, then the back cover, and then scan the remainder of the original. 2 Load the paper to be used into the desired paper tray. Setting Description Book Spread Both pages of the page spread are printed on the same page. Separation Separate copies of each page in the page spread are printed in the original page order. The original is scanned to fit the size of paper that will be used. Front Cover The front cover and separate copies of each page in the page spreads are printed in the original page order. Front and Back Cover The front cover, separate copies of each page in the page spreads and the back cover are printed in the original page order. SURVEYOR’S REPORT SURVEYOR’S REPORT 8 Application functions 8-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Application], and then touch [Book Copy/Repeat]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Book Copy/Repeat screen appears. 4 Touch [Book Copy]. The Book Copy screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-29 Application functions 8 5 Touch the button for the desired setting. – If "Separation", "Front Cover" or "Front and Back Cover" is selected, [Binding Position] appears. Select the binding position of the original. – If desired, specify a Book Erase function. Touch the button for the erasing method, touch [-] and [+] to specify the width of the area to be erased, and then touch "OK". – Touch [<-->] on the Frame Erase screen/Center Erase screen to switch between the integer and the fraction, specify the width to be erased, and then touch [OK]. – If a decimal value is displayed in the Frame Erase screen/Center Erase screen, use the keypad to type in the setting. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. 8 Application functions 8-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – To cancel the "Book Copy" function, touch [No]. ? What do the Book Erase functions do? % The shadow of the book binding and the shadow of the book edges can be erased from the copies. The "Frame Erase" and "Center Erase" functions can be used together. ? How are settings specified for the "Frame Erase" and "Center Erase" functions. % Refer to "Erasing black marks along borders ("Erase" function)" on page 8-51. In addition, if the "Frame Erase" or "Center Erase" function in the Application screen is previously specified, [Frame Erase] or [Center Erase] under "Book Erase" appears highlighted. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close]. Frame Erase screen Center Erase screen bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-31 Application functions 8 7 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper], and then select the paper tray loaded with the paper. 8 Specify any other desired copy settings. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 9 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 10 Press the [Start] key. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Scanning a multi-page original from the original glass" on page 3-15. – Position the next page and repeat step 10 until all pages of the original are scanned. Scanning begins. If "Book Spread" or "Separation" is selected, printing begins. If "Front Cover" or "Front and Back Cover" is selected, continue with step 11. 11 After all original pages have been scanned, touch [Finish]. – If "Front and Back Cover" was selected, the back cover is scanned after the front cover, and then all page spreads are scanned in order. SURVEYOR’S REPORT SURVEYOR’S REPORT 8 Application functions 8-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – If "Front Cover" was selected, all page spreads are scanned in order after the front cover. 12 Press the [Start] key. SURVEYOR’S REPORT bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-33 Application functions 8 8.9 Tiling copy images ("Image Repeat" function) An original image can be repeatedly printed on a single sheet of paper. The possible number of repeating images is automatically selected based on the size of the loaded original, the specified paper size and the zoom ratio. The following repeating formats and settings are available. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Load the paper to be used into the desired paper tray. 3 Touch [Application], and then touch [Book Copy/Repeat]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Book Copy/Repeat screen appears. Setting Description With Margin Multiple copies are printed of the entire image within the specified area. The area around the image appears as a margin. Without Margin Multiple copies of the selected area of the image are printed to fill the paper; however, a part of the image may be cut off. 2/4/8 Repeat A fixed number of copies of the selected image area are printed in the paper. The number of repeating copies can be set to 2, 4 or 8 times. However, any part of the image that does not fit within its specific section of the paper is cut off. Original With Margin Without Margin 8 Application functions 8-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch [Image Repeat]. The Image Repeat screen appears. 5 Under "Layout", touch [With Margin] or [Without Margin], or touch [2/4/8 Repeat]. – To cancel the "Image Repeat" function, touch [No]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-35 Application functions 8 – Touching [2/4/8 Repeat] displays the 2/4/8 Repeat screen, where the number of repeats and the interval can be selected. – When selecting [2 Repeat], touch [2 Repeat Detail Settings] to specify Image Direction and Repeat Interval Settings. 8 Application functions 8-36 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Check the scanning size under "Scan Range", touch [OK], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. – If the original size does not appear under "Scan Range" or to specify the scanning area, touch [Set Range], and then specify the scanning area from any of the screens. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. ? Can sizes in metrics be displayed? % Touch or to display a different list of sizes. ? Can any size be specified? % Any size can be specified from the Custom Size screen. Touch [X] or [Y], touch [<-->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to specify the size of the document. If a decimal value is displayed in the screen, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to type in the setting. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. Set Range screen Custom Size screen bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-37 Application functions 8 7 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper], and then select the paper tray loaded with the paper. – If settings were specified in the 2/4/8 Repeat screen, touch [Zoom] in the Basic screen, and then specify the zoom ratio setting. 8 Specify any other desired copy settings. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 9 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 10 Press the [Start] key. 8 Application functions 8-38 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8.10 Dividing spread image into right and left pages using ADF ("Page Separation" function) A page spread image scanned from the ADF can be divided into two separate images of right and left pages. A page spread image can be divided with the left and right halves copied onto separate pages. With singlesided copying, the two halves are printed on two separate pages. With double-sided copying, the two halves are printed on the front and back sides of a single page. 1 Load the original in the ADF. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. – For an original that exceeds 80 pages, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11. 2 Load paper of size A4 v, B5 v, and 8-1/2 e 11 v into the desired paper tray. – Available paper sizes are A4 v, B5 v, and 8-1/2 e 11 v. Auto Paper Select will not function. 3 Touch [Paper]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-39 Application functions 8 4 Touch the desired tray key to select the tray loaded with A4 v, B5 v, and 8-1/2 e 11 v paper. 5 Touch [Application], and then touch [Book Copy/Repeat]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the Reset key, All changes to the settings are canceled. The Book Copy/Repeat screen appears. 6 Touch [Page Separation]. The Page Separation screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-40 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7 Select the binding position of the spread original. – For the spread original to read from the left page to the right page, touch [Left Bind] to highlight it. On the contrary, if the spread original reads from the right page to the left page, touch [Right Bind]. 8 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close]. 9 In the Basic screen, touch Paper, and then select the paper tray loaded with the paper. 10 Specify any other desired copy settings. – Auto Zoom will not function. The magnification can be changed as desired. – To cancel the setting and select the default press the [Reset] key. 11 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 12 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-41 Application functions 8 8.11 Adding a binding margin to copies ("Page Margin" function) Copies can be printed with a binding margin so that the pages can easily be filed. When making double-sided copies, the image orientation can be adjusted by specifying the position of the binding margin. In addition, the image orientation can be adjusted without creating a binding margin. ! Detail If the positions of the staples or punched holes are different from the binding position, the positions of the staples or punched holes are given priority. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Page Margin]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Page Margin screen appears. 4 4 ABC DEF GHI 4 4 ABC DEF GHI 3 3 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF GHI 4 4 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF GHI 1 1 ABC DEF GHI 4 4 ABC DEF GHI 3 3 ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF GHI 1 1 ABC DEF GHI 3 3 ABC DEF GHI 1 2 AB DE GH ABC DEF GHI 2 2 ABC DEF GHI 1 1 ABC DEF GHI 3 3 ABC DEF GHI 1 2 BC EF HI 1 1 ABC DEF GHI 3 3 ABC DEF GHI ABC DEF 2 1 ABC DEF "Right" setting "Left" setting "Top" setting 8 Application functions 8-42 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Select the position of the binding margin. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. – To cancel the "Page Margin" function, touch [No]. – If "Auto" is selected, the binding margin is set at the top or at the left. – If "Auto" is selected for the binding position, load the original with the top toward the back of the machine. If the original is loaded in any other orientation, the correct position will not be selected. ? What happens when "Auto" is selected? % The factory default setting is "Auto". Touch [Auto] to automatically determine the binding position according to the orientation of the loaded original. If the original length is 297 mm or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the original length is more than 297 mm, a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected. 4 Touch [-] or [+] to specify the binding margin width. – If "None" is selected, the binding margin width is set to 0 mm. When making double-sided copies, the image orientation can adjusted without creating a binding margin. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen, use the keypad to type in the setting. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. ? How can the entered margin position be corrected? % Without changing the margin width, change the margin position. 5 If necessary, touch [Image Shift]. The Image Shift screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-43 Application functions 8 6 Adjust the position of the image, and then touch [OK]. – Touch [Left], [Right], [Top] or [Bottom] to select the direction to be adjusted, and then use the keypad or touch [-] and [+] to specify the adjustment amount. – To cancel the shift, touch [No Shift]. – To adjust the position of the image on the back side of the paper when printing double-sided copies, touch [Change Back Shift]. 7 If desired, touch [Original Direction], and then select the setting appropriate for the original. – For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26. 8 Touch [OK]. 9 Specify any other desired copy settings. 10 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 11 Press the [Start] key. 8 Application functions 8-44 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8.12 Adjusting the image to fit the paper ("Image Adjust" settings) Use this function to make a copy adjusting the position of printed image. The Centering function centers the original image on copy paper. ! Detail Normally, images are trimmed by 3 mm at the top, 4 mm at the bottom, and 2 mm on each side (left/right) from the paper size. If [Full Scan] is selected, images are not trimmed but copied to the edge of the sheet. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Image Adjust]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Image Adjust screen appears. Setting Description Centering The image is centered in the paper without being enlarged. Full Scan The full image is scanned without triming to create margins. Even if text is printed to the edges of the original, it can be copied without being cut off. Centering Full Scan bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-45 Application functions 8 3 Select the image adjusting method. – To cancel the "Setting", touch [No]. 4 Check the original size, and then touch [OK]. – If the original size cannot be detected automatically or to specify the original size, touch [Original Size], and then specify the original size from any of the screens. – Touch or to display a different list of standard sizes. – To specify a custom size, touch [Custom Size] to display the Custom Size screen. Touch [X] or [Y] to select the dimension, and use the keypad to specify the desired value. (To enter a value, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to type in the new value.) 8 Application functions 8-46 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – If a value outside the allowable range is specified, the message "Input Error" appears. If "Input Error" appeared or if the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key, and then specify the correct value. 5 Specify any other desired copy settings. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 6 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 7 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-47 Application functions 8 8.13 Copying with the page layout of a booklet ("Booklet" function) The page order of the scanned original is automatically arranged to produce double-sided copies in a page layout for center binding, such as for a magazine. Stapling is possible only when optional saddle stitcher on the finisher is installed. ! Detail Generally, a multiple of 4 original pages is required with a single-sided original, and a multiple of 2 original pages is required with a double-sided original. If there are not enough pages, blank pages are automatically added at the end. For details on stapling, refer to "Binding copies at the center ("Center Staple & Fold" setting)" on page 3-79. For an original that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11. The width of the binding margin is automatically specified. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Booklet]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. 8 8 7 7 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 6 3 6 3 5 4 8 1 8 1 7 REPORT 2 3 6 6 6 4 5 1 8 1 8 2REPORT 7 “Left Bind” setting “Right Bind” setting 8 Application functions 8-48 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Left Bind] or [Right Bind]. – If the original contains only pages in the landscape orientation, they will be bound at the top, regardless of which setting is selected. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. – To cancel the "Booklet" function, touch [No]. – To adjust the image position widthwise and lengthwise as desired, touch [Image Shift], specify the shift amount, then touch [OK]. – For details of shift amount setting, refer to "Adding a binding margin to copies ("Page Margin" function)" on page 8-41. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-49 Application functions 8 – To make the specified amount of blank space in the center between the two images on a page, touch [Page Spacing]. Select [Front/Back] to make the same amount of blank space, or [Front Side]/[Back Side] to specify the different amount for each, then use [-], [+], or control panel keypad to enter the desired amount. Touch [OK] to complete the setting. 4 Touch [OK]. 5 Specify any other desired copy settings. 6 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 7 Press the [Start] key. 8 Application functions 8-50 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8.14 Erasing specified area of copies (Erase) When the original is scanned from the original glass, black copy marks may be produced along borders and center line, and also around punch holes. Use this function to eliminate them from the copies and lower the toner consumption at the same time. The following three settings are provided for the Erase function. These are compatible with each other. Setting Description Frame Erase This function erases black marks along the borders of printed sheets which tend to be created when using the original glass to scan thick original such as a book. Use this function also for the original already having black marks along borders. Refer to "Erasing black marks along borders ("Erase" function)" on page 8-51 Center Erase This function erases black marks along the center fold of printed sheets which tend to be created when using the original glass to scan thick original such as a book. Use this function also for the original already having black marks along the center fold. Refer to "Erasing black marks along center fold ("Center Erase" function)" on page 8-53 Non-Image Area Erase This function detects the original size placed on the original glass and erases outside area of the original. Refer to "Erasing outside areas of the original ("Non-Image Area Erase" function)" on page 8-55 Frame Erase Center Erase Non-Image Area Erase bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-51 Application functions 8 8.14.1 Erasing black marks along borders ("Erase" function) Copies can be produced by erasing unwanted areas around the original, such as the transmission information on received faxes and the shadows of punched holes. With frame erasing, the same width can be erased along all four sides of the original or a different width can be erased along each side of the original. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Erase]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Erase screen appears. 3 Touch [Frame Erase]. The Frame Erase screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-52 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch the button for the desired position to be erased. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. – To cancel the "Frame Erase" function, touch [No]. ? What happens when [Frame] is selected? % The same width is erased on all four sides of the original. The factory default setting is "Frame". ? Can the settings be combined? % "Frame" cannot be combined with the other settings ("Top", "Left", "Right" or "Bottom"). 5 Touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to specify the width to be erased. – To specify a different width to be erased depending on the position, specify different settings for "Top", "Left", "Right", and "Bottom". – When using the keypad to specify the settings, press the [C] (clear) key, and then specify the setting. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to type in the setting. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. 6 Touch [OK]. 7 Specify any other desired copy settings. 8 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 9 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-53 Application functions 8 8.14.2 Erasing black marks along center fold ("Center Erase" function) This function erases black marks along the center fold of printed sheets which tend to be created when using the original glass to scan thick original such as a book. Use this function also for the original already having black marks along the center fold. With frame erasing, the same width can be erased along all four sides of the original or a different width can be erased along each side of the original. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Erase]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Erase screen appears. 3 Touch [Center Erase]. The Center Erase screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-54 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to specify the width to be erased. – When using the keypad to specify the settings, press the [C] (clear) key, and then specify the setting. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. – To cancel the "Center Erase" function, touch [No]. ? What happens when a value outside of the allowable range is specified? % The massage "Input error" appears. If "Input error" appears or if the erased width was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad, and then specify the correct value. 5 Touch [OK]. 6 Specify any other desired copy settings. 7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 8 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-55 Application functions 8 8.14.3 Erasing outside areas of the original ("Non-Image Area Erase" function) This function detects the original size placed on the original glass and erases outside areas of the original. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Erase]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Erase screen appears. 3 Touch [Non-Image Area Erase], then touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. – To cancel the "Non-Image Area Erase" function, touch the key again. 4 Specify any other desired copy settings. 5 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 6 Press the [Start] key. 8 Application functions 8-56 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8.15 Printing the date/time or page number on copies (Stamp/Composition functions) The date/time or page number can be added to copies at the specified location, or a distribution number can be added when multiple copies are made. The following Stamp/Composition functions are available and can be combined. ! Detail The [Registered Overlay] key appears only when the machine is equipped with in HDD. To use Header/Footer function, a header/footer should be registered in advance from Administrator mode. For details on registering headers/footers, refer to "Specifying headers/footers" on page 12-64. ! Detail For details on printing a date/time stamp, refer to page 8-57. For details on printing a page number stamp, refer to page 8-60. For details on printing a stamp, refer to page 8-63. For details on printing a copy protection stamp, refer to page 8-66. For details on printing a repeating stamp, refer to page 8-73. For details on printing an overlay, refer to page 8-78. For details on printing a registered overlay, refer to page 8-81. Function Description Date/Time Select a format and print the date or time on the specified pages. Page Number Select a format and print page numbers starting with the specified page number. Stamp • Preset Stamp Print copies with previously stored preset stamps overlapping pages. • Registered Stamp Print copies with a stamp registered with the Copy Protection Utility overlapping pages. Copy Protect Print copies with copy protection text (hidden text that prevents unauthorized copying), such as a preset stamp or the date. Stamp Repeat Print copies with text (such as registered stamps, preset stamps or the date) repeating throughout the page. Overlay Copies can be printed with the contents of the first original page overlapped by (as an overlay image) the remaining original pages. Registered Overlay A previously scanned image can be stored on the HDD (Register Overlay Image) and recalled when needed to printed overlapping a document (Recall Overlay Image). Header/Footer The date and time or a distribution number can be printed on each page. This function is available only when specified by the administrator. Distribution Control Number Print four-digit distribution number to fill the background of each copied set. Watermark Print the desired letter type selected from preset watermarks in the center of printed page background. 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 3 3 2 2 1 1 0001REPORT bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-57 Application functions 8 For details on printing a header/footer, refer to page 8-87. For details on printing a distribution control number, refer to page 8-89. For details on printing a watermark, refer to page 8-91. 8.15.1 Printing the date/time ("Date/Time" function) 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Stamp/Composition screen appears. 3 Touch [Date/Time]. The Date/Time screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-58 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch buttons under "Date Format", "Time Format" and "Pages" to specify the various settings. – To cancel the "Date/Time" function, touch [No]. – To print the date/time only on the first page, touch [1st Page Only]. – The stamp will not be printed on blank pages inserted using the "Cover Sheet", "Insert Sheet" and "Chapters" functions. ? Can the time be omitted? % If "None" is selected, the time is not printed. 5 Touch [Print Position], and then select the printing position. – To make fine adjustments to the printing position, touch [Adjust Position]. Select the desired direction under "Left & Right Adjustment" or "Top & Bottom Adjustment", touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, touch [–] and [+] to specify the adjustment amount, and then touch [OK]. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to type in the adjustment amount. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-59 Application functions 8 – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. ? What are the limits on the adjustment amount? % The print position can be finely adjusted in 0.1 mm increments. ? Can no adjustments be made? % To make no left/right or up/down adjustments, touch [No Adjustment]. 6 If necessary, specify the other settings. – To specify the text size, touch [Text Size], and then select the size The factory default is 10 pt. 7 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. 8 Specify any other desired copy settings. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 9 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 10 Press the [Start] key. 8 Application functions 8-60 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8.15.2 Printing the page number ("Page Number" function) 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Stamp/Composition screen appears. 3 Touch [Page Number]. The Page Number screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-61 Application functions 8 4 Using the keypad, type in the starting page number for printing. – If desired, touch [Chapter], and then use the keypad to type in the chapter number. The entered chapter number is printed if "1-1, 1-2...." is selected under "Page Number Type". – The setting for "Page Number" can be set to a number between –99999 and 99999, and the setting for "Chapter" can be set to a number between –100 and 100. – When specifying a setting for "Starting Page Number", switch the number between positive and negative by pressing the key. – If a negative value is specified, the numbers are not printed until the numbering reaches 1. For example, if "–1" was specified, the numbers are printed starting with "1" on the third copied page. – To print multiple chapters, specify the first page of each chapter using the "Chapters" function. For details, refer to "Specifying pages to be printed on the front side ("Chapters" function)" on page 8-17. – To cancel the "Page Number" function, touch [No]. 5 Select a setting under "Page Number Type". 6 Touch [Print Position], and then select the printing position. – To make fine adjustments to the printing position, touch [Adjust Position]. Select the desired direction under "Left & Right Adjustment" or "Top & Bottom Adjustment", touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, touch [–] and [+] to specify the adjustment amount, and then touch [OK]. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to type in the adjustment amount. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. 8 Application functions 8-62 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. ? What are the limits on the adjustment amount? % The print position can be finely adjusted in 0.1 mm increments. ? Can no adjustment be made? % To make no left/right or up/down adjustments, touch [No Adjustment]. 7 If necessary, specify the other settings. – To also specify settings for the "Cover Sheet", "Insert Sheet" and "Chapters" Application functions, touch [Insert Sheet Setting], and then select the settings for the pages to be printed. – Blank pages inserted using the "Cover Sheet", "Insert Sheet" and "Chapters" functions are only counted, but page numbers are not printed on them. – If "Print on Back Cover Only" or "Do Not Print Page Number" is selected under "Cover Sheet", page numbers are printed starting with "2" in single-sided copies and starting with "3" in double-sided copies. – If "Do Not Print #" is selected, inserted pages are only counted, but page numbers are not printed on them. If "Skip the Page(s)" is selected, inserted pages are not counted and page numbers are not printed on them. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-63 Application functions 8 – To specify the text size, touch [Text Size], and then select the size. The factory default is 10 pt. 8 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. 9 Specify any other desired copy settings. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 10 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 11 Press the [Start] key. 8.15.3 Printing previously registered stamps ("Stamp" function) 1 Position the original to be copied. – Use the Copy Protection Utility to register a registered stamp. For details on registering stamps, refer to the manual of the Copy Protection Utility. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Stamp/Composition screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-64 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Stamp]. – To cancel the "Stamp" function, touch [No]. The Stamp screen appears. 4 Select the desired stamp under "Stamp Type/Preset Stamps" or "Stamp Type/Registered Stamps". – Touch or to display a different list of preset or registered stamps. – Only one stamp can be selected. 5 Select the desired setting under "Pages". – To print the stamp only on the front cover, touch [1st Page Only]. – The stamp will not be printed on blank pages inserted using the "Cover Sheet", "Insert Sheet" and "Chapters" functions. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-65 Application functions 8 6 Touch [Print Position], and then select the printing position. – To make fine adjustments to the printing position, touch [Adjust Position]. Select the desired direction under "Left & Right Adjustment" or "Top & Bottom Adjustment", touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, touch [–] and [+] to specify the adjustment amount, and then touch [OK]. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to type in the adjustment amount. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. – If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. ? What are the limits on the adjustment amount? % The print position can be finely adjusted in 0.1 mm increments. ? Can no adjustments be made? % To make no left/right or up/down adjustments, touch [No Adjustment]. 8 Application functions 8-66 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7 Select the desired settings for "Text Size". – As the factory default, the following setting is selected. Text Size: Std. 8 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. 9 Specify any other desired copy settings. 10 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 11 Press the [Start] key. 8.15.4 Printing copy protection text ("Copy Protect" function) ! Detail If the "Copy Protect" function is set, hidden text is printed in order to prevent unauthorized copying. When an original printed with copy protection text is copied, the hidden text appears clearly repeated in the copies so that the reader knows that it is a copy. The copy protection text is printed on all pages. The pages cannot be specified. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-67 Application functions 8 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Stamp/Composition screen appears. 3 Touch [Copy Protect]. 8 Application functions 8-68 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Select the desired type of copy protection text. – To cancel the Copy Protect function, touch [No]. – Touching [Registered Stamp] or [Preset Stamp] displays a screen containing buttons for the available stamps. Touch the button for the desired stamp, and then touch [OK]. – Use the Copy Protection Utility to register a registered stamp. For details on registering stamps, refer to the manual of the Copy Protection Utility. – The selected copy protection text formats appear in a column at the center of the screen. Up to eight text lines can be combined. – Multiple registered stamps or preset stamps cannot be selected. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-69 Application functions 8 – Touching [Date/Time] displays the Copy Protect > Date/Time screen. Select the desired settings under "Date Format" and "Time Format", and then touch [OK]. – The copy protection date and time that is printed is the date and time when the original is scanned. – Touching [Other] displays a screen for specifying settings for other stamps. Touch the button for the desired stamp, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel the changes to the settings in each copy protection settings screen, touch [No]. – To print the copy job number, touch [Yes] under "Job Number". – To print the serial number of this machine, touch [Yes] under "Serial Number". For details on specifying settings for the serial number, contact your service representative. – To print the copy distribution number, touch [Yes] under "Distribution Control Number". A distribution number between 1 and 99,999,999 can be specified. 5 Touch [Detailed Settings]. The Detailed Settings screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-70 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Touch the desired button to change the setting values in each setting screen, and then touch [Close]. – As the factory default, the following settings are selected. Density: Std.; Copy Protect Pattern: Emboss Text; Text Size: Std.; Background Pattern: Pattern 1 – The setting under "Pattern Contrast" in the Copy Protect Pattern screen can only be specified in single increments between –2 and +2. Density screen Copy Protect Pattern screen bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-71 Application functions 8 7 If desired, touch [Change Pos./Delete], and then change the arrangement of the text. – To change the arrangement order, touch [Change Position], select the copy protection text to be moved, and then touch either [Up] or [Down]. – To add a space to the copy protection text, touch [Insert Space]. Touch either [Up] or [Down] to move the round mark that appeared beside the specified copy protection text type, and then touch [Insert]. Text Size screen Background Pattern screen 8 Application functions 8-72 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – To delete the copy protection text, touch [Delete], and then touch the button for the copy protection text to be deleted. 8 Touch [OK] and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. 9 Specify any other desired copy settings. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. 10 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 11 Press the [Start] key. Insert Space scrren Delete scrren bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-73 Application functions 8 8.15.5 Printing repeating stamps ("Stamp Repeat" function) 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, press the [Reset] key. The Stamp/Composition screen appears. 3 Touch [Stamp Repeat]. The Stamp Repeat screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-74 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Select the desired type of repeating stamp. – To cancel the "Stamp Repeat" function, touch [No]. – Touch [Registered Stamp] or [Preset Stamp] to display a screen containing buttons for the available stamps. Touch the button for the desired stamp, and then touch [OK]. – Use the Copy Protection Utility to register a registered stamp. For details on registering stamps, refer to the manual of the Copy Protection Utility. – The selected repeating stamp formats appear in a column at the center of the screen. Up to eight text lines can be combined. – Multiple registered stamps or preset stamps cannot be selected. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-75 Application functions 8 – Touching [Date/Time] displays the Stamp Repeat > Date/Time screen. Select the desired settings under "Date Type" and "Time Type", and then touch [OK]. – The repeating stamp date and time that is printed is the date and time when the original is scanned. – Touching [Other] displays a screen for specifying settings for other stamps. Touch the button for the desired stamp, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel the changes to the settings in each repeating stamp settings screen, touch [No]. – To print the copy job number, touch [Yes] under "Job Number". – To print the serial number of this machine, touch [Yes] under "Serial Number". For details on specifying settings for the serial number, contact your service representative. – To print the copy distribution number, touch [Yes] under "Distribution Control Number". A distribution number between 1 and 99,999,999 can be specified. 5 Touch [Detailed Settings]. The Detailed Settings screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-76 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Touch the desired button to change the setting values in each setting screen, and then touch [Close]. – As the factory default, the following settings are selected. Density: Std.; Text Size: Std. Density screen Text Size screen bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-77 Application functions 8 7 If desired, touch [Change Pos./Delete], and then change the arrangement of the text. – To change the arrangement order, touch [Change Position], select the repeating stamp text to be moved, and then touch either [Up] or [Down]. – To add a space to the repeating stamp, touch [Insert Space]. Touch either [Up] or [Down] to move the round mark that appeared beside the specified repeating stamp type, and then touch [Insert]. Change Position screen Insert Space screen 8 Application functions 8-78 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – To delete the repeating stamp text, touch [Delete], and then touch the button for the repeating stamp text to be deleted. 8 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close]. 9 Specify any other desired copy settings. 10 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 11 Press the [Start] key. 8.15.6 Printing the image scanned first overlapped by the remaining original pages ("Overlay" function) Copies can be printed with the contents of the first scanned original page overlapped by the remaining original pages. In addition, a scanned original can be stored as a registered overlay and recalled and used later. Delete screen bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-79 Application functions 8 1 Position the original for the overlay. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. The Stamp/Composition screen appears. 3 Touch [Overlay]. – To cancel the "Overlay" function, touch [No]. The Overlay screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-80 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Select the desired settings for "Pages". – To print the overlay image only on the first copied page, touch [1st Page Only] under "Pages". 5 Touch [Close]. 6 Specify any other desired copy settings. 7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 8 Press the [Start] key. ! Detail If you cannot save a job with an overlay specified in a user box, select [Utility/Counter] - [User Settings] - [Copier Settings] - [Separate Scan Output Method], and set to [Page Print]. For details, refer to "Custom Display Settings" on page 12-19. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-81 Application functions 8 8.15.7 Saving a scanned image as a registered overlay ("Registered Overlay" function) 1 Position the original to be stored as overlaying image. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. The Stamp/Composition screen appears. 3 Touch [Registered Overlay]. The Registered Overlay screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-82 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Touch [Register Overlay Image]. – To cancel the Registered Overlay function, touch [No]. The Register Overlay Image screen appears. 5 Touch [New]. – To overwrite the registered overlay with the new image, select a registered overlay, and then touch [Overwrite]. – To delete a registered overlay, select a registered overlay, and then touch [Delete]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-83 Application functions 8 – After touching the button for the registered overlay, the date that the overlay was registered appears. The Image Name Registration screen appears. 6 Type in the image name, and then touch [OK]. – Touch the buttons in the keyboard that appears in the screen to type. For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3. 8 Application functions 8-84 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7 Check the original size of [Original Size], and then touch [OK]. – If the original size cannot be detected automatically or to specify the original size, touch [Original Size], and then specify the original size from any of the screens. To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 8 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close]. 9 Specify any other desired copy settings. 10 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-85 Application functions 8 11 The original is scanned, then saved as a registered overlay. 2 Note With the "Restrict User Access" parameter in Administrator mode, changes to a registered overlay without administrator permission can be prevented. 8.15.8 Using a registered overlay ("Registered Overlay" function) 1 Position the original for overlay. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. The Stamp/Composition screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-86 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Registered Overlay]. The Registered Overlay screen appears. 4 Touch the button for the "Registered Overlay" to be used, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel the "Registered Overlay" function, touch [OK]. – After touching the button for the registered overlay, the date that the overlay was registered appears. – To print the overlay image only on the first copied page, touch [1st Page Only] under "Pages". 5 Touch [OK] and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. 6 Specify any other desired copy settings. 7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 8 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-87 Application functions 8 8.15.9 Printing a header/footer ("Header/Footer" function) 0 In order to use headers/footers, a header/footer must be registered in advance from Administrator mode. For details on registering headers/footers, refer to "Specifying headers/footers" on page 12-64. 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. 3 Touch [Header/Footer]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. – If no header/footer is registered in Administrator mode, [Header/Footer] does not appear. The Header/Footer screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-88 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Under "Recall Header/Footer", touch the button of the header/footer to be used, and then touch [OK]. – To check or temporarily change the header/footer settings, touch [Check/Change Temporarily]. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close]. 6 Specify any other desired copy settings. 7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 8 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-89 Application functions 8 8.15.10 Printing the distribution control number ("Distribution Control Number" function) 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Stamp/Composition screen appears. 3 Touch [Distribution Control Number]. The Distribution Control Number screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-90 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Using the keypad, type in the starting distribution control number for printing. – To cancel the Distribution Control Number function, touch [No]. 5 Select the desired setting under "Pages". – To print the distribution control number only on the first page, touch [1st Page Only]. – The distribution control number will not be printed on blank pages inserted using "Cover Sheet", "Insert Sheet", and "Chapters" functions. 6 If necessary, specify the other settings. – As the factory default, the following settings are selected. Density: Standard, Text Size: Standard – To specify the density, touch [Density], and then select the desired density. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-91 Application functions 8 – To specify the text size, touch [Text Size], and then select the desired size. 7 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close]. 8 Specify any other desired copy settings. 9 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 10 Press the [Start] key. 8.15.11 Printing the watermark onto copies ("Watermark" function) 1 Position the original to be copied. – For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition]. – To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled. The Stamp/Composition screen appears. 8 Application functions 8-92 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Watermark]. The Watermark screen appears. 4 Select the desired watermark. – To cancel the Watermark function, touch [No]. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close]. 6 Specify any other desired copy settings. 7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 8 Press the [Start] key. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-93 Application functions 8 8.16 Saving the scanned original in a user box ("Save in User Box" function) A scanned original can be saved in a user box. Documents saved in user boxes can be printed when necessary. ! Detail For details on the user box settings, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. 1 Position the original to be copied. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Save in User Box]. 3 Touch [User Box]. A screen for selecting a user box appears. 8 Application functions 8-94 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Select the user box where the data is to be saved. – Touch the tab containing the desired user box, and then button for the user box. – To type in a user box number to specify the user box, touch [Enter User Box No.]. – It is not necessary to enter the password when saving data, even if a password has been specified for the box. – Touching [Search User Box] displays the Search User Box screen. User boxes can be searched for by the first letter of their name. Touch [etc] or the button that includes the first letter of the user box name to display a list of user boxes starting with the selected letter. A user box can be selected from this screen. 5 Touch [OK]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-95 Application functions 8 6 Check the name of the document to be saved. To change the name that is automatically specified, touch [Document Name]. 7 After typing in the name, touch [OK]. – For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3. 8 Select whether or not a copy will also be printed when the data is saved. To print a copy, touch [Yes] beside "Save & Print". 8 Application functions 8-96 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the "Save in User Box" function, touch [No]. The Application screen appears again. 10 Specify any other desired copy settings. 11 Press the [Start] key. If [Yes] beside "Page Print" was selected, the scanned original is copied and the document data is saved in the specified user box. If [No] beside "Page Print" was selected, the data for the scanned original is saved in the specified user box. ! Detail For details on using documents saved in user boxes, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. If you cannot save a job with an overlay specified in a user box, select [Utility/Counter] - [User Settings] - [Copier Settings] - [Separate Scan Output Method], and set to [Page Print]. For details, refer to "Custom Display Settings" on page 12-19. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-3 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9.1 Replacing the toner cartridge When the toner is about to run out, an advanced warning message similar to the one shown below appears. ! Detail When the message appears, prepare to replace the toner cartridge according to your maintenance agreement. 2 Note After the message appears, the machine stops operating. Replace the toner cartridge according to your maintenance agreement. ! Detail For details on replacing the toner cartridge, refer to "To replace the toner cartridge" on page 9-5. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Display in Enlarge Display mode When the toner is about to run out, [ ! ] appears on the screen. Touch [ ! ] to display the following message. When the toner is empty, the screen shown below appears. 7 WARNING Precaution for the empty toner cartridge If it is thrown into a fire, the toner may ignite and cause a dangerous situation. % DO NOT THROW toner or the empty toner cartridge into a fire! 7 CAUTION Precaution for storing and handling the toner cartridge If too much of toner is inhaled or toner gets in your eyes, your health may be affected. % Keep the toner cartridge away from children. % Be careful not to spill toner inside the machine or get toner on your clothes or hands. % If your hands become soiled with toner, immediately wash them with soap and water. % If toner gets in your eyes, immediately flush them with water, and then seek professional medical attention. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-5 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9 9.1.1 To replace the toner cartridge 0 Use the same number toner cartridge as described on the label applied on the upper left side of the toner cartridge cover. Otherwise, machine trouble may occur. 1 Open the toner cartridge door. 2 Pull out the cartridge holder. – While pulling the toner unit lever toward you, pull the cartridge holder out toward you as far as possible. 3 Withdraw and pull up the used toner cartridge to remove it. 4 Remove the new toner cartridge form the box. – The toner within the toner cartridge may have become compacted. Be sure to handle steps 5 until the toner is mostly broken up before installing the cartridge. 5 Shake the new toner cartridge by turning it over about five times. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Remove the cover from the new toner cartridge. 7 Set the toner cartridge, making sure that it is correctly oriented. – With the label at the end of the toner cartridge facing up, insert the bottom of the cartridge into the slot in the cartridge holder. 8 Return the cartridge holder to its original position 9 Close the toner cartridge door. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-7 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9 9.2 Replacing the staple cartridge When the staple cartridge is empty, the message "Replace staple cartridge." appears. Replace the staple cartridge. Display in Enlarge Display mode When staples are about to run out, [ ! ] appears on the screen. Touch [ ! ] to display the following message. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Reminder Be sure to replace the staple cartridge only after the message appears, otherwise the machine may be damaged. 9.2.1 To replace the staple cartridge in Finisher FS-524 1 Open the front door. 2 Grab handle FN7, and then pull out the stacker unit. – Slowly pull out the stacker unit as far as possible. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9 3 Remove the staple cartridge holder. – Hold the lever on the staple cartridge holder, and then pull the holder down to remove it. 4 Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple cartridge holder. 5 Load the new staple cartridge into the staple cartridge holder. – Do not remove the remaining staples, otherwise the machine will not be able to staple after the cartridge is replaced. 6 Install the staple cartridge holder. – Check that the staple cartridge holder is securely inserted as far as possible. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7 Return the stacker unit to its original position. – When returning the stacker unit to its original position, do not grab any part other than handle FN7, otherwise your hand or fingers may be pinched. 8 Close the front door. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-11 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9 9.2.2 To replace the staple cartridge in Finisher FS-525 1 Open the front door. 2 Grab handle FN7, and then pull out the stacker unit. – Slowly pull out the stacker unit as far as possible. 3 Remove the staple cartridge holder. – Hold the lever on the staple cartridge holder to pull it up, and then pull it downward and out to remove it. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Push the portion of the staple cartridge holder indicated by "PUSH" to open the cover of the staple cartridge holder. 5 Remove the empty staple cartridge. 6 Load a new staple cartridge. 7 Remove the tape from the staple cartridge, and then close the cover of the staple cartridge holder. – Do not remove the remaining staples, otherwise the machine will not be able to staple after the cartridge is replaced. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-13 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9 8 Install the staple cartridge holder. – Check that the staple cartridge holder is securely inserted as far as possible. 9 Return the stacker unit to its original position. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – When returning the stacker unit to its original position, do not grab any part other than handle FN7, otherwise your hand or fingers may be pinched. 10 Close the front door. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-15 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9 9.2.3 To replace the staple cartridge in Finisher FS-610 1 Open the front door. 2 Grab handle FN6, and then pull out the stacker unit. – Slowly pull out the stacker unit as far as possible. 3 Remove the staple cartridge holder. – Hold the lever on the staple cartridge holder, and then pull the holder up to remove it. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple cartridge holder. 5 Load the new staple cartridge into the staple cartridge holder. – Do not remove the remaining staples, otherwise the machine will not be able to staple after the cartridge is replaced. 6 Slowly peel off the stopper tape. 7 Install the staple cartridge holder. – Check that the staple cartridge holder is securely inserted as far as possible. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-17 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9 8 Return the stacker unit to its original position. – When returning the stacker unit to its original position, do not grab any part other than handle FN6, otherwise your hand or fingers may be pinched. 9 Close the front door. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9.3 Emptying hole-punch scrap boxes If the hole-punch scrap box of the punch kit installed with the finisher becomes full, the message shown below appears (if the box can be emptied by the user). 2 Note The setting for emptying the hole-punch scrap box should be specified by the service representative. For details, contact the service representative. The default setting is "Service". If a message appears, immediately contact the service representative. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-19 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9 ! Detail When performed by user If the hole-punch scrap box has become full while a job is being performed, the job being performed is paused. To continue the job without canceling the Punch setting, empty the hole-punch scrap box. To cancel the Punch setting and continue the job, touch [Cancel Punching]. When performed by service representative If the hole-punch scrap box has become full while a job is being performed, the job being performed is paused. To continue the job, touch [Cancel Punching]. However, the continued job is printed without holes being punched. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9.3.1 To empty the hole-punch scrap box of the finisher Follow the procedure described below to empty the hole-punch scrap box. 1 Open the front door. 2 Pull out the hole-punch scrap box. 3 Empty the hole-punch scrap box. 4 Insert the hole-punch scrap box into its original position. 5 Close the front door. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-21 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9 9.3.2 To empty the hole-punch scrap box of the Z Folding Unit Follow the procedure described below to empty the hole-punch scrap box. 1 Open the front door. 2 Pull out the hole-punch scrap box. 3 Empty the hole-punch scrap box. 4 Insert the hole-punch scrap box into its original position. 5 Close the front door. 9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10 Care of the machine bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10-3 Care of the machine 10 10 Care of the machine 10.1 Cleaning This section describes the procedures for cleaning each part. Be sure to turn off the main power switch before cleaning it. 10.1.1 Cleaning the left partition glass Keep the glass clean; otherwise soil marks may be copied, resulting in dark lines on the copies. Raise the ADF, and clean the left partition glass by wiping it with a soft, dry cloth. 2 Reminder Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the left partition glass. 10.1.2 Cleaning the original glass Keep the glass clean; otherwise spots may be copied. Raise the ADF, and clean the surface of the original glass by wiping it with a soft, dry cloth. 2 Reminder Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the original glass. 10 Care of the machine 10-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10.1.3 Cleaning the document pad Keep the pad clean; otherwise spots may be copied. Raise the ADF, and clean the document pad by wiping it with a soft, dry cloth. 2 Reminder Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the document pad. 10.1.4 Cleaning the paper take-up roller Keep the roller clean; otherwise soil marks may be copied, resulting in dark lines on the copies. Clean the paper take-up rollers by wiping them with a soft, dry cloth. 2 Reminder Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the paper take-up roller. 10.1.5 Cleaning the main unit Clean the surface of the main unit by wiping it with a soft cloth dampened with a mild household detergent. 2 Reminder Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the main unit. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10-5 Care of the machine 10 10.1.6 Cleaning the control panel Clean the control panel by wiping it with a soft, dry cloth. 2 Reminder Pressing too hard on the control panel or the touch panel may damage them. Never use a mild household detergent, glass cleaner, benzin or thinner to clean the control panel or touch panel. 10 Care of the machine 10-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10.1.7 Care of Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101 2 Reminder Before cleaning the authentication unit, disconnect it from the machine. If a force is applied to the USB port, it may be damaged. When cleaning the authentication unit, do not allow water to enter the authentication unit, otherwise the system may be damaged. Never use organic solvents, such as benzene or alcohol, to clean the authentication unit, otherwise it may be damaged. 2 Note When disconnecting or connecting the authentication unit, turn off the machine with the main power switch, and then wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off. Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable, otherwise the cable may be damaged. Care of the housing Frequency: Once a month, or when it is dirty Wipe the housing with a soft, dry cloth. If the housing cannot be cleaned by wiping it, wash it with a cloth dampened with a mild detergent and wrung out well. After the housing is cleaned, rinse the cloth and wring it out well before wiping off the detergent. Care of the scanner Frequency: Once a month, or when it is dirty or covered with fingerprints Care of the scanner Frequency: Once a month, or when it is dirty or covered with fingerprints Clean the scanner with a soft cloth used to wipe eyeglass lenses. If it is extremely dirty, clean it with an eyeglass lens cleaner. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10-7 Care of the machine 10 10.1.8 Care of Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201 2 Reminder Before cleaning the authentication unit, disconnect it from the machine. If a force is applied to the USB port, it may be damaged. When cleaning the authentication unit, do not allow water to enter the authentication unit, otherwise the system may be damaged. Never use organic solvents, such as benzene or alcohol, to clean the authentication unit, otherwise it may be damaged. 2 Note When disconnecting or connecting the authentication unit, turn off the machine with the main power switch, and then wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off. Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable, otherwise the cable may be damaged. Frequency: Once a month, or when it is dirty Wipe the authentication unit with a soft, dry cloth. If the authentication unit cannot be cleaned by wiping it, wash it with a cloth dampened with a mild detergent and wrung out well. After the authentication unit is cleaned, rinse the cloth and wring it out well before wiping off the detergent. 10 Care of the machine 10-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10.2 Viewing counters (Meter Count) 10.2.1 Viewing counters The Meter Count screen can be displayed so that the total number of prints since counting started can be viewed. In addition, the list of counters can be printed. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [Meter Count], and then touch [Check Details] in the left panel. 3 The Meter Count screen appears. ? Can the list of counters be printed? % Touch [Print List], select the paper size, and then press the [Start] key. 4 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note The list of counters can be displayed even while the machine is copying or printing. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10-9 Care of the machine 10 10.3 When the message "It is time for the scheduled inspection of the device." appears A periodic maintenance will be required after 250,000 copies for bizhub 751/601. If the message "It is time for the scheduled inspection of the device." appears, contact your service representative and request a periodic maintenance inspection. 10 Care of the machine 10-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11 Managing jobs bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-3 Managing jobs 11 11 Managing jobs 11.1 Overview of Job List screen 11.1.1 Jobs Specifying the desired copy settings, then pressing the [Start] key queues the copy operation in this machine. This queued operation is called a job. In the same way, operations for making scans and computer printouts are also queued as jobs. - Jobs that are being performed and the job log can be checked from the Job List screens. - Jobs are printed starting with the one at the top of the Current Jobs list. - Jobs are numbered in the order that they were programmed and are queued to be performed (printed). 2 Note The job number identifies the job; it does not indicate the printing order. In addition, the job number does not change until the job is deleted. By using the "Increase Priority" function, the selected job can be moved to the front of the queue so that it is printed first. 11.1.2 Multi-job feature While one job is being printed, another job can be queued. A total of 250 jobs can be queued. The number of jobs possible for each operation is listed below. * The values listed above are for reference and may differ from the actual values depending on other settings. When one job is finished being printed, the next queued job automatically begins. 2 Note Up to 250 jobs, including print jobs, scanner transmission jobs, fax transmission jobs and received fax/save jobs, can be queued. Operation Number of jobs Copy 5 Interrupted copy 1 Scan 5 Print 10 Fax (Off Hook TX) 1 Fax (Memory TX) 50 Fax (Timer TX) 20 Fax RX 100 Fax (Polling RX) 1 Fax (Polling TX) 1 Sharing 56 Total 250 11 Managing jobs 11-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11.1.3 Job List screens From the Job List screen, lists of jobs being performed by this machine and the jobs that have been performed in addition to the job details can be viewed, and the job settings can be changed. ! Detail To display the Job List screen, touch [Job List] in the left panel, and then touch [Job Details]. From the Job List screen, the following tabs for the various functions can be displayed. - Print Lists print jobs for copying, computer printing, and received faxes. - Send Lists fax and scanner transmission jobs. - Receive Lists fax transmission jobs. - Save Lists jobs for saving documents in user boxes. 2 Note As the factory default, the Current Jobs list on the Print tab is displayed in the Job List screen. The screen for each function listed above can be displayed from any other Job List screen. However, if a different tab is selected while a setting is being changed, that setting is canceled. A Current Jobs list and a Job History list can be displayed for each function. - Current Jobs: Lists jobs that are queued and being performed, allowing you to check the current status of the machine. - Job History: Lists jobs that have been completed, including jobs that were not performed due to an error, allowing you to check the history and result of all jobs. The type of jobs to be displayed can be selected from the Current Jobs list and Job History list. For example, the lists of stored jobs and active jobs can be displayed in the Current Jobs list on the Print tab, and the lists of deleted jobs, completed jobs and all jobs can be displayed in the Job History list. The types of jobs that can be selected differ depending on the selected tab. The function of each button in the Job List screens is described below. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-5 Managing jobs 11 *1 Displayed when the Current Jobs list is displayed. Button name Description [Print] button Touch to display the Print tab of the Job List screen. [Send] button Touch to display the Send tab of the Job List screen. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. [Receive] button Touch to display the Receive tab of the Job List screen. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. [Store] button Touch to display the Store tab of the Job List screen. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. [Current Jobs] button A selected button indicates which job list is currently displayed. Touch to switch from the Job History list to the Current Jobs list. This lists the jobs that are currently being performed and the jobs that are queued (waiting) to be performed. [Job History] button Touch to switch from the Current Jobs list to the Job History list. This list the jobs that have been performed. [Delete] button*1 A job can be deleted from the Current Jobs list. For details, refer to "Deleting a job" on page 11-8. [Increase Priority] button (displayed on the Current Jobs list of the Print tab) The next job to be printed after the current job is finished can be changed. For details, refer to "Increasing printing priority" on page 11-17. The buttons that appear differ depending on the tab or list (Current Jobs or Job History) that is displayed. [Release Held Job] button (displayed on the Current Jobs list of the Print tab) Touch to display the list of stored jobs. The settings of a stored job can be changed, or the job can be printed or deleted. [Check Job Set.] button*1 The settings for a job in the Current Jobs list can be checked. For details, refer to "Checking job settings" on page 11-10. [Deleted Jobs] button [Finished Jobs] button [All Jobs] button (displayed on the Job History list of the Print tab) Touch to select the type of jobs displayed in the Job List screen. Change the display mode by touching the appropriate button. [Detail] button Touch to display screens for checking the status, results, error details, user name, queued time, completed time, number of original pages and number of copies for jobs in the Current Jobs and Job History lists. For details, refer to "Checking job details" on page 11-10. and buttons When there are more jobs than the seven that can be displayed at one time, touch these arrows to display jobs higher or lower in the list (higher or lower in the printing order). [Close] button Touch to quit Job List mode and returns to the screen that was displayed before [Job List] was touched. 11 Managing jobs 11-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) The following information is listed in the Print tab. Item Name Description No. Job identification number assigned when the job is queued User Name Displays the type (source) of the job. "COPY" is displayed for copy jobs. Status (Current Jobs list only) Displays the status of the job Document Name Displays the name of the file for print jobs sent from the computer. If user authentication settings have been applied, the names of documents are not displayed for other users. The name of confidential documents is not displayed. Time Stored Displays the time that the job was queued. Org. Displays the number of pages in the original. Copies Displays the number of Copies to be printed. With jobs listed as "Printing" in the Current Jobs list, a count of the number of Copies printed is displayed. Result (Job History list only) Displays the result of the operation (Job Complete, Deleted Due To Error, Deleted by User, Reset Modes). bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-7 Managing jobs 11 11.1.4 Left panel Job List The job list or the job status can be displayed in the left panel of the main screen. 1 Touch [Job List] in the left panel. A list of jobs appears in the left panel. – If the "Job Display Setting" parameter (available from the User Setting screen) is set to "Status Display", the job status is displayed in the left panel. – To display the Job List screen, touch [Job Details]. – To delete a job, select the job from the job list, and then touch [Delete]. – When there are more jobs than the seven that can be displayed at one time, touch and to display other jobs. ! Detail As the factory default, the display for the sub display area is that when "Job Display Setting" is set to "List Display". For details on specifying the default display for the left panel and the display method for the left panel Job List, refer to "Custom Display Settings" on page 12-19. 11 Managing jobs 11-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11.2 Performing operations on jobs 11.2.1 Deleting a job A queued job or job being printed (job on the Current Jobs list) can be deleted. 1 Touch [Job List] in the left panel, and then touch [Job Details]. The Job List screen appears. 2 In the Print tab, display the job to be deleted. – Jobs on the Job History list cannot be deleted. 3 Select the job to be deleted, and then touch [Delete]. – If the job to be deleted is not displayed, touch or until the desired job is displayed. – If an incorrect job was selected, select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it. A message requesting confirmation to delete the job appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-9 Managing jobs 11 4 Check the information that is displayed, touch [Yes] if the correct job is indicated, and then touch [OK]. – To quit deleting the job, touch [No], and then touch [OK]. The screen displayed before [Delete] was touched appears again, and the job is deleted from the Current Jobs list. 5 Touch [Close] or press the [Reset] key. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note If user authentication settings have been applied and the machine is set so that jobs cannot be deleted by other users, the job is not deleted. A job being performed can also be deleted by selecting the job in the sub display area, then touching [Delete]. 11 Managing jobs 11-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11.2.2 Checking job settings Job settings for stored jobs, jobs being printed, jobs queued to be printed and held jobs can be checked. 1 Touch [Job List] in the left panel, and then touch [Job Details]. The Job List screen appears. 2 Display the list containing the job whose settings are to be checked. 3 Select the job to be checked, and then touch [Check Job Set.]. – If an incorrect job was selected, select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it. – The contents and number of Job Settings screens differ depending on the job that was selected. – The upper number to the left of [ Back] indicates the number of the currently displayed screen. The lower number indicates the total number of screens. – To display the previous screen, touch [ Back]. To display the next screen, touch [Forward ]. The Check Job Settings screen appears. 4 After checking the settings, touch [Close] or press the [Reset] key. – To return to the screen displayed before [Check Job Set.] was touched, touch [Close]. – To return to the Basic screen, press the [Reset] key. 11.2.3 Checking job details The following information can be checked from the Job List screen. - Print tab Status (Receiving, Print Wait, Printing, Stop Print, Print Err, Job Stored)*1, Result (Job Complete, Deleted Due To Error, Deleted by User, Reset Modes)*2, Error Details*2, User Name, Document Name, Output Tray, hours (Job Start, Job End*2), Prints (Original, # of Sets), External Server Information - Send tab Status (Transferring, Waiting, Dialing, Waiting To Redial)*1, Result (Job Complete, Deleted Due To Error, Deleted by User)*2, User Name, Document Name, Address Type (E-Mail, FTP, File (SMB), TWAIN, Fax, WebDAV, Others), Dest (Detail*3), hours (Job Start, Type), Prints (Document), External Server Information - Receive tab Status (Receiving, Dialing (only with polling reception), Print Wait, Printing, Stop Print, Print Err, Saving to Memory)*1, Result (Job Complete, Deleted Due To Error, Deleted by User, Reset Modes)*2, Error Details*2, User Name, Document Name, Output Tray, hours (Job Start, Type), Prints (Document), box number, box name, External Server Information - Save tab Status (Receiving, Saving to Memory)*1, Result (Job Complete, Deleted Due to Error, Deleted by User, Reset Modes)*2, Error Details*2, User Name, User Box (box number/box name), hours (Job Start), Prints (Original) *1 Displayed only for jobs on the Current Jobs list *2 Displayed only for jobs on the Job History list bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-11 Managing jobs 11 *3 Displayed only for jobs on the Currently Jobs list transmitted to multiple destinations 1 Touch [Job List] in the left panel, and then touch [Job Details]. The Job List screen appears. 2 Display the list containing the job whose details are to be checked. 3 Select the job whose details are to be checked, and then touch [Detail]. – If an incorrect job was selected, select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it. The Detail screen appears. 4 After the desired information has been checked, touch [Close] or press the [Reset] key. – To return to the screen displayed before [Job Details] was touched, touch [Close]. – To return to the Basic screen, press the [Reset] key. ! Detail To delete the job, touch [Delete] in the Detail screen. If [Detail] appears in the Detail screen for a job selected from the Send tab, detailed information is available on the multiple destinations that the data was sent to with broadcast transmission. To view the information, touch [Detail]. 11 Managing jobs 11-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11.2.4 Displaying the Current Jobs list (stored jobs and active jobs) The Current Jobs list of received print jobs for Copy mode and Fax mode and for computer printing is displayed. 1 Touch [Job List] in the left panel, and then touch [Job Details]. The Job List screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the desired list. – To display the stored jobs, touch [Release Held Job] to display the Release Held Job screen. To return to the Job List screen, touch [Cancel]. ! Detail For details on the function of each button, refer to "Job List screens" on page 11-4. From the Release Held Job screen, proof copies of stored jobs can be printed. For details, refer to "Printing a proof copy of a stored job" on page 11-14. Stored jobs can be printed from the Release Held Job screen. For details, refer to "Printing a stored job" on page 11-15. To give priority for output to a job, touch [Increase Priority] in the Current Jobs list. For more details, refer to "Increasing printing priority" on page 11-17. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-13 Managing jobs 11 11.2.5 Displaying the Job History list 1 Touch [Job List] in the left panel, and then touch [Job Details]. The Job List screen appears. 2 Touch [Job History]. The Job History list of the Print tab appears. 3 Touch the button for the desired list. – Deleted Jobs: Displays only jobs that were deleted before they were finished. – Finished Jobs: Displays only jobs that were correctly completed. – All Jobs: Displays all jobs. 11 Managing jobs 11-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11.2.6 Printing a proof copy of a stored job A single copy of a stored job can be printed in order to be checked. The Held Jobs list contains jobs such as those for which a proof copy was being printed when the automatic system reset operation was performed. 2 Note For details on displaying the screen, refer to "Displaying the Current Jobs list (stored jobs and active jobs)" on page 11-12. 1 In the Current Jobs list of the Print tab, touch [Release Held Job]. The Release Held Job screen appears. 2 From the job list, select the job whose proof copy is to be printed, and then touch [Proof Copy] key. – If the job to be removed from the Held Jobs list is not displayed, touch or until the desired job is displayed. – If an incorrect job was selected, touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it. – After the single proof copy is printed, check the print result. ? How is printing of a proof copy stopped? % Press the [Stop] key. ! Detail To change the settings, touch [Check Job Set.] in the Release Held Job screen. For details, refer to "Printing a stored job" on page 11-15. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-15 Managing jobs 11 11.2.7 Printing a stored job A job is removed from the Held Jobs list and printed. 2 Note For details on displaying the screen, refer to "Displaying the Current Jobs list (stored jobs and active jobs)" on page 11-12. 1 In the Current Jobs list of the Print tab, touch [Release Held Job]. The Release Held Job screen appears. 2 Select the job to be removed from the Held Jobs list. – If the job to be removed from the Held Jobs list is not displayed, touch and until the desired job is displayed. – If an incorrect job was selected, select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it. – To continue without changing the specified copy settings, continue with step 5. 3 Touch [Change Setting]. The Change Setting screen appears. 11 Managing jobs 11-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 In the Change Setting screen, change the copy settings as desired, and then touch [OK]. ? Is there more information about the settings? % Refer to the appropriate section. ? Can a proof copy be printed? % For details on printing a proof copy, refer to "Printing a proof copy of a stored job" on page 11-14. 5 In the Release Held Job screen, touch [OK] or press the [Start] key. The stored job appears in the Current Jobs list and is printed. ? How is the removal of a job from the Held Jobs list stopped? % Touch [Cancel]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-17 Managing jobs 11 11.2.8 Increasing printing priority The next job to be printed after the current job being printed can be selected. If an Administrator mode parameter was set so that the output priority of jobs cannot be changed, [Increase Priority] does not appear and the output priority of the jobs cannot be specified. If the job currently being printed can be interrupted, printing is interrupted and printing of the job given priority begins. Printing of the interrupted job is automatically restarted once printing for the job given priority is finished. If the job currently being printed cannot be interrupted (a job has already been interrupted or a job was already given priority), printing is interrupted after printing for the current job is finished. 1 Display the Job History list of the Print tab. – For details on displaying the screen, refer to "Displaying the Current Jobs list (stored jobs and active jobs)" on page 11-12. 2 Touch [Increase Priority]. The Increase Priority screen appears. 3 In the job list, touch the button for the job to be given priority to select it, and then touch [OK]. – If the job to be given priority is not displayed, touch and until the desired job is displayed. – If an incorrect job was selected, select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it. The selected job moves to the top of the list and printing of the job begins. ? How can the change in the printing priority be stopped? % Touch [Cancel]. 11 Managing jobs 11-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12 Utility mode bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-3 Utility mode 12 12 Utility mode 12.1 Overview of Utility mode parameters 12.1.1 List of registration information and parameters This section describes the buttons available when the [Utility/Counter] key is pressed. 2 Note The buttons that appear in the Utility mode parameters differ depending on the specified settings. List of Utility mode parameters First-level menu Second-level menu Third-level menu Details [1] One-Touch/User Box Registration [1] Create One-Touch Destination [1] Address Book (Public) Refer to "Create One- Touch Destination" on [2] Address Book (Person- page 12-8. al) [3] Group [4] E-mail Settings [2] Create User Box [1] Public/Personal User Box* Refer to "Create User Box" on page 12-8. [2] Bulletin Board User Box [3] Relay User Box [3] Limiting Access to Destinations [1] Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations Refer to "Limiting Access to Destinations" on page 12-8 [2] User Settings [1] System Settings [1] Language Selection Refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17. [2] Measurement Unit Settings [3] Paper Tray Settings [4] Power Save Settings [5] Output Settings [6] Blank Page Print Settings [7] Density for Original Type [8] Page Number Print Position [2] Custom Display Settings [1] Copier Settings Refer to "Custom Display Settings" on page 12-19. [2] Scan/Fax Settings [3] Copy Screen [4] Fax Active Screen [5] Color Selection Settings [6] Left Panel Display Default [7] Search Option Settings 12 Utility mode 12-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) [2] User Settings [3] Copier Settings Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple (Machine with SD-507 only) Refer to "Copier Settings" on page 12-21. Auto Zoom For Combine/ Booklet Auto Sort/Group Selection Default Copy Settings Default Enlarge Display Settings When AMS Direction is Incorrect Separate Scan Output Method Enlargement Rotation Auto Zoom (Platen) Auto Zoom (ADF) Specify Default Tray when APS Off Select Tray for Insert Sheet Tri-Fold Print Side Print Jobs During Copy Operation Automatic Image Rotation Printed side when copying 1 sheet from Original Glass [4] Scan/Fax Settings Black Compression Level Refer to "Scan/Fax Settings" on page 12-23. Default Scan/Fax Settings Default Enlarge Display Settings [5] Printer Settings [1] Basic Settings Refer to "Printer Settings" on page 12-37. [2] Paper Setting [3] PCL Settings [4] PS Setting [5] XPS Settings [6] TIFF/PDF Image Paper Setting [7] Print Reports [8] Image Shift Settings [9] Stamp Settings [6] Change Password Changes the password for the user who is currently logged on. Refer to "Change Password" on page 12-23. [7] Change E-Mail Address E-Mail Address Changes the e-mail address for the user who is currently logged on. Refer to "Change E-Mail Address" on page 12-23 [8] Toner Supply Refer to "Toner Supply" on page 12-24. [8] Change Icon Changes the icon for the user who is currently logged on. First-level menu Second-level menu Third-level menu Details bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-5 Utility mode 12 [3] Administrator Settings [1] System Settings [1] Power Save Settings Refer to "System Settings" on page 12-26. [2] Output Settings [3] Date&Time Settings [4] Daylight Saving Time [5] Weekly Timer Settings [6] Restrict User Access [7] Expert Adjustment [8] List/Counter [9] Reset Settings [0] User Box Settings (next screen) [1] Size Settings For details of [1] Size Settings, contact your service [2] Stamp Settings representative. [3] Blank Page Print Settings [4] Page Number Print Position [5] Skip Job Setting [6] Application Key Settings [8] Advanced Preview Setting [2] Administrator/Machine Settings [1] Administrator Registration Refer to "Administrator/ Machine Settings" on page 12-32. [2] Input Machine Address [3] One-Touch/User Box Registration [1] Create One-Touch Destination Refer to "One-Touch/User Box Registration" on page 12-32. [2] Create User Box [3] One-Touch/User Box Registration List [4] Maximum Number of User Boxes [4] User Authentication/ Account Track [1] General Settings Refer to "User Authentication/ Account Track" on [2] User Authentication page 12-33. Settings [3] Account Track Settings [4] Print without Authentication [5] Print Counter List [6] External Server Settings [7] Limiting Access to Destinations [8] Authentication Device Setting [9] Auth/Acct Track Common Setting First-level menu Second-level menu Third-level menu Details 12 Utility mode 12-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) [3] Administrator Settings [5] Network Settings [1] Network Setting Refer to "Network Settings" on page 12-36. [2] TCP/IP Settings [3] NetWare Settings [4] HTTP Server Settings [5] FTP Settings [6] SMB Settings [7] LDAP Settings [8] E-Mail Settings [9] SNMP Settings [0] AppleTalk Settings (next screen) [1] Bonjour Setting [2] TCP Socket Settings [3] Network Fax Settings [4] WebDAV client Settings [5] Web Service Settings [7] SSDP Settings [8] Detail Settings [9] IEEE802.1X Authentication Settings [6] Copier Settings Auto Zoom (Platen) Refer to "Copier Settings" on page 12-21. Auto Zoom (ADF) Specify Default Tray when APS Off Select Tray for Insert Sheet Print Jobs During Copy Operation Tri-Fold Print Side Automatic Image Rotation Printed side when copying 1 sheet from Original Glass [7] Printer Settings USB Timeout Refer to "Printer Settings" on page 12-23. Network Timeout Print XPS Errors [8] Fax Settings [1] Header Information Refer to "Fax Settings" on page 12-38. [2] Header/Footer Position [3] Line Parameter Setting [4] TX/RX Settings [5] Function Settings [6] PBX Connection Setting [7] Report Settings [8] Job Settings List [9] Multi Line Setting [0] Network Fax Setting First-level menu Second-level menu Third-level menu Details bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-7 Utility mode 12 * If an optional hard disk is not installed, [Confidential RX User Box] appears. [3] Administrator Settings [9] System Connection [1] Open API Settings Refer to "System Connection" on page 12-38. [2] Admin. transmission [3] Prefix/Suffix Automatic Setting [0] Security Settings [1] Administrator Password Refer to "Security Settings" on page 12-38. [2] User Box Administrator Setting [3] Administrator Security Levels [4] Security Details [4] Security Detail provides [Audit Log Setting]. For details, please contact your service representative. [5] Enhanced Security Mode [6] HDD Settings [7] Function Management Settings [8] Stamp Settings [0] Driver Password Encryption Setting (next screen) [1] Flash Memory Lock Password (next screen) [1] License Settings [1] Get Request Code Refer to "License Settings" on page 12-41. [2] Install License [3] List of Enabled Functions [2] OpenAPI Certification Management Setting [1] Restriction Code Settings Refer to "OpenAPI Authentication Management Setting" on page 12-41. First-level menu Second-level menu Third-level menu Details 12 Utility mode 12-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.2 Registering a destination This section describes the function and main registration parameters that can be specified after pressing the [Utility/Counter] key, then touching [One-Touch/User Box Registration]. 12.2.1 Create One-Touch Destination 2 Note If user authentication settings have been specified, [1 One-Touch Destination/User Box Registration] cannot be selected when no user has logged on. However, after a user has logged on, [1 One-Touch Destination/User Box Registration] appears. Items for registering fax destinations appear only when the fax kit is installed or when Internet fax functions are available. 12.2.2 Create User Box 2 Note [2 Bulletin Board User Box] and [3 Relay User Box] appear only when the fax kit is installed or when Internet fax functions are available. If an optional hard disk is not installed, the [Confidential RX User Box] key appears instead of the [Public/Personal] key. 12.2.3 Limiting Access to Destinations Access Level Using the Access Level settings on this machine, the security of registered destinations can be managed by permitting/prohibiting viewing of the destination information or fax transmissions to the destination. Access permission levels can be set to one of six levels between 0 and 5, with the higher number indicating higher security. 2 Note The access level that is set for user, destination, and group level on the Limiting Access to Destinations can be used when user authentication settings have been specified. Parameter Description Address Book (Public) Specify settings for registering fax and scan destinations. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. Address Book (Personal) Group E-mail Settings Parameter Description Public/Personal User Box Specify settings for registering user box destinations. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations and the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Opera- Bulletin Board User Box tions. Relay User Box bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-9 Utility mode 12 Level settings The access permission level can be specified for each user and destination. The destinations that can be accessed by users can be limited according to the access permission levels specified for the user and destination. For example, a level 2 user can access destinations in levels 0 through 2, but cannot access destinations in levels 3 through 5. A level 5 user can access all destinations in levels 0 through 5. 2 Note For details on the access permission level settings for user, refer to "User Authentication/Account Track" on page 12-33. As a default, the access permission level specified for public users is level 0. Group In addition to users and destinations, groups with access permissions can be created and given a name. When users and destinations are registered in these groups, a destination registered in a group can be accessed by users registered to the same group. In addition, by applying access permission levels to groups, users not registered in a group can be given access permissions according to the conditions of the specified level. A destination can be registered in only one group. However, a user can be registered in multiple groups. Level 2 user access range Level 5 user access range Destinations Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 User 3 Destination 1 Destination 2 User 1 User 2 Access Allow Level 3 12 Utility mode 12-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Specifying a group setting 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Limiting Access to Destinations]. The Limiting Access to Destinations screen appears. 4 Touch [1 Create Group]. – A maximum of 20 groups can be registered. – In the Create Group screen, touch the button for a group, touch [Details], and then check the destinations and names of users belonging to that group. The Create Group screen appears. 5 Touch the button for the desired group, and then touch [Edit]. The Edit screen appears. 6 Touch [Group Name]. The Group Name screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-11 Utility mode 12 7 Type in the group name (up to 24 characters), and then touch [OK]. – For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3. The group name is specified. 8 Select the desired access permission level. The access permission level for the group is specified. 9 Touch [OK]. Specifying a destination level 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Limiting Access to Destinations]. The Limiting Access to Destinations screen appears. 4 Touch [2 Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations]. The Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations screen appears. 12 Utility mode 12-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5 Touch the button for the desired destination. – For an address book destination, touch the index button for the first letter of the destination, and then search for the destination. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-13 Utility mode 12 6 Touch the button for the desired setting. – Either an access permission level or an access permission group can be specified for each destination. – Only one access permission group can be specified for a single destination. – To specify the destination group, touch [Apply Group]. Touch the button for the desired group, and then touch [OK]. – Touch the button for a group, touch [Details], and then check the destinations and names of users belonging to that group. – To specify the destination level, touch [Apply Level]. Touch the button for the desired level, and then touch [OK]. 12 Utility mode 12-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Specifying a user level 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Limiting Access to Destinations]. The Limiting Access to Destinations screen appears. 4 Touch [3 Apply Levels/Groups to Users]. The Apply Levels/Groups to Users screen appears. 5 Select either "Public User Box" or "Personal User Box" as the user type, and then touch the button for the desired User. – The "Public User Box" and "Personal User Box" settings appear only when access by a public user is permitted. – If use by a public user is permitted, "Public" appears as the user name. As the default, level 0 is specified. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-15 Utility mode 12 6 Touch the button for the desired setting. – Both an access permission level and an access permission group can be specified for each user. – A single user can be registered in multiple access permission groups. – To specify the user group, touch [Apply Group]. Touch [Yes], touch the button for the desired group, and then touch [OK]. – Touch the button for a group, touch [Details], and then check the destinations and names of users belonging to that group. – To specify the user level, touch [Apply Level]. Touch [Yes], touch the button for the desired level, and then touch [OK]. 12 Utility mode 12-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.2.4 Displaying the destination registration screen Follow the procedure described below to display the One-Touch/User Box Registration screen by pressing [Utility/Counter] key. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [1 One-Touch/User Box Registration]. – An item can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for the number beside the desired button. For [1 One-Touch/User Box Registration], press the [1] key in the keypad. The One-Touch/User Box Registration screen appears. 2 Note To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or Box mode appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-17 Utility mode 12 To exit the Utility mode, press the [Utility/Counter] key. Or, repeat touching [Close] until the Copy, Fax/Scan, or Box screen appears. With an optional i-Option LK-101 installed in the machine, the Utility mode can also be terminated by touching [Close] repeatedly until the screen specified in Application Key Settings appears. 12.3 Specifying user settings This section describes the function and main registration parameters that can be specified after pressing the [Utility/Counter] key, then touching [User Settings]. 12.3.1 System Settings Language Selection Measurement Unit Settings Paper Tray Settings * Appears when the optional Large capacity unit LU-405/406 is installed. Description Default Setting Select the language of the touch panel message. English Description Default Setting Select one of the following as the measurement units in which values are displayed in the touch panel. mm (Numerical Value), inch (Numerical Value), inch (Fraction) mm (Numericial Value) Parameter Description Default Setting Auto Tray Selection Settings Select the paper trays that are selected automatically when the "Auto" Paper setting is specified. In addition, specify the priority of the paper trays when the auto tray switch operation is performed. Tray priority order: Tray 1 % Tray 2 % Tray 3 % Tray 4 % Bypass % LCT* Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF Select whether or not a paper tray loaded with paper of the same size is selected automatically when a paper tray that was selected manually becomes empty while printing copies. Restrict No Matching Paper in Tray Setting Select the operation that is performed when there is no paper of the corresponding size in the specified paper tray. • Stop Printing (Tray Fixed): The machine stops operating. • Switch Trays (Tray Priority): When the corresponding size or type of paper is not loaded in the specified paper tray, a different paper tray is selected if it contains paper of the corresponding size. Stop Printing (Tray Fixed) Print Lists Select the paper tray used for printing lists, such as the sales counter and consumables indicators. Tray 1, 1-Sided Paper Type/Size Settings Specify the paper type to be use for each tray. Plain Paper Post Inserter Alert Display Setting Specify whether to display the paper size and paper orientation during the tray display or an alarm indication for the post inserter. Yes 12 Utility mode 12-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Power Save Settings 2 Note [Low Power Mode Settings] appears only if the "Administrator Security Levels" parameter in Administrator mode is set to [Level 1], [Level 2]. ! Detail For details on the "Administrator Security Levels" parameter, refer to "Security Settings" on page 12-38. Output Settings 2 Note The "Output Tray Settings" parameter is available only if the optional finisher is installed. Blank Page Print Settings Density for Original Type Parameter Description Default Setting Low Power Mode Settings Specify the desired length of time (between 1 and 240 minutes) until the machine enters Power Save mode. 15 minutes Sleep Mode Settings Specify the desired length of time (between 1 and 240 minutes) until the machine enters Sleep mode. 60 minutes Parameter Description Default Setting Print/Fax Output Setting Specify settings for printing. For details, refer to the User manual – Print Operations. Output Tray Setting Select the copy output tray for each type of job (copies, printouts, reports and faxes). Copy: Tray 2 Print: Tray 2 Print Reports: Tray 2 Fax: Tray 2 Description Default Setting Select whether or not stamps and overlays are printed on blank pages. Do Not Print Description Default Setting Shift the exposure level darker/lighter within 6 levels for each original type, which will be reflected to 9 levels of the Density setting available on the Basic screen. Text/Photo: 3 Text: 3 Photo: 3 Dot Matrix Original: 2 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-19 Utility mode 12 Page Number Print Position 2 Note [Output Settings], [Blank Page Print Settings], [Density for Original Type], and [Page Number Print Position] appear only if the "Administrator Security Levels" parameter in Administrator mode is set to "Level 2". 12.3.2 Custom Display Settings Copier Settings Scan/Fax Settings Copy Screen Fax Active Screen Description Default Setting Specify the print position of the stamp on back pages when duplex printing and booklet are used in combination. All the same Parameter Description Default Setting Default Tab Specify the default display for the Basic screen in Copy mode. • Basic: This is the normal basic display. • Quick Copy: Displays all selectable items for the "Paper" function, "Zoom" function and "Duplex/Combine" function. The normal Basic screen appears as a different tab. Basic Shortcut Key 1 Shortcut keys for frequently used Application functions can be added to the Basic screen of Copy mode. OFF Shortcut Key 2 Parameter Description Default Tab Specify settings for faxing and scanning. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. Program Default Address Book Index Default Shortcut Key 1 Shortcut Key 2 Default Address Book Default Address Type Parameter Description Default Setting Copy Operating Screen Select the screen that is displayed while printing. • Yes: A screen for reserving a copy job appears while printing and, if [Program Next Job] is touched, a job can be reserved. • No: A copy job can be reserved while the Basic screen in Copy mode is displayed. No Parameter Description TX Display Specify settings for faxing. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. RX Display 12 Utility mode 12-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Color Selection Settings Left Panel Display Default Search Option Settings Parameter Description Default Setting Select Color Select the color that indicates that the button is selected. Green Parameter Description Default Setting Left Panel Display Default Select the information displayed as the default in the left panel. • Job List: A list of the jobs that are being performed and queued to be performed is displayed. • Check Job Settings: The currently specified copy settings are displayed. Job List Job Display Setting Select the job list information displayed in the left panel. • List Display: A list of the jobs that are being performed and queued to be performed is displayed. • Status Display: The progress of the job being performed is displayed. List Display Parameter Description Default Setting Uppercase and Lowercase Letters Select whether or not to differentiate between uppercase and lowercase letters. Differentiate Search Option Screen Select whether or not to display [Uppercase and Lowercase Letters] setting in the advanced search. OFF bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-21 Utility mode 12 12.3.3 Copier Settings Parameter Description Default Setting Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple Select whether or not the "Booklet" function is selected automatically when the "Center Staple & Fold" setting is selected. This parameter is available only if optional finisher is installed. Auto Select Booklet Auto Zoom For Combine/ Booklet Select whether or not the preset zoom ratios are automatically selected when the "Auto" Paper setting is selected and a combined copy setting or the "Booklet" function is selected. • Auto Display Zoom Ratio: The following zoom ratios are specified. 2in1, Booklet: 64.7% 4in1: 50.0% 8in1: 32.3% • Off: The zoom ratio is not selected automatically. Auto Display Zoom Ratio Auto Sort/Group Selection Select whether or not the "Sort" setting is automatically selected when 2 or more copies are set to be printed in a single job. • Yes: When an original is loaded into the automatic document feeder and the [Start] key is pressed, the "Group" setting is automatically selected if the original consists of only one page, and the "Sort" setting is automatically selected if the original consists of two or more pages. • No: The "Sort" or "Group" setting is not selected automatically. Yes Default Copy Settings Specify the default settings for Copy mode. The copy settings selected when the machine is turned on (the power switch is set to "n") or the [Reset] key is pressed can be specified. • Current Setting: The settings specified from the touch panel before Utility mode was entered are set as the default settings for Copy mode. • Factory Default: The factory default settings are set as the default settings for Copy mode. Factory Default Default Enlarge Factory Default Specify the default settings for Enlarge Display mode. • Current Setting: The settings specified in the Enlarge Display mode before Utility mode was entered are set as default settings for the Enlarge Display mode. • Factory Default: The factory default settings are set as the default settings for the Enlarge Display mode. Factory Default When AMS Direction is Incorrect Select whether or not printing continues when the paper and original orientations are different with the "Auto Paper Select" setting selected. • Print: The Zoom setting is automatically set and the copy is printed on paper of the specified size in the specified orientation. • Delete Job: The job is deleted, and no copies are printed. Print Separate Scan Output Method Select whether copies are printed as the original is being scanned or after the entire original has been scanned when scanning an original in separate batches or when scanning a multiple-page document from the original glass. • Page Print: Printing of copies that can be printed begins while the original is being scanned. • Batch Print Printing begins after all pages of the original have been scanned. Page Print 12 Utility mode 12-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Note [Auto Zoom (Platen)], [Auto Zoom (ADF)], [Specify Default Tray when APS Off], [Select Tray for Insert Sheet], and [Automatic Image Rotation] appear only if the "Administrator Security Levels" parameter in Administrator mode is set. [Print Jobs During Copy Operation] appears only if the "Administrator Security Levels" parameter in Administrator mode is set to "Level 2". Enlargement Rotation Select whether an image that exceeds 297 mm in the main scanning direction (left/right direction on the original glass and ADF) is rotated when the copies are printed. • Allow: An enlargement rotation is performed. • Restrict: The enlargement rotation is prohibited. Allow Auto Zoom (Platen) Select whether or not the "Auto" Zoom setting is automatically selected when a paper tray is selected (except when the "Auto" Paper setting is selected) while an original is placed on the original glass. OFF Auto Zoom (ADF) Select whether or not the "Auto" Zoom setting is automatically selected when a paper tray is selected (except when the "Auto" Paper setting is selected) while an original is loaded into the ADF. ON Specify Default Tray when APS Off Select which paper tray is selected when the "Auto" Paper setting is canceled. • Tray Before APS ON: The paper tray that was being used before the "Auto" Paper setting was selected is selected. • Default Tray: Tray 1 is used. Tray Before APS ON Select Tray for Insert Sheet Select the default paper tray loaded with paper for the cover pages (front cover), inserted pages and chapter title pages. Tray 2 Tri-Fold Print Side Whether to fold copies with the printed surface inward or outward can be selected when copies are output tri-folded. This function can be used if the optional Finisher FS-610 is installed. Inside Print Jobs During Copy Operation Select whether or not print data or fax data can be accepted for printing while a copy operation is being performed. • Accept: Print data and fax data can be accepted and printed. • Receive Only: Print data and fax data is printed after the copy operation is finished. Accept Automatic Image Rotation Select whether or not the image is automatically rotated when the original and copy paper orientations are different. • When Auto Paper / Auto Zoom / Reduce is set: If the "Auto" Paper setting, "Auto" Zoom setting or a Reduce setting is selected, the image is automatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper. • When Auto Paper / Auto Zoom is set: If the "Auto" Paper setting or "Auto" Zoom setting is selected, the image is automatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper. • When Auto Zoom / Reduce is set: If the "Auto" Zoom setting or a Reduce setting is selected, the image is automatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper. • When Auto Zoom is set: If the "Auto" Zoom setting is selected, the image is automatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper. When Auto Paper/Auto Zoom is set Printed side when copying 1 sheet from Original Glass Specify whether the copies of originals scanned from the original glass are output with the printed sides facing up or down. • Face Down: Copies are output with the printed sides facing down. • Face UP: Copies are output with the printed sides facing up. Face Down Parameter Description Default Setting bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-23 Utility mode 12 When the Enlarge Display mode is selected, the [Default Enlarge Display Setting] button appears to allow specifying the default settings of the copy and fax/scan operations in the Enlarge Display mode. ! Detail For details on the "Administrator Security Level" parameter, refer to "Security Settings" on page 12-38. For details on the default settings and the factory default settings, refer to page 2-31. To change the default settings for Fax/Scan mode, press the [Fax/Scan] key, enter Utility mode, and then select a setting for this parameter. 12.3.4 Scan/Fax Settings 12.3.5 Printer Settings 12.3.6 Change Password 12.3.7 Change E-Mail Address 2 Note [Change E-Mail Address] appears only if the "Administrator Security Levels" parameter in Administrator mode is set to "Level 2" Parameter Description Black Compression Level Specify settings for scanning. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. Default Scan/Fax Settings Default Enlarge Display Settings Parameter Description Basic Settings Specify settings for printing. For details, refer to User manual – Print Operations (IC-208). Paper Settings PCL Settings PS Setting XPS Settings TIFF/PDF Image Paper Setting Print Reports The Print function settings can be printed as a report. For details, refer to User manual – Print Operations (IC-208). Image Shift Settings Make adjustment on Image Shift function used in Printer mode. For details, refer to the User manual – Print Operations (IC-208). Stamp Settings Specify settings for Stamp function used in Printer mode. For details, refer to the User manual – Print Operations (IC-208). Available paper types depend on the paper tray. Description The password for the user who is currently logged on can be changed. After typing in the current password, type in the new password. This parameter is available when "User Authentication" is set to "ON (MFP)". Description The e-mail address for the user who is currently logged on can be changed. This parameter appears only when a user other than a public user is logged on. 12 Utility mode 12-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.3.8 Toner Supply 12.3.9 Change Icon 12.3.10 Displaying the User Settings screen Follow the procedure described below to display the User Settings screen by pressing [Utility/Counter] key. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [2 User Settings]. – An item can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for the number beside the desired button. For [2 User Settings], press the [2] key in the keypad. Description When the toner density becomes low, the density level can be restored while the machine is stopped. Description The icon registered for the user who is currently logged on can be changed. This parameter appears only when a user other than a public user is logged on. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-25 Utility mode 12 The User Settings screen appears. 2 Note To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy or Box mode appears. 12 Utility mode 12-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.4 Specifying administrator settings This section describes the function and main registration parameters that can be specified after pressing the [Utility/Counter] key, then touching [Administrator Settings]. 12.4.1 System Settings Power Save Settings * This item appears when an optional fax kit, hard disk or the image controller IC-208 is not installed, the USB memory is not connected, and the weekly timer is set to [OFF]. Output Settings Date/Time Settings Daylight Saving Time Parameter Description Default Setting Low Power Mode Settings Specify the desired length of time (between 1 and 240 minutes) until the machine enters Power Save mode. 15 minutes Sleep Mode Settings Specify the desired length of time (between 1 and 240 minutes) until the machine enters Sleep mode. 60 minutes Hibernation Setting* Specify whether to bring the machine to the same condition as the main power off when the machine enters Sleep mode or the sub power switch is turned off. ON Power Save Key Select which low power mode is entered when the [Power Save] key is pressed. • Low Power: The touch panel goes off and the machine enters a mode where it conserves energy. • Sleep: Although the machine conserves more energy in Sleep mode than in Power Save mode, the machine must warm up when Sleep mode is canceled, therefore taking more preparation time than Power Save mode. Low Power Enter Power Save Mode Specify settings for faxing. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. Normal Parameter Description Default Setting Print/Fax Output Setting Specify settings for printing. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations and the User manual – Print Operations. Output Tray Settings Select the finishing tray for each type of job (copies, printouts, reports and faxes). Copy: Tray 2 Printer: Tray 2 Print Reports: Tray 2 Fax: Tray 2 Shift Output Each Job Select whether or not printed copies are fed out shifted when "Offset" is selected while a finisher is installed. • Yes: Pages are fed out shifted. • No: Pages are fed out without being shifted. Yes Description Default Setting Specify the current date and time. In addition, the time zone can be set between -12:00 and 13:00 (in 30-minute increments). Time Zone: +00:00 Description Default Setting Select whether or not the machine’s internal clock observes daylight saving time. If "Yes" is selected, a setting appears so that the length of time for adjusting the current time can be set. The length of time applied for daylight saving time can be set between 1 and 150 minutes in 1-minute increments. No bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-27 Utility mode 12 Weekly Timer Settings ! Detail If the weekly timer is set, the machine will be turned on/off at the specified time. Settings can be specified to require a password in order to turn the machine on or to allow fax and print jobs to be received after the machine has been turned off by the timer. Various weekly timer settings in the Weekly Timer Settings screen can be combined. For details on the various settings, refer to "Overview of weekly timer settings" on page 12-44. Restrict User Access Parameter Description Default Setting Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings Select whether or not the weekly timer is used. OFF Time Settings Specify the time of each day that the machine is turned on/off. - Date Settings Specify the individual dates or the days of the week that the machine is turned on/off. - Select Time for Power Save If the machine is turned off at a specific time, for example, during the lunch break, the time for turning the machine off and on can be specified. No Password for Non- Business Hours If the machine is turned off with the weekly timer function, select whether or not use is limited with a password. In addition, if "Yes" is selected, specify the password that must be entered. No Parameter Description Default Setting Copy Program Lock Settings Select the registered copy programs that are prevented from being changed or deleted. - Delete Saved Copy Program Select the registered copy programs to be deleted. - Restrict Access to Job Settings Changing Job Priority Select whether or not to allow the print priority of jobs to be changed. Allow Delete Other User Jobs Select whether or not jobs from other users can deleted when the user authentication settings have been specified. Restrict Registering and Changing Addresses Select whether or not to allow registered destinations to be changed. Allow Changing Zoom Ratio Select whether or not to allow stored zoom ratios to be changed. Allow Change the "From" Address Select whether or not to allow the specified From address to be changed. Allow Change Registered Overlay Select whether or not to allow registered image overlays to be changed. Allow Restrict Operation Restrict Broadcasting Select whether to prevent multiple recipients from being specified for fax transmissions. OFF 12 Utility mode 12-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Expert Adjustment Parameter Description Default Setting Density for Original Type Shift the exposure level darker/lighter within 5 levels for each original type, which will be reflected to 9 levels of the Density setting available on the Basic screen. Text: 3 Text/Photo: 3 Photo: 3 Dot Matrix Original: 2 Erase Adjustment Non-Image Area Erase Select the condition for Non-Image Area Erase to function. Except Original Glass e1.0 Non-Image Area Erase Setting Select the setting method, erasing mode, and original density for the Non-Image Area Erase function. Erase Setting: Specify How to Erase: Rectangular Original Density: Standard ADF Frame Erase Specify the erasing width for the ADF Frame Erase function. 3 mm Printer Adjustment Leading Edge Adjustment Adjust the starting print position between -3.0 mm and +6.0 mm at the leading edge of the paper (with respect to the paper feed direction). Adjustments can be specified for each paper type. 0.0 mm Centering Adjust the starting print position between -6.4 mm and +6.3 mm at the left edge of the paper (with respect to the paper feed direction). 0.0 mm Vertical Adjustment If the copy image is distorted (stretched or compressed), the paper feed speed and printing speed can be synchronized to adjust the distortion of the copy image between -1.35 and +5.00. 0.0% Horizontal Adjustment If the copy image is distorted (stretched or compressed), the zoom ratio in the transverse feed direction of the original can be adjusted between - 1.0% and +1.0%. 0.0% 2nd-Side Size Adjustment Adjust the zoom ratio for the back side of double-sided copies for each paper tray. Adjust Ratio:[No Selection], [-0.1%], [-0.2%], [-0.3%] No Selection bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-29 Utility mode 12 *1 Appears only when Finisher FS-610 is installed. *2 Appears only when finisher is installed with punch kit. *3 Appears only when Z folding unit is installed. *4 Appears only when post inserter is installed. ! Detail [Finisher Adjustment] appears only when an optional finisher is installed. The Finisher Adjustment parameters that are available differ depending on the model of the installed finisher. Finisher Adjustment Center Staple Position* 1 Adjust the stapling position (between -12, 8 mm and 12, 7 mm) when printing with the "Center Staple & Fold" setting. 0.0 mm Half-Fold Position* 1 Adjust the folding position (between -12, 8 mm and 12, 7 mm) when printing with the "Center Staple & Fold" setting. 0.0 mm Punch Vertical Position Adjustment*2 Adjust the vertical position of the punched holes between -5.0 mm and 5.0 mm. 0.0 mm Punch Unit Vertical Position Adjustment *3 Adjust the vertical position of the punched holes between - 5.0 mm and 5.0 mm for each paper size. 0.0 mm Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment* 2 Adjust the horizontal position of the punched holes between -5.0 mm and 5.0 mm. 0.0 mm Punch Unit Horizontal Position Adjustment *3 Adjust the horizontal position of the punched holes between - 5.0 mm and 5.0 mm. 0.0 mm Punch Resist Loop Size Adjustment*2 Adjust the hole-punching shift for double-sided printing and outputting cover pages between -16.0 mm and 16.0 mm. 0.0 mm 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment*3 Adjust the 1st folding position between - 12.8 mm and + 12.7 mm for each paper size. 0.0 mm 2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment*3 Adjust the 2nd folding position between - 12.8 mm and + 12.7 mm for each paper size. 0.0 mm Tri-Fold Position Adjustment*1 Adjust the folding positions (between -12.8 mm and 12.7 mm) when printing with the "Tri-Fold" setting. 0.0 mm 2-Position Staple Pitch Adjustment*1 Adjust the distance (between 128 mm and 160 mm) between staples when printing with the "2 Position" Staple setting ("Staple" and "Center Staple & Fold"). 128 mm Post Inserter Feeder Size Adjustment*4 Adjust the sensor for detecting the size of paper loaded in the paper trays of the post inserter. - Scanner Area Scanner Adjustment: Leading Edge Adjust the starting scan position between -2.0 mm and +6.0 mm at the leading edge of the original (with respect to the image scan direction). 0.0 mm Scanner Adjustment: Centering Adjust the starting scan position between -3.0 mm and +3.0 mm at the left edge of the original (with respect to the image scan direction). 0.0 mm Vertical Adjustment If the scanned image is distorted (stretched or compressed), the zoom ratio in the feed direction of the original in the scanner area can be adjusted between -2.0% and +2.0%. 1.00% ADF Centering Adjust the center position in the transverse feed direction of the original between -3.0 mm and +3.0 mm. 0.0 mm Copy Protect Density Adjustment Adjust the density of hidden text printed as copy protection. 200 to 255: 219 Parameter Description Default Setting 12 Utility mode 12-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) List/Counter Reset Settings 2 Reminder Even if the System Auto Reset Time is [OFF], the System Auto Reset function is activated after 1 minute of no operation of the machine during the User Authentication or Account Track. However, when in the Enlarge Display mode, the System Auto Reset function is not activated. If user authentication settings have been specified or "Enhanced Security Mode" has been set to "ON", the logoff from Administrator mode or user authentication mode will be performed according to the "System Auto Reset Time" parameter. Parameter Description Management List Job Settings List The machine settings can be printed. Paper Size/Type Counter Store combinations of paper sizes and paper types to be counted. Parameter Description Default Setting System Auto Reset Specify the desired length of time until the automatic system reset operation is performed. • Priority Mode: Select the setting ("Box", "Copy" or "Scan/Fax") for the mode that the machine enters when the automatic system reset operation is performed. • System Auto Reset Time: Specify the setting (between 1 and 9 minutes or "OFF") for the desired length of time until the automatic system reset operation is performed. Priority Mode: Copy System Auto Reset Time: 1 Minute Auto Reset Select the setting (between 1 and 9 minutes or "OFF") for the desired length of time until the automatic panel reset operation is performed for each mode (Copy, Scan/Fax and Box). Copy: 1 Minute Scan/Fax: 1 Minute Box: 1 Minute Job Reset When Account is changed Select whether or not the settings are reset (initialized) when the user has changed. This machine detects that the user has changed when the optional key counter has been removed or when the user has logged off if user authentication or account track settings are specified. Reset When original is set on ADF Select whether or not the settings are reset when an original is loaded into the automatic document feeder. Do Not Reset Next Job Staple Setting: Select whether the same Staple setting from the previous job is set or the setting is canceled when that job begins and the settings for the next job can be specified. OFF Original Set/Bind Direction: Select whether the same Original Direction and Binding Position settings from the previous job are set or the settings are canceled when that job begins and the settings for the next job can be specified. OFF Reset Data After Job: Select whether or not to reset the address and other settings after scanning or fax transmission. When "Confirm with User"* is specified, whether or not to hold the address and other settings can be selected after scanning or fax transmission. Reset All System Auto Reset for Proof Copy Select whether or not to activate the automatic system reset after the proof copy operation is performed. Yes bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-31 Utility mode 12 When the optional i-Option LK-101 is registered, the setting can be specified from Priority Mode: [Application Menu], [Fax/Scan], [Copy]. When LK-101 is registered, [Auto Reset] can be used to configure the Web Browser settings. Factory default: 1 minute If "Confirm Address (TX)" is set to "ON", "Confirm with User" in [Job Reset] - [Next Job] - [Reset Data After Job] cannot be used. User Box Settings Stamp Settings Blank Page Print Settings Page Number Print Position Skip Job Setting Parameter Description Default Setting Delete Unused User Box Specify settings for using boxes. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. Delete Secure Print Documents Auto Delete Secure Document Specify settings for using boxes. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. 1 day Encrypted PDF Delete Time 1 day ID & Print Delete Time 1 day Document Hold Setting ON External Memory Function Settings Save Document OFF Print Document ON ID & Print Delete after Print Setting Confirm with User Document Delete Time Setting 1 day Parameter Description Default Setting Header/Footer Settings Program or delete header/footer settings. - Fax TX Settings Select whether or not the stamp settings are canceled when a fax is sent. Cancel Description Default Setting Select whether or not stamps and overlays are printed on blank pages when a Stamp/Composition function is set. Do Not Print Description Default Setting Specify the print position of the stamp on back pages when duplex printing and booklet are used in combination. All the Same Parameter Description Default Setting Fax Select whether or not to skip jobs for the fax transmission. ON other than Fax Select whether or not to skip jobs for other functions than fax transmission. ON 12 Utility mode 12-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Application Key Settings 12.4.2 Administrator/Machine Settings 2 Note When entering the device name while registering the machine address, do not use characters that cannot be used by the operating system. 12.4.3 One-Touch/User Box Registration Description Default Setting Functions can be assigned to Key 1 and Key 2. Key 1: Scan/Fax Key 2: Copy Parameter Description Default Setting Original Direction Confirmation Screen Configure settings to fax or scan a document. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. ON Parameter Description Administrator Registration Specify the administrator information displayed in the Service Representative/ Administrator Information screen of the Help screen and the From address for sending e-mail from the machine. Input Machine Address Register the name of the machine and its e-mail address. The registered machine name is added to the names of files that are sent and to originals saved in user boxes. As the factory default, the machine name is specified as "KMBT_751/601". The registered e-mail address is used with Internet faxing. Parameter Description Create One-Touch Destination Specify settings for registering fax, scan and user box destinations. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations and the Create User Box User manual – Box Operations. One-Touch/User Box Registration List The lists of address book destinations, group destinations, program destinations and titles/text can be printed to be checked. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. Maximum Number of User Boxes Specify the maximum number of user boxes for each user. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-33 Utility mode 12 12.4.4 User Authentication/Account Track General Settings User Authentication Settings Description Default Setting Specify user authentication and account track settings in order to control the use of this machine. • User Authentication: Select either "External Server Authentication" or "ON (MFP)" as the user authentication method. To quit user authentication, select "OFF". • Public User Access: Select whether or not the machine can be used by an unauthenticated user. This cannot be selected if "User Authentication" is set to "OFF". • The machine can be used without authentication if [ON (Without Login)] is touched when logging on as a public user. When logging on as an authorized user, the [Access] key must be pressed first to display the authentication screen. • Account Track: Select whether or not account tracking is used to control the machine. • Account Track Input Method: To authenticate using an account name and password, touch [Account Name & Password]. To authenticate using only a password, touch [Password Only]. No setting can be selected when "Account Track" is set to "OFF". If both user authentication and account track settings are specified, "Account Name & Password" cannot be selected. • Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track: Select whether or not user authentication and group authentication are synchronized. This appears only when "User Authentication" is set to "External Server Authentication" or "ON (MFP)" and "Account Track" is set to "On". • When # of Jobs Reach Maximum: To stop the job being printed and begin printing the next job when the limit specified for account track or user authentication is reached, touch [Skip Job]. To stop the all jobs when the limit is reached, select [Stop Job]. • Number of User Counters Assigned: Adjust the number of users and accounts that can be registered. Example: When "Number of User Counters Assigned" is set to "50", 950 accounts can be registered. • Ticket Hold Time Setting: Specify the desired length of holding time (between 1 and 60 minutes) of Kerveros authentication ticket. The holding time setting is applied when Active Directory is selected as the authentication server type. User Authentication: OFF Public User Access: Restrict Account Track: OFF Account Track Input Method: Account name & password Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track: Synchronize When # of Jobs Reach Maximum: Skip Job Number of User Counters Assigned: 500 Ticket Hold Times Settings: 60 min Parameter Description Default Setting Administrative Settings User Name List Select whether or not a list of user names is displayed in the user authentication screen. OFF Default Function Permission Operations that are possible with this machine can be limited when authenticating with an external server. Copy: Allow Scan: Allow Fax: Allow Print: Allow User Box: Allow Print Scan/Fax TX: Allow Save to External Memory: Allow ID & Print Settings Whether or not to use the ID & Print function can be selected. Also, whether to print unauthorized jobs or public user jobs immediately or to save them in the ID & Print User Box can be selected. ID & Print: OFF Public User: Print Immediately ID & Print Operation Settings Specify the printing method when using the ID & Print function. • Print All Jobs: All the jobs are printed with a single authentication operation. • Print Each Job: The stored jobs are printed one at a time. Print All Jobs User Registration Register the users of this machine. In addition, the password, number of prints allowed, authentication information and function permissions can be specified for each user. - User Counter The copy, print and fax/scan use for each user can be checked. - 12 Utility mode 12-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Note The user authentication parameters appear only if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to any setting other than "OFF". [Save to External Memory] appears if "Save Document" is set to ON (displayed by touching [User Box Settings] on the System Settings screen, then [External Memory Function Settings]). If authentication is performed with PageScope Authentication Manager, [User Registration] does not appear. ! Detail When user authentication is performed using an optional authentication unit by placing your finger or IC card on the authentication unit, jobs saved in the ID & Print User Box can be printed. Account Track Settings 2 Note The account track parameters appear only if "Account Track" on the General Settings screen is set to "ON". If authentication is performed with PageScope Authentication Manager, [Account Track Settings] does not appear. Print Without Authentication Print Counter List External Server Settings Parameter Description Account Track Registration Register the accounts using this machine. In addition, the password and number of prints allowed can be specified for each account. Account Track Counter The copy, print and scan/fax use for each account can be checked. Description Default Setting Select whether or not printing is permitted without specifying a user or account. If printing is permitted, prints are counted for public users. Restrict Description Default Setting This parameter appears only if user authentication or account track settings have been specified. The use for each user or account can be checked. Paper Tray: Tray 1 Simplex/Duplex: 1-sided Print Item: All Info. Description Specify the external server that performs user authentication. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-35 Utility mode 12 Limiting Access to Destinations Authentication Device Settings ! Detail The Authentication Device Settings parameters are available only if the optional authentication unit is installed. The authentication units of the IC card type and the biometric type cannot be installed at the same time. If [SSFC] is selected for the IC card type, specify company code and company identification code. For details, refer to the manual provided with the authentication unit. Auth/Acct Track Common Setting Parameter Description Create Group Groups for permitting access to destinations can be registered and edited. Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations The access permission level and the group with access permissions can be specified for each destination. Apply Levels/Groups to Users The access permission level and the group with access permissions can be specified for each user. Parameter Description Default setting General Settings Specify the settings for the installed authentication unit. • Card Authentication: Select the IC card type and operation settings. • Bio Authentication: Select the beep and operation settings. When the authentication unit (IC card type) has been installed: IC Card Type: FeliCa Operation Settings: Card Authentication When the authentication unit (biometric type) has been installed: Beep Sound: ON Operation Settings: 1-tomany authentication Logoff Settings Select whether or not the user is logged off after a scan or fax is sent or after the copy original is scanned. Do not log off Parameter Description Default setting Logout Confirmation Screen Display Setting Select whether or not to display the logging-off confirmation screen after pressing the [Access] key. ON 12 Utility mode 12-36 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.4.5 Network Settings Parameter Description Network Setting Specify settings for using the network. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. TCP/IP Settings NetWare Settings HTTP Server Settings FTP Settings SMB Settings LDAP Settings E-mail Settings SNMP Settings AppleTalk Settings Bonjour Setting TCP Socket Settings WebDAV Client Settings Web Service Settings SSDP Settings Detail Settings IEEE 802.1x Authentication Settings Network Fax Settings Specify settings for using network faxing. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-37 Utility mode 12 12.4.6 Copier Setting 12.4.7 Printer Settings Parameter Description Default Setting Auto Zoom (Platen) Select whether or not the "Auto" Zoom setting is automatically selected when a paper tray is selected (except when the "Auto" Paper setting is selected) while an original is placed on the original glass. OFF Auto Zoom (ADF) Select whether or not the "Auto" Zoom setting is automatically selected when a paper tray is selected (except when the "Auto" Paper setting is selected) while an original is loaded into the ADF. ON Specify Default Tray when APS Off Select which paper tray is selected when the "Auto" Paper setting is canceled. • Tray Before APS ON: The paper tray that was being used before the "Auto" Paper setting was selected is selected. • Default Tray: Tray 1 is used. Tray Before APS ON Select Tray for Insert Sheet Select the default paper tray loaded with paper for the cover pages (front cover), inserted pages and chapter title pages. Tray 2 Print Jobs During Copy Operation Select whether or not print data or fax data can be accepted for printing while a copy operation is being performed. • Accept: Print data and fax data can be accepted and printed. • Receive Only: Print data and fax data is printed after the copy operation is finished. Accept Tri-Fold Print Side Whether to fold copies with the printed surface inward or outward can be selected when copies are output tri-folded. This function can be used if the optional Finisher FS-610 is installed. Outside Automatic Image Rotation Select whether or not the image is automatically rotated when the original and copy paper orientations are different. • When Auto Paper / Auto Zoom / Reduce is set: If the "Auto" Paper setting, "Auto" Zoom setting or a Reduce setting is selected, the image is automatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper. • When Auto Paper / Auto Zoom is set: If the "Auto" Paper setting or "Auto" Zoom setting is selected, the image is automatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper. • When Auto Zoom / Reduce is set: If the "Auto" Zoom setting or a Reduce setting is selected, the image is automatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper. • When Auto Zoom is set: If the "Auto" Zoom setting is selected, the image is automatically rotated to fit the orientation of the paper. When Auto Paper/Auto Zoom is set Printed side when copying 1 sheet from Original Glass Specify whether the copies of originals scanned from the original glass are output with the printed sides facing up or down. • Face Down: Copies are output with the printed sides facing down. • Face UP: Copies are output with the printed sides facing up. Face Down Parameter Description USB Timeout Specify settings for registering print destinations. For details, refer to the User manual – Print Operations. Network Timeout Print XPS Error 12 Utility mode 12-38 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.4.8 Fax Settings 2 Note [8 Fax Settings] appears only when the fax kit is installed or when Internet fax functions are available. 12.4.9 System Connection 2 Note [2 Administrator Settings] is displayed when the machine is managed by CS Remote Care. 12.4.10 Security Settings Administrator Password User Box Administrator Setting Parameter Description Header Information Specify settings for registering fax destinations. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. Header/Footer Position Line Parameter Setting TX/RX Settings Function Settings PBX Connection Setting Report Settings Job Settings List Multi Line Setting Network Fax Settings Specify settings for using network faxing. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. Parameter Description Open API Settings Specify settings for registering network connections. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. Admin. transmission The administrator can send the machine status to the service representative. For details, contact your service representative [Prefix/Suffix Automatic Setting] Select whether to automatically add prefix and suffix to a destination number. If [Prefix/Suffix Automatic Setting] is set to [ON], the other settings will be restricted. For details, refer to the User manual – Network Administrator. Description Default Setting The administrator password used to specify the Administrator mode settings can be specified or changed. The administrator password can contain between 0 and 8 digits (characters). If the "Password Rules" parameter is set to "Enabled", only an administrator password with 8 digits can be specified. 12345678 Description Specify settings for using boxes. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-39 Utility mode 12 Administrator Security Levels Security Details Description Default Setting Specify the range of Administrator mode parameters available to users. • Level 1: Low Power Mode Settings, Auto Zoom (Platen), Auto Zoom (ADF), Specify Default Tray when APS Off, Select Tray for Insert Sheet, Automatic Image Rotation are available to users. • Level 2: Low Power Mode Settings, Output Settings, Density for Original, Page Number Print Position, Blank Page Print Settings, Auto Zoom (Platen), Auto Zoom (ADF), Specify Default Tray when APS Off, Select Tray for Insert Sheet, Automatic Image Rotation, Copy Operating Screen, Change E-Mail Address are available to users. • Prohibit: None of the parameters that are available to users with "Level 1" or "Level 2" are available. Prohibit Parameter Description Default Setting Password Rules Select whether or not password rules are applied. Invalid Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error Select the operations that are prohibited if user authentication failed. • Mode 1: Operations cannot be performed for a fixed length of time. • Mode 2: When authentication has failed repeatedly, the control panel can no longer be operated. The number of times of failed authentication can be set between 1 and 5. If operation of the control panel is restricted, touch [Release], and then select the items whose operation restrictions are canceled. • Users & Accounts: Operations for user authentication and account track • Secure Print: Operations for confidential documents • User Box: Operations for password-protected boxes • SNMP: Operations for SNMP v3 Write user authentication • Release Time Settings: Specify the length of time until prohibited operations are automatically unlocked. The time can be set between 1 and 60 minutes. Mode 1 Release Time Settings: 5 min. Confidential Document Access Method The operation method for confidential documents can be viewed. If "Prohibited Functions When Authentication Failed" is set to "Mode 1", this parameter is set to "Mode 1". If "Prohibited Functions When Authentication Failed" is set to "Mode 2", this parameter is set to "Mode 2". Mode 1: Type in the ID and password for the confidential document, and then select the document. Mode 2: Enter the Secure Print ID, select the document, and then enter the password for authentication. Mode 1 Manual Destination Input Select whether or not a recipient can be typed in manually in a recipient input screen. Allow Print Data Capture Select whether or not data for a print job can be captured. For details, refer to the User manual – Print Operations. Restrict Fax TX Select whether or not fax transmissions are prohibited. OFF Hide Personal Information Select whether or not the file name and destination are hidden in the job log. OFF Display Activity Log Select whether or not the communication log is displayed. ON Delete Job Log The entire job log can be cleared. - Secure Print Only This setting is for the print operations. For details, refer to the User manual – Print Operations. Web browser contents access This setting is for the use of an application that interacts with the Web browser. For details, refer to the User manual – Advanced Function Operations. 12 Utility mode 12-40 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) ! Detail The operation of the "Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error" parameter applies to the following passwords. User passwords, account passwords, user box passwords, passwords for confidential documents, and the administrator password If the control panel cannot be operated even after touching [Release] from the "Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error" parameter to specify the items whose operation restrictions are canceled or if an operation is prohibited from a failed attempt to authenticate the administrator password, restart the machine. Restart the machine, wait for the time specified in "Release Time Settings", and then perform the administrator authentication. 2 Reminder When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off. Enhanced Security Mode HDD Settings Description Settings necessary for applying enhanced security mode appear. Select whether or not to apply enhanced mode settings when the necessary settings are specified. For details, contact your service representative. Parameter Description Default Setting Check HDD Capacity Information concerning the hard disk capacity is displayed. Overwrite Temporary Data Specify whether or not to overwrite the temporary image data saved on the hard disk with all operations for copying, scanning, faxing and computer printing. For details on the settings, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. By specifying a setting to overwrite temporary data, the area of the hard disk where image data is saved after printing or sending can be overwritten, and the data can be erased. This process prevents disclosure of image data on the hard disk. NO Overwrite All Data Select this parameter to overwrite and delete all data on the entire hard disk in the specified patterns for mode 1 through mode 8 when returning the machine from lease or disposing the machine in order to prevent disclosure of the data. For details on the settings, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. Before performing this operation, contact your service representative. Mode 1 HDD Lock Password Specify the password for protecting data on the hard disk. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. Format HDD Format the hard disk. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. HDD Encryption Setting This setting appears when the optional Security kit is installed. Specify an encryption passphrase to encrypt data in the hard disk. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. When a setting is specified, all data written to the hard disk is encrypted to protect it. If the encryption key is changed, the hard disk will be reformatted. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-41 Utility mode 12 Function Management Settings ! Detail The following functions cannot be used if "Network Function Usage Settings" is set to "OFF". PC-FAX transmission Using the HDD TWAIN driver to view and retrieve documents in user boxes Using PageScope Box Operator to view and retrieve documents in user boxes Using PageScope Scan Direct to retrieve documents in user boxes Using PageScope Job Spooler to view and retrieve documents in user boxes Box operations using the PageScope Web Connection (The User Box tab does not appear.) Stamp Settings Driver Password Encryption Setting Flash Memory Lock Password 12.4.11 License Settings 2 Note For details on Install License, refer to the Quick Guide [Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations]. 12.4.12 OpenAPI Authentication Management Setting Parameter Description Default Setting Network Function Usage Settings Specify settings for network functions that are difficult to count when managing operations. ON Parameter Description Apply Stamps Select whether or not a stamp is added when printing or sending. Delete Registered Stamp Select whether or not stamps registered for copy protection can be deleted. Description Default setting The encryption password for the printer driver can be changed. For details, refer to the User manual – Print Operations. Use Factory Default Description Default setting The lock password of flash memory can be changed or released. Use Factory Default Parameter Description Get Request Code Issues the request code for this machine that registers in the License Management Server (LMS). Install License Select the function to be enabled, and then type in the license code acquired from the License Management Server (LMS). List of Enabled Functions Enabled functions can be checked. Parameter Description Restriction Code Settings Configure settings to prevent our deprecated OpenAPI connection application from being registered in this machine. For details, contact your service representative. 12 Utility mode 12-42 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.4.13 Displaying the Administrator Settings screen Follow the procedure described below to display the Administrator Settings screen by pressing [Utility/Counter] key. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [3 Administrator Settings]. – An item can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for the number beside the desired button. For [3 Administrator Setting], press the [3] key in the keypad. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-43 Utility mode 12 3 Type in the administrator password, and then touch [OK]. – For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3. The Administrator Settings screen appears. 2 Note To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or Box mode appears. 2 Reminder The default administrator password is "12345678". The administrator of this machine should change the administrator password. Be sure to keep the administrator password in a safe place. If the administrator password is lost, it must be specified by the service representative. For details, contact the service representative. 12 Utility mode 12-44 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.5 Overview of weekly timer settings Various weekly timer settings in the Weekly Timer Setting screen can be combined. A general procedure is described below. 0 If the weekly timer has been set, leave the machine plugged into the electrical outlet even if the machine has been turned off. 0 Press the [Utility/Counter] key, touch [Administrator Settings], then [System Settings], then [Weekly Timer Setting], and correctly specify the necessary settings. 1 Set "Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings" to "ON". 2 Specify times for "Time Settings". 3 Specify dates for "Date Settings". 4 Specify the desired settings for "Select Time for Power Save" and "Password for Non-Business Hours". The weekly timer is set. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-45 Utility mode 12 12.6 Finisher Adjustment 12.6.1 Center Staple Position Adjustment The stapling position when printing with the "Center Staple & Fold" setting can be adjusted for each paper size. 2 Note [Center Staple Position Adjustment] does not appear if optional Finisher FS-610 is not installed. If the angle of the staple must be adjusted, contact your service representative. ! Detail For details on the "Center Staple & Fold" setting, refer to "Binding copies at the center ("Center Staple & Fold" setting)" on page 3-79. For the procedure on adjusting the center folding position, refer to "Half-Fold Position" on page 12-47. 0 Adjust the center folding position before adjusting the center stapling position. 0 Before making any adjustments, use the "Center Staple & Fold" setting to print a single sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [1 Center Staple Position]. The Center Staple Position screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the paper size to be adjusted. – If the paper size to be adjusted is not displayed, touch and until the desired paper size is displayed. 12 Utility mode 12-46 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7 Compare the width of the left pages of the copy sample with the width of the right pages to check for the center of the paper. – If the staple position is too far to the left of the center of the paper, touch [+] to increase the adjustment (between 0.1 mm and 12.7 mm). – Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. – If the staple position is too far to the right of the center of the paper, touch [-] to reduce the adjustment (between -0.1 mm and -12.8 mm). 8 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The stapling position is adjusted. If the stapling position was at the center of the paper in step 7, this completes the procedure. 9 Use the "Center Staple & Fold" setting to print another sample copy. 10 Check the print result. – Check that the stapling position is adjusted to the center of the paper. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 9. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-47 Utility mode 12 12.6.2 Half-Fold Position The folding position when printing with the "Half-Fold" setting can be adjusted for each paper size and for each paper type. 2 Note [Half-Fold Position] does not appear if optional Finisher FS-610 is not installed. If the angle of the center folding position must be adjusted, contact your service representative. ! Detail For details on the "Center Staple & Fold" setting, refer to "Binding copies at the center ("Center Staple & Fold" setting)" on page 3-79. 0 Before making any adjustments, use the "Half-Fold" setting to print a single sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [2 Half-Fold Position]. The Half-Fold Position screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the paper size to be adjusted. – If the paper size to be adjusted is not displayed, touch and until the desired paper size is displayed. 12 Utility mode 12-48 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7 Compare the width of the left pages of the copy sample with the width of the right pages to check for the center of the paper. – If the folding position is too far to the left of the center of the paper, touch [+] to increase the adjustment (between 0.1 mm and 12.7 mm). – Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. – If the folding position is too far to the right of the center of the paper, touch [-] to reduce the adjustment (between -0.1 mm and -12.8 mm). 8 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The center folding position is adjusted. If the folding position was at the center of the paper in step 7, this completes the procedure. 9 Use the "Half-Fold" setting to print another sample copy. 10 Check the print result. – Check that the folding position is adjusted to the center of the paper. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 9. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-49 Utility mode 12 12.6.3 Punch Vertical Position Adjustment The vertical position of punched holes when printing with a Punch setting can be adjusted for each paper size. 2 Note [Punch Vertical Position Adjustment] appears only if optional punch kit is installed on the finisher. For details on the Punch settings, refer to "Punching holes in copies (Punch settings)" on page 3-74. 0 Before making any adjustments, use a Punch setting to print a sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [3 Punch Vertical Position Adjustment]. The Punch Vertical Position screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the paper size to be adjusted. – If the paper size to be adjusted is not displayed, touch and until the desired paper size is displayed. 12 Utility mode 12-50 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7 Check the sample copy for the punch positions and for the center of the paper. – If the punch positions are too far above the center of the paper, touch [+] under "Adjust Value" to increase the adjustment (between 0.1 mm and 5.0 mm). – Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. – If the punch positions are too far blow the center of the paper, touch [-] under "Adjust Value" to increase the adjustment (between -0.1 mm and -5.0 mm). 8 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The vertical position of the punched holes is adjusted. If no adjustment of the vertical position of the punched holes was necessary in step 7, this completes the procedure. 9 Use a Punch setting to print another sample copy. 10 Check the print result. – Check that the vertical position of the punched holes was adjusted. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 9. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-51 Utility mode 12 12.6.4 Punch Unit Vertical Position Adjustment The vertical position of punched holes when printing with a Punch setting can be adjusted for each paper size. 2 Note [Punch Unit Vertical Position Adjustment] appears only if optional Z folding unit is installed. For details on the Punch settings, refer to "Punching holes in copies (Punch settings)" on page 3-74. 0 Before making any adjustments, use a Punch setting to print a sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [4 Punch Unit Vertical Position Adjustment]. The Punch Unit Vertical Position screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the paper size to be adjusted. – If the paper size to be adjusted is not displayed, touch and until the desired paper size is displayed. 12 Utility mode 12-52 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7 Check the sample copy for the punch positions and for the center of the paper. – If the punch positions are too far above the center of the paper, touch [+] under "Adjust Value" to increase the adjustment (between 0.1 mm and 5.0 mm). – Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. – If the punch positions are too far blow the center of the paper, touch [-] under "Adjust Value" to increase the adjustment (between -0.1 mm and -5.0 mm). 8 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The vertical position of the punched holes is adjusted. If no adjustment of the vertical position of the punched holes was necessary in step 7, this completes the procedure. 9 Use a Punch setting to print another sample copy. 10 Check the print result. – Check that the vertical position of the punched holes was adjusted. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 9. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-53 Utility mode 12 12.6.5 Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment The horizontal position of punched holes when printing with a Punch setting can be adjusted for each paper size. 2 Note [Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment] appears only if optional punch kit is installed on the finisher. For details on the Punch settings, refer to "Punching holes in copies (Punch settings)" on page 3-74. 0 Before making any adjustments, use a Punch setting to print a sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [5 Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment]. The Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment screen appears. 12 Utility mode 12-54 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Check the horizontal position of the punched holes. – To increase width A, touch [+] to increase the adjustment (between 0.1 mm and 5.0 mm). – Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. – To decrease width A, touch [-] to decrease the adjustment (between -0.1 mm and -5.0 mm). 7 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The horizontal position of the punched holes is adjusted. If no adjustment of the horizontal position of the punched holes was necessary in step 6, this completes the procedure. 8 Use a Punch setting to print another sample copy. 9 Check the print result. – Check that the horizontal position of the punched holes was adjusted. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 9. A A bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-55 Utility mode 12 12.6.6 Punch Unit Horizontal Position Adjustment The horizontal position of punched holes when printing with a Punch setting can be adjusted. 2 Note [Punch Unit Horizonal Position Adjustment] appears only if optical Z folding unit is installed. For details on the Punch settings, refer to "Punching holes in copies (Punch settings)" on page 3-74. 0 Before making any adjustments, use a Punch setting to print a sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [6 Punch Unit Horizontal Position Adjustment]. The Punch Unit Horizontal Position Adjustment screen appears. 6 Check the horizontal position of the punched holes. – To increase width A, touch [+] to increase the adjustment (between 0.1 mm and 5.0 mm). – Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. A 12 Utility mode 12-56 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) – To decrease width A, touch [-] to decrease the adjustment (between -0.1 mm and -5.0 mm). 7 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The horizontal position of the punched holes is adjusted. If no adjustment of the horizontal position of the punched holes was necessary in step 6, this completes the procedure. 8 Use a Punch setting to print another sample copy. 9 Check the print result. – Check that the horizontal position of the punched holes was adjusted. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 9. 12.6.7 Punch Resist Loop Size Adjustment When printing with a Punch setting, the angle of punched holes along the side of the paper can be adjusted. 2 Note [Punch Resist Loop Size Adjustment] appears only if optional punch kit is installed on the finisher. For details on the Punch settings, refer to "Punching holes in copies (Punch settings)" on page 3-74. 0 Before making any adjustments, use a Punch setting to print a sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. A bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-57 Utility mode 12 5 Touch [7 Punch Resist Loop Size Adjustment]. The Punch Resist Loop Size Adjustment screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the desired adjustment parameter. 7 Check the angle of the punched holes. – If the punched holes are angled, touch [+] to change the adjustment. If the angle cannot be adjusted by touching [+] or if the paper is wrinkled, touch [-] to change the adjustment. – Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. 8 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The angle of the punched holes is adjusted. If no adjustment of the angle of the punched holes was necessary in step 6, this completes the procedure. 9 Use a Punch setting to print another sample copy. 10 Check the print result. – Check that the angle of the punched holes was adjusted. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 7 through 10. 12 Utility mode 12-58 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.6.8 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment/2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment The first and second folding position when printing with the "Z-Fold" setting can be adjusted for each paper size. 2 Note [1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment] and [2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment] do not appear if optional Z folding unit is not installed. 0 Before making any adjustments, use the "Z-Fold" setting to print a single sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. In addition, to adjust both the 1st and 2nd folding positions for Z-folding, be sure to adjust the 1st folding position first. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [8 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment] or [9 2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment]. The Z-Fold Position Adjustment screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the paper size to be adjusted. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-59 Utility mode 12 7 Check the folding positions in the sample copy. – If the folding position is too far on the left side of the paper, touch [+] under "Adjust Value" to increase the adjustment (between 0.1 mm and 12.7 mm). – Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. – If the folding position is too far on the right side of the paper, touch [-] under "Adjust Value" to increase the adjustment (between -0.1 mm and -12.8 mm). – Adjust values so that the distance between the left edge of the paper and the 2nd Z-folding position is 2 mm or more. 8 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The folding positions are adjusted. If no adjustment of the folding positions were necessary in step 7, this completes the procedure. 1st Z-fold position 2nd Z-fold position 1st Z-fold position 2nd Z-fold position 2 mm or more 12 Utility mode 12-60 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9 Use the "Z-Fold" setting to print another sample copy. 10 Check the print result. – Check that the folding positions were adjusted. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 10. 12.6.9 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment The folding position when printing with the "Tri-Fold" setting can be adjusted for each paper size. 2 Note [Tri-Fold Position Adjustment] does not appear if optional Finisher FS-610 is not installed. 0 Before making any adjustments, use the "Tri-Fold" setting to print a single sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [10 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment]. The Tri-Fold Position Adjustment screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the paper size to be adjusted. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-61 Utility mode 12 7 Check the folding positions in the sample copy. – If the folding position is too far on the right side of the paper, touch [+] under "Adjust Value" to increase the adjustment (between 0.1 mm and 12.7 mm). – Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. – If the folding position is too far on the left side of the paper, touch [-] under "Adjust Value" to increase the adjustment (between -0.1 mm and -12.8 mm). 8 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The folding positions are adjusted. If no adjustment of the folding positions were necessary in step 7, this completes the procedure. 9 Use the "Tri-Fold" setting to print another sample copy. 10 Check the print result. – Check that the folding positions were adjusted. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 10. 12 Utility mode 12-62 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.6.10 2-Position Staple Pitch Adjustment The distance between staples when printing with the "2 Position" Staple setting ("Staple" and "Center Staple & Fold") can be adjusted. 2 Note [2-Position Staple Pitch Adjustment] does not appear if optional Finisher FS-610 is not installed. 0 Before making any adjustments, use the "2 Position" Staple setting to print a sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [Forward ], and then touch [1 2-Position Staple Pitch Adjustment]. The Adjust Spacing of 2 Staples screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the setting to be adjusted. 7 Check the stapling positions in the sample copy. – Touch [+] or [-] under "Adjust Value" to adjust the distance (between 128 mm and 160 mm) between the staples. – Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. 8 Touch [OK]. The distance between the staples is adjusted. If no adjustment of the distance between the staples was necessary in step 7, this completes the procedure. 9 Use the "2 Position" Staple setting to print another sample copy. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-63 Utility mode 12 10 Check the print result. – Check that the distance between the staples was adjusted. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 10. 12.6.11 Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment The sensors for detecting the size of paper loaded in the paper trays of the optional post inserter can be adjusted. 2 Note [Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment] appears only if optional post inserter is installed. 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [Forward ], and then touch [2 Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment]. The Post Inserter Tray Size Adj. screen appears. 6 Load the selected paper in the paper tray for the post inserter, and then press the [Start] key. 7 Touch [Close]. 12 Utility mode 12-64 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.7 Header/Footer Settings Follow the procedures described below to specify headers/footers used with the Stamp/Composition functions available from the Application tab. 12.7.1 Specifying headers/footers 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [1 System Settings]. The System Settings screen appears. 3 Touch [Forward ], and then touch [2 Stamp Settings]. The Stamp Settings screen appears. 4 Touch [1 Header/Footer Settings]. The Header/Footer Settings screen appears. 5 Touch [New]. The Header/Footer Settings > New screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-65 Utility mode 12 6 Touch [Name]. The New > Name screen appears. 7 Type in the header/footer name (up to 16 characters long), and then touch [OK]. – For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3. The header/footer name is specified. 12 Utility mode 12-66 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8 Under "Header Settings" or "Footer Settings", touch [Print], and then select the type of header/footer to be printed. Touch [Close]. 9 Select the desired setting under "Pages", and specify the desired settings for "Text Size" and "Print Position". 10 Touch [OK]. ! Detail To print the header/footer only on the first page, touch [1st Page Only]. 12.7.2 Editing headers/footers 1 In the Header/Footer Settings screen, touch the button of the header/footer to be edited. 2 Touch [Check/Edit]. – To delete the header/footer, touch [Delete]. The Check/Edit screen appears. 3 Touch [OK]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-67 Utility mode 12 12.8 Authentication Method Specify user authentication and account track settings in order to control the use of this machine. User authentication settings are specified to manage individuals, and account track settings are specified to manage groups and multiple users. By specifying both user authentication and account track settings, the number of prints made by each account can be managed for each individual user. 2 Note A total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered on this machine. If an authentication mode is set, the authentication screen is displayed while this machine is in standby. In order to use this machine when user authentication or account track settings are specified, the user name and password must be entered. For details, refer to "Controlling each user’s use of this machine (User Authentication)" on page 2-38. User authentication and account track can be specified without synchronizing. 12.8.1 User authentication and account track User authentication and account track can be used to specify the following settings. - User Authentication – Limits on the available functions (copy operations, scanning operations, fax operations, printing, document storing operations, transmitted document printing and saving document to the external memory) – Counters for printing/scanning by each user – Management of group user boxes and personal user boxes for each owner – Management of the level and the group with permissions to access destinations by each owner – Delete jobs of other users - Account Track – Counters for printing/scanning from each account – Operates the group box 12.8.2 When user authentication and account track are synchronized This setup is used when the machine is used by multiple departments and the use by each employee is managed by each department. With this setup, statistics can be maintained on each employee (each user) and on each department (each account). To manage the use of this machine in this way, specify the following authentication settings. User 1 User 2 Group A Group B Account Parameter on Authentication Method screen Settings User Authentication Select "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)". Account Track Select "ON", and then specify the account name and password. Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track Select "Synchronize". Account Name (on User Registration screen) Select an account name if "ON (MFP)" was selected. 12 Utility mode 12-68 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2 Note For details on external server authentication, refer to the User manual – Network Administrator. 12.8.3 When user authentication and account track are used separately This setup is used when the machine is used by multiple employees with each employee performing multiple duties, which are to be totaled separately. With this setup, statistics can be maintained for each employee (each user) and on each duty of the employee (each account). In addition, totals can be maintained on each employee (each user) and each duty (each account) even if the same duty is performed by two different employees. To manage the use of this machine in this way, specify the following authentication settings. User 1 User 2 Account Group A Group B Group C Parameter on Authentication Method screen Settings User Authentication Select "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)". Account Track Select "ON", and then specify the account name and password. Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track Select "Do Not Synchronize". bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-69 Utility mode 12 12.8.4 Selecting an authentication method 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [1 General Settings]. The General Settings screen appears. 4 Specify a setting for "User Authentication". – To cancel user authentication, touch [OFF]. – To use an external server to perform user authentication, touch [External Server Authentication], and then select the server type. – In order to use an external server, the external server must first be registered. – To use this machine’s authentication system to perform user authentication, touch [ON (MFP)] 5 Specify a setting for "Public User Access". – To prohibit unregistered users from using this machine, touch [Restrict]. – To allow this machine to be used by touching [Public User Access] in the authentication screen without entering a user name or password even though user authentication settings have been applied, touch [Allow]. – "ON (Without Login)" allows the machine to be used without authentication when logging on as a public user. When logging on as an authorized user, the [Access] key must be pressed first to display the authentication screen. 6 Specify a setting for "Account Track". – To cancel account tracking, touch [OFF]. – To use the account track function, touch [ON]. 7 Specify a setting for "Account Track Input Method". – To allow this machine to be used after the account name and password are entered in the account track screen, touch [Account Name & Password]. – To allow this machine to be used after the password is entered in the account track screen, touch [Password Only]. 12 Utility mode 12-70 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8 Specify a setting for "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track". – Synchronize "ON (MFP)" is set and "Account Track" is set to "ON", this setting allows this machine to be used simply by entering user authentication information the first time that the machine is used if the corresponding account was specified during user registration. When "External Server Authentication" is selected and "Account Track" is "ON", and once the machine is used with the appropriate user authentication and account track information entered, this setting allows the machine to be used simply by entering user authentication information by being synchronized with the authenticated account. – Do Not Synchronize This setting requires that all information be entered for user authentication and account track each time that the machine is used. 9 Touch . The second screen is displayed. 10 Specify a setting for "When # of Jobs Reach Maximum". – To skip the job when the limit specified with user authentication or account track is reached, touch [Skip Job]. – To stop all jobs when the limit specified with user authentication or account track is reached, touch [Stop Job]. 11 Specify a setting for "Number of User Counters Assigned". – Press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then use the keypad to specify the desired value (between 1 and 999). – If user authentication and account track settings have been applied, counters can be assigned to both accounts and users, and counts for both can be totaled. 12 Specify "Ticket Hold Time Setting". – Use the keypad to type in the time. (1 to 60 minutes) – Specify the holding time of Kerveros authentication ticket. The holding time setting is applied when Active Directory is selected as the authentication server type. 13 Touch [OK]. – If the setting for "User Authentication", "Account Track" or "Number of User Counters Assigned" was changed, the message "Are you sure you want to clear all data?" appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-71 Utility mode 12 14 Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. – To stop clearing the usage data without changing the settings, touch [No]. – If the setting for any of the following is changed, the data is not cleared. "Public User Access", "When # of Jobs Reach Maximum", "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" or "Ticket Hold Time Setting" – To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. The authentication method is set. Continue by specifying settings for user authentication and account track. 2 Reminder Do not use a name including uppercase and lowercase of the same character for the user name of the external server. Since bizhub 751/601 cannot differentiate between uppercase and lowercase letters, the operation may not be performed correctly. 2 Note "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" can be specified if "User Authentication" is set to "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)" and "Account Track" is set to "ON". If "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" is set to "Synchronize", even when "Public User Access" is set to "Allow", "Public User Access" changes to "Restrict". "Number of User Counters Assigned for Users" can be specified if "User Authentication" is set to "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)" and "Account Track" is set to "ON". If the number of user counters is set to "50", up to 950 accounts can be registered. ! Detail For details on external server authentication, refer to the User manual – Network Administrator. If "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" was set to "Do Not Synchronize", use by a public user is not permitted. If both user authentication and account track settings have been applied, "Account Name & Password" is selected. A public user can be set to provide temporary access to this machine. If public user access is permitted, it is recommended that limitations be placed on the machine functions that can be used. For details, refer to "User Registration" on page 12-74. If account track settings have been applied while "User Authentication" is set to "ON (MFP)" or "ON (External Server)", type in the user name and password in the user authentication screen, and then type in the account name and password in the account track screen. When "ON (MFP)" is selected and "Account Track" is "ON", and once the machine is used with the appropriate user authentication and account track information entered, the authenticated account is registered to the account name. The machine can be used simply by entering user authentication information from the next time. 12 Utility mode 12-72 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.9 User Authentication Setting User authentication settings can be specified. 12.9.1 Administrative Settings—List User authentication settings can be specified to display [List] in the user authentication screen and the User Name screen. Touch [List] to display a list of registered user names from which the desired user name can simply be selected. (The default setting is "OFF".) 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [2 User Authentication Settings]. The User Authentication Setting screen appears. ? Why is [2 User Authentication Settings] not available? % [2 User Authentication Settings] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to "OFF". 4 Touch [1 Administrative Settings]. 5 Touch [User Name List]. Buttons for the available settings appear. 6 Touch the button for the desired setting. Whether or not a user name list button appears is set. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-73 Utility mode 12 12.9.2 Default Function Permission If external server authentication was selected, limitations can be placed on the machine functions that can be used by an authorized user. (The default setting is "Allow".) The following operations can be limited. - Copy operations - Scan operations - Fax operations - Printing from a printer - Saving documents on the hard disk - Printing the transmitted document - Saving the document to the external memory - Manual destination input 2 Note To limit machine use by registered users, specify settings in the User Registration screen. With "Print Scan/Fax TX", printing can be prevented when scanning or faxing a document saved in a box. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [2 User Authentication Settings]. The User Authentication Setting screen appears. ? Why is [2 User Authentication Settings] not available? % [2 User Authentication Settings] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to "OFF". 4 Touch [1 Administrative Settings]. 5 Touch [Default Function Permission]. The Function Permission screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the desired settings. 7 Touch [OK]. The default function permissions are set. 12 Utility mode 12-74 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.9.3 Public User Access If user authentication settings have been specified and public user access is permitted, there are two methods for authenticating the public user. Allow: Touch [Public User] in the authentication screen to display the Basic Screen and operate the machine. ON (Without Login): The machine can be used without authentication when logging on as a public user. When logging on as an authorized user, the [Access] key must be pressed first to display the authentication screen. (The default setting is "Restrict".) 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [1 General Settings]. 4 Touch [Public User Access]. Buttons for the available settings appear. 5 Touch the button for the desired setting. The public user authentication method is set. ! Detail [Public User Access] is not available if "User Authentication" is set to "OFF". To log on as a general user when "Public User Access" is set to "On (Without Login)", press the [Access] key to display the Basic screen. 12.9.4 User Registration The password, number of prints allowed, and function permissions can be specified for each user of this machine. In addition, if an authentication unit is installed on this machine, the user’s IC card or the vein patterns of their finger can be registered. As an example, the following procedure describes how to register a user with authentication performed by the machine. 0 A total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered on this machine. 0 If "Public User Access" on the General Settings screen is set to "Allow", a public user is added. Function limitations can be specified for the public user. 0 If "Account Track" on the General Settings screen is set to "ON", the number of users set for "Number of User Counters Assigned" can be registered. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [2 User Authentication Settings]. The User Authentication Setting screen appears. ? Why is [2 User Authentication Settings] not available? % [2 User Authentication Settings] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to "OFF". 4 Touch [2 User Registration]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-75 Utility mode 12 5 Touch the button for the desired user, and then touch [Edit]. The Edit screen for the user appears. 6 Touch [User Name]. The User Name screen appears. 7 Type in the user name (up to 64 characters long), and then touch [OK]. – For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3. – Once a user name is registered, it cannot be changed. – A user name that has already been registered cannot be used again. The user name is set. 8 Touch [Password]. The Password screen appears. ? Why is [Password] not available? % [Password] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to "ON (External Server)". 9 Type in the password (up to 64 characters long), and then touch [OK]. For confirmation, the Password screen appears again. Retype the same password, and then touch [OK]. The user password is set. 10 Touch [E-Mail Address]. The E-Mail Address screen appears. 12 Utility mode 12-76 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11 Type in the e-mail address (up to 320 characters), and then touch [OK]. The e-mail address is set. If the e-mail address exceeds 69 characters, [Detail] appears in the User Registration screen. Touch [Details] to display the E-Mail Address Details screen and the entire e-mail address. 12 To use the account track function, touch [Account Name]. – [Account Name] appears only if "Account Track" on the General Settings screen been set to "ON". The Account Name screen appears. 13 Touch the button for the desired account, and then touch [OK]. – Before an account name can be selected, accounts must have been registered. For details on registering accounts, refer to "Account Track Registration" on page 12-80. The account is set. 14 Touch [Max. Allowance Set]. The Max. Allowance Set screen appears. 15 To specify the maximum number of prints allowed, use the keypad to type in the desired value. – To specify no maximum for prints, touch [No Limit]. 16 Touch [OK]. The maximum number of prints allowed is set. 17 To use authentication unit (biometric type) or authentication unit (IC card type), touch [Register Auth. Info.]. – [Register Auth. Info.] appears only if an authentication unit is installed on this machine. The Register Auth. Info. screen appears. 18 Touch [Edit]. – When using authentication unit (biometric type), place a finger on the authentication unit and register the vein patterns. – When using authentication unit (IC card type), place an IC card on the authentication unit and register the card information. 19 Touch [Function Permission]. The Function Permission screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-77 Utility mode 12 20 Touch the button for the desired setting for each operation. – To permit the operation to be performed, touch [Allow]. – To prohibit the operation to be performed, touch [Restrict]. – Touch [All Users] to apply the settings in the current screen to all registered users. Touch [All Users], touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. – With "Print Scan/Fax TX", printing can be prevented when scanning or faxing a document saved in a box. – Depending on the function limitation settings that are specified, a different Basic screen may appear when logging on. The Basic screen that appears changes in the following order: Copy % Scan % Fax % Box. – If no operation is permitted, user authentication cannot be performed. 21 Touch [OK]. The function permissions are set. 22 Touch [Forward ], and then touch [Icon]. The Select Icon screen appears. 23 Select an icon to display in the user list, and then touch [OK]. The icon is set. 24 Touch [OK]. – To cancel the settings in the current screen, touch [Cancel]. – To delete the selected user information, touch [Delete] in the User Registration screen. 12 Utility mode 12-78 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.9.5 User Counter The following data for each user can be checked. Copy + Print This table shows the total number of pages printed with copy and print operations. - Total: Total number of printed pages - Max Allowance: Limits specified during user registration for the number of pages - Large Size: Total number of pages printed on large-sized paper Copy This table shows the total number of pages printed with copy operations. - Total: Total number of copied pages - Large Size: Total number of pages copied on large-sized paper Print This table shows the total number of pages printed with print operations. - Total: Total number of printout pages - Large Size: Total number of printout pages printed on large-sized paper Fax/Scan - Total: Total number of pages scanned/total number of prints in the Fax and Scan modes. - Large Size: Total number of pages scanned/total number of prints in the Fax and Scan modes for paper specified as large-size paper Original Counter - This counter shows the number of original pages that were scanned. Paper Counter - This counter shows the number of pages used for printing. Fax TX - Fax TX: Total number of pages transmitted with fax operations 2 Note Counting automatically continues with user counters when using external server authentication. The public user access is counted as "public" of the counter. The user box administrator access is counted as "BoxAdmin" of the counter. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-79 Utility mode 12 12.9.6 Viewing user counters 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [2 User Authentication Settings]. The User Authentication Setting screen appears. ? Why is [2 User Authentication Settings] not available? % [2 User Authentication Settings] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to "OFF". 4 Touch [3 User Counter]. 5 Touch the button for the desired user, and then touch [Counter Details]. The Counter Details screen for the user appears. 6 Touch the button for the counter to be viewed, and then check the counter. – To clear the counters for the current user, touch [Clear Counter] in the Counter Details screen for the current user. A confirmation message appears, asking whether the counter should be cleared. To clear the counters for the displayed user, touch [Yes] in the confirmation message screen, and then touch [OK]. The maximum number allowed is not cleared. – To clear the counters for all users, touch [Reset All Counters] in the User Counter screen. A confirmation message appears, asking whether the counters should be cleared. To clear the counters for all users, touch [Yes] in the confirmation message screen, and then touch [OK]. The maximum number allowed is not cleared. 7 Touch [Close]. 12 Utility mode 12-80 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.10 Account Track Setting 12.10.1 Account Track Registration The password and number of prints allowed can be specified for each account using this machine. 2 Note A total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered on this machine. 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [3 Account Track Settings]. The Account Track Setting screen appears. 4 Touch [1 Account Track Registration]. 5 Touch the button for the desired account, and then touch [Edit]. The Edit screen for the account appears. If “Account Name & Password” was selected: bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-81 Utility mode 12 – If "Account Name & Password" was selected, the same account name cannot be used more than once. – The screen that appears differs depending on the setting selected for "Account Track Input Method". 6 Touch [Account Name]. The Account Name screen appears. 7 Type in the account name (up to 8 characters long), and then touch [OK]. – For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3. – If [Name] was displayed, type in the account name (up to 20 characters), and then touch [OK]. – If "Account Track Input Method" was set to "Account Name & Password", the same account name cannot be registered more than once. The account name is set. 8 Touch [Password]. – If "Account Track Input Method" was set to "Password Only", the same password cannot be registered more than once. The Password screen appears. 9 Type in the password (up to 8 characters long), and then touch [OK]. A screen for retyping the password appears. If “Password Only” was selected: 12 Utility mode 12-82 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10 Retype the password specified in step 9, and then touch [OK]. The user password is set. 11 Touch [Max. Allowance Set]. The Max. Allowance Set screen appears. 12 To specify the maximum number of prints allowed, use the keypad to type in the desired value. – To specify no maximum for color and black prints, touch [No Limit]. – Touch [All Accounts] to apply the settings in the current screen to all registered accounts. Touch [All Accounts], touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears in order to display a message and apply the settings to all accounts. At this time, do not turn off the machine with the main power switch. 13 Touch [OK]. The maximum number of prints allowed is set. 14 Touch [OK]. – To delete the selected account information, touch [Delete]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-83 Utility mode 12 12.10.2 Account Track Counter The following data for each account can be checked. Copy + Print This table shows the total number of pages printed with copy and print operations. - Total: Total number of printed pages - Max Allowance: Limits specified during account registration for the number of pages - Large Size: Total number of pages printed on large-sized paper Copy This table shows the total number of pages printed with copy operations. - Total: Total number of copied pages - Large Size: Total number of pages copied on large-sized paper Print This table shows the total number of pages printed with print operations. - Total: Total number of printout pages - Large Size: Total number of printout pages printed on large-sized paper Fax/Scan - Total: Total number of pages scanned/total number of prints in the Fax and Scan modes. - Large Size: Total number of pages scanned/total number of prints in the Fax and Scan modes for paper specified as large-size paper Original Counter - This counter shows the number of original pages that were scanned. Paper Counter - This counter shows the number of pages used for printing. Fax TX Count - Total number of pages transmitted with fax operations 2 Note The public user access is counted as "public" of the counter. 12 Utility mode 12-84 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12.10.3 Viewing account counters 1 Display the Administrator Settings screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Settings screen" on page 12-42. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [3 Account Track Settings]. The Account Track Setting screen appears. 4 Touch [2 Account Track Counter]. 5 Touch the button for the desired account, and then touch [Counter Details]. The Counter Details screen for the account appears. 6 Touch the button for the counter to be viewed, and then check the counter. – To clear the counters for the current account, touch [Clear Counter] in the Counter Details screen for the current account. A confirmation message appears, asking whether the counter should be cleared. To clear the counters for the displayed account, touch [Yes] in the confirmation message screen, and then touch [OK]. The maximum number allowed is not cleared. – To clear the counters for all accounts, touch [Reset All Counters] in the Account Track Counter screen containing a list of all accounts. A confirmation message appears, asking whether the counters should be cleared. To clear the counters for all accounts, touch [Yes] in the confirmation message screen, and then touch [OK]. The maximum number allowed is not cleared. 7 Touch [Close]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-85 Utility mode 12 12.11 Password Rules If password rules have been applied, the following limitations are applied to the passwords in order to increase security. If password rules are applied and already specified passwords do not meet the password rules, those passwords are not accepted when they are entered. In that case, ask the administrator to change the passwords to meet the following conditions. ! Detail The following conditions apply to the characters used in passwords. Uppercase and lowercase letters are differentiated. Symbols other than the plus sign (+) and quotation mark (") can be used. 12.11.1 Conditions of the password rules Administrator password 2 Note Use when specifying administrator settings. User passwords 2 Note Use when specifying user authentication settings. Account passwords 2 Note Use when specifying account track settings. Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering/changing 8 alphanumeric characters and symbols • A password that consists of a repetition of the same character cannot be registered. • The same password as one before being changed cannot be registered. Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering/changing 8 or more alphanumeric characters and symbols • A password that consists of a repetition of the same character cannot be registered. • The same password as one before being changed cannot be registered. Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering/changing 8 alphanumeric characters and symbols • A password that consists of a repetition of the same character cannot be registered. • The same password as one before being changed cannot be registered. 12 Utility mode 12-86 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Box passwords 2 Note Specify 8 characters (numbers, * or #) as the fax transmission password for boxes. Confidential document passwords 2 Note If any password not following the Password Rules, Secure Print cannot be performed. Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering/changing 8 alphanumeric characters and symbols • A password that consists of a repetition of the same character cannot be registered. • The same password as one before being changed cannot be registered. Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering/changing 8 alphanumeric characters and symbols • A password that consists of a repetition of the same character cannot be registered. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-87 Utility mode 12 12.12 Enhanced Security Mode When enhanced security mode is applied on this machine, various security settings are set in order to increase security when managing scan data. Restrictions are applied to user operations, public user access is prohibited, and box operations and print jobs are limited. There are various settings that must first be specified or are forcibly set in order for "Enhanced Security Mode" to be set to "ON". Before setting "Enhanced Security Mode" to "ON", be sure to check the settings for the security functions. 2 Reminder If there are settings that are incompatible with the enhanced security Mode, "Enhanced Security Mode" cannot be set to "ON". ! Detail Certain conditions must be met in order for the enhanced security features to be applied. For details, contact your service representative. The settings that must be specified or are forcibly set cannot be changed after "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON". Required settings The following settings must first be specified in order to set "Enhanced Security Mode" to "ON". ! Detail If "Account Track" is set to "ON" in the General Settings screen, set "Account Track Input Method" to "Account Name & Password". [SSL] appears when a certificate is registered with PageScope Web Connection. Administrator mode parameters Settings User Authentication/Account Track—General Settings— User Authentication Select "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)". System Connection—Open API Settings—SSL The button must be displayed. Security Settings—Administrator Password Specify a password that meets the password rules. Security Settings—HDD Settings—HDD Lock Password *Otherwise, install the optional security kit. Specify the hard disk locking password. Security Settings/Security Details/Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error/Release Time Settings Specify 5 minutes or longer. Security Settings/Flash Memory Lock Password Specify the flash memory locking password. 12 Utility mode 12-88 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Changed settings For increased security, the following settings are set when "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON". 2 Note The number of times for checking for "Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error" can be changed to a number between 1 and 3. A changed setting cannot be changed when "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "OFF". When "Password Rules" is set to "Enable", a password that does not meet the password rules is considered a failed attempt during authentication. For details on the password rules, refer to "Password Rules" on page 12-85. When "Overwrite Temporary Data" is set to "Mode 2", it cannot be changed to "Mode 1" even if "Enhanced Security Mode" is "ON". For details on the changed network settings, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations. User operation limitations When "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON", an icon appears in the screen and limitations are placed on the user for the following operations. - A public user cannot use this machine. - The list of users does not appear in the user authentication screen. - When user authentication has failed the specified number of times, the control panel can no longer be operated. If operation of the control panel is restricted, touch [Release], and then select the items whose operation restrictions are canceled. - The destination cannot be changed by the user. - This machine’s counter data cannot be retrieved by PageScope Net Care or PageScope VISUALCOUNT-MASTER. - An application performing the write operation with SNMP v1/v2c cannot be connected. - Write users using SNMP v3 must be authenticated. 2 Note For details on the limitations placed on the user for box operations, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. For details on the limitations placed on the user for printing, refer to the User manual – Print Operations. For details on canceling operation restrictions applied when authentication failed, refer to "Security Settings" on page 12-38. Administrator mode parameters Changed settings System Settings—Restrict User Access—Restrict Access to Job Settings—Registering and Changing Addresses Set to "Restrict". User Authentication/Account Track—General Settings— Public User Access Set to "Restrict". User Authentication/Account Track—User Authentication Settings—Administrative Settings—User Name List Set to "OFF". User Authentication/Account Track—Print Without Authentication Set to "Restrict". Security Settings—User Box Administrator Setting Set to "Restrict". Security Settings—Security Details—Password Rules Set to "Enable". Security Settings—Security Details—Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error Set to "Mode 2" and three times or less for checking. Security Settings—Security Details—Confidential Document Access Method Set to "Mode 2". Security Settings—HDD Setting—Overwrite Temporary Data Set to "Mode 1". 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-3 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13.1 Safety information Carefully read this information, and then store it in a safe place. - Before using this device, carefully read this information and follow it to operate the device correctly. - After reading this information, store it in the designated holder with the warranty. Important information The reprinting or reproduction of the content of this publication, either in part or in full, is prohibited without prior permission. The content of this publication is subject to change without notice. This publication was created with careful attention to content; however, if inaccuracies or errors are noticed, please contact your sales representative. The marketing and authorization to use the our company’s product mentioned in this information are provided entirely on an "as is" basis. Our company’s assumes no responsibility for any damage (including lost profits or other related damages) caused by this product or its use as a result of operations not described in this information. For disclaimers and warranty and liability details, refer to the user manual Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-101). This product is designed, manufactured and intended for general business use. Do not use it for applications requiring high reliability and which may have an extreme impact on lives and property. (Applications requiring high reliability: Chemical plant management, medical equipment management and emergency communications management) Use with other authentication devices is not guaranteed. In order to incorporate improvements in the product, the specifications concerning this product are subject to change without notice. For safe use Warning Symbol • Do not this product near water, otherwise it may be damaged. • Do not cut, damage, modify or forcefully bend the USB cable. A malfunction may occur as a result of a damaged or cut USB cable. • Do not disassembly this device, otherwise it may be damaged. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Regulation notices USER INSTRUCTIONS FCC PART 15 - RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES (For U.S.A. Users) NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interface by one or more of the following measures: - Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. - Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. - Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. - Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help 7 WARNING The design and production of this unit conform to FCC regulations, and any changes or modifications must be registered with the FCC and are subject to FCC control. % Any changes made by the purchaser or user without first contacting the manufacturer will be subject to penalty under FCC regulations. INTERFERENCE-CAUSING EQUIPMENT STANDARD (ICES-003 ISSUE 4) (For Canada Users) This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. FCC part 15 FCC: Declaration of Conformity Product Type Authentication unit (Biometric type) Product Name AU-101 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference, and this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-5 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 13.2 Using Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101 The Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101 is a biometric authentication system that performs user authentication by scanning vein patterns in a finger. Log on to this machine and print job operation can be authenticated with finger vein patterns when using this machine with user authentication settings specified. The status of the authentication unit is indicated by a status indicator and tone. In order to use the authentication unit, user finger vein patterns must first be registered with the machine. A registered user can log on to this machine or print a print job after completing authentication with their finger vein patterns. The following procedures describe how to specify the necessary settings on the machine, register users, and perform the logon and print job operations after completing authentication. 2 Note Align the index finger with the indentation and notch in the scanner, and then position the finger so that the tip lightly touches the edge of the scanner. Place your thumb and middle finger down to hold the authentication unit in place on both sides, and avoid moving the index finger being used for authentication. 2 Reminder Do not place any object other than your finger in the scanner of the authentication unit while scanning, otherwise the device may malfunction. Do not disconnect the cable connecting the authentication unit to the computer while scanning, otherwise the system may become unstable. Status indicator Device status Lit (green) Standing by/authentication completed Flashing (green) Authenticating/scanning Lit (red) Authentication failed/scanning failed Off The authentication unit is not detected. Tone Device status One short beep Starting to scan One short beep Retrying after authentication failed One short beep Authentication completed Two short beeps Authentication failed 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13.2.1 Settings of this machine ! Detail User authentication on the machine must be set for machine authentication. 2 Note This device does not support external server authentication. To combine account track settings with user authentication settings, set Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track to "Synchronize". When you set "Do Not Synchronize", the ID & Print function cannot be used. 1 From the control panel of the multifunctional product, touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track] on the Administrator Settings screen, and then touch [1 General Settings]. 2 Set "User Authentication" to "ON (MFP)", and then touch [OK]. 3 Touch [8 Authentication Device Settings], then [1 General Settings], then [Bio Authentication]. 4 Select the desired settings under "Beep Sound" and "Operation Settings". – Under "Beep Sound", select whether or not a beep is produced when scanning of the finger vein pattern is completed successfully. – Under "Operation Settings", select the logon method after registration. 1-to-many authentication: Logon is possible simply by positioning the finger. 1-to-1 authentication: Logon is possible by entering a user name and positioning the finger. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-7 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 – For details on logging on, refer to "Logging on to this machine" on page 13-20. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 6 Touch [2 Logoff Settings]. 7 Select whether or not the user is logged off when scanning of the document is finished after the user has logged on to this machine. 8 Touch [OK]. 9 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13.2.2 Registering users There are two methods for registering users. - Connecting the authentication unit to the machine and registering directly from the machine - Connecting the authentication unit to a computer and registering using Data Administrator ! Detail Registered user data is stored on the hard disk of the machine. If the user authentication method on the machine is changed or the hard disk is reformatted, the registered user data is erased. Registering from the control panel of this machine 1 From the control panel of the machine, touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track] on the Administrator Settings screen, and then touch [2 Authentication System], then [2 User Registration]. – [2 User Authentication Settings] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to "OFF". 2 Touch the button for a registration number, and then touch [Edit]. 3 Touch [Register Auth. Info.]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-9 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 4 Touch [Edit]. 5 Position the finger on the authentication unit to scan the finger vein pattern. – Scan the finger vein pattern three times, removing and repositioning the same finger, and touch [OK] after each time. 6 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. 7 Type the user name and the password. 8 If desired, specify the function limitations. 9 Touch [OK]. 10 Touch [Close]. Registering from Data Administrator In order to use Data Administrator, settings must be specified on the machine and the setup procedure must be performed. The setup procedure includes installing BioDriver (USB-Driver) of the authentication unit, then installing Data Administrator Bio Plugin. 2 Reminder Data Administrator ver. 4.0 or later must first be installed on the computer. For details on the operating environment and installation procedure for Data Administrator, refer to the user manual for the Data Administrator. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Checking the currently installed version 1 From the "Help" menu of Data Administrator, click "Version Information". – If the version appears as "3.x": This software cannot be used. Install version 4.x. – If Data Administrator ver. 3.x is installed, it is removed when version 4.x is installed. 2 Click the [Plug-in version] button. 3 From the "Plug-in information list", check the version of the Data Administrator plug-in. – If the plug-in version appears as "4.x": This software can be used. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-11 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 Setup 1 Turn off the machine with the main power switch, and then disconnect the authentication unit from the machine. 2 Install BioDriver (USB-Driver). – Plug the cable from the authentication unit into the USB port on the computer. – The Found New Hardware Wizard starts. 3 Select "Yes, now and every time I connect a device", and then click [Next]. 4 Insert the application DVD included with the authentication unit into the DVD drive of the computer. 5 Select "Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)", and then click [Next]. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Select the "Include this location in the search" check box, check that the application DVD appears as a location to be searched, and then click [Next]. – If the application DVD does not appear as a location to be searched for the driver, click [Browse], select the BioDriver (USB-Driver) folder on the DVD, and then click [OK]. The installation begins. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 7 Click [Finish]. 8 Repeat steps 5 through 7. The installation of BioDriver (USB-Driver) is completed. 9 Install Data Administrator Bio Plugin. Open the DA_Bio_Plugin folder on the application DVD, and then click "setup.exe". 10 Select the language, and then click [OK]. The installer starts up. 11 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen to complete the installation. 12 Click [Next]. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13 Select "I accept the terms of the license agreement", and then click [Next]. 14 Click [Install]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-15 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 15 Click [Finish]. Data Administrator Bio Plugin is installed, and the setup is completed. Registering users 2 Reminder In order to register users with Data Administrator, the authentication unit must be connected to the USB port of the computer, and the computer and this machine must be connected over a network. 1 If the authentication unit is connected to the machine, turn off the machine with the main power switch, and then disconnect the authentication unit. – If the authentication unit is connected to the computer, continue with step 4. – When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off. – Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable, otherwise the cable may be damaged. 2 Turn on the machine with the main power switch. 3 Connect the authentication unit to the USB port of the computer installed with Data Administrator. – Do not connect other USB devices to the same port where the authentication unit is connected. If enough USB power is not provided, the authentication unit may not operate correctly. – When using a USB hub, be sure to use a self-powered USB hub that can provide 500 mA or more. – After connecting the authentication unit, wait at least 5 seconds before operating it. This machine Network USB Computer Authentication unit 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4 Start up Data Administrator, and then import the device information for the machine. – For details on importing the device information, refer to the user manual for Data Administrator. The Device information pane appears. 5 Select "User authentication settings" in the Function selection pane, and then click [Add]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-17 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 6 Select a template, and then click [OK]. The User settings dialog box appears. 7 Type in the user name and password, click the Vein Authentication tab, and then click [Import]. – If desired, type in the e-mail address. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8 Position the finger on the authentication unit, and then click [Start reading]. – Scan the finger vein pattern three times, removing and repositioning the same finger each time. – After scanning the finger vein patterns, place the same finger, and press [Authentication Test]. – If your finger vein patterns have been authenticated in the authentication test, press [New]. If authentication has failed, retry scanning the finger. 9 Click [Register]. 10 Click [OK]. – Repeat steps 5 through 10 until all users have been registered. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-19 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 11 Click [Export to the device]. – To change the registered data, select the user name, and then click [Edit]. 12 Click [Write]. – Data Administrator is equipped with a batch copy feature that allows the registered user data to be specified on multiple machines specified to be used with the authentication unit. The registered user data is specified on the machine. 13 Click [OK]. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14 Disconnect the authentication unit from this USB port of the computer. 15 Turn off the machine with the main power switch, connect the authentication unit, and then turn on the machine with the main power switch. – When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off. – Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable, otherwise the cable may be damaged. 13.2.3 Logging on to this machine Follow the procedures described below to log on to this machine by completing authentication with finger vein patterns. When "1-to-many authentication" has been specified 1 Position the registered finger on the authentication unit. 2 The user is authenticated, and the Basic screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-21 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 When "1-to-1 authentication" has been specified 1 Type in the user name. 2 Position the registered finger on the authentication unit. The user is authenticated, and the Basic screen appears. 2 Note If authentication fails many times, the authentication data may not be registered correctly. Therefore, register the user again. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13.2.4 ID & Print function Print jobs sent from a computer are saved in the ID & Print user box on the machine and can be printed after authentication is completed with finger vein patterns. This is called the ID & Print function. In addition, documents saved in the ID & Print user box can be checked and specified to be printed from the control panel of the machine. 2 Note For details on the printer driver settings and Box mode functions, refer to the user manual included with the machine. ID & Print (For Windows) Specifying settings on the Configure tab 1 For Windows 2000/NT 4.0, click the [Start] button, point to "Settings", and then click "Printers". For Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [Start] button, and then click "Printers and Faxes". For Windows Vista/Server 2008, click the [Start] button, and then click "Control panel", "Hardware and Sound", and "Printers". For Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, click the [Start] button, and then click "Control panel", and "Devices and Printers". – If "Printers and Faxes" does not appear in the Start menu in Windows XP/Server 2003, open the Control Panel from the Start menu, select "Printers and Other Hardware", and then select "Printers and Faxes". – For Windows Vista/Server 2008, if the control panel is in the classic view, double-click "Printers". – For Windows 7/Server 2008, if the control panel is in an icon view, click "Devices and Printers". 2 Right-click the icon of the installed printer, and then click "Properties". 3 Click the Configure tab. 4 Select "User Authentication" under "Device Option". 5 Select "ON (Device)" from the "Setting" drop-down list. 6 Select "ID & Print" under "Device Option". 7 Select "Allow" from the "Setting" drop-down list. 8 Click [Apply], and then click [OK]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-23 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 Sending a print job 1 Open the data in the application, click [File], and then click [Print]. 2 Check that the printer name has been selected in "Printer Name" or "Select Printer". If the printer is not selected, click to select the printer. – The Print dialog box differs depending on the application. 3 Click [Preferences] (or [Properties]). 4 Click the Basic tab. 5 Click the [Authentication/Account Track] button. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Select "Recipient User", and then enter the user name and password. – If [User Authentication/Account Track] - [User Authentication Settings] - [Administrative Setting] - [ID & Print Settings] - "Public User" is set to "Save" in the Administrator Settings of the machine and the public user job is permitted, public user jobs are also saved in the [ID & Print User Box]. 7 Click [Verify] to check the user ID. 8 Click [OK]. – If the user name or the password is incorrect, type in the correct information. 9 Click the [OK] button. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-25 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 10 From the "Output Method" drop-down list, select "Print". – If [User Authentication/Account Track] - [User Authentication Settings] - [Administrative Setting] - [ID & Print Settings] - "ID & Print" is set to "ON" in the Administrator Settings of the machine, general print jobs are also saved in the [ID & Print User Box]. 11 Specify the desired settings, and then click [OK]. 12 Click [Apply], and then click [Print]. The print job is sent. 13 Print a print job. – "Begin Printing": The print job is printed. "Print & Access": The print job is printed, and the user is logged in to the Basic screen. "Access": The print job is not printed, and the user is logged in to the Basic screen. – Make sure that either "Begin Printing" or "Print & Access" is selected. – You can also select "Access" and select a print job to print. For details, refer to "Selecting the print job to be printed from the control panel" on page 13-30. – Place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1-to-many authentication has been specified. – Enter the user name and place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1-to- 1 authentication has been specified. The user is authenticated, and the print job is printed. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) ID & Print (for Macintosh) Setting printer information 1 Open the "Print & Fax" dialog box (or "Printer Setup Utility"/"Print Center" dialog box.) – The "Print & Fax" dialog box can be opened from "System References" on the Apple menu (OS X 10.4/10.5/10.6). – The "Printer Setup Utility"/"Print Center" dialog box can be opened from "HDD" - "Applications" - "Utilities" (OSX 10.2/10.3). 2 Open the "Printer Info" dialog box. – For "Print & Fax" dialog box, click [Option & supply] (OSX 10.5/10.6) or [Printer Setup] (OSX 10.4). – For "Printer Setup Utility"/"Print Center" dialog box, select "Information" from the "Printer" menu. 3 Select "Installable Options". – For OSX 10.5/10.6, click [Driver]. – For OSX 10.2/10.3/10.4, select "Installable Options". 4 Click the "ID & Print" check box to put a check mark in it. 5 Click [Apply Changes], and then close the "Printer Info" dialog box. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-27 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 Sending a print job 1 Open the data in the application, click [File], and then click "Print". 2 Check that the printer name has been selected. – The Print dialog box differs depending on the application. 3 From the drop-down menu, select "Output Method". 4 Select the "User Authentication" check box. The User Authentication dialog box appears. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5 Select "Recipient User", and then enter the user name and password. – If [User Authentication/Account Track] - [User Authentication Settings] - [Administrative Setting] - [ID & Print Settings] - "Public User" is set to "Save" in the Administrator Settings of the machine and the public user job is permitted, public user jobs are also saved in the [ID & Print User Box]. 6 Click the [OK] button. 7 From the "Output Method" drop-down list, select "Print". – If [User Authentication/Account Track] - [User Authentication Settings] - [Administrative Setting] - [ID & Print Settings] - "ID & Print" is set to "ON" in the Administrator Settings of the machine, general print jobs are also saved in the [ID & Print User Box]. 8 Specify the desired settings, and then click [Print]. The print job is sent. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-29 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 9 Print a print job. – "Begin Printing": The print job is printed. "Print & Access": The print job is printed, and the user is logged in to the Basic screen. "Access": The print job is not printed, and the user is logged in to the Basic screen. – Make sure that either "Begin Printing" or "Print & Access" is selected. – You can also select "Access" and select a print job to print. For details, refer to "Selecting the print job to be printed from the control panel" on page 13-30. – Place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1-to-many authentication has been specified. – Enter the user name and place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1-to- 1 authentication has been specified. The user is authenticated, and the print job is printed. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Selecting the print job to be printed from the control panel Follow the procedure described below to select the document to be printed from those saved in the ID & Print user box. 1 Touch [Screen Operation]. 2 Log in to the machine. – Place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1-to-many authentication has been specified. – Enter the user name and place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1-to- 1 authentication has been specified. The user is authenticated, and the Basic screen appears. 3 Press the [User Box] key in the control panel. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-31 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 4 Touch [Use Document]. 5 Touch [System User Box]. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Touch [ID & Print User Box], and then touch [OK]. 7 Select the document to be printed. – Multiple documents can be selected. – To select all documents, touch [Select All]. – To cancel the selection of all documents, touch [Reset]. – To check various information, such as the date/time when the document was stored and the document name, touch [Detail View]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-33 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13 8 Touch [Print] under "Action". – To delete the document, touch [Delete]. – To check the document details, touch [Document Details]. – To cancel the operation, touch [Cancel]. The selected document is printed. 2 Note If authentication fails many times, the authentication data may not be registered correctly. Therefore, register the user again. 13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-3 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14.1 Safety information Carefully read this information, and then store it in a safe place. - Before using this device, carefully read this information and follow it to operate the device correctly. - After reading this information, store it in the designated holder with the warranty. Important information The reprinting or reproduction of the content of this publication, either in part or in full, is prohibited without prior permission. The content of this publication is subject to change without notice. This publication was created with careful attention to content; however, if inaccuracies or errors are noticed, please contact your sales representative. The marketing and authorization to use the our company’s product mentioned in this information are provided entirely on an "as is" basis. Our company’s assumes no responsibility for any damage (including lost profits or other related damages) caused by this product or its use as a result of operations not described in this information. For disclaimers and warranty and liability details, refer to the user manual Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-201). This product is designed, manufactured and intended for general business use. Do not use it for applications requiring high reliability and which may have an extreme impact on lives and property. (Applications requiring high reliability: Chemical plant management, medical equipment management and emergency communications management) Use with other authentication devices is not guaranteed. In order to incorporate improvements in the product, the specifications concerning this product are subject to change without notice. For safe use Warning Symbol • Do not this product near water, otherwise it may be damaged. • Do not cut, damage, modify or forcefully bend the USB cable. A malfunction may occur as a result of a damaged or cut USB cable. • Do not disassembly this device, otherwise it may be damaged. • Do not store the IC card within 40 mm of the card scanning area. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Regulation notices USER INSTRUCTIONS FCC PART 15 - RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES (For U.S.A. Users) NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interface by one or more of the following measures: - Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. - Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. - Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. - Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help 7 WARNING The design and production of this unit conform to FCC regulations, and any changes or modifications must be registered with the FCC and are subject to FCC control. % Any changes made by the purchaser or user without first contacting the manufacturer will be subject to penalty under FCC regulations. INTERFERENCE-CAUSING EQUIPMENT STANDARD (ICES-003 ISSUE 4) (For Canada Users) This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. FCC part 15 FCC: Declaration of Conformity Product Type Authentication unit (Biometric type) Product Name AU-201 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference, and this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-5 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 14.2 Using Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201 is an IC card authentication system that performs user authentication by IC cards. Log on to this machine and print job operation can be authenticated with IC cards when using this machine with user authentication settings specified. In order to use the authentication unit, user IC card IDs must first be registered with the machine. A registered user can log on to this machine or print a print job after completing authentication with their IC card IDs. The following procedures describe how to specify the necessary settings on the machine, register users, and perform the logon and print job operations after completing authentication. 2 Reminder Do not disconnect the USB cable while the authentication unit is being used, otherwise the system may become unstable. Do not store the IC card within 40 mm of the card scanning area. 14.2.1 Settings of this machine ! Detail User authentication on this machine must be set for machine authentication. 2 Note This device does not support external server authentication. To combine account track settings with user authentication settings, set Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track to "Synchronize". When you set "Do Not Synchronize", the ID & Print function cannot be used. 1 From the control panel of this machine, touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track] on the Administrator Settings screen, and then touch [1 General Settings]. 2 Set "User Authentication" to "ON (MFP)", and then touch [OK]. – For details on specifying settings for "Public User Access" and "Account Track", refer to "Selecting an authentication method" on page 12-69 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3 Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. 4 Touch [8 Authentication Device Settings], then [1 General Settings], then [Card Authentication]. 5 Select the desired settings under "IC Card Type" and "Operation Settings". – Under "Operation Settings", select the logon method after registration. Card Authentication: Logon is possible simply by positioning the IC card. Card Authentication + Password: Logon is possible by positioning the IC card and entering the password. – For details on logging on, refer to "Logging on to this machine" on page 14-22. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-7 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 7 Touch [2 Logoff Settings]. 8 Select whether or not the user is logged off when scanning of the document is finished after the user has logged on to this machine. 9 Touch [OK]. 10 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14.2.2 Registering users There are two methods for registering users. - Connecting the authentication unit to this machine and registering directly from the machine - Connecting the authentication unit to a computer and registering using Data Administrator ! Detail Registered user data is stored on the hard disk of this machine. If the user authentication method on the machine is changed or the hard disk is reformatted, the registered user data is erased. Registering from the control panel of this machine 1 From the control panel of this machine, touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track] on the Administrator Settings screen, and then touch [2 User Authentication Settings], then [2 User Registration]. 2 Touch the button for a registration number, and then touch [Edit]. 3 Touch [Register Auth. Info.]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-9 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 4 Touch [Edit]. 5 Position the IC card on the authentication unit, and then touch [OK]. 6 After the message "Registered" appears, touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. 7 Type the user name and the password. 8 If desired, specify the function limitations. 9 Touch [OK]. 10 Touch [Close]. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Registering from Data Administrator In order to use Data Administrator, settings must be specified on the machine and the setup procedure must be performed. The setup procedure includes installing IC Card Driver (USB-Driver) of the authentication unit, then installing Data Administrator IC Card Plugin. 2 Reminder Data Administrator ver. 3.0 or later must first be installed on the computer. For details on the operating environment and installation procedure for Data Administrator, refer to the user manual for the Data Administrator. Checking the currently installed version 1 From the "Help" menu of Data Administrator, click "Version Information". – If the version appears as "3.x": This software cannot be used. Install version 4.x. – If Data Administrator ver. 3.x is installed, it is removed when version 4.x is installed. 2 Click the [Plug-in version] button. 3 From the "Plug-in information list", check the version of the Data Administrator plug-in. – If the plug-in version appears as "4.x": This software can be used. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-11 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 Setup 1 Turn off the machine with the main power switch, and then disconnect the authentication unit from the machine. 2 Install IC Card Driver (USB-Driver). – Plug the cable from the authentication unit into the USB port on the computer. – The Found New Hardware Wizard starts. 3 Select "Yes, now and every time I connect a device", and then click [Next]. 4 Insert the application DVD included with the authentication unit into the DVD drive of the computer. 5 Select "Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)", and then click [Next]. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Select the "Include this location in the search" check box, check that the application DVD appears as a location to be searched, and then click [Next]. – If the application DVD does not appear as a location to be searched for the driver, click [Browse], select the IC Card Driver (USB-Driver) folder on the DVD, and then click [OK]. The installation begins. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-13 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 7 Click [Finish]. The installation of IC Card Driver (USB-Driver) is completed. 8 Install Data Administrator IC Card Plugin. Open the IC_Card_Plugin folder on the application DVD, and then click "setup.exe". 9 Select the language, and then click [OK]. The installer starts up. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen to complete the installation. 11 Click [Next]. 12 Select "I accept the terms of the license agreement", and then click [Next]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-15 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 13 Click [Install]. 14 Click [Finish]. Data Administrator IC Card Plugin is installed, and the setup is completed. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Registering users 2 Reminder In order to register users with Data Administrator, the authentication unit must be connected to the USB port of the computer, and the computer and machine must be connected over a network. 1 If the authentication unit is connected to this machine, turn off the machine with the main power switch, and then disconnect the authentication unit. – If the authentication unit is connected to the computer, continue with step 4. – When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off. – Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable, otherwise the cable may be damaged. 2 Turn on the machine with the main power switch. 3 Connect the authentication unit to the USB port of the computer installed with Data Administrator. – Do not connect other USB devices to the same port where the authentication unit is connected. If enough USB power is not provided, Authentication unit (IC Card Type) may not operate correctly. – When using a USB hub, be sure to use a self-powered USB hub that can provide 500 mA or more. – After connecting the authentication unit, wait at least 5 seconds before operating it. – If the data have already been read out, proceed to 7. 4 Find this device in the window, then double-click it. This machine Network USB Computer Authentication unit bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-17 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 5 Click [Import]. 6 Click [Yes]. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7 Start up Data Administrator, and then import the device information for this machine. – For details on importing the device information, refer to the user manual for Data Administrator. The Device information pane appears. 8 Select "User authentication settings" in the Function selection pane, and then click [Add]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-19 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 9 Select a template, and then click [OK]. The User settings dialog box appears. 10 Type in the user name and password, click the IC card authentication tab. – If desired, type in the e-mail address. 11 Position the IC card on the authentication unit, and then click [Start reading]. – The card ID can also be registered by selecting "Input the card ID directly". 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12 Click [OK]. – Repeat steps 8 through 12 until all users have been registered. 13 Click [Export to the device]. – To change the registered data, select the user name, and then click [Edit]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-21 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 14 Click [Write]. – Data Administrator is equipped with a batch copy feature that allows the registered user data to be specified on the multiple machines specified to be used with the authentication unit. The registered user data is specified on the machine. 15 Click [OK]. 16 Disconnect the authentication unit from this USB port of the computer. 17 Turn off the machine with the main power switch, connect the authentication unit, and then turn on the machine with the main power switch. – When the this machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off. – Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable, otherwise the cable may be damaged. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14.2.3 Logging on to this machine Follow the procedures described below to log on to this machine by completing authentication with IC card IDs. When "Card Authentication” has been specified" has been specified 1 Position the registered IC card on the authentication unit. 2 The user is authenticated, and the Basic screen appears. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-23 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 When "Card Authentication + Password" has been specified 1 Position the registered IC card on the authentication unit, and then type in the password. 2 Touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. The user is authenticated, and the Basic screen appears. 2 Note The notification beep sounds while scanning. The notification beep is canceled by touching [Login] or pressing the [Access] key to complete authentication. This is a normal operation of the device. If authentication fails many times, the authentication data may not be registered correctly. Therefore, register the user again. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14.2.4 ID & Print function Print jobs sent from a computer are saved in the ID & Print user box on this machine and can be printed after authentication is completed with IC card IDs. This is called the ID & Print function. In addition, documents saved in the ID & Print user box can be checked and specified to be printed from the control panel of this machine. 2 Note For details on the printer driver settings and Box mode functions, refer to the user manual included with this machine. ID & Print (For Windows) Specifying settings on the Configure tab 1 For Windows 2000/NT 4.0, click the [Start] button, point to "Settings", and then click "Printers". For Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [Start] button, and then click "Printers and Faxes". For Windows Vista/Server 2008, click the [Start] button, and then click "Control Panel", then "Hardware and Sound", then "Printers". For Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, click the [Start] button, and then click "Control panel", and "Devices and Printers". – If "Printers and Faxes" does not appear in the Start menu, open the Control Panel from the Start menu, select "Printers and Other Hardware", and then select "Printers and Faxes". – If Control Panel in Windows Vista/Server 2008 is displayed in the Classic view, double-click "Printers". – For Windows 7/Server 2008, if the control panel is in an icon view, click "Devices and Printers". 2 Right-click the icon of the installed printer, and then click "Properties". 3 Click the Configure tab. 4 Select "User Authentication" under "Device Option". 5 Select "Device" from the "Setting" drop-down list. 6 Select "ID & Print" under "Device Option". 7 Select "Allow" from the "Setting" drop-down list. 8 Click [Apply], and then click [OK]. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-25 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 Sending a print job 1 Open the data in the application, click [File], and then click [Print]. 2 Check that the printer name has been selected in "Printer Name" or "Select Printer". If the printer is not selected, click to select the printer. – The Print dialog box differs depending on the application. 3 Click [Preferences] (or [Properties]). 4 Click the Basic tab. 5 Click the [Authentication/Account Track] button. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6 Select "Recipient User", and then enter the user name and password. – If [User Authentication/Account Track] - [User Authentication Settings] - [Administrative Setting] - [ID & Print Settings] - "Public User" is set to "Save" in the Administrator Settings of the machine and the public user job is permitted, public user jobs are also saved in the [ID & Print User Box]. 7 Click [Verify] to check the user ID. 8 Click [OK]. – If the user name or the password is incorrect, type in the correct information. 9 Click the [OK] button. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-27 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 10 From the "Output Method" drop-down list, select "Print". – If [User Authentication/Account Track] - [User Authentication Settings] - [Administrative Setting] - [ID & Print Settings] - "ID & Print" is set to "ON" in the Administrator Settings of the machine, general print jobs are also saved in the [ID & Print User Box]. 11 Specify the desired settings, and then click [OK]. 12 Click [Apply], and then click [Print]. The print job is sent. 13 Position the registered IC card on the authentication unit. – Make sure that "Begin Printing" is selected. – To select the print job to be printed, touch [Screen Operation]. For details, refer to "Selecting the print job to be printed from the control panel" on page 14-32. The user is authenticated, and the print job is printed. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) ID & Print (for Macintosh) Setting printer information 1 Open the "Print & Fax" dialog box (or "Printer Setup Utility"/"Print Center" dialog box.) – The "Print & Fax" dialog box can be opened from "System References" on the Apple menu (OS X 10.4/10.5/10.6). – The "Printer Setup Utility"/"Print Center" dialog box can be opened from "HDD" - "Applications" - "Utilities" (OSX 10.2/10.3). 2 Open the "Printer Info" dialog box. – For "Print & Fax" dialog box, click [Option & supply] (OSX 10.5/10.6) or [Printer Setup] (OSX 10.4). – For "Printer Setup Utility"/"Print Center" dialog box, select "Information" from the "Printer" menu. 3 Select "Installable Options". – For OSX 10.5/10.6, click [Driver]. – For OSX 10.2/10.3/10.4, select "Installable Options". 4 Click the "ID & Print" check box to put a check mark in it. 5 Click [Apply Changes], and then close the "Printer Info" dialog box. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-29 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 Sending a print job 1 Open the data in the application, click [File], and then click "Print". 2 Check that the printer name has been selected. – The Print dialog box differs depending on the application. 3 From the drop-down menu, select "Output Method". 4 Select the "User Authentication" check box. The User Authentication dialog box appears 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5 Select "Recipient User", and then enter the user name and password. – If [User Authentication/Account Track] - [User Authentication Settings] - [Administrative Setting] - [ID & Print Settings] - "Public User" is set to "Save" in the Administrator Settings of the machine and the public user job is permitted, public user jobs are also saved in the [ID & Print User Box]. 6 Click the [OK] button. 7 From the "Output Method" drop-down list, select "Print". – If [User Authentication/Account Track] - [User Authentication Settings] - [Administrative Setting] - [ID & Print Settings] - "ID & Print" is set to "ON" in the Administrator Settings of the machine, general print jobs are also saved in the [ID & Print User Box]. 8 Specify the desired settings, and then click [Print]. The print job is sent. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-31 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 9 Print a print job. – "Begin Printing": The print job is printed. "Print & Access": The print job is printed, and the user is logged in to the Basic screen. "Access": The print job is not printed, and the user is logged in to the Basic screen. – Make sure that either "Begin Printing" or "Print & Access" is selected. – You can also select "Access" and select a print job to print. For details, refer to "Selecting the print job to be printed from the control panel" on page 14-32. – Place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1-to-many authentication has been specified. – Enter the user name and place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1-to- 1 authentication has been specified. The user is authenticated, and the print job is printed. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Selecting the print job to be printed from the control panel Follow the procedure described below to select the document to be printed from those saved in the ID & Print user box. 1 Touch [Screen Operation]. 2 Log in to the machine. – Place the IC card you have registered on the authentication unit when IC card authentication has been specified. – Place the IC card you have registered on the authentication unit and enter the password when IC card authentication + password has been specified. The user is authenticated, and the Basic screen appears. 3 Press the [User Box] key in the control panel. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-33 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14 4 Touch [Use Document]. 5 Touch [System User Box]. 6 Touch [ID & Print User Box], and then touch [OK]. 14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7 Select the document to be printed. – Multiple documents can be selected. – To select all documents, touch [Select All]. – To cancel the selection of all documents, touch [Reset]. – To check various information, such as the date/time when the document was stored and the document name, touch [Detail View]. 8 Touch [Print] under "Action", and then touch [OK]. – To delete the document, touch [Delete]. – To check the document details, touch [Document Details]. – To cancel the operation, touch [Cancel]. The selected document is printed. 2 Note If authentication fails many times, the authentication data may not be registered correctly. Therefore, register the user again. 15 Appendix bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 15-3 Appendix 15 15 Appendix 15.1 Entering text The following procedure describes how to use the keyboard that appears in the touch panel for typing in the names of registered users and custom paper sizes. The keypad can also be used to type in numbers. Any of the following keyboards may appear. Example Screen for entering the name of a custom paper size Password input screen 15 Appendix 15-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Touching [Shift] switches the keyboard display between lowercase letters (numbers) and uppercase letters (symbols). bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 15-5 Appendix 15 15.1.1 Enlarging the keyboard The keyboard can be displayed larger so that it easier to read. 1 While the keyboard is displayed, touch [Enlarge ON]. The keyboard is displayed enlarged. 2 To cancel the enlarged display and return the keyboard to its normal size, touch [Enlarge OFF] while the keyboard is displayed enlarged. 2 Note The keyboard is used in the same way, even when it is displayed enlarged. 15 Appendix 15-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 15.1.2 To type text % Touch the button for the desired character from the keyboard that appeared. – To type in uppercase letters or symbols, touch [Shift]. – Numbers can also be typed in with the keypad. The entered characters appear in the text box. 2 Note To revert to the setting when the keyboard was displayed, touch [Cancel]. To clear all entered text, press the [C] (clear) key. Some buttons may not appear, depending on the characters being entered. ! Detail To change a character in the entered text, touch and to move the cursor to the character to be changed, touch [Delete], and then type in the desired letter or number. 15.1.3 List of available characters Type Characters Alphanumeric characters/ symbols bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 15-7 Appendix 15 15.2 Glossary The words used in Copy mode are described below. Abbreviation ADF Automatic document feeder; Can be used to automatically scan the original ADU Automatic duplex unit; used to print automatically on both sides of paper. APS "Auto Paper Select" setting ATS Automatic paper-tray-switching feature (ATS = Auto Tray Switch) LCT Large capacity tray; can be loaded with a large amount of paper to feed it into the copier main body. A Auto Zoom Select this setting to automatically select the appropriate zoom ratio after an original is placed on the original glass or loaded into the ADF and the paper size is selected. Auto Paper Select Select this setting to detect the original placed on the original glass or loaded into the ADF, then automatically select paper of the same size if "e1.0" is selected or select the paper size appropriate for the specified zoom ratio. B Background Removal Select a setting to adjust the density of the background color of the original to one of nine levels. C Change Tray Settings Touch this button to specify a paper size or type not loaded in a paper tray or to copy on paper other than normal paper. Chapters Set this function to specify chapter title pages that must be printed on the front side of the paper when printing double-sided copies. Combine Select a setting to arrange reduced copies of multiple original pages on a single copy page. The settings for the number of pages that can be combined are "2 in 1", "4 in 1" and "8 in 1". Copy Protection Set this function to print hidden text in order to prevent improper copying. When an original printed with copy protection text is copied, the hidden text appears clearly repeated in all pages of the copies so that the reader knows that it is a copy. Cover Mode Set this function to add paper from the specified paper tray to the copies as a cover page. D Density Select a setting to adjust the density of the print image to one of nine levels. Duplex Select the setting to specify if the scanned original and the printed copy are printed on just one side or both sides. F Fold & Staple Set this function to fold the copies in half and staple them together at the center. Finishing Select from the settings that are available for sorting and finishing copies when they are fed into the finishing tray. 15 Appendix 15-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) G Group (Copy/Finishing) Select this setting to separate the copies of each page in the original. The specified number of copies of the second page is printed after all copies of the first page are finished. Group (reference permission) Use this feature to limit the addresses that each user can reference and to manage security. I Insert Image Set this function to later scan multiple images from the original glass and insert them at the desired locations in an original scanned with the ADF, then feed out all copies together. Insert Sheet Set this function to insert paper from the specified paper tray into the copies as chapter title pages. M Margin Select the setting for the position of the binding margin for the loaded original. Selecting the appropriate setting prevents the copy from being printed upside-down when making double-sided copies from singlesided original or when making single-sided copies from double-sided originals. Minimal Select this setting to produce a copy with the original image slightly reduced. Mixed Original Select this setting to detect the size of each original page and print a copy on paper of the appropriate size when an original with different page sizes is loaded together into the ADF. N Neg-/Pos. Reverse Set this function to copy the original with the light- and dark-colored areas or the colors (gradations) of the image inversed. O Offset Select this setting to separate copies that are fed out. OHP Interleave Set this function to insert paper between OHP that are being copied.This prevents OHP from sticking together. Original Type Select the setting for the image type of the original to better adjust the copy quality. Original Direction Select the setting for the orientation that the original is placed on the original glass or loaded into the ADF. P Paper Select settings for the type and size of paper to be printed on. Preview Print image can be checked as a preview image before printing. Proof Copy Press this key to print a single sample copy and stop the machine so that it can be checked before printing a large number of copies. This prevents copy errors from occurring in a large number of copies. Punch Select the setting to punch holes in the copies for filing. S Save in User Box Temporarily saves the job on the hard disk so that it can later be recalled and used again Separate Scan Scans an original exceeding the maximum 80 pages that can be loaded into the ADF by scanning the original in separate batches. The original can be scanned and treated as a single copy job. In addition, the scanning location can be switched between the original glass and the ADF during the scanning operation. bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 15-9 Appendix 15 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert Select from the functions that are available to edit copies as desired Sort Select this setting to separate each set of the copies. The second copy set is printed after all of the first copy set is finished. Staple Select a setting to staple copies together. X XY Zoom Touch this button to use the keypad to specify the zoom ratio for producing an enlarged/reduced copy of the loaded original. Z Zoom Specify the zoom ratio of the copy. 15 Appendix 15-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 16 Index bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 16-3 Index 16 16 Index Symbols [Power] (auxiliary power) key 2-31 Numerics 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment/2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment 12-58 2in1 3-55 2-Position Staple Pitch Adjustment 12-62 4in1 3-55 8in1 3-55 A Accessibility 4-27 Account track 2-42 Account Track Settings 12-80 ADF 3-9, 7-31, 15-7 Administrator Settings 12-26 Administrator/Machine Setting 12-32 Authentication method 12-67 Authentication unit 2-45, 2-47 Authentication unit (biometric type) 2-45 Authentication unit (IC card type) 2-47 Auto Paper setting 3-36 Auto Reset Confirmation 4-33 Auto Zoom setting 3-39 Automatic panel reset 2-34 B Background Removal 3-61, 3-63 Basic screen 2-26 Binding Position 3-29 Biometric authentication 2-45 Book Copy 8-27 Booklet 8-47 Bypass tray 2-6, 2-55 C Call service representative 5-3 Center Staple & Fold 3-77, 3-79 Center Staple Position 12-45 Change Icon 12-24 Chapters 8-17 Check Job 4-3 Cleaning 10-3 Combined pages 3-55 Conserving energy 2-34, 2-35, 2-36 Consumables 9-3 Control panel 2-24, 2-29 Copier Settings 12-21, 12-37 Cover Sheet 8-6 Create One-Touch Destination 12-8 Create User Box 12-8 Current Jobs list 11-12 Custom Display Settings 12-19 Custom Size settings 7-14, 7-25 D Deleting jobs 11-8 Density 3-61, 3-62 Destination registration 12-8, 12-32 Double-sided copying 3-52 E Emptying hole-punch scrap boxes 9-18 Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation 4-35 Enlarge/Reduce settings 3-44 Entering text 15-3 Erase 8-50, 8-51, 8-53, 8-55 F Face Up 3-64, 3-69 Fax Settings 12-38 Fax/Scan Settings 12-23 Features 1-3 Finisher FS-524 2-12 Finisher FS-525 2-14 Finisher FS-610 2-16 Finishing 3-64 Folding 3-77 Full Size 3-40 Fusing unit 2-9 G Glossary 15-7 Glossy 3-61 Group 3-64, 3-67 H Half-Fold 3-77, 3-78 Half-Fold Position 12-47 Header/Footer 12-64 Help 4-22 I IC card authentication 2-47 Icons 2-28 Image Adjustment 8-44 Image Repeat 8-33 Increase Priority 11-17 Individual Zoom 3-45 Insert Image 8-14 Insert Sheet 8-10 Internal 2-8 Interrupt 4-15 16-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 16 Index J Job History list 11-13 Job List screen 11-3 K Key Repeat Start/Interval Time 4-29 L Large Capacity Unit LU-405 2-10 Large Capacity Unit LU-406 2-11 Left panel Job List 11-7 Lever M4 2-60 License Settings 12-41 Limiting Access to Destinations 12-8 Loading paper 2-50, 2-51, 2-52, 2-55 Low power mode 2-34 M Machine Configuration 2-3 Main messages and their remedies 5-47 Main power switch 2-31 Manual conventions 1-9 Message 10-9 Message Display Time 4-37 Meter Count 10-8 Minimal 3-43 Mixed Original 3-21, 15-8 Mode Memory 4-16, 4-20 N Neg./Pos. Reverse 8-26 Network Setting 12-36 Non-standard-sized paper 7-12 O Offset 3-64 OHP Interleave 8-3 One-Touch Destination/User Box Registration 12-32 Options 2-3 Original > Copy settings 3-50 Original Direction 3-26, 15-8 Original feeding 3-9 Original glass 3-10 Original orientation 1-10 Original Type 3-59, 15-8 Originals 7-31 Output Tray OT-505 2-22 Oversized paper 7-17 Oversized paper settings 7-27 P Page Margin 8-41 Paper misfeed 5-5 Paper misfeed indications 5-7 Paper storage 7-8 Paper take-up roller 2-50 Password Rules 12-85 Periodic maintenance 10-9 Post Inserter PI-504 2-21, 3-86, 5-39 Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment 12-63 Power save 2-34, 2-35, 2-36 Prefix/Suffix Automatic Setting 12-38 Preview 4-9 Printer Settings 12-23, 12-37 Program Jobs 8-21 Proof Copy 4-6 Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment 12-53 Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 2-12, 2-14, 2-15, 2-16 Punch Resist Loop Adjustment 12-56 Punch settings 3-64, 3-74 Punch Unit Horizontal Position Adjustment 12-55 Punch Unit Vertical Position Adjustment 12-51 Punch Vertical Position Adjustment 12-49 Q Queuing copy jobs 3-90 Quick copy screen 2-26 R Recall Copy Program 4-20 Replacing the staple cartridge 9-7 S Save in User Box 8-93 Security Settings 12-38 Selecting the output tray 3-68 Separate Scan 3-11 Set Zoom 3-48 Shift Tray SF-602 2-22 Simple troubleshooting 5-43 Single-sided copying 3-51 Sleep mode 2-35 Sort 3-64, 3-66 Sound Setting 4-38 Special Size settings 7-24 Stamp/Composition 8-56 Standard Size 1 settings 7-23 Staple cartridge 9-7 Staple settings 3-64, 3-71 Stored jobs 11-14, 11-15 System Auto Reset 2-34 System Auto Reset Confirmation 4-31 System Connection 12-38 System Settings 12-17, 12-26 T Tab Original Settings 3-24 Temporarily stopping 3-91 Text Enhancement 3-61 Text entry 15-3 Toner cartridge 9-3 Touch panel 2-26, 4-27 Transport lever 2-60 Tray 1 2-5, 2-50 Tray 2 2-5, 2-50 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 16-5 Index 16 Tray 3 2-5, 2-51 Tray 4 2-5, 2-51 Tri-Fold 3-77, 3-81 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment 12-60 Trouble code 5-3 Trouble shooting 5-3 U User authentication 2-38 User Authentication Setting 12-72 User Authentication/Account Track 12-33 User manuals 1-11 User Settings 12-17 Utility mode 12-3 W Warm-up 2-32 Weekly timer 2-36, 12-44 Wide Paper settings 7-17 X XY Zoom 3-41 Z Z Folding Unit ZU-604/ZU-605 2-19 Z-Fold 3-77, 3-83 Z-Folded Original 3-23 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 16-6 Index 16 Guide de l’utilisateur Opérations de numérisation avancée . bizhub 362/282/222 Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Introduction 1.1 Energy Star®..................................................................................... 1-4 Définition d'un produit ENERGY STAR®....................................... 1-4 1.2 Marques commerciales et marques déposées ............................. 1-5 Information de licence.................................................................... 1-5 OpenSSL Statement ...................................................................... 1-6 1.3 A propos de ce manuel .................................................................... 1-9 Structure du Guide......................................................................... 1-9 Notation.......................................................................................... 1-9 Images présentées....................................................................... 1-10 Précautions d'utilisation............................................................... 1-10 Fonctions ne pouvant pas être utilisées ...................................... 1-10 1.4 Guides de l'utilisateur..................................................................... 1-12 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie] ..................................... 1-12 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]...................... 1-12 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Boîte] ...................................... 1-12 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Impression] ............................. 1-12 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Numérisation avancée] (le présent manuel)....................................................................... 1-12 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax]......................................... 1-13 1.5 Explication des conventions.......................................................... 1-14 Recommandations de sécurité .................................................... 1-14 Séquence d'actions ..................................................................... 1-14 Astuces ........................................................................................ 1-15 Repères de texte spéciaux .......................................................... 1-15 2 Fonctions 2.1 Télécopie par adresse IP ................................................................. 2-3 2.2 Scan vers PC..................................................................................... 2-4 2.3 Scanner IP ......................................................................................... 2-6 2.4 Relais IP............................................................................................. 2-7 2.5 PageScope Web Connection........................................................... 2-8 Table des matières-2 bizhub 362/282/222 3 Télécopie par adresse IP 3.1 Spécifier un destinataire avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ............................................................................................. 3-3 Sélectionner un bouton une touche................................................ 3-3 Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ................................................................... 3-3 Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche ............................................. 3-5 Recherche d'un destinataire une touche........................................ 3-7 3.2 Entrer une adresse............................................................................ 3-9 Pour entrer une adresse ................................................................. 3-9 3.3 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom................... 3-12 Qualité........................................................................................... 3-12 Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité................................... 3-13 Densité .......................................................................................... 3-14 Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité ...................................... 3-14 Réglage du Format Original .......................................................... 3-15 3.4 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires...................................... 3-16 Spécifier les informations sur l'identifiant ..................................... 3-18 Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission .......... 3-20 Spécifier une émission 2en1......................................................... 3-21 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso ......................... 3-22 Spécifier la priorité d'émission...................................................... 3-23 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge................................ 3-23 Spécifier le paramètre Tampon .................................................... 3-25 3.5 Si l'émission n'est pas arrivée à son terme .................................. 3-26 Consulter le rapport d'émission.................................................... 3-26 Réexpédition ................................................................................. 3-27 3.6 Recevoir une télécopie par adresse IP.......................................... 3-28 3.7 Ajouter un destinataire ................................................................... 3-29 Pour programmer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ............. 3-31 Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche........... 3-34 Copier un bouton 1-touche .......................................................... 3-35 Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire.............. 3-36 Donner un nom à un index............................................................ 3-37 Pour nommer un index ................................................................. 3-37 Enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique..................... 3-39 Pour enregistrer une Programme E-mail ...................................... 3-41 Changer/Effacer un Programme E-mail........................................ 3-44 bizhub 362/282/222 Table des matières-3 4 Opérations Scan vers PC 4.1 Avant d'enregistrer ........................................................................... 4-3 Installer Scanner IP Scanner sur l'ordinateur................................. 4-3 Vérifier les paramètres réseau........................................................ 4-3 4.2 Spécifier une destination avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche .................................................................... 4-4 Sélectionner un bouton une touche............................................... 4-4 Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ............................................................. 4-5 Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche ............................................ 4-7 Recherche d'un destinataire une touche ....................................... 4-9 4.3 Entrer une adresse ......................................................................... 4-11 Pour entrer une adresse............................................................... 4-11 4.4 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom.................. 4-14 Qualité .......................................................................................... 4-14 Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité .................................. 4-15 Densité ......................................................................................... 4-16 Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité...................................... 4-16 Réglage du Format Original ......................................................... 4-17 4.5 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires..................................... 4-18 Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission ......... 4-20 Spécifier une émission 2en1........................................................ 4-21 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso ........................ 4-22 Spécifier la priorité d'émission..................................................... 4-24 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge............................... 4-25 Spécifier le paramètre Tampon.................................................... 4-26 Spécifier le nom du fichier ........................................................... 4-27 4.6 Si les données n'ont pas pu être enregistrées ............................ 4-28 Consulter le rapport d'émission................................................... 4-28 Réexpédition ................................................................................ 4-29 4.7 Enregistrer une destination ........................................................... 4-30 Programmer un bouton 1-touche ................................................ 4-30 Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche........................................ 4-32 Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche.......... 4-35 Copier un bouton 1-touche.......................................................... 4-36 Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire ............. 4-37 Table des matières-4 bizhub 362/282/222 5 Scanner IP 5.1 Avant d'utiliser Scanner IP ............................................................... 5-3 Scanner IP et ImageReceiver ......................................................... 5-3 Utiliser un routeur téléphonique...................................................... 5-4 Utiliser un modem ou un adaptateur de terminal ........................... 5-4 Utiliser Windows XP Service Pack 2/Windows Vista...................... 5-4 Autoriser l'utilisation de ImageReceiver.......................................... 5-6 Conflits de ports ImageReceiver .................................................... 5-7 Emissions SSL ................................................................................ 5-8 Installation des certificats ............................................................. 5-10 5.2 Installer/désinstaller les utilitaires................................................. 5-13 Méthodes d'installation du ImageReceiver................................... 5-13 Installer les utilitaires..................................................................... 5-14 Désinstaller les utilitaires (pour Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003).......................................... 5-17 5.3 Opérations de scanner IP ............................................................... 5-19 Fenêtre principale ......................................................................... 5-19 Commandes disponibles .............................................................. 5-21 Boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings ............................................. 5-24 Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (Paramètres de tri) (onglet Scanner) ............................................................................ 5-26 Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (onglet RX document (Réception document)).................................................................. 5-27 Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (onglet TX document (Emission document)) ................................................................... 5-28 Boîte de dialogue Divided Settings (Paramètres de division) ....... 5-30 Boîte de dialogue Receive Notify Settings ................................... 5-31 FenêtreVisionner ........................................................................... 5-33 Boîte de dialogue Printer Setting .................................................. 5-34 Boîte de dialogue Print Property................................................... 5-35 5.4 Opérations ImageReceiver............................................................. 5-37 Icône ImageReceiver .................................................................... 5-37 Commandes ImageReceiver......................................................... 5-38 Boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings.................................. 5-41 Boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings.............................. 5-42 5.5 Enregistrer les boutons et les opérations de numérisation .................................................................................... 5-43 Fonctionnement général ............................................................... 5-43 Démarrer Scanner IP .................................................................... 5-43 Enregistrer un bouton de numérisation ........................................ 5-44 Numériser un document à l'aide des paramètres enregistrés...... 5-47 Visionner l'image numérisée ......................................................... 5-49 Spécifier l'impression automatique avec IP Scanner ................... 5-50 bizhub 362/282/222 Table des matières-5 Imprimer automatiquement avec Scanner IP .............................. 5-54 Spécifier l'impression automatique avec ImageReceiver ............ 5-55 Imprimer automatiquement avec un bouton de numérotation 1-Touche...................................................................................... 5-58 Quitter Scanner IP........................................................................ 5-58 5.6 Autres opérations ........................................................................... 5-59 Transférer un document reçu vers Scanner IP ............................ 5-59 Transférer vers Scanner IP........................................................... 5-60 6 Opérations Relais IP 6.1 Avant l'émission................................................................................ 6-3 Définir "Restreindre" sous "Passerelle émission" .......................... 6-3 Spécifier les paramètres des stations de relais ............................. 6-3 6.2 Spécifier un destinataire avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ............................................................................................ 6-4 Sélectionner un bouton une touche............................................... 6-4 Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ............................................................. 6-5 Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche ............................................ 6-7 Recherche d'un destinataire une touche ....................................... 6-9 Spécifier la chaîne de numérotation ............................................ 6-11 6.3 Entrer un numéro de fax ................................................................ 6-12 Pour entrer un numéro de fax ...................................................... 6-12 6.4 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom.................. 6-15 Qualité .......................................................................................... 6-15 Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité .................................. 6-16 Densité ......................................................................................... 6-17 Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité...................................... 6-17 Réglage du Format Original ......................................................... 6-18 6.5 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires..................................... 6-19 Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission ......... 6-21 Spécifier une émission 2en1........................................................ 6-22 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso ........................ 6-23 Spécifier le paramètre Priorité émission ...................................... 6-25 Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge............................... 6-26 Spécifier le paramètre Tampon.................................................... 6-27 6.6 Si l'émission n'est pas arrivée à son terme ................................. 6-28 Consulter le rapport d'émission................................................... 6-28 Réexpédition ................................................................................ 6-29 6.7 Enregistrer un destinataire ............................................................ 6-30 Programmer un bouton 1-touche ................................................ 6-30 Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche........................................ 6-32 Table des matières-6 bizhub 362/282/222 Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche........... 6-35 Copier un bouton 1-touche .......................................................... 6-36 Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire.............. 6-37 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7.1 Paramètres que vous pouvez définir avec PageScope Web Connection......................................................................................... 7-3 Onglet Lecture (mode Utilisateur) ................................................... 7-3 Onglet Réseau (Mode Administrateur)............................................ 7-4 7.2 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection .............................................. 7-5 Configuration minimale requise ...................................................... 7-5 Accéder à PageScope Web Connection ........................................ 7-6 Si les réglages Authentification Utilisateur ont été appliqués......... 7-7 Si les paramètres Authentification Groupe ont été appliqués ........ 7-7 Structure des pages ....................................................................... 7-8 Connexion en mode Administrateur ............................................. 7-10 Cache du navigateur Internet ....................................................... 7-12 Avec Internet Explorer .................................................................. 7-12 Avec Netscape.............................................................................. 7-12 7.3 Enregistrement adresse 1-touche (mode Utilisateur).................. 7-13 Donner un nom à un index............................................................ 7-17 Enregistrer un destinataire 1-touche ............................................ 7-19 Enregistrer une adresse secondaire ............................................. 7-21 Pour enregistrer un destinataire secondaire................................. 7-22 Modifier les paramètres d'un destinataire 1-touche..................... 7-25 Supprimer un destinataire 1-touche ............................................. 7-27 7.4 Paramètres relais IP (mode Administrateur)................................. 7-29 Sélectionner la station de relais IP à utiliser ................................. 7-29 Pour sélectionner une station de relais......................................... 7-30 Enregistrer une station de relais IP ............................................... 7-32 Pour enregistrer une station de relais IP....................................... 7-33 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8.1 Paramètres disponibles .................................................................... 8-3 Paramètres pouvant être spécifiés depuis l'écran Gestion administrateur ................................................................................. 8-3 Liste des paramètres réseau requis................................................ 8-3 8.2 Paramètres relais IP.......................................................................... 8-6 Enregistrer une station de relais IP ................................................. 8-6 Pour enregistrer une station de relais IP......................................... 8-6 bizhub 362/282/222 Table des matières-7 Sélectionner une station de relais IP.............................................. 8-9 Spécifier le port de résultat de relais ........................................... 8-10 8.3 Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil) ......................................................................................... 8-11 Paramètres de logiciel SW........................................................... 8-11 Pour spécifier un paramètre de commutation logicielle .............. 8-13 Spécifier les réglages pour limiter la numérotation et les émissions de radiodiffusion (mode 018)............................. 8-15 Spécifier les réglages de l'image sur le rapport de résultats (mode 023) ............................................................... 8-16 Spécifier les paramètres pour les émissions de récepteur vérifiées (mode 200) ..................................................................... 8-17 Spécifier l'identification de la télécopie directe et la télécopie par adresse IP (mode 351) ........................................... 8-19 Spécifier si les informations de l'identifiant sont ajoutées en cas de télécopie directe, d'exécution d'une opération de relais IP ou de transfert de documents reçus (mode 352) ........... 8-20 Spécifier l'écran par défaut pour l'introduction d'adresses (mode 366)................................................................. 8-21 Spécifier les paramètres des informations censées figurer sur le rapport pour la télécopie directe/les émissions par relais IP (mode 368) ..................................................................... 8-22 Spécifier la méthode de codage des émissions par relais IP (mode 381) ................................................................................... 8-23 Spécifier les paramètres relatifs aux résultats d'émission des émissions par relais IP (mode 382) .............................................. 8-24 Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de communication–1 (mode 475)...................................................... 8-26 Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de communication–2 (mode 476)...................................................... 8-28 Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de communication–3/Spécifier des restrictions pour l'enregistrement des adresses Fax et l'impression de rapports et spécifier le mode d'affichage des destinataires 1-Touche (mode 477).................... 8-30 Spécifier la méthode de suppression pour [Supp] dans les écrans de saisie (mode 478) ........................................................ 8-33 Spécifier les paramètres de limitation de l'authentification utilisateur aux seules fonctions de Numérisation (mode 479) ..... 8-34 9 Localisation de pannes 9.1 A l'apparition d'un certain écran..................................................... 9-3 9.2 Codes d'erreur .................................................................................. 9-4 Opérations Scan vers PC............................................................... 9-4 Opérations de scanner IP .............................................................. 9-5 Opérations relais IP........................................................................ 9-6 Table des matières-8 bizhub 362/282/222 9.3 Localisation de pannes..................................................................... 9-7 Télécopie par adresse IP ................................................................ 9-7 Opérations Scan vers PC ............................................................... 9-8 Opérations de scanner IP ............................................................... 9-9 Opérations de relais IP et autres .................................................. 9-15 10 Annexe 10.1 Caractéristiques .............................................................................. 10-3 Caractéristiques de télécopie par adresse IP............................... 10-3 Caractéristiques Scan vers PC..................................................... 10-3 Caractéristiques scanner IP.......................................................... 10-4 Caractéristiques de relais IP ......................................................... 10-4 10.2 Saisir du texte .................................................................................. 10-5 Pour taper du texte ....................................................................... 10-5 Liste des caractères disponibles .................................................. 10-6 10.3 Glossaire .......................................................................................... 10-7 10.4 Index ............................................................................................... 10-11 1 Introduction Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-3 1 Introduction Nous vous remercions d'avoir porté votre choix sur cet appareil. Le présent guide de l'utilisateur renferme les détails des opérations requises pour l'utilisation des fonctions de numérisation avancée des bizhub 362, 282 et 222, les précautions d'emploi ainsi que les procédures de dépannage fondamentales. Avant d'utiliser ces appareils, il y a lieu de lire entièrement ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour assurer un fonctionnement correct et efficace de l'appareil. Après avoir lu ce Guide de l'utilisateur, rangez-le dans le logement du guide de manière à pouvoir vous y référer en cas de besoin lors de l'utilisation de la machine. Les illustrations contenues dans ce Guide peuvent représenter l'équipement réel de manière légèrement différente. 1 Introduction 1-4 bizhub 362/282/222 1.1 Energy Star® En tant que partenaires ENERGY STAR®, nous avons pu déterminer que cet appareil satisfait aux directives ENERGY STAR® en matière d'efficience énergétique. Définition d'un produit ENERGY STAR® Un produit ENERGY STAR® intègre une fonction spéciale qui lui permet de basculer automatiquement en "mode d'économie d'énergie" à l'issue d'une certaine période d'inactivité. Un produit ENERGY STAR® utilise l'énergie avec plus d'efficacité, vous permet d'économiser de l'argent sur vos factures d'électricité et contribue à protéger l'environnement. Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-5 1.2 Marques commerciales et marques déposées KONICA MINOLTA, le logo KONICA MINOLTA et The essentials of imaging sont des marques déposées ou des marques de fabrique de KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC. PageScope et bizhub sont des marques déposées ou des marques de fabrique de KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Netscape Communications, le logo Netscape Communications, Netscape Navigator, Netscape Communicator et Netscape sont des marques de fabrique de Netscape Communications Corporation. Compact-VJE Copyright 1986-2003 VACS Corp. RC4® est une marque déposée ou une marque commerciale de RSA Security Inc. aux USA et/ou dans d'autres pays. RSA® est une marque déposée ou une marque commerciale de RSA Security Inc. RSA BSAFE® est une marque déposée ou une marque commerciale de RSA Security Inc. aux USA et/ou dans d'autres pays. Information de licence Ce produit contient un logiciel cryptographique RSA BSAFE de RSA Security Inc. 1 Introduction 1-6 bizhub 362/282/222 OpenSSL Statement OpenSSL License Copyright © 1998-2000 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)" 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact opensslcore@ openssl.org. 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@crypt-Soft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-7 Original SSLeay License Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscape's SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, Ihash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@crypt-soft.com)" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related. 4. If you include any Windows-specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT 1 Introduction 1-8 bizhub 362/282/222 (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and distribution terms for any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed, i.e., this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.] All other product names mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Information carried in this manual including design and related materials, and software contained in the machine and software attached to the CD-ROM are valuable assets of NEC, NEC AccessTechnica, Ltd. and respective licensee(s). NEC, NEC AccessTechnica, Ltd. and the licensee shall reserve all rights to design, produce, copy, use and sell this manual, including the patents, copyrights, and other proprietary rights, except when such an action is permitted to be transferred to another company with a written consent. Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-9 1.3 A propos de ce manuel Le présent Guide de l'utilisateur couvre les fonctions qui sont ajoutées lorsque le scanner est installé sur les bizhub 362, 282 et 222. Ce chapitre présente la structure du manuel et les règles de notation des noms de produit, etc. Ce manuel s'adresse aux utilisateurs qui comprennent les opérations de base des ordinateurs et de cette machine. Pour les procédures d'exploitation du système d'exploitation Windows ou Macintosh et des applications logicielles, veuillez vous référer aux manuels correspondants. Structure du Guide Ce Guide comprend les chapitres suivants. Chapitre 1 Introduction Chapitre 2 Fonctions Chapitre 3 Télécopie par adresse IP Chapitre 4 Opérations Scan vers PC Chapitre 5 Scanner IP Chapitre 6 Opérations Relais IP Chapitre 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection Chapitre 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion Chapitre 9 Localisation de pannes Chapitre 10 Annexe Notation Nom de produit Notation dans le manuel bizhub 362/282/222 cette machine ou son périphérique ou 362/282/222 Contrôleur réseau interne Contrôleur d'imprimante Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 Windows NT 4.0 Microsoft Windows 2000 Windows 2000 Microsoft Windows XP Windows XP Microsoft Windows Vista Windows Vista Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 Quand les systèmes d'exploitation ci-dessus sont mentionnés tous ensemble Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP 1 Introduction 1-10 bizhub 362/282/222 Images présentées De manière générale, les écrans tactiles et les fenêtres d'application qui figurent dans ce manuel indiquent que seul le scanner optionnel a été installé. Précautions d'utilisation Veuillez suivre les précautions mentionnées ci-dessous lors de l'utilisation de ces fonctions. - Etant donné la restriction de la garantie du respect de la vie privée lors des émissions par Internet et Intranet, nous recommandons d'envoyer les documents importants directement au destinataire en utilisant une ligne téléphonique normale. - Les appareils téléphoniques connectés à un réseau local ne peuvent pas être utilisés. - L'envoi d'une émission peut prendre quelque temps en raison du trafic Internet/Intranet. - En fonction des serveurs de courrier électronique, il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas envoyer des documents avec un nombre important de pages ou d'images. Fonctions ne pouvant pas être utilisées Les fonctions suivantes peuvent être utilisées avec des émissions de télécopie normales en utilisant une ligne téléphonique ordinaire, mais elles ne peuvent pas être utilisées si seul le scanner est installé. - Emission par lots - Réception d'appel sélectif - Emission d'appel sélectif - Emission de numérisation rapide - Emission du mot de passe - Copie à distance - Emissions de boîtes confidentielles - Inscription au bulletin - Composition mains libres - Interrogation à distance du bulletin - Réglage "Pas de réduction" 2 Remarque L'émission du mot de passe et la copie à distance peuvent être spécifiées dans l'opération, toutefois elles ne fonctionneront pas. Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-11 Les fonctions suivantes peuvent être utilisées. - Réglages de la qualité - Réglages de la densité - Réglage du Format Original - Rapport d'émission - 2en1 - Emission recto-verso - Tampon (en option) - Informations relatives à l'identifiant* - Emission prioritaire - Émission différée - Emission rotative* *Fonctions pouvant être utilisées avec une opération de télécopie par Internet et par adresse IP 1 Introduction 1-12 bizhub 362/282/222 1.4 Guides de l'utilisateur Les Guides de l'utilisateur suivants ont été préparés pour cette machine. Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie] Ce manuel contient des détails sur les opérations de base et les procédures d'exploitation des différentes fonctions de copie. - Consulter ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour obtenir des détails sur les procédures d'exploitation des fonctions de copie, ainsi que des précautions relatives à l'installation/l'utilisation, la mise sous tension et hors tension de la machine, le chargement du papier et les opérations de dépannage comme la résolution des problèmes de serrage papier. Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau] Ce manuel contient des détails sur la définition des fonctions réseau pour l'équipement standard et sur l'utilisation des fonctions de numérisation. - Consulter ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour obtenir des détails sur les procédures d'exploitation relatives aux fonctions réseau et sur les opérations Scan vers E-mail, Scan vers FTP et Scan vers SMB et Fax Internet. Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Boîte] Ce manuel décrit en détail les procédures liées aux fonctions Boîte. - Consulter ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour obtenir des détails sur l'impression d'une épreuve ou d'un travail verrouillé et sur les options utilisant le disque dur en option, comme le routage et l'enregistrement des documents dans des boîtes. Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Impression] Ce Guide contient des détails sur les procédures d'exploitation utilisant le contrôleur d'imprimante intégré standard. - Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions d'impression, consulter le Guide de l'utilisateur (fichier PDF) sur le CD-ROM Utilisateur. Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Numérisation avancée] (le présent manuel) Ce Guide renferme les détails des procédures d'exécution des fonctions pouvant être utilisées lorsque le scanner optionnel est installé. - Consulter ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation des opérations de la télécopie par adresse IP, relais IP et Scan vers PC et sur l'utilisation du scanner IP. Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-13 Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax] Ce Guide décrit en détail les procédures liées aux fonctions Fax. - Consulter ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour obtenir des détails sur les procédures d'exploitation des fonctions Fax quand le kit Fax en option est installé. 1 Introduction 1-14 bizhub 362/282/222 1.5 Explication des conventions Les repères et mises en forme utilisés dans le présent manuel sont décrits ci-dessous. Recommandations de sécurité 6 DANGER Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en évidence de cette manière risquent de causer des blessures graves voire mortelles dues à l'énergie électrique. % Observer tous les dangers afin de prévenir toute blessure. 7 AVERTISSEMENT Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures graves ou des dommages matériels. % Observer tous les avertissements afin de prévenir toute blessure et garantir l'utilisation correcte du copieur. 7 ATTENTION Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures légères ou des dommages matériels. % Observer toutes les mises en garde pour éviter les blessures et assurer l'utilisation en toute sécurité du copieur. Séquence d'actions 1 Le chiffre 1 ainsi formaté indique la première étape d'une séquence d'actions. 2 Les nombres suivants ainsi formatés indiquent les étapes successives d'une série d'actions. Une illustration insérée ici montre les opérations à exécuter. Introduction 1 bizhub 362/282/222 1-15 ? Le texte formaté de cette manière fournit une assistance supplémentaire. % Le texte formaté de cette manière décrit l'action censée garantir que les résultats souhaités sont atteints. Astuces 2 Remarque Le texte présenté de cette manière apporte des informations utiles pour l'utilisation en toute sécurité du copieur. 2 Rappel Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des informations importantes (Rappel). ! Détails Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des renvois à des informations plus détaillées. Repères de texte spéciaux Touche [Copie] Les noms des touches du panneau de contrôle apparaissent dans le format indiqué ci-dessus. REGLAGE MACHINE Les textes affichés se présentent sous la forme ci-dessus. 1 Introduction 1-16 bizhub 362/282/222 2 Fonctions Fonctions 2 bizhub 362/282/222 2-3 2 Fonctions 2.1 Télécopie par adresse IP Les données de numérisation sont envoyées par Intranet, sans passer par un serveur de courrier électronique réseau. Seule une machine de type identique à celui-ci est en mesure de recevoir les données et d'être réglée de manière à recevoir les fax émis par l'adresse IP. - Cette machine doit être raccordée à un réseau local et les paramètres réseau doivent être spécifiés. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des paramètres réseau, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages réseau liés à cette machine, voir "Paramètres disponibles" à la page 8-3. - Si une destination est enregistrée à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-Touche, un document à transmettre peut être envoyé en appuyant simplement sur le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche. - Pour plus de détails, voir chapitre 3, "Télécopie par adresse IP" à la page 3-3. Intranet AdresseIP Terminal Fax (Même type d’unité que cette machine) 2 Fonctions 2-4 bizhub 362/282/222 2.2 Scan vers PC Les données de numérisation sont envoyées à l'ordinateur spécifié sur le réseau et enregistrées dans un dossier déjà configuré. Cela permet d'enregistrer des documents papier sous la forme de données électroniques par une simple activation de touche, ce même dans un environnement dans lequel aucun serveur de courrier électronique n'est utilisé. Si vous utilisez le scanner IP inclus et les utilitaires ImageReceiver (récepteur d'images), le dossier dans lequel les données sont censées être enregistrées doit être spécifié à l'avance sur l'ordinateur qui reçoit les données. Qui plus est et en fonction des réglages spécifiés dans le scanner IP, il est possible de créer un dossier portant le nom du bouton à touche unique où les données peuvent être enregistrées. - Le document est envoyé comme fichier image TIFF ou PDF. - Les fichiers image TIFF peuvent être visualisés sur Windows à l'aide de la visionneuse d'images Tiff incluse. - Les fichiers image PDF peuvent être visualisés à l'aide de Adobe Reader. - Un câble croisé peut être utilisé même dans un environnement sans réseau local pour connecter directement cette machine à l'ordinateur afin de pouvoir utiliser la fonction Scan vers PC. - S'il existe un serveur DHCP faisant partie du réseau, il se peut que cette fonction soit perturbée étant donné que les adresses IP sont automatiquement assignées à chaque ordinateur. Si tel est le cas, spécifier une adresse IP fixe pour l'ordinateur, ou alors utiliser le scanner IP pour enregistrer les données. - Cette machine doit être raccordée à un réseau local et les paramètres réseau doivent être spécifiés. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des paramètres réseau, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages réseau liés à cette machine, voir "Paramètres disponibles" à la page 8-3. - Pour plus de détails, voir chapitre 4, "Opérations Scan vers PC" à la page 4-3. Fonctions 2 bizhub 362/282/222 2-5 Intranet Ordinateur client 2 Fonctions 2-6 bizhub 362/282/222 2.3 Scanner IP Les données de numérisation sont envoyées à l'ordinateur spécifié sur le réseau et les données sont enregistrées dans un dossier portant le même nom que le bouton de numérisation enregistré. Depuis l'ordinateur, enregistrer les paramètres de numérisation comme bouton de numérisation sur cette machine pour enregistrer les documents papier sous la forme de données électroniques en appuyant tout simplement sur le bouton de numérisation. - Le document est envoyé comme fichier image TIFF ou PDF. - Les fichiers image TIFF peuvent être visualisés sur Windows à l'aide de la visionneuse d'images Tiff incluse. - Les fichiers image PDF peuvent être visualisés à l'aide de Adobe Reader. - Un câble croisé peut être utilisé même dans un environnement sans réseau local pour connecter directement cette machine à l'ordinateur afin de pouvoir utiliser le scanner IP. - Cette machine doit être raccordée à un réseau local et les paramètres réseau doivent être spécifiés. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des paramètres réseau, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages réseau liés à cette machine, voir "Paramètres disponibles" à la page 8-3. - Pour plus de détails, voir chapitre 5, "Scanner IP" à la page 5-3. - Les documents envoyés comme émission fax ou fax Internet peuvent également être transférés vers l'ordinateur spécifié dans le scanner IP par l'administrateur. Paramètres Scanner Ordinateur client Fonctions 2 bizhub 362/282/222 2-7 2.4 Relais IP Un fax est envoyé par une machine de relais connectée au réseau local. Si une machine de relais est connectée à une ligne téléphonique dans un réseau intranet, spécifier la machine de relais depuis les machines (cette machine) connectées au réseau local pour envoyer un fax en utilisant la ligne téléphonique. Les résultats de l'émission de fax relayée peuvent être vérifiés dans la machine à partir de laquelle le fax a été émis. - Cette machine doit être raccordée à un réseau local et les paramètres réseau doivent être spécifiés. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des paramètres réseau, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages réseau liés à cette machine, voir "Paramètres disponibles" à la page 8-3. - Si une destination est enregistrée à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, un